VOLUME 14. No, 1 1961 RECORDS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Published by the Board and edited by the Museum Director Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide. Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical. voLumE | 4 1961-1964 2 ey a — 2 ge a Ke > —, SEER SSS S—_ SPALL aN FALE y — ed zZ VL 8 ee EOD fe Be mil EL eaa es Ep RECORDS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Published by the Museum Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide, South Australia The title page design incorporates a sketch by Madeleine Boyce of Caloprymnus campestis, a rare species of rat kangaroo, once considered extinct, but rediscovered in the Lake Eyre Basin some years ago by the Honorary Curator of Mammals (Mr. H. H. Finlayson) The Museum Board accepts no responsibility for opinions expressed and statements made herein by the authors of papers CONTENTS No. 1. Published 8th August, 1961 Aboriginal hammer-stones of South Australia. oe M. Cooper) . ne Cenozoic Biraieraphy une pee Bee Batenniolony, of the Tirari Desert, South Australia. Si A. pana R. H. Tedford and Alden H. Miller) . Re-examination of the species of Pron deadvied i H. Womersley. (S. L. Tuxen) . Studies of the Acarina fauna of leat. litter and moss fetta Australia No. 1. A new genus and species of Phaulo- dinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis, from Queens- land (Acarina, Uropodina). (H. Womersley) ... .. Studies of the Acarina fauna of leaf-litter and moss from Australia No. 2. A new Trachytid mite (Polyaspmus tuberculatus, from spine aneae: sii (H. Womersley) . A new record of the little heer Automates oka tenis (Michael, 1908) from New Zealand (Acarina, Polyas- pidae), with aa gaan of the male and Breer (H. Womersley) . . A new species of Chlenias ee seaniera. Boaeniniey on Acacia aneura with some Central Australian native beliefs about it. (Norman B. Tindale) . : On Central Australian Mammals. Part Iv. “The ‘Dis. tribution and Status of Central Australian a (H. H. Finlayson) . : : ease Archaeological ening toe outa ‘Hock Shelter: a preliminary report. (Norman B, Tindale) . No. 2. Published 27th July, 1962 The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps) on South Aus- tralian Coasts, Part III. (H. M. Hale) . ; : Occurrence of the Whale Berardius arnuxi in Southern Australia. (H. M. Hale) . Rock Engravings at Sica seal Se net South Wales. (Charles P. Mountford) . Paar. 19 107 115 125 131 141 193 197 231 245 Some Tingidae (Hemiptera) in the South Australian Museum, (Carl J. Drake and Florence A. Ruhoff) . New Hylid Frog from the Central anes of New Guien, (Michael J. Tyler) . : Geographical Knowledge of the Kaiadilt Paaple of Bentinck Island, Queensland. (Norman B. Tindale) . Some Population Changes among the Kaiadilt People of Bentinck Island, (raconalaa’ (Norman B. Tindale) . Australian Quail-Thrushes of the Genus Cmclosoma, (H. T. Condon) . Bris: iF oe eee Aberrant Aceiralion increase Uitvadeehine Bugs (Lygaeidae, Rhyparochrominae). (G. F. Grogs) . Sacred Objects of the Pitjandjara Tribe, Western Central Australia. (Charles P. Mountford) . No. 3. Published 23rd August, 1963 Fossil Ratite Birds of the Late sey of Australia. (Alden H. Miller) . A Turtle Shell Mask of Toures Straits es in 7 the cies Museum, University of Sydney. (G. L. Pretty) . Australian Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera cd aaa (a. Fr Gross and G. G. E. Seudder) . Aquatic and Semiaquatic Biases jakon in ations Timor by G. F. Gross of the South Australian Museum. (Herbert B. Hungerford and Ryiuchi Matsuda) .. .. .. A new Larval Neotrombidium (Acarina, eee Hn CLSNISC from bat guano. (H. Womersley) . Monunguis Wharton 1938, a valid genus US Trombid- toidea). (H. Womersley) . New records of Diarthrophallidae iesatna with desaspeun of the hitherto unknown larval stage. (H. Womersley) Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia, Part II. Musical rocks and associated iat of the Pitjandjara people. (Norman B. Tindale) . nae Preliminary survey of the Biitirn Slate Tmplements of South Australia. (Robert Edwards) . The Aboriginal Skin Rugs of Australia. ( 0, P. Mountford) 249 203 2059 297 337 371 397 413 421 427 471 473 477 487 499 515 525 Three new species of the Gekkonid Lizard genus Beapodae. tylus Gray from Australia. (Arnold G. Kluge) . . 545 A Tjurunga-like Stone Pendant from New South Wales: (Norman B. Tindale) . » 595 Young Female Pigmy Spaeat Whales (ogia teres Blainville) from Western and South Australia. (Herbert M. Hale) . Ales 3 : wee. SF. tek” GOL Fossiliferous euatean succession on Mnsigh ee South Australia. (Brian Daily) . EE ee OLD No. 4. Published 27th May, 1964 Obituary and Seigeannby of Herbert sips es (R. V. Southeott) . ‘ 603 Aboriginal baited side 6 Miaanes peach Nae South Wate, (W. I. North) . ae. 633 Rock engravings ae Bau snigheisenis of Pitcairn Station, North-Eastern South Australia. (Robert Edwards) .. 643 Revision of the Ghost Moths (Lepidoptera Fromscitiettoe, family Hepialidae), Part VIII. (Norman B. Tindale) 663 Flint implements found near Nipa, Central Papuan High- lands (with comments by Norman B. ee (H. K. Bartlett) . Sw 669 Systematic sutton of the hie (ites frog Hyllla ious storfii Werner. (M. Tyler) . . 675 Pigmy Right Whale (Caperea neem’. in ‘South ‘Awe tralian Waters, Part Il. (H. M. Hale) . ‘ 679 A new meteorite find from South Neier oo. -W. P. STS, PR ee 695 LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS Pace. Bartlett, H. K. Flint implements found near Nipa, Central Papuan High- lands (with comments by Norman B, Tindale) .. .. 669 Condon, H. T. Australian Quail-Thrushes of the Genus Cinclosoma . .. 337 Cooper, H. M. Aboriginal hammer-stones of South Australia ........ 1 Corbett, David W. P. A new meteorite find from South Australia... ...... 695 Daily, Brian. Fossiliferous Cambrian succession on Fleurieu Peninsula, South Australia ........ resis) thane eee Drake, Carl J., and Ruhoff, Florence A. Some Tingidae (Hemiptera) in the South Australian Menara, ee Me ee SL ARE De Rm tk ne ele Edwards, Robert. Preliminary survey of the Reniform Slate Implements of South Australia ....... 515 Rock engravings and stone eaglensits of Piiaien Station; North-Eastern South Australia .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 648 Finlayson, H. H. On Central Australian Mammals. Part IV. The Distribu- tion and Status of Central Australian Species .. .. 141 Gross, G. F. Aberrant Australian brachypterous cee Bugs (Lygaeidae, Rhyparochrominae) . : A 371 Gross, G. F., and Seudder, G. G. E. Australian Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera Lygaeidae) . .. 427 Hale, H. M. The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia a a on South Australian Coasts, Part TIT .. .. 197 Occurrence of the Whale Berrie arnuxi in “Southern Australia .. .. .. 3 sod Young female pigmy sperm winlee Cai kvenioas Blainville) from Western and South Australia .. .. 561 Pigmy Right Whale (Caperea marginata) in South Aus- tralian Waters, Part Il . Hungerford, Herbert B., and eatin ‘Heinen Aquatic and Semiaquatic Hemiptera taken in Portuguese Timor by G. F. Gross of the South Australian Museum Kluge, Arnold G. Three new species of the Gekkonid Lizard genus gk tylus Gray from Australia .. . ng ; Miller, Alden H. Fossil Ratite Birds of the Late Tertiary of Australia . .. Mountford, Charles P. Rock Engravings at Koonawarra, Western New South Wales ...... Sacred Objects of he: Bijendiace Tribe, Wrarieer Cantenl Australia .. .... 4 , The Aboriginal Skin Bugs of Auatialla mark ge North, W. I. Aboriginal factory sites at Moonee Beach, New South Wealee The 44 : 5 rere Pretty, G. L. A Turtle Shell Mask of Torres Straits + Type in the nee Museum, University of Sydney . oer Southeott, R. V. Obituary and bibliography of Herbert Womersley .. Stirton, R. A., Tedford, R. H., and Miller, Alden H. Cenozoic Stratigraphy and Vertebrate pie AS of the Tirari Desert, South Australia .. .. .. Tindale, Norman B. A new species of Chlenias (Lepidoptera Boarmiidae) on Acacia aneura with some Central Australian native beliefs about it . ee “pti Archaeological Sid OM of Wacls. Rock. Shelter: a preliminary report . : Geographical Bete niiiire Ost thie ‘Kae Paante. of Bentinck Island, Queensland . Some Population Changes among the Kaiadilt | People of Bentinck Island, Queensland . ; 679 471 545 633 421 603 19 131 193 259 297 Vii Vili Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia, Part II. Musical rocks and associated objects of the Pitjandjara people .. .. . 7 A Tjurunga-like Stone Pendant freee dete South Wales % Revision of the Ghost Moths (Lepidoptera eee family Hepialidae) Part VIII . : Comments on Flint Implements fauna at Ripack APS 25 Tuxen, S. L. Re-examination of the species of Protura described by H. Womersley . Tyler, Michael J. New Hylid Frog from the Central Highlands of New Guinea .. .. Systematic position “of thes New ras frog Hyelta wolterstorfi Werner .. .. ...... : : Womersley, H. Studies of the Acarina fauna of leaf-litter and moss from Australia No. 1. A new genus and species of Phaulo- dinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis, from seen land (Acarina, Uropodina) . F Studies of the Acarina fauna of lent Tae til moss ean Australia No, 2. A new Trachytid mite (Polyaspmus tuberculatus, from Queensland (Acarina, Trachytina) A new record of the little known Calotrachytes sclero- phyllus (Michael, 1908) from New Zealand (Acarina, Polyaspidae), with description of the male and nymph A new Larval Neotrombidiwm (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) from bat guano .. . Monunguis Wharton 1938, a a valid genus ‘(Acarina Trom- bidioidea) . Sah New records of Diacihcounalidas Raat) with ‘jeacie tion of the hitherto unknown larval stage .. .. .. .. 499 550 663 670 63 253 675 107 115 125 473 477 487 ABORIGINAL HAMMER-STONES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By H. M. Cooper, HON. ASSOCIATE IN ANTHROPOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary This paper describes the various shapes and forms of the hammer-stones of South Australia. It is suggested that lack of sufficient evidence at the present time precludes the definite separation of the different types of this implement — so essential an aid to stone age man — either into their correct material culture sequences, if any, or to define many of their possible uses. Jivrbert Mathew Itale, OBI. Direelor of the South Australian Museum from 1928 wotil his retirement in 1960, ABORIGINAL HAMMER-STONES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By H. M. COOPER, How. Associate ris AnTHRoPOLocY, SourH Avustratian Museum Fig. 1-29 SUMMARY This paper describes the various shapes and forms of the hammer-stones of South Australia. It is suggested that lack of sufficient evidence at the preseut time precludes the definite separation of the different types of this implement—so essential an aid to stone age man—either into their correct material culture sequences, if any, or to define many of their possible uses. DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DISCUSSION The writer, so far as his search has extended, failed to discover any paper devoted solely and in detail to our local hammer-stones although many references to them have appeared in various papers relating to South Australian stone implements by Howchin (1934), and Tindale and Maegraith (1931). The opportunity afforded by the examination of several thousand examples in the South Australian Museum together with the collection, personally, of many hundreds in the field, suggested the possible usefulness of a paper describing a representative series of types and their variants. It has been deemed preferable to refer solely to those from South Australia owing to the possible existence of additional types else- where in Australia (due to wide differences in its flora and fauna, which exist in such a vast territory) and, in addition, local variations unknown to the writer which doubtless occur. Lack of much undisputable evidence in many cases tends to advise the exercise of caution towards any arbitrary attempt to place our hammer-stones in any definite material culture sequence, if indeed any major changes have occurred during the antiquity of man in Australia. It appears probable, however, that the hammer-stone, which persisted into historic times and was indispensible in the every A 2 RECORDS OF THE §,A, MUSEUM day life of primitive man, had continued to exist throughout his material culture periods in its fundamental conception although subject to some modifications in design and size as necessitated by his subse- quent change to many much lighter and smaller implements and also to alterations in the flora and fauna provoked by his arrival in Australia, The principal need for the hammer-stone was a tool for the manofacture of his stone inrplements, These implements could be divided, broadly, into two groups—core and flake implements. A hammer was held in one hand and in the other the workman Prasped another rock destined to produce a stone implement. ‘The former, more especially in early periods, could have been a fairly heavy stone or water-worn pebble because at that time he depended largely upon the weight of his implement for eutting and chopping. Sharp and skilfully aimed blows, struck with his lammer-stone, in the correct plane, removed unnecessary niaterial in the form of flakes from the latter, and so provided him with a base of the required weight and form for his crude implement, Any sharp edged stone conld serve as a entting tool. However, the working edges of the more refined examples were then improved by means of secondary trimming, that is small flakes were more care- fully removed along them hy means of hammer-stones, making his large implement more efficient, This techniqne of removing flakes from a block of stone vr a pebble produced a core implement, The manulacture of a flake implement was commenced in the same way, that is with » hammer-stone held in one hand and a block of suitable stone in the other, In this case, however, the block of stone itsell, instead of being trimmed to form an implement, was used to provide flakes of the required size, shape and thickness, by striking it in the correct place and thus breaking off flakes of the desired dimensions. These were then, during later periods at least, carefully given light secondary trimming along their working edges to provide efficient tools snch as small knives, saws, scrapers or adzes, The smallest microlith flake implements of Sonth Australia weigh no more than .2 of a milligram, The hammer-stones of South Australia, as elsewhere, at least where an abundance of material was available, were selected from examples possessing shapes that could be grasped conveniently in the hand, Smooth water-worn pebbles were sought after wherever possible; their surfaces tended to minimize injuries to the hand during use, Angular blocks with rounded edges and even rough pieces were COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 3 sometimes employed, especially in those situations where more suitable material was Jacking, The large tnajority of South Australian hammer-stones comprise (1) diseoidal and (2) ovate shaped water-worn pebbles, the material employed, chiefly, being fine-grained qnuartzites very compact in texture aid eminently suitable for the purpose, Other rocks used inelnde granitic types, flint, chert, fossiliferous Cambrian limestone and silicified sandstones, Hammer-stones with the slightest indications of wear, due perhaps to use upon no more than a single occasion, are very plentiful iu areas where pebbles abound such as upon the banks of the River Wakefield (Cooper 1960) and in the vicinity of Cape Jervis, but in districts where good material was scarce or entirely absent aud supplies had to he transported or traded, hammer-stones often exhibit extreme wear suggesting that they were highly valued and jealously guarded, Cooper (1954) diseussed a similar situation relating to adzastones, those in localities where suitable material was lacking, being trimmed again many times until completely unservice- able, whereas those in areas with a plentiful supply of raw material were rejected as soon as partly worn and replaced by new ones. These two examples serve to indicate that even primitive man had his own particular economic problems, The hammer-stone, m common with many other stone implements, appears to liaye been employed for a variety of purposes, mostly subsidiary, in addition to its primary function in the manufacture of stone implements, An examination of the collection indieates their use at fimes for such supplementary requirements as pounders and auvils. Some of the secondary purposes, more particularly in the earlier periods, can be assumed at present as imerely conjectural but it is known that in historic times they were utilized in varions ways such as for pounding nuts, bark, skins and in the recovery of marrows contained in bones, Hammer-dressing of polished stone axe-heads, in order to complete their trimming, was possibly another well defined purpose, Crushed shells of periwinkles and other sea species, from which it is difficult to extract the edible contents by other means, have been discovered npon kitchen middens on Kangaroo Island (Cooper 1943) and upon the adjacent main, Hammer-stones would provide the logical means for effecting this end, Tt is believed that, prior to the use of hammer-stones as an estab- lished material culture industry, primitive man, in at least some parts of the world manufactured his crude implements by simply striking or hurling a block of stone against a rocky face and thus breaking off 4 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM in a haphazard way, for subsequent use, a portion of the block which he had thrown. It is hardly possible to determine whether this was standard procedure or not during the earlier periods of man’s oceupa- tion of Australia although it appears to have been employed as a temporary measure during historic times for the manufacture of an occasional crude implement, Baines in Evans (1872) records a further interesting method of producing flake implements witnessed by him near Victoria River, North Anstralia, during 1860. A native struck a piece of stone ttas big as an ostrich eg@’’ held in the hand against a large rock with such skill as to produce a perfectly symmetrical flake with a strengthening midrib, its finished form indicating the removal of only three flakes in all for its production, This implement, owing to its design and locality of origin, appears to have been an interchangeable one used in that part of Australia as a spear-head, a knife, or a pick, The large accumulation of hammer-stones upon camp-sites in many parts of South Australia, however, seems to offer sufficient proof that they provided the means utilized in the shaping and formation of the majority of that State’s stone implements including many types which ocenr in thousands and are so standardized in form that haphazard methods of manufacture would be impracticable. Alternative implements to replace the conventional hammer-stone, possibly utilized merely as a temporary mieasnre, are indicated by the presence of occasional disearded working cores of convenient size with evidence upon their surfaces of hammering and battering (fig. 26), Many hand pebble choppers of the dorninant Kangaroo Island industry bear extensive evidence of use upon their nether stdes which show nnmerous traces of deep pitting over a considerable area, apparently the result of use as temporary hammers. (Cooper 1943), (fig, 27). A few of the large implements from Hallett Cove (Cooper 1959) bear similar indications and also others, in addition, from the River Wakefield area (Cooper 1961), A earefol survey of the thousands of South Australian hammer- stones already referred to disclosed that it was difficult, confusing, and even impracticable to separate, arbitrarily, all conventional hammer- stones, from a considerable proportion of pebble upper millstones, anvils and pounders becanse in many cases the three latter groups had been used, apparently, when the necessity arose, to perform the functions of a hammer-stone in addition to their own. Examples of all three have been inclnded in this paper, All types, to some degree, tend to merge into one another, COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 5 A typical hammer-stone from South Australia may be described as a smooth water-worn pebble, symmetrically ovate in natural shape and derived from rock of sufficient strength to resist the wear and stresses to which an implement of this nature is liable, These hammer- stones exhibit degrees of battering and pitting from the very slightest surface markings through all the respective stages to extreme wear when the pebble is finally reduced from a rounded to an almost rectangular shape (fig. 1, 2 and 3). The wear, doubtless the result of diverge uses, is practically always evident upon the middle of both sides, both ends and all edges. Well developed pit holes develop, generally in pairs, the one above the other just higher and lower than mid-centre. ‘heir existence in this interesting manner appears fe be due fo the operator turning the hanimer-stone end for end from time to time when using either one or the other of the two sides. They are usually fairly similar in depth or nearly so, This may suggest that the reversal of end was deliberate and not accidental because such intentional action would tend to retain a better balance and extend, in addition, the uselul life of the stone. Dual deep grooves, due to battering, upon both edges of certain hammer-stones, are found upon a eonsiderable number of ovate examples; they oceur, chiefly, apon ecamp-sites on Yorke Peninsula (fiz. 4), The depth of these grooves is roughly equable, which tends to indicate that they were reversed deliberately end for end hy the user in much the same way as in the case of the dual depressions npon the two sides already referred to. An interesting variant bul not a conventional type of hammer-stone is shown in fig. 5, where the two central pitted or depression centres upon both sides have been made in a transverse but slightly oblique direetion instead of the conventional longitndinal position. The other dominant South Australian hammer-stone, as already stated, is discoidal in shape, its fine grained texture being generally similar to that of the ovate form, Tt exists in large numbers, as does the ovate type, and similarly bears evidence of nse from the slightest to extreme wear, Both sides and the whole of its diseoidal periphery (edwe) were subject to use. A typical and plentiful well-worn example unlike the ovate type, however, exhibits only a single pit hole or depression at the centre of one or both sides, This could be due to its diseoidal shape because the blows of the operator, irrespective of which of the sides was held uppermost would tend to fall in the centre (fig. 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10). 6 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM Both ovate and diseoidal forms yary greatly in size, more especially the latter and many of them served no donbt as anvils although some of these, in addition, bear evidence of marked use as hammers upon their edges, The central pit mark upon the larger examples is often very deep. An occasional anvil possesses well defined pit marks, with jagged edges instead of the normally smovth worn sides, his jagged deep pitting also occlirs wpon small hammer-stones of various shapes but of such a size as suggests use in (he hand. This condition seems too harsh to indicate the use of either as a hammer-stone or anvil respectively when used for pounding and breaking, as the case may be, banes, shells or skins. It may be the result of much heavier work atch as stone erushing or flaking, perhaps for some specific work, when operating a hammer-stone plus anvil technique (fig, 10 and 11). Small ovate hammer-stones, such as shown in fig, 12 and 13 occur, almost exclusively, upon camp-sites on the Adelaide Plains, the coastal regions southwards towards Cape Jervis and Yorke Peninsula. Hammicring is confined exclusively to the two extremities with no evidence of wear elsewhere. The shsence of warks in their middle sections is puzzling and suggests a possibility that they were hafted In some manner, Fig. 14 shows a hammer-stone made of tongh fine grained quartzite with marked evidence of severe end flake damage to itself incurred during nse; it is relatively common, inore particularly upon the Adelaide Plains and adjacent regions, Stone implements and working cores made from the same hard rock are abundant upon these camping grounds. Such damage to hammer-stones appears to be the result of attempting to strike off flakes from blocks of the same intractahle material as that from which the hammers were derived. Hammer-stonces, more elongate than the ovate type described, oceur in small numbers. Wear in these examples appears to be mostly upon the extremities suggesting a preference for pounding (fig. 15), Many polished axe-hends, composed of various igneous rocks from the South-Rast of Sonth Australia, possess a well defined pit hole upon each side 4 little ahove the working edge, probably resulting from use as anvils. Fig. 16 from that area, in addition, exhibits a deeply battered depression upon both edges due to hammering, Many upper millstones, when made from water-worn pebbles, in addition to possessing the normal nether surface worn smooth by grinding seeds, show distinct evidence of hammering upon the entire COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 7 periphery of their edges, This implement, therefore, appears to have had at least two important uses (fig. 17). Long and narrow stones, shown in fig. 18 and 19, nondescript in shape and watrimmed, are found sparingly. They exhibit near one extremity, and nsually npon one side only, either a well developed pit hole or a more widespread battered area, due to some form of hammer- ing. They were termed by McCarthy (1946) ‘‘Brachinas’’ from the Far Northern creek, where the first example was found by the writer. Their use must have been restricted to work of a light nature because of the inferior strength of the material composing them and also their long and narrow form (Monntford 1939). Tig. 20 shows a type of nondescript shape from Kangaroo Island. It is severely weathered, thickly patinated and has an outer coating af lateritie concretion. It weighs 6]b. There is a somewhat jagged pit hole upon each side. Its chief use could have been as an anvil. Fig. 29 was used, probably, somewhat similarly. Its peripheral edge in addition, however, bears strong evidence that it was also employed ag a hammer-stone. The use or uses of very small hammer-stones—some weighing as little as loz—may be somewhat more diffieult to define even although they are often identical with their larger counterparts. It is obvions that their lightness precludes association with any type ol work where weight is a consideration, Tt is possible that they were utilized in the addition of secondary trimming to certain of the smaller types of implements and for the removal of small and frail flakes from working cores in the manufacture of some of the microlith types (fig. 21, 22 and 23), Tig, 24 and 25 represent a group of Kangaroo Island hammer-stones smaller than those of more conventional size from that locality. They may have heen used to fashion stone implements of lesser size such as those described hy Cooper (1960), Fig, 28 illustrates an interesting dual type of implement—of which the South Australian Mnseum possesses over 80 specimens. It is confined, so far as is known loeally at present, to the Far North West. of the State and thence across the border into the adjacent districts of Western Australia. Its battered ends indicate extensive use for pounding and hammering, Its other, and obviously chief use, is for employment as a kind of rolling millstune. Mr. N, B, Tindale, Curator of Anthropology, South Australian Museum, has witnessed this latter function in progress and will deseribe it fully in a later paper. 8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The writer has not seen any water-worn pebble or other form of rock, where the natural shape has been deliberately altered by chipping, preparatory to its nse as a hammer-stone. This, of course, is in marked contrast to the various stone implement industries. CONCLUSIONS The two dominant hammer-stone shapes, as described in detail, disclose, it will have heen seen, some differences cansed by wear. There appears to be very little definite evidence available relating to at least some of these variations, although if is possible that there may have been deliberate and important reasons for selecting the two different shapes, and if this be true they may have at. least some different functions. The two extremities of ovate forms, for example, would appear ideal for the purpose of striking the necessary flakes from working cores to shape them into implements or removing flakes fram bloeks to serve, when completed, as future tools. The possibility that they represent separate material culture periods could be considered but such a hypothesis seems hardly tenable, Both shapes, more especially the ovate form, exist in association with the large hand pebble choppers of Kangaroo Island left hehind by the natives fornierly inhabiting that locality but who, apparently, disappeared a considerable fine ago, The question arises, too, whether the earliest primitive man to reach Anstralia brought with him the knowledge of hammer-stones represented by one or more of the forms discussed herein or whether it reached the continent through the medinm of later arrivals. Primeval man, during the earliest periods of his existence, as his native successor of today does as a makeslift, was doubtless content to use any random fragment of rock lying upon the surface of the ground in his domain in order to provide himself with a ecride implement with which to eut, saw or chop. He toay have devised later, as lis experience progressed, one more to his satisfaction by hurling one rock against another and selecting a suitable fragment. He appears to have learned, subsequently, by holding in his hand a stone of suitable size—preferably a water-worn pebble which would obviate ents and bruises—that it could more easily enable him to fashion a rude implement but an improved one, from a rock of superior material held in the other, Recent excavations and Carbon 14 datings appear to extend the antiquity of man in Australia to much earlier periods than previously COOPER—HAMMER-STONES S believed possible, It seems fairly certain, however, that Australia’s first inhabitants were acquainted with the hammer-stone and its functional use at least in a generalized way. The many thousands of standard examples of the more recent material culture implement types found in Australia indicate that hammer-stones—not haphazard methods—were essential for their production, as already emphasized in this paper, It may be observed that wear upon the surfaces of the hammer- stones disenssed herein is the sole evidence, in many instances, mpon which to base even problematical deductions relating to some of their uses, remembering that function is of far greater anthropological significance than mere shape or form. It is most essential, further- more, in order to minimize possible faulty conclusions, that these dednetions should be associated only with those examples belonging to any particular branch of the culture of primitive man, which oceur in numbers sufficiontly abundant in order to prove, beyond reasonable doubt, their respective existences as distinct well-established types, These couditions appertain to all figured specimens in this paper with the exception of fig, 5 which is deseribed in the text but with the necessary reservations, Stone, withont doubt, did not comprise the only material employed through the ages for the purposes of hammering, pounding and batter- ing. It is logical to assume that wood possessed advantages or at least was suitable for some purposes. The latter of course, with the passage of time, have long since disappeared. Suitable rock, fortunately, is practically indestructible; neverthe- less it ig useful to bear in mind that implements made of that material, as for example in the case ol our hammer-stones, comprise no more than part of any one of the many particular material cultures of former periods of primeval man, An examination of the stone implements of Australia, however cursory, cannot fail to emphasize the vital importance of the hammer stone to the native workman without which he would be as helpless as 4 skilled tradesman who has mislaid his footrule or his drill. The correct vse of this simple tool in the production of flakes having the necessary length, breadth and thickness—more especially when the core to he struek is of equal strength and intractibility—required skill in its initial achievement and in completing the finished product. An account of the manufacture by a Shasta Indian of California of an obsidian arrow-head derived from a flake—obseryed by an 10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM unnamed writer—is referred to by Stevens (1870) and is deserving of repetition, It reveals the skill needed by the native worker, not only in its final trimming but also in his intimate knowledge of the various types of rock used by him, because in many cases, owing to their varied texture, they did not respond satisfactorily to produce the required flaking unless treated correctly in anticipation of it, This unknown writer states that a flake having been struck off a block by the native ‘the commenced a series of continnons blows, every one of which chipped off fragments of the brittle substance. It gradually seemed to acquire shape. After finishing the base of the arrow-head . . . he began striking gentle blows, every one of which 1 expected would break it in pieces, Yet such was his adroit applica- tion, his skill and dexterity that in little over an hour he produced a perfect obsidian arrow-head, “‘T then requested him to carve one from the remains of a broken hottle which, after two failures, he succeeded in doing. He gave as a reason for his ill-suecess that he did not understand the grain of the glass. No sculptor ever handled a chisel with greater precision, or more carefully measured the weight and effect of every blow, than did this ingenious Indian,’ The handicraft in stone bequeathed by our own native people of more reeent years—still nomadic hunters and food gatherers, as were the many generations which preceded them—cannot fail to disclose the symmetrical beauty of their craftsmanship, REFERENCES Cooper, H, M,, 1943; ‘(Large stone implements from South Australia.” Ree, 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369, 1954: ‘*Material eulture of Anstralian aboriginals.’’ Ree, S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 11, pp. 91-97, 1959: “‘Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia.’’ Trans, Roy. Soe. S. Aust., Adelaide, 82, pp. 55-59. » 1960: ‘‘The archaeology of Kangaroo Island,’’ Rec. S, Aust. Mns., Adelaide, 13, pp. 481-503. 1961: ‘‘Large stone implements from the lower River Wakefield, South Australia,’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., Adelaide, 84, pp. 105-118. COOPER—HAMMER-STONES il Evans, John, 1872: ‘‘The ancient stone implements of Great Britain.’’ London, p. 23. Howchin, Walter, 1934: ‘‘The stone implements of the Adelaide Tribe of aborigines.’’ Adelaide, pp. 69-73. McCarthy, F. D., 1946: ‘‘The stone implements of Australia.’’ Aust. Mus., Sydney, Memoir 9, pp. 57-60. Mountford, C. P., 1939: ‘‘Australian and Tasmanian Implements of unknown use.’’ South Aust. Naturalist, Adelaide, 19, pp. 12-14, Stevens, E. T., 1870: ‘‘Flint Chips.’’ London, pp. 77 and 78. Tindale, N. B., and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: ‘‘Traces of an extinct aboriginal population on Kangaroo Island.’’ Ree. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4, pp. 275-289. 12 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 13 14 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM * ete l SE) tre ALS COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 15 A. MUSEUM RECORDS OF THE 5S. COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 7 18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM LOCATIONS OF FIGURED SPECIMENS Fig. 1. Sellick Beach. Fig. 2. Port Rickaby. Fig. 3. Pennington Bay, near. (Kangaroo Island.) Fig. 4, Tiddy Widdy Well. Fig. 5. Normanville. Fig. 6. Hallett Cove. Fig. 7. Murray Bridge. Fig. 8. Cleve. Fig. 9. Baan Hill. Fig. 10. Brachina Creek. Fig. 11. Brachina Creek, Fig. 12. Normanville. Fig. 13. Port Elliot. Fig. 14. Normanville. Fig. 15. Buleara. (Kangaroo Island). Fig. 16. Mundalla. Fig. 17. Limestone Springs. Fig. 18. Brachina Creek. Fig. 19. Moorowie. (Mount Chambers Gorge.) Fig, 20. Hog Bay River. (Kangaroo Island.) Fig. 21. South Australia. Vig. 22. Lake Albert. Fig. 23. Loveday Bay. Fig. 24. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.) Fig. 25. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.) Fig. 26. Moonta, Fig. 27. Pennington Bay, near. (Kangaroo Island.) Fig. 28. Pudalja. Fig. 29. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.) The above drawings, acknowledged with appreciation, were executed by Miss V. Richardson, South Australian Museum. Dr. B. Daily, Curator of Fossils and Minerals in the same institution kindly identified the principal types of rocks selected by the natives for use as hammer-stones. CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY OF THE TIRARI DESERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By R. A. STIRTON, R. H. TEDFORD, AND ALDEN H. MILLER Summary The origin and evolution of the Australasian vertebrate fauna has been the subject of considerable speculation due to the lack of evidence from the fossil record. The Pleistocene marsupials of Australia are fairly well known, but they tell us little about the Tertiary evolution of their ancestors. Only a few undoubted Tertiary marsupials had been reported prior to the investigations described in this paper. Baldwin Spencer (1900) described a bushytailed opossum from Fossil Bluff, Tasmania, which was critically reviewed and redescribed by Frederic Wood Jones (1930). This specimen was found in marine deposits containing foraminifera which are said to belong to the Janjukian “Stage” and probably Oligocene in age. Charles Anderson (1937) recorded diprotodontid and macropodid remains from New Guinea which are possibly late Pliocene or early Pleistocene. Edmund D. Gill (1957) and Stirton (1957b) have recently summarized the evidence on the few Tertiary marsupials found in Victoria. The Beaumaris fauna of Victoria is associated with late Miocene Cheltenhamian invertebrates, the macropodid from Forsyth’s Bank belongs in the early Pliocene Kalimnan “Stage”, and the cuscus from a podsol near Hamilton is referred to the late Pliocene (see review by Gill, 1957). Recently Martin F. Glaessner, B. McGowran, and M. Wade (1960) recorded part of the diaphysis of a “large kangaroo” femur from a place called Henty’s near Hamilton, Victoria. This they consider as referable to the Balcombian “Stage” middle Miocene. Some other mammalian remains from Chinchilla in the Darling Downs of Queensland may be as old as Pliocene (Woods, 1956, p. 139; 1958, p. 189). CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEON- TOLOGY OF THE TIRARI DESERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By R, A. STIRTON, R. H. TEDFORD, aso ALDEN H. MILLER Fig, 1-4 INTRODUCTION The origin and evolution of the Australasian vertebrate fauna has heen the subject of considerable speculation due to the lack of evidence trom the fossil record, The Pleistocene marsupials of Australia are fairly well known, but they tell us little about the Tertiary evolution of their ancestors, Only a few undoubted Tertiary marsupials had been reported prior to the investigations described in this paper. Baldwin Spencer (1900) described a bushytailed opossum from Fossil Bluff, Tasmania, which was critically reviewed and redescribed by Frederic Wood Jones (1930). This specimen was found in marine deposits containing foraminifera which are said to belong to the Janjukian ‘‘Stage’’ and probably Oligocene in age, Charles Anderson (1937) recorded diprotodontid and macropodid remains from New Guinea which are possibly late Pliocene or early Pleistocene, Edmund D. Gill (1957) and Stirton (1957b) have recently summarized the evidence on the few Tertiary marsupials found in Victoria. The Beaumaris fauna of Victoria is associated with late Miocene Chelten- hamian invertebrates, the macropodid from Forsyth’s Bank belongs in the early Pliocene Kalimnan ‘‘Stage’’, and the cuscus from a podsol near Hamilton is referred to the late Pliocene (see review by Gill, 1957). Recently Martin F. Glaessner, B, McGowran, and M. Wade (1960) recorded part of the diaphysis of a ‘large kangaroo’? femur from a place called Henty’s near Hamilton, Victoria. This they con- sider as referable to the Baleombian ‘‘Stage’’ middle Miocene. Some other mammalian remains from Chinchilla in the Darling Downs of Queensland may be as old as Pliocene (Woods, 1956, p. 139; 1958, p. 189). Stirton and Tedford eame to South Australia on Fulbright Awards in 1953 to search for Tertiary mammalian faunas and if possible to initiate studies on the stratigraphic sequence of the assemblages, In his original invitation to us, the late Sir Douglas Mawson suggested 20 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM ~ the eastern side of Lake Ryre Basin as an area to explore, The expedition’ organized that year was sponsored by the Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, the South Australian Museum, and the Museum of Paleontology of the University of California, It is interesting to note that after several months of most discouraging prospecting in the Lake Eyre Basin during which we went down Cooper Creek ag far us the Malkuni waterhole (Nmu Camp), G. Davidson Woodard made onr first discovery of Tertiary mammals af Lake Palankarinoa on Joly 27, 1953, This was the key that omocked the door to the snecess of our subsequent expeditions. An acconnt of the 1954 explorations appeared in Pacific Discovery (Vol. 7, No. 2, 1954), and preliminary deseriptions of some of the late Tertiary Palankarinna mammals were reported by Stirton (1955). When we left the field in 1953 we thought the Woodard locality would prove to be an extensive quarry. Unfortunately at that site the Mampuwordu channel sands in which the fossils ocenr had been truncated by the overlying Tirari Formation. Consequently the 1954 party soon depleted the quarry. Later that season outerops of a correlative of the Katipiri Formation along the Warburton River were prospeeted from Cowarie to Kalamurina, and a locality was examined on the Diamantina near Birdsville, Finally four of us (Connell, Marens, Stirton and Woodard) drove across southern Queensland to the Darling Downs, where we collected some fossils and measured sections near the Condamine Biver on the Nangram Lagoon and old Chinchilla Stations, Also exposures were prospeeted alone King and Spring Creeks near Clifton and on Freestone Creek near Warwick. Wheu the remainder of the parfy was returning to Adelaide, Lawson found part of a small mandible in the Etadunna Formation at Lake Palankarinna, This was subseqnently described as the holotype of Pevikoala palankavinniea Stirton (1957a). At that time we were still confused ahout the stratigraphic relations of the Mampuwordu Sands and the Etadunna Formation, Consequently Perikoala was incorreetly assigned to the Palankarinna Pliocene fauna. The 1957 party made important contributions to our knowledge on the stratigraphy, found other productive fossil sites at Lake Palankarinna, and discovered fossils at Lake Kanunka and Lake (1) Personnel of the expuiitions have been: 1952; Paul FP. Lawson, Richard A, Tedford, Q. Davidson Woodard, and R, A. Stirton, The party waa luter joined by Harold 0. Reynolds. A side trip to Lake Menindee was made by Norman B, Tindale, Tedford, and Stirton, 1954; Wim, A, Cassidy, James K, Connull, Leslie F, Marcus, Lawson, Stirton, and Woodard. 1957; Harry J, Bowshall, Brian Daily, Lawson, and Tedford. 1858; Lawson, Stirton, and Tedford. STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 21 Pitikanta, By shovelling numerous trenches through the weathered surface materials across the exposures Daily and Tedford revealed the correct stratigraphic relations of the Ktadunna Formation, the Mampuwordn Sands, and the Tirari Formation. This party also prospected along the Warburton River. For the first time now there was sufficient evidence to reveal the columnar positions of four vertebrate faunas, In 1958 we collected extensively from the four faunas, The areas visited were Lake Ngapakaldi, Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, Lake Palankarinna, and from the Malkuni waterhole on down Cooper Creek to within 16 miles of Lake Fyre. In the course of refining and eon- tributing to our information on the stratigraphy we discovered the late Pleistocene Katipiri channel sands with remains of Diprotodon at Lake Palankarinna, All of our efforts to find fossil vertebrates in the underlying non- marine Winton Formation thus far have failed, There is one piece of a large bone from Lake Howitt that may have come from that forma- tion, but it is too incomplete and poorly preserved for identification. Only preliminary identifications of the faunas are included in this report. Detailed deseriptions of the higher vertebrates will appear in separate publications. The Ngapakaldi and Palankarinna mammals will be done by Stirton, the Kanunka and Malkuni mammals by Tedford, and the birds from all four faunas by Miller, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This research and exploration for Cenozoic vertebrates and on the continental stratigraphy in South Australia is a joint project of the Sonth Anstralian Museum and the Museum of Paleontology of the University of California, We are permanently indebted to the former Tirector, Mr, Herbert M. Hale, O.B.1B, and all members of the South Anstralian Museum for their cordialily and constant assistance. As the recipients of Fulbright Awards in 1953, Stirton and Tedford were sponsored by the Department of Geology of the University of Adelaide. We gratefully acknowledge their sponsorship and wish (o express olir appreciation to Professor Arthur R, Alderman and all members of his staff for their helpful suggestions and efforts to facilitate our work. We are most appreciative of the support received through our Fulbright Awards and in particular to Mr. Geoffrey G, Rossiter (executive officer of the United States Educational Foundation in Australia) who did everything possible to make our experience in 22 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM Australia pleasant and profitable, The 1953 expedition was greatly facilitated by a liberal grant-in-aid by Dr, Maleolm C. MeKenna. We are equally grateful to the National Science Foundation and to Dr. David D, Keck (programme director for Systematic Biology) for their generous support to continue in 1958. The 1957 expedition was financed by the South Australian Museum and by the Museum of Paleontology; also some of the funds for the other expeditions came from those institutions, The encouragement and advice given by both the late Sir Douglas Mawson and Mr. C. Warren Bonython from the time we first thought of going to Anstralia has been of the highest order. Their confidence in our ability to attain our objective gaye us the inspiration to surmani all discouraging obstacles. Much valuable information on the geology of South Australia was received from Drs. F, W. Whitehouse, KR, ©. Sprigg and M. ¥. Glaessner, We are especially indebted to Dr. Brian Daily for his assistance in working out the stratigraphy and for sketching from aerial photographs promising areas to explore. Mr. Norman B, Tindale, with his profound knowledge of geography and aboriginal place names, has gen¢éronsly placed all of this information at our disposal. All suceess of our efforts in the exploration must be attributed to the team work of all members of the field parties. The efforts of Mr. Pan! F. Lawson however deserve especial recognition, He has assumed all the difficult tasks of organizing and proenring the materials necessary for all operations in the field. Furthermore he has found most of the best specimens which will be designated as holotypes. His assistance and suggestions both in the field and in the laboratory have heen invaluable, Australian hospitality was well exemplified at the Etadunna Station where we were made welcome by Mr. and Mrs, EB. J, Oldfield. There we stored our provisions and came at regular intervals for fresh water. It is not possible to list here all of our other friends in Australia who were equally generous and hospitable to us, but to all we are most grateful, GEOCHRONOLOGIC, STRATIGRAPHIC AND FAUNAL TERMINOLOGIES Geochronologie Terminology —Our most difficult problem in the Tirari area is to determine the age of the rock units in which the fossils occur, xcept for the upper part of the Katipiri Formation with the remains of Diprotodon, our reference to the Lyellian time terms is STIRTON AND oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 23 little more than a guess. Unfortunately we have discovered no voleanic rocks to offer means of absolute dating with radioactive materials. Nor does the age of the marine formations in Victoria and Tasmania in which land mammals have been found help us at this time. Mammalian remains are meagre and very incomplete in these forma- tions, nor is there any indieation of closely related forms occurring in the marine beds and in the Tirari area, althongh additional specimens from these or from other formations may offer important clues. Tf fossil pollen oecnrs in these rocks it nay be usefl in vorrelation. This will necessitate a research programme in palynology but this is beyond the seope of onr present project. Onr suggestion of Lyellian time terms is based on our interpreta- tion of the stage of evolution of the mammals, This of conrse is largely specnlative because we have no phyletic control even in the Macropodidae which are better represented in the fossil reeord than any of the families of Australian mammals. If we assume that the rate of evolution in the hypsobrachyodont Macropodinae is roughly comparable to that ol the braclyhypsodunt to hypsodont Kquinae, then we may reasonably conclude that the Mtadunna formation is as old as Oligocene. This will be diseussed further when the faunas are described in detail in our fortheoming reports. When knowledge on the vertebrate paleontology and continental stratigraphy of Anstralia offers adequate information for correlation, it will be interesting to sce how far off we were in our first tentative Mpoch designations, Our rock sequences are not eomplete enough to vepresent a continous sueceession of chronostratigraphie unite, even from the different exposed sections, Until the suecession of the Tertiary vertebrate faunas is much better known, or other evidence is available, we shall have no means of knowing the duration of the hiatuses represented by the unconformaties and disconformuties between our formations. The faunas, however, indicate that the longest is between the Etadunna and the Mampuwordu. Stratigrapie Terminology.—We have proposed four formational names, The Btadyunna, Mampuwordu, Tirari and Katipiri, Wach of these formations is distinguished on its lithologic character and on the basis of its stratigraplie position in relation to the other forma- tions, They are not defined on the basis of their contained fauna or faunas. The maximum horizontal or vertical extent of these units is not observable and therefore not determinable from the surface expostires. The laenstrine Ktadunna Formation is evidently the most extensive and our knowledee of the Mampuwordn channel and flood 24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM NORTHERN TERRITORY WESTERN AUSTRALIA NEW SOUTH WALES VICTORIA 1 2 SMESTON MENTY'S, FORSYTHS B HAMILTON X @Melbourne | BEAUMA| Fig. 1. A map of the Australasian region showing the location of the Tirari Desert area east of Lake Kyre. The other Tertiary and early Pleistocene faunal localities are indicated by X (see correlation chart, fig. 3). STIRTON AND oOTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 25 plain sands is limited to a local area at Lake Palankarinna, The red argillaceous sandstones and arenaceous claystones of the Tirari Forma- tion are also wide spread, possibly almost as much so as the Etadunna. The Katipiri fluviatile beds possibly represent all of Pleistocene time. They are exposed at Lake Palankarinna, Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, Lake Ngapakaldi, along Cooper Creek, and probably farther north. Faunal Terminology.—Most vertebrate paleontologists, especially those working with fossil mammals, consider their fossil assemblages as biological entities and refer to them as faunas (or local faunas). This procedure has been employed to implement efforts in the applica- tion of the biologic evidence to the problems of faunal succession, paleoecology, and geochronology. The term ‘‘fauna’’ as used here (Stirton, 1936, 1940) need not be confused with the concept of fauna as representing all the animals living in a given area at a given time. In fact there is no local area of any appreciable extent in which we can know, or hope to know, all of the animals that lived, or are living, at any given time. In any event the evidence available to us can be considered only as a representation of that fauna. An assemblage of fossils from one locality may represent the mammals living in a given area at a given time. Several assemblages from different sites may be recognized as belonging to one fauna. A single species or an individual fossil specimen may be our sole representation of a distinct faunal unit and may be so designated. Collections of fossils from different localities are recognized as representing a fauna when the genera and species are the same. Separate faunal names may be employed when the paleontologist has reason to assume that the materials before him represent distinct faunal units, even though the specimens cannot be precisely identified to genus and species. Eventually additional evidence may necessitate synonymizing certain faunal names; on the other hand a faunal name as it has been applied to certain fossil materials may be found to refer to two or more faunas. This need not be considered as confusing nor misleading but as normal procedure as our knowledge increases. This biologic approach offers basic control units in phylogenetic, paleoecologic and stratigraphic interpretations. Many fossil mam- malian assemblages occur in fluviatile deposits where there is no chance of tracing the beds laterally and where there is little or no chance of establishing suprapositional or infrapositional temporal control with other rock units in the section. In other areas the strati- graphic position of the sites where fossils are found may be obscured 26 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM by complex geologic structure. Therefore it is only exceptional when mammalian fossils are sufficiently represented in a continuous succession of chronostratigraphic units to permit the delineation of Stages and Zones (Savage, 1955). One fauna may be distributed throughout a considerable thickness of rocks because of relatively rapid deposition of sediments. On the other hand due to a slow accumulation of detritus, or alterations in the distribution of animals, two or more distinct faunas may occur very close to one another in a vertical section. Locally or within an area of 50 miles, marshland, woodland and grassland environments may affect the composition of synchronous faunas. Some animals with wide environmental tolerances wil] frequently reveal the contemporaneity of such faunas. These synchronous assemblages of different composition (faunal facies) when discovered as fossils may be recorded by distinct faunal names, We have recognized four faunas in the area here referred to as the Tirari Desert. A type locality has been designated for each of these faunas as is standard practice in introducing new formation names. To avoid confusion these have been given local geographic names that differ from the names of the formations. The reason for this is apparent because we have recognized two faunas, the Malkuni and the Kanunka, as coming from the Katipiri Formation. The Malkuni fauna is represented from numerous localities along Cooper Creek and at Lake Palankarinna, On the other hand we have found the Kanunka fauna in remarkably similar channel sands only at Lake Kanunka, Eventually one of our faunas may be discovered elsewhere in Australia in a different formation. The Palankarinna fauna is thus far restricted to two localities at Lake Palankarinna in the Mampu- wordu Sands, Remains representing the Ngapakaldi fauna are more widely distributed. There are numerous localities at Lake Palankarinna, one at Lake Kanunka, and several at both Lake Pitikanta and at Lake Ngapakaldi. STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY The term Tirari Desert was first used without explicit definition by John Walter Gregory (1906) for the sandridge country between the Warburton River and Cooper Creek oceupied by the Tirari aboriginal tribe. As used in this report the Tirari Desert actually represents a southern extension of the Arunta (or Simpson) Desert east of Lake Eyre, bounded to the east by a north trending anticlinal axis involving Mesozoic and early Tertiary rocks. The southern boundary is the divide between the Lake Eyre and Lake Frome basins -* STIRTON anv oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 27 formed by a north-easterly trending anticlinal axis involving Mesozoic and Tertiary vocks, N orth of the Warburton River the Tirari Desert merges with the southern Arunta Desert, The present-day plystography of this region is dominated by a remarkably linear system of parallel sandridges, the long axes of which trend slightly west of north (Madigan, 1946), Characteristic of the Tirari Desert is the great mimber of large and small saltpans, basins of very local drainage, produced by large scale deflation in late Quaternary and Reeent time. Donald King (1960) has given an extended discussion of the sandridge deserts of South Australia. Cutting across the sandridges and in places into the underlying forma- tions are two large streain conrses, Cooper Creek and the Warburton River, that carry flood waters from eastern Queensland into Lake Myre North. The stratigraphy of the area covered during these investigations has never received detailed attention although the general geology of the Lake Wyre Basin as a whole is fairly well known (see Sprige (1958) for snmmary), G, L. Dehney (1881a) gave the only account of the pre-sandridge reology of the Tirari Desert in a report ou the results of attempts ta locate shallow wells in this country oes the latter part of the last century. Significantly he memtions (p. 146) ‘the broken face of the escarpment, of the table hills, overlooking a salt lake 25 miles north- west of Lake Killalpaninna, displays marly clays mixed with gypsum and fossil bones. The fossils, which have been determined by Professor Tate, consist of fish vertebrae, teeth and the bony scales of crocodiles, and phalanges of a gigantic marsupial of the family of kangaroo, from which it may be safely concluded that the marly clays, sandstone, and #ypsiferous beds of the tableland country are of lacus- trine origin’. This discovery was mentioned hy Ralph Tate (1889, p. 54) whose list includes “nhalanges of an emu-like bird’? instead of those of a kangaroo, In any event it appears that Debnuy discovered Luke Kanunka where bones of the Kanunka yertebrates had weathered out af the loose channel sands of the Katipiri Formation and occur as font on the Btadunna exposures below. It appears from Dehney’s (1881b) well logs at sites 1-4 that the Katipiri channel and flood plain sands were well distributed ont from the present course of Cooper Creek. Only at his well site 2 which is 44 miles north of Cooper Creek and 23 miles east of Lake Hyre did he find a section like the ones we have deseribed at Lake Kanunka and Lake Palankarinna. Evidently 248 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM that bore eut through the Katipiri and Tirari formations and some six feet into the Htadunna. John W. Gregory (1906) and Cecil Thomas Madigan (1945) crossed the Tirari Desert, but give only a cursory discussion of the sandridges and saltpans, Gregory’s primary interest was in the fossil vertebrates reported from Cooper Creek and the Warburton River. In so far as we can determine at this time, all the fossils collected in the Tirari Desert area by the Gregory expedition belong to the Malkuni fauna. He apparently was not aware of Debney’s discovery in the sandridge country between these rivers, Recently D. King (1956 and 1960) has dealt with the late Cenozoic deposits exposed in the southwestern margin of the Tirari Desert along the southern shores of Lake Eyre, but this is 50 to 60 miles southwest of the area diseussed in this report. Kxposures of middle and later Cenozoic rocks in the Tirari Desert are widely scattered due to the ubiqnitous sandridge cover which obscures most of the underlying deposits. Only here and there where deflation or the major water conrses have carved deep enough into the desert floor are exposures to be found. Therefore the margins of the numerous saltpans (usually the western sides) and banks of the entrenched Cooper Creek and Warburton River expose the only significant outcrops of pre-sandridge rocks in the Tirari Desert. It was found that the distinetive lithologies and superpositional relationships of the formational units eould be recognized over wide areas, even though the outcrops are discontinuous. In some instances it has been possible to cheek these litholowical correlations with fossils. Three genoral localities are dealt with somewhat in detail in this report (Tig, 2). They were singled out because they have yielded the most significant fossil vertebrate remaing and offered the best exposnres of the formations. The type sections of our stratigraphic units and the type localities for the faunas have been designated from these local areas. 1. Lake Palankarinna—This is the best single section so far diseovered, Late Mesozoic and middle to later Cenozoie rocks are continuously exposed in a dissected escarpment stretching for abont three miles along the western side of this saltpan, Lake Palankarinna is south of Cooper Creek and about 18 miles southwest of Etadunna Station at approximately latitude 28° 47’ 8., longitude 138° 25° B, 2. Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta and Lake N gapakaldi.Nearly 30 miles north of Lake Palankarinna are exposures along the shores STIRTON anp OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 29 LAKE EYRE NORTH —— Routes of Expeditions © Ngopokold) Fauna 0 » 6 20 . Localities © Polonkorinna Fauna wes @ Konunka Founo ® Molkun! Fauno Hig. 2. The Tirari Desert area east of Lake Eyre, South Australia. There are many more Ngapakaldi faunal localities on the west side of Lake Palankarinna than indicated on this map. of the two small lakes, Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta, and Lake Ngapakaldi. There we have found important fossil vertebrate remains, especially those from the lower channel sands of the Katipiri Forma- tion and from the much older Etadunna Formation. Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta are small saltpans only 14 miles long and two miles apart in the same interdune valley at approximately latitude 28° 23’ S., longitude 138° 18’ E, 30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Three miles north of Lake Pitikanta lies the larger Lake Ngapakaldi at approximately latitude 28° 18’ S., longitude 138° 15’ E. Only the exposures of the Etadunna Formation on the eastern side of this saltpan have yielded fossils of the Ngapakaldi fauna. The same fauna occurs in outcrops of the same formation on the west sides of Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta. 3. Katipiri waterhole, Cooper Creek—There is an excellent cliff exposure along the northern bank of Cooper Creek at Katipiri water- hole, 24 miles northwest of Lake Palankarinna at approximately latitude 28° 385’ §., longitude 138° 6’ E. There the superpositional relationships of the upper fluviatile deposits of the Katipiri Formation are revealed. On the following pages a composite stratigraphic column for the area investigated is described utilizing information drawn from a study of the three sections listed above. A description of the strati- graphic columns for each locality is given in Appendix A. Late Mesozoic—Early Tertiary The base of our oldest Cenozoic unit is exposed at the south- western end of Lake Palankarinna. These basal green sandstones of MEGAFOSSIL MAMMALIAN FAUNAS *STAGES” VICTORIA AND TASMANIA LAKE EYRE BASIN PLEISTOCENE WERRIKOOIAN Hamilton t* PLIOCENE KALIMNAN aN Forsyths Bank f* Potankorinna ft CHELTENHAMIAN MIOCENE 0 Pe} -- - —- -- - - - =~ + = ae ee ae a oe a oe ee ee ee ee ee EOCENE x Directly correlated with the marine type sections or their generally accepted equivalents, Fig. 3. Tentative correlation of somo Cenozoic mammalian faunas. STIRTON AND orbkrs—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 31 the middle ‘Tertiary Htadunna Formation rest unconformably on deeply weathered gray siltstones, clays and sandstones of the non- marine Winton Formation, the uppermost Cretaceous unit recognized in the Lake Eyre Basin. Immediately south of Lake Palankarinna these older rocks ure gently upwarped forming a low anticlinal divide separating the Lake Eyre and Lake Frome depressions. Superficial silicification (the formation of duricrust) of an extensive peneplane cut across the Cretaceous rocks and thin remnants of overlying early Cenozois fliviatile deposits predates the deposition of the Htadunna Formation, The Etadunna Formation lacks any trace of large scale silicifieation and contains locally ut its base a limonite cemented conglomerate of siliceows nodules derived {rom the Winton Formation. The absence of any marked southward coarsening of the Etadunna Formation against the duricrusted upwarp of older rocks suggests that this anticline was not a prominent feature in mid-Tertiary time. Middle Tertiary (?Oligocene) Etadunna Formation Stratigraphy —The term Etadunna Formation was first used by Stirton in his preliminary deseription of the mammals from the Palankarinna fama (1955, p. 267). In that paper Stirton credits the term NWtadunna Formation to G. Davidson Woodard who proposed it in a report on his pioneer investigations of Tirari Desert geology (unpublished manuseript on file at the Museum of Paleontology, University of California). [t was ussumed that Woodard’s report would soon be published as planned, At that time the post-Winton lacustrine deposits at Lake Palankarinna and the immediately over- lying channel sands with the Palankarinna fauna were thought to belong to the same eyele of deposition and hence to a single formation. Later stratigraphic work by Brian Daily and Tedford hag shown that, the channel sands are a distinct lithologie anit disconformably over- lying the lake beds. As used here the term Htadunna Formation is restricted to the lacustrine deposits und a new name, Mampuwordu Sands, is proposed for the overlying channel sands containing the Palankarinna fauna, At the type section, the bluffs along the western side of Lake Palunkarinna, the Etadnima Formation consists of a maximum of 97 feet of green claystone and sandstone interbedded with white caleareous mudstone and dolomitic limestone (see Appendix A for detailed description), ‘The basal green sandstone member of the 32 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSBUM Htadunna Formation rests inconformably on the Winton Formation. A discontinuons basal conglomerate may oecur at this contact. The basal member o! the Mtadunna Pormation is succeeded by a sequence of dolomitic limestones, Caleireous mudstones and elaystones with several horizons of intraformational breccia denoting repeated exposure and drying of the shallow water lagoon in which these deposits formed. Poorly preserved gastropods, ostracodes and oégonia of Chara were lonnd in the caleareous mudstones. The sueceeding strata at Lake Palankarinna consist of an alterna- tion of green claystones and argillaceous sandstones yielding abundant, but fragmentary, remains of fish, reptiles, birds and some mammals {notably Perikeala). These deposits give way to a ealeareous mud- stone with interbedded claystone and calearcous sandstone, The uppermost units at the type section are fossiliferous arenaceous green elaystones and interbedded sandstones in places overlain disconform- ably (probably with angular unconformity) by the Mampuwordu Sands. Where the Mampuwordu Sands are absent, the Btadunna Formation {is overlain with angular onconformity by the Tirari Formation or locally by the suceveding Katipiri Sands, At Lake Palankarinna the Etadunna Formation was folded into a broad syncline before the Mampuwordu Sands and horizontally bedded Tirari Formation were deposited, This folding may have corresponded with movements along the Mesozoic—early Tertiary anticlinal axis immediately to the southeast because the formations overlying the Etadanna are poorly sorted fluviatile deposits rich in Fragments derived from a duricrusted terrain, The Rtadunna Formation exposed at Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, and Lake Ngapakaldi is thinner than at the type section but strikingly similar in lithology. There is a maximum of 24 feet of Lake Kanunka dolomitie calcareous mndstones with prominent intra formational breccias at the top whieh alternate with green claystones (for measured sections see Appendix A). Artienlated mammalian skeletons and parts of skeletons were found consistently at the top of the lowest exposed green claystone and at the base of the immediately overlying ealearcous mudstone. The positions assumed by the articulated skeletons of the abundant small diprotedonts and small macropodids suggest entrapment of the animals in boggy elay, Their remains are truncated and weathered where they projected into the overlying calearcous mudstone indieating exposure before burial beneath the overlying calcareous sediments. Although it is impossible directly to trace the fossiliferous horizon from Lake Kanunka and STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 33 Lake Pitikanta to Lake Ngapakaldi, the unusual concentration of mammalian remains at a similar stratigraphic position at each locality is tentatively accepted as indicating approximate synchronous deposition, The Etadunna Formation at Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, and Lake Ng‘apakaldi is nearly flat-lying. There the strata are disconform- ably overlain by equivalents of the Tirari Formation and locally by the Katipiri Sands. It is possible that the dolomitic mudstones and interbedded thin green clays recorded from the southern shore of Lake Eyre North by King (1956) are part of the Etadunna Formation. The unconformably overlying deposits at that locality cannot be correlated at present with any of the post-Etadunna Formations in the area we have studied. Paleontology—tThe vertebrate fauna from the Etadunna Forma- tion is herein designated as the Ngapakaldi fauna with its type locality LAKE KANUNKA KATIPIRE WATERHOLE LAKE PITIKANTA LAKE PALANKARINNA GOOPER CREEK { COMPOSITE } Sm et 5} YEATICAL SCALE W FEET WIND PFT NES MAL RUN) Y 5377-82, FAUNA Vy 5ED9-E9 TT WOAPARALDY Y SITE fauna = V BERD ETADUNNA nedranazor) ¥3TTO nearanaay Vane Fauva ) S763 vS5765 FORMATION LITMDLOGIC SyMBOLS \ vars CET Feoey CROSS-REODED Sahos = GLAYETONE = SANDSTONE ES CALCAREOUS MUDSTONE GRGILLACEOUS SANDSTONE E @RENACEOUS Ci ATSTONE fssse] INTRAFORMATIONS'. BRECOA WINTON FORMATION q LIMESTONE AND GCOLOMITIC e} LiMeSTOME Fig. 4. Colummnar sections indicating stratigraphic positions of faunas and formations in the Tirari Desert area east of Lake Eyre, South Australia, Scale in feet. ie 34 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM on the east shore of Lake Ngapakaldi (U.C. Loc. V 5858). Its most important representation is the locally abundant skeletal remains of marsupials collected on the eastern shore of Lake Ngapakaldi and the northwestern shore of Lake Pitikanta, Additional, but more frag- mentary, marsupial material has been taken at the same horizon at Lake Kanunka and from members 4, 6 (Perikoala), and 9 of the Etadunna Formation at Lake Palankarinna, A provisional fannal list for the Ngapakaldi fauna is given below combining the material from all the localities mentioned. Only the koala-like Perikoala has been previously described (Stirton, 1957a). NGAPAKALDI FAUNA (?0LIGOCENE) Mouuusca Gastropopa: Poorly preserved gastropods have been found that evidently represent three genera. ARTHROPODA Osrracopa; Some fossil ostracodes occur in the caleareous mudstones but these have not been identified further. OsTEICHTHYES Dipnot: CeratopontipaE: One locality at Lake Palankarinna yielded a large series of lungfish teeth. These for the most part are smaller than the teeth in the Malkuni and Kanunka faunas. Other teeth, how- ever, found on the Etadunna exposures are as large as those in the later faunas, Treueostet: Bones of teleost fishes are as abundant in the Etadunna Formation as they are in the later channel sands. Repriuia CuetoniA: Parts of carapaces, plastrons, and body skeletal elements are abundant in this formation, Crocoptnia: Pieces of skulls and lower jaws were found at different sites, but these reptiles seemed to have been much less numerous than the turtles. Squamata: Varanipan: There is one vertebra of a large, but not gigantic, lizard. STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 35 AVES More than 45 fragmentary bird bones represent a rather diversified avifauna. The collection is sufficient to permit identification to family as follows. PELECANIFORMES: Pevecanipan: The distal end of a tarsometatarsus represents a pelican differing significantly from the modern genus. CICONITFORMES; Puoentcoprertipsr: The distal articulation of a tarsometatarsus represents the genus Phoenicopterus but the species is about 50 per cent larger than any modern flamingo. The family is not represented in the modern fauna of Australia, ANSERIFORMES: Anatipaz: A complete humerus is tentatively allocated to the subfamily comprising the spine-tailed ducks, GRUIFORMES : Gruipar: An imperfect proximal end of a tarsus is some form of crane, CHARADRIIFORMES : Bururiyipar: A proximal half of a humerus apparently represents this family of shore-birds, the thick-knees. LanipaE: A distal half of a tarsometatarsus appears to represent a gull or a tern. MamMatia MARSUPIALIA: Dasyuripan: One of the most significant specimens found in the Etadunna Formation is a new genus of dasyurid. The size of the animal is comparable to Dasyurus quoll. This specimen consists of I’; both wpper canines, P?, P*, M* and M? of both sides; M*; the left mandible with the canine, Pi, the anterior end of Ps, Ps missing from its alveolus, Mi-s in place; part of a pelvis and much of the ulna, and numerous foot bones. The proximity of these parts in the clay- stone indicates they belong to a single individual. The three premolars with gradation in size from P: to Ps and the absence of the metaconid on Mi; suggests that this animal may not be far removed from the ancestry of Thylacinus. 36 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM PHAsCOLAROTIDAB:? Perikoala palankarimnica Stirton (19572) The type and paratype of this species were originally described as part of the Palankarinna fanna, We now know that they come from the underlying Htadunna Formation and belong to the Ngapakaldi fauna. As yet we haye found no specimens referable to this species at Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, or Lake Ngapakaldi where most of the mammalian remains have been found, Macropopipan: Poronorar: Part of a left mandible is referable to a group that is possibly ancestral to the genus Bettongia. Most of the horizontal and posterior parts of the jaw are missing. ‘The incisor is broken off, but Pa, Mi, Mz and Ms are in place and little worn. The specimen is remarkably like the living bettongs especially in the premolar, but the details in the patterns of the molars are different. Subfamily 7 One of the most remarkable mammals in the Ngapakaldi fauna is a new genus of questionable subfamily relationships. The skull is somewhat comparable in outline but more elongate than that of Aepyprymnus, On the whole however the new genus seems to be about equally distinct from each of the Recent potoroine genera as well as from Hypsiprymnodow. There are two erania with mandibles and parts of the body skeletons that belong to two individuals, as well as two other lower jaws with parts of the maxillaries associated, and parts of the lower jaws of still another individual. Features in the molars offer some suggestion of their derivation from a primitive marsupial with a tribosphenic pattern, Furthermore the transverse lophs and lophids are more trenchant and not us depressed in the middle as in the Potoroinae or the Hypsiprymnodontinae, The characters in these Ngapakaldi specimens are much like those seen in the living Setonia brachyurus as well as those in the three specimens discussed later in the Malkuni, Kanunka and Palankarinna faunas, Dieroropontipan: The most abundant marsupial in the Ngapakaldi fauna is a primitive diprotodontid about the size of a domestic suid, Unfortunately the bones of the skeletons we have found thus far have been badly shattered by expansion and contraction in the surface weathering zone, Nevertheless enough specimens haye been found to make a restoration possible, although adequately preserved cervical, thoracic and lumbar vertebrae, as well as bones of the sternum and STIRTON anv oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY ay ribs are still wanting. All of the bones in our collection have not yet been fully prepared and restored because of their fragmentary con- dition, The phylogenetic position of this interesting animal, as in most ol the other Ngapakaldi marsupials, cannot be accurately determined until more of the genera and species intermediate between if and the later related genera can be found. The molars are sharply biliphodont with only slight indications of forelinks and midlinks, Of the premolars only P{ are present. They have a simple pattern and are reduced in size. The lower incisors are rather widely spatulate as in Palorchestes, not rounded as in the Diprotodontinae. Late Tertiary (?early Pliocene) Mampuwordu'*’ Sands Stratigraphy.—The Mampuwordu Sands are locally exposed stream channel deposits known only at the type locality, Lake Palankarinna, This formation contains the Palankarinna fauna partly described by Stirton (1955). Seattered remnants of probably wide- spread stream channel and floodplain deposits outcrop along the north- western side of Lake Palankarinna where some have cut as much as 16 feet into the uppermost member of the Mtadunna Formation. They are disconformably overlain by the Tirari Formation, Manmuwalian remains lave been found in local concentrations at the base of these channels at two localities in pebbly cross-bedded quartz sand and lenticular arenaceons claystones. Those remains were commonly broken, but not badly waterworn. Broken fragments fonnd separated in the fossil qnarries were frequently found to fit together indicating no great distance of transport, Waterworn pebbles within the basal sands tuclude durierust and quartz fragments derived from the Mesozoie and early Tertiary deposits as well as limestone fragments devived from the underlying Etaduuna Formation, The presence of fragments derived from the deeper parts of the Etadnnna Formation sugeest that the folding of these rocks preceded deposition of the Mampuwordo Sands. Regional uplift is refleeted in the change from fine grained clastic and chemical sediments of the Etadunna to the eoarser fluviatile deposits of the Mampuwordu Sands and the sueceeding Tirari Formation. Paleontology—The Palankarinna fauna was taken from two quarries in the Mampuwordn Sands exposed along the northwestern (2) 4 Dieri name for a site at the northwestern end of Lake Palankarinna; approved by the State Nomenclature Committee of South Australia. 38 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM side of Lake Palankarinna. The Woodard Quarry (U.O.M.P. locality V 5367), the type locality, was discovered in 1953 and worked out in 1954. The Lawson and Daily Quarries (U.C.M.P. locality V 5769) are two bone-bearing pockets in a single channel discovered in 1957 about 4 mile north of the Woodard Quarry. Stirton (1955) gave a preliminary description of the 1953 collection from the Woodard Quarry. A provisional faunal list for both localities is given below. PALANKARINNA FAUNA (?PLIOCENE) ARTHROPODA CRUSTACEA: Decapopa: Both gastroliths and pieces of the pinchers occur in this collection, OsTEICHTHYBS TrLnoster: Numerous bones probably representing a diversified fish fauna have been taken from the Woodard locality. Reprints Crocopinma: There are more than 125 isolated teeth, 7 dermal scutes and 6 parts of crocodilian skulls and mandibles. The ravages of these creatures may account in a large measure for the fragmentary condition of the mammal bones, AVES CaSUARIIFORMES : Dromicenpar; A tarsometatarsus seems clearly to represent a new species of this family. It is the first Tertiary record of the Dromiceiidae. The proportions of the bone are intermediate between those in the emu and the cassowary, but the species clearly was an emu and not a cassowary. b, ¢ 1910; do, 1928 of stomach troublu; aged o, 18 years; f, 8.2; m, 82.4; newly married to 1.10 at time of death; no ehiliren, Sf.1s, WINDJAKUKAURUNGATI SEND TALS OBES STL barantan (tune fish)s white name SARAT No, 1; b, ©. 1900; arrived on Mornington Island from Allen Island 2 July 1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 60 years (could be 28 years older) ; mrasured a8 BL, no, 1h (because of her Linck hair without greyness ele waa at first considered much younger); f. By; m. S£.1; married 8.5 and 8.16; 3 children, Sta, SP.18, 8.26 (by 8.5), Blood types: —B, MNss, Ry Ry, Py+, La(a—), Py(at+), K— Sfl4. KARIKARIWANGATI mandatji (large eat fish); b. e. 1912; d, 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinele to Allen Island; aged ec. 85 yoarsy f, S43 m. S£.2; married §.5 (also probable associations with Y.2); 2 children, Sf. 28 (by 8.5), YL. (probably by Y.2)., SE15, KONGARANGATT tjaparta (sole); b. o. 1916; d, ¢, 1918, by drowning, after people had been chased out on to reefs by White innn, with dogs; aged «. 2 years; £..8,5; ii, UF,4, St.10. RENDJALKAURUNGATI tjolora (atone fish); white namo DONNA, also written ss DONA and very incorreotly as NORMA; b. ¢ 1915, nreived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 23 December 1950 wt Mornington Island; f 8&5; m. St. 12; married 8.8 and 817; children, 8.21 (by 8.8), 8F.52 (by B17). Sf£17. MEDEDINGRINGATI tjoands (white porpoise); white name SALLY; h. ¢. 1924, arrived on Mornington [sland 18 Oevtober 1948; living June 1960; age ¢, 37 yeara: measured us BI. no. 80; f S25 m, R03; married 6.18; 6 childyen, 82.31, 8.29, 3.41, 5f.35, 8.38, S£.37, Thia is the woman spoken ta by MeCarthy when investt- gating the shooting of the native on Sweers Tsland in 1948. Blood types:—B, Mas, BR, Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Py(at+), K—. J S£18, TONDOTNGATL kulkitji (shark); white name RHEBA, name also written as REA; b. ¢, 1925, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; ogo 6. 45 years; measured a3 BI, no. 31; f. 8.5; m. 8£,13; married 8.8, 5.175 & olildren, 8£,27, SE29 (by 8.8), 8.28, S£.96, 8.40 (by BT). Blood types:—B, Nes, Ry Ry, Py+, Le(a—), Ny(at+), K—, 8f£.19, KONGARANGATT; b. c. 1926; d. « 1928 at Kombali, in the mangroves of exposure and cold during 8.E, trade wind weather and at same time as mother; aged e, + years; f, 8.6; m, Sf.5. B£.20. sre. 57.23. St.24, Sf.2h, SP26, Bf.27, Bi.2o. B£.30, Bf. BL3g, Sf.a3, 1.34. B£.35, TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 323 WANARATJINGATI? b, o, 1927; d. 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; aged c. 20 years; f. 8.5; m. S#.8; not married, no children. BKORAWURUNGATLI bidjaripa (dugoug); white name MATILDA; b. ¢, 1929, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 5 June 1980, after giving birth to still-born miale child on 22 May 1950; aged ce. 21 yours; #. 8.9; m. Uf.10; married 8.6 but no children; as widow had short mavital assoeations with T12 and V,3, but neither were considered to be proper marriages; 2 ohildren, T£.15, T.17 (considered to have been fathered by 1,12), . BIRARUKINGATT komi (a fish); b, 0, 1982; d, «, 1937, Killed by V.3 whose elder brother should hava liad her as wife; aged c. 5 years; f. 8.5; m. Sf.14.. KONGARANGATY, also called KUNTURUNGATI mengungurn (queen fish); white ninie MARTHA; b. ¢. 1933; d, 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Beutinek to Allen Island; aged ©, 14 years; oot married, but, had been promised to Z.9; £. 8.5; zm rey ae married, Reputed to have boen a light-skinned person, known as & andokando, WERUNGATJINGAT! tadaoka bya ae fish) white name DAWN; b. 1935, arrived on Moriungton Island 2 July 1947 from Allen Island; living June 1960; age 25 years; measured ne BI, no, 17; #. 8.11; an, UE7; married 8.16; 4 children, Sf.34, §.35, 8.86, 8.39. Blood lypess—O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Leda), Fy(at+), K—, Webb—, Jka—. TONDOINGATI bokadji (black hawk); white mame MAY; b, e 1986, arrived Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; living June 1960; age ¢c, 23 years; teasured ag BI, no. 29; f. 8.9; m. Ut.10; married U.17; no ehildren. Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py, Lea—), Py(at+), K—, Webb—, Jha+, EORAREINGATT karwark (queen fish); white name PAULA; b, 1 July 1988 (age given im mission records, not verifiable); arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; lying June 1960; age 21 years 1] months; f, 8.11; m, Ut,7; not married, promised to T.15, BERUMOINGATE mali (swamp turtle) ; white name NETTA; b. 1 July 1942 (miesion record age, not verifiable’); arrived on Morningtou Tsland 4 August 1947; living Jane 1960; age 17 years 11 months; measured ae BI. on. 86; 2, 8.8; mw, Sf.18; not married, not promised. Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ito, P7—, Lefa—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—, Jkat. . WARTADANGATI bidjarupa. (dugong); white name ETITEL, earlier records give MILDRED (%); b. 30 July or September 1946 (eonilieting mission renards} j arrived Morniogtou Island 4 August 1947; living June 190; age 14 years 9 months or 13 yeara 8 months; mensured as BI. no. 40; £. 5.8; m. 2f.2; not married, not promised, Blood types:—B, MNsa, Ry Ry Py—, La(ot), Fytas), K— TONDOINGATI banga (turtle); white mame DOLLY; b. Mareh 1946, arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 14 years 3 months; meusured as BI, no. 38; f, 8.8; m, Sf18, Blood types:—B, MNss, Ry Ky, Py—, Le(a—), Byi+y, K—. WEREKEWERERENGATI kambo (rock cod); white name MARGARET; b. May 1946 on Sweers Island; arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 14 April 1950 on Mornington Taland, eause not stated; m. UL,16 unmarried; child aseribed to BS: was adopted by 817 and Vf10, ————— white name TRENE; b. July 1948, arrived Mornington Tsland 18 October 1948; d, 10 January 1949; aged ( months; f. 8.18; m, Sf.17. white name OLIVE, also known as OLOM; b, 11 October 148 at Mornington Island; d. 20 February 1950; aged 1 year 4 months, The first ehiid born on Moroington atter the evacuation of Bentinck Island; f, 8,17; m. Sf.16, white name NANCY; Bb, 4 December 1949 at Mornington Island; d. 19505 aged under L year; £. 8.10; m. Wf.7, white name DOROTHY; b, 27 May 1950 at Mornington Island; d, 88 August 1951 at Cloncurry Hospital; aged 1 year 3 months; f. 8.16; m. Sf.24, white name MADGE; b. 29 May 1953 ot Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 7 years 0 months; f 8.18; m, Sf,17, : 324 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM 8£.36, ——————. white name OLIVE kuluwanda (a small bird); b, 17 July 1955 at Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 6 years 10 months; ft. 8.17; m, 8,18, 8t. 37-————- white name DOROTHY; b. 19 May 1959 at Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 1 year 0 months; f. B15; m. 8£.17. S8f£.448. —————— white name JOY; b. 3 September 1959 at Mornington Taland; living June 1960; age 9 montha; £, S175 m. VF10, Males of Dolnoro T V1, Ngolotalicurunpaijarupangati kambo (rock vod); b, e, 1880; d. ¢, 1918; shot by a white man at Minakuri; aged ¢. 38 years; f- } me } younger sisters were Tf£2 and TL.3; family if any, not recorded, T.2, Kongarangati waruku (sun); b, ¢, 1845; d, ¢, 1919, killed li «, fight; aged c. 34 years; f, or step f. 8.1; m, Wf.l; married W.2 and VE.2; S children, T.4, Tf.7 (hy Wiz), THB (by VEZ). T.38. Modomodongati bidjarupa (dugong); pb, ©, 1885; J, «& 1940; drowned at night at Kodakurn; aged ¢, 55 years; f. T.2; m. ; married S£.2 and S£,10; 5 children, 5 (by SL.2); Tao, Tat, Vad, TEI (by $1.10), T.4, Bitangati, also called Kongarungsti, tjilanganda — moariwu (biface palavolithie stone tool); b. ¢, 1890; d. probably before 1983, drowned at night while tishing from a raft, ngimi (translated as ‘‘outside’’) Baltae Tsland; aged ¢, 43 years; f. T.2; m. Wf.2; married 8£.9; 2 children, Tf.9, T.13, 7.5. Wuandurnngati (also ealled Kongarangati) kulkitji (shark); white name Sam; b, eo. 1898, arrived Mornington Island 28 October 1948; d. 1 January 1949 at Mornington Tslund; aged ¢. 51 years; blind in one eye since childhood; fF. T.3; m, Xf.25 married Wid; 1 child, Tf14, T.6. Kongarangati karwark (queen fish) ; white name Shorty; b. c 1905 arrived Mornington Taland on 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age o, 55 years; measured as BI, no, 24; £, unrecorded T, mun; m, Sf.1; married WH.3 and Uf.3 (widow of V.5); ull X#,20 (by Wf.3), Blood types: —B, MNgs, By Ry, Py—, Leta—), Fyin+) T.7.. Wojopongati (Waijupungati) koako (eurlew); b, ¢. 1915; d. ec. 1944, collapsed and tied of sickness while out lonting at Windjarukauras aged « 29 yoare; womarrieds #. (ar more likely step-father) S45 m. Uf.d, T.8. Wojvpongati (Waijupungati) walda (moon); b. 6 1918; d. ¢, 1934, speared and Icilled at Dangkokinaijarup; aged «. IM yenra; not married; f. (or step-father) Z.3; m, TYf.4, TO. Wanggalkoangati nyorongkolt ( ); white name Paul; b, ¢, 1920, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age c. 40 years; measured og Bl. no. 8; f. (or more likely afepefather) 8.4; m, Uf9; married Tf12 (widow of U,10); no children, Blood types:—B, MNags, Ry Ry, Pye, Lolo), Fy(at), K—, 7.10. Wauaratjingati; b. c. 1927; d. c. 1929 ab co. 2 years; f. TS (or 8.6); m. 8£.10. T.11, Wanaratjingati; b. o. 1930; d. o. 1984 ut o. 4 years; f, T.8 (or 5.6); m. Sf.10, T.12, Kongarangati wanikar (pelican (%)); white name Dugal (Dougal) Goongarra (corruption of ngati name); b, «. 1930, arrived on Mornington Island 9 December 1947 atter medical inspection trip of Dr, Spalding; living June 1960; age o. 30 years; méasured as BI. no. 2; f. (or etep-father) 8.5; im. Tf; married Zid; 4 children, Tf.16, Tf.17, T.20, T£.19; also two stillborn, T.16 and T.18 (unsexed) prior to T£,16; also suapected father af T.17 and TE15 (by Sf21), Note: Real father of T.12 may have been 'T.3, Blood types:—O, MNws, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), fy(a+), K—, Webb—, Jka+, 113, Pindjarindjingati kalbara (white crane) ; white name Frederick; b. ¢. 1933, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age o. 27 years; measured as BI. no. 11; £. T.4; m, Sf,9; married TA18 and Xf17; 2 children, TH18, T.21 and 1 stillborn unsexad, T.19. Blood types:—Q, Mass, Ry Ry, P)—-. Le(a—), Fyta+), K—, Webb—, Jka+, TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 325 T14. Mapuru bandeingati; b, v. 19384; d, ¢, 19385 at o. 1 year; f, 'T.3 (or S.6); m, Sf10, T.16, Koogarangati karumoko (long tom fish); white name Arthur; hb, 1938, arrived on Mornington Taland 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 22 years; f. U.11; m. Uf12; not married, but promised to St.26, T.16, Stillborn. unsexed, b. ¢ 1949; f£. T.12; m, Zf4, T.17, Stillborn male, b, 22 May 1950; reputed f, T.12; sm, S£2L (see nole under 8£2)). T.18. Stillborn (%); uot sexed; b, prior to 1951; f, T.12; mm. Zea T19, Btillborn; not sexed; b. January 1951; f¢. T.13; m, Uf,1g, T.20, ————— wlite mame Bernard; b, 14 February 1955; living June 1960; age 5 years 3 months; is very blond-haired; £, T,12; m, Zl.4, 'P.21. ——————. kalbura (white Grane); white name Westie Frederick; b, 9 January 1960; living June 1960; age 5 months; f. 7,13; m, X£,17, Females of Dolnoro T TL.1. MAPURABANDETJARUNGATT Karwark (queen fish) and/or tantamant ( 4 b, & 1870; dc, 198%; aged e. 64 yours, of mulatji, a poison from the sca; f, } Mm. ; married U,1; @ children, U.6, Uf, U.10, TLe. BALTAENGATT tjaparta (sole); b, « 18835 d. ¢, 1918; aged c. 36 years. Shot by white man, inland, at Burumangi, child shot from her body in advanced pregnancy ; fy ; Tm. ; brother was T.1; sister wae TH3; widow of unknown man; tuarried 5; 1 ehild, 8.12 (by unrecorded earlier husband). Tr, KONGARANGATI debedebe (rock cod); b. ec. 1885; d. c. 1925; died of old wind during storm while fishing in the water of a creek; aged ec. 40 years; f. ; my ; elder brother was T.l and elder sister Tf£.2; married W.2; 1 child, W.6. Tid, MARDANGEHINGATTL bilti (tern); b, c. 1898; d, 6, 1943 at Lokoti (Rokoti) ; f. . m. ; married Z.3, 2.2 and Z.5; 5 children, T.8 (by 7), 2.6, Z,.7, 23, Zf4 (by 4,3). TP.5. MAPURABANDELTARUNGATI wondo (rain); b, e. 1900; d. «, 1945 of sickness at KSongarai; aged ¢. 45 years; f. } my j Married 1.6; 2 childven, Uf,13, Uta, TL, KONGARANGATE bidjarupa (dugong); white name POLLY; b, ¢. 1906, arrived on Mornington Island probably in 1947 group; d, shortly after 1948 but no mission data exists recording her death; f- > mk ; married T.8 (not sure); 9,5} 3 childran, TF10, TL11, 1.12 (all probably by 7.3), Tt,7, KOBATITNGATYI raerupudi (queen fish) and/or wonda = karuwi (rain); while mame HDITH; b. ¢. 1909, arrived on Mornington Island 18 Oetoher 1948; living Jina 1960; age «, 51 years; measured as GJ. no, 33; f, 1.2; m, W.2; murried five times, 4.3, Z.2, U.10, 2.9, 8.19; 8 children, Uf.18, U.17, U.18 (all by U.10), Blood typies:—B, Ness, By, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Tf.8. BELURUNGATI mandatji (cat fish); white name PANSY; b. ¢. 1917, arrived on Mornington Taland 4 August 1947; d, 18 Muay 1958, missing, believed drowned; after death of son; this considered as s suivide by aborigines; aged e, 41 yenrs; f, T.2; m. Vi2; married 5,6, 0,10 and Ui4; 1 child, 1.19 (by O10), TI, MAMBUNGGINGATTI debedebe (rock cod); white name ROMA; b. oc, 1917, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ce. 48 yoars; measured as BI. no. 16; f. T4; m, 82.9; married 0,18, U0 and §.10; 3 children, U£,21 (by U.18), U.20 (by U.10), and 8.80 (by $10), Blood types:—O, MNes, Ry By, Py—, Le(a—), Py(a+), K—, Webh—., TF.10, NGTLTALNGATI; b, ¢, 1925; d, 1947; drowned on raft voyage from Bentinek to Allen Tsland; aged ¢, 22 years; unmarried; f. (or stepfather) 8.5; m, TE6, Note: Qeal father may have been T.3, Till. TARUKUNGATI; b, ©, 1928; d, 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinek to Allen Island; aged c. 19 years; unmarried; f. (or stepfather), 8.5; m. T£.6. Note: Real father may have been T.3, 326 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Ti.12. WEREKEWEREKENGATI (TIONGROMANGATT); bh, 6, 1985 on Swoers Island; d. 1947, drowned on raft yoyage trom Beutinck to Allen Island; aged «. 12 yeura; Parentage not reeurded. Tf.13. TURURUNGATT kanatu (oil fish); white name ALISON, (ALLISON); bh, « 1936 at Tururu, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living Juno 1960; age c. 24 years; measred as BI. no, 23; f. T.3 (or 8.6); m, S£.10; married Y¥.5; 1 child, Y1.6, Blood types:—B, MNga, Ry Ry, Pi—, Lete—), Fy(a+), K—, TE14, KAKONGATI talkurnki (giant kingfisher) ; white name ISABELLE; b. 1 July 1943, birth estimate in Mornington Island Register, arrived Mornington Island 1% October 1948; living June 1960; age 16 years 11 months; measvred as BI. no. 85; not yet married; f, T.5; m, Wf4. Blood types:—B, Mss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(u—), Fy(o+), E-, T£.15. white name MILDRED; b, November 1944 on Mornington Island: d. 23 May 1949; aged G months; f, (suspected) 7.12; m. (unmarried) Sf.21 (see note under Sf,21), T£.16, ————— white name AGNES; b, 18 April 1952 on Mornington Island} living tune 1960; aged 8 years 1 month; f. T.12; m. Zf4, Tf.17, ————— white name AMY; b. 1953-54; d, 1953-54; f 1.125 m. Zl. T£,18, ————— kalbara (white crane); white name DAPHNE; b, 4 Mareh 1955 on Mornington Island; living June 1960; aged 4 yenrs 9 months; B. T.1a; m, Xf,17, T#19, ————— white name GAY; b. 1 July 1959; d, 14 July 1959; aged 14 days; #. 1.12; m, Zid. Males of Dolnoro U U4, Banbanngati; b. c. 1865 at Banhanharukeinds d, «, 1917; aged ce 52 years; {———; m. ; married Tf and Uf.3 (no issue); 3 children, U.6, Uf4, 1.10 (by 'T#.1)- TZ, Njinjilkingati bidjarupa (dugong); b, ¢, 1870; d. ¢ 1918, drowned at Rondjalkauru after being shot at by « white man; aged o, 48 yoars; f, ;om™m ; Imurried U1; 2 children, UL,8, 0.9. 0.8. ‘Tjiluangati karwark (queen fish); b. c. 1875; d. «. 1910, speared and killed in a fight; uged ¢, 85 years; £. 7m. -; married Vf.1; 2 children, UAT, Uf.11. U.4. Modomodongati airuput (small mackarel); b, ¢. 1885; d. after 1915+ f, 4 Ily ; married §8f,5, Sti; 2 children, U.12, 0.13, U5. Markurukandjingati burantant (bone fish); 6, 6 1895; d, o. 1939 at Minakuri of a awelling sickness of the sfoniaeh called mukoitj whiel: ia belisved to come. after brenking a food eating rule; f. + Mm. ; married Vi4 (widow of W.3), Xf,9 (widow of W.3). Noter 1 stepchild Wf.6 from Vf.4, by W.3). U.6. (ascribed also to W.) Modomodongati ngorolko, also toato (rainbow) and/or birint )5 b. e 1895; d. e, 1040, drowned at Wunki from a raft (broke a tule by killing a flying fox in the day time and beeame lost in heavy fog while fishing with bark flares at night), a tall thin man; aged c. 45 years} f, Wi1; m, Tf; married T.5, UL& (young widow of his father, U1); 4 ehildren, Uf13, Ut.14 (by T£5), UF15, U16 (uy UL3), U7. (but could belong to 8.) Kabaratjingati karwark (queen fish); b. o 1896; da. ¢. 1920 of stomach sickness at Kongara; not married; nged e, 24 yeara; f. U.22; m, Sf,1. 0.8, Njinjillingati kudabalt (curlew) and Wardondi (inangrove dwelling rat); b. o. 1897; d, ¢, 1928, death attributed to a shot by a white man at Kongarai while alowe; aged ¢, 31 years; fy ; my ; married Uf10; 1 child, Uf16, U.9. Korowaraingati bidjarupa (dugong); b, & 1898; d, «, 1918, killed by white man in bush on Bentinek Island; aged ¢, 20 years; unmarried; f, U.2; m. Uf, U1. Rotjorotjongati tadaoka (pumpkishend fish); white name Willy; b. ¢. 1900; d. July/ August 1945, killed by 8.16 at Minakuri; aged c. 45 yaurs; his grave seen; his widows still had unhealed mourning slashes on 17 August 1945; #. 1,1; m. Tf.1; married six wives, T?.7, TL£.9, UT.3 (his father’s widow), Tf.8, M£.9, BE12; 4 childron, Uf,18, U7 and U.18 (by Tt.7), U9 (by TES), TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 327 ULL, Kalturingati walda (moun); b, 6 1905; d, ¢, 1944; «a tall man; aged ¢. 39 years; speared and killed at Mededingki by 8.8 who sneaked on him while he was spearing fish; ff ; m- 7 married Uf12; 3 children, 0.14, 0.15, T.15 (check reason for dilfurence in doluoro), 0,12, Dodjonapangati tjoanda (white porpoise); b. c. 1912; d. o. 1945; tall yonng man; unmarried; speared by a man from Minakuri; 1. U4; m, 8f.5. U.18, Bokanaijarupangati makulda (big headed turtle); b. ¢. 1915; dc 1944; aged a 29 years; speared at Tjarapand by Z.8, died of wounds at Kongara; f£, U.4; m. Sf.5; married Tf.9; 1 child, Ur21, U.14. Baltacngati debedebe (rock cod); white name Maurice; b, co, 1932, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ¢«. 28 years; measured as BL. no, 5; f. U1; m, UPI; married SL.10 and TH; 2 children, U,21, UF.2 (by Sf.10). Blood types:—B, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a+), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—. U.AS. Werungati mialt (flat fish); white name Colin; b. ¢, 1985; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d. 20 Mareh 1952; aged o. 17 A yeas unmarried; but reputed father of Uf,23 (part Kuiadilt) by Lardiil woman TDA. 0.16, Borerunguti tjordaruki (erow) ; white name Desmond; b. 1986; arrived on Mornington Teland 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 24 years; measired as BI. no. 6; not married; 1, U.6; mn, Uf.3. Blood types: —O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py— Le(a—), FPy(a+), K—, Webb, Jka+, W.17, Djoragarangati burantant (bone fish); white name Darwin; b, 1 July 1939 (fide late entry in Mission Register), arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; nge 21 yeara 0 months; measured as BI. no. 35 f£. U.10; m. TE£7; married $1.25; uo children, Blood types:—B, Nsa, Ry, Py—, Lo(a—), Py(at+), K—, W.18. Moraringati; while oame Donald; b. ¢, 1941 on Sweers Island; arrived on Mornington gt 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age 19 yoars; not married; £. 0.10; m, TE7, U,19, Tarurukingati murkudi (groper fish); white name Tony; b, 1 July 1942 (fide late entry In Mission Register) at Taaro; arrived on Mornington Tsland 4 August 1047; d. 2¢ September 1955, drowned in u canoe sceident off Porsyth Island; aged 13 Fears 3 months; £. U.10; m. T.8. U.20, Modomodongati, ulso valled Korownringati tjadark ( \; white name Roland; bh. ec. 10452 arrived on Mormington Tslund 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age e, 1) years; unmarriod; measured as BL uo, 37; f. 0410; m, TH9. Blood types:— O, Ness, Hy By, Py—, La(o—), Fy(a+), K—, Webh—, Jkat+. U.31, —————— male child; b, & 1947; arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d o 1948; aged e. 1 years; f. Ud; m. Sf10. U.22. (out of sequence) no name (father of Kabarstji karwark); b- ; d, o, 19045 married S!,1 (alao perhaps Sf.2 but. no issue); 2 children, 0.7, UL5. Females of Dolnora U Uf,1. DANGALBADANGONGATT djingkawavangaloro (south-east wind); b, o, 1875; d, a 1918; aged c. 48 years; drowned at Pungkalwangki after being shot at by white men f. ; Te ; married U.2; 2 children, Uf.3, U.9. UL, JUMUTANGATI (YUMATERR of Mission Records); b, ¢, 1883; d, ¢ 1940; aged o 55 years; drowned during a 1940 raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; her son X.5 wot there with some of the party; f, ; om, ; married X.2; 1 ehild, X65, U£3. BALTAMNGATI hidjarupa (dugong); white name EVE; b, ¢, 1894; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d. 1 September 1954; aged c. 64 yenrs; cause of death given as ‘‘nge’’; f, 0.2; m. Uf.l; married U.1, U.6, U.10 (she waa his father’s other wife), 5.6, then 8.10 who just before his death passed her to V.S (in October 1950), T.6; 2 children, Uf15, U.16 (by U.6), 328 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Uf. DUBALKARURONGATI tadacka (pumpkinhead fish) ; white nama MARA; bh. o, 1897, arrived on Mornington Island 4 Augnst 1947, was the woman who reported the mass drowning on the voyage by rafts from Beutinck to Allen Island; d, 1948 (after ane aged & SL years; f, Ul; m. Tl.1; warried §.5; 3 children, Sf,15, 8,18, wee UES, KABARATIINGATI raeruputa (a white fish); b, ¢, 1898; d, c, 1908 of sicknosa at Rongara; aged o 1) years; f, 1,22; m. Sf.2, ULG, TITLIWANGATL karwark (queen fish); b, e 1905 at Vjiliwa = 7 Tjiwiakura; d. t, 19583 aged 28 years, ab Markaruki; weut out into water, on return her stomach swelled up; f =m. j warried 8.7; 1 ehild, UL17. (Note that. the father's 4 other children by two other wives Sf.7 and V¥#.5 are of dolnoro V.) UL, KALNJIRINGATL balibal (blaek spotted stingray) and Karwark ); white name HANNAH; b. c, 1905; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; a. August 1947; aged o, 42 years; deserihed as having appoarance of an aged woman ah death; £. 0.38; m, Vél; married $.11, S.7, 8.10; 3 children, St.24, Sf£.26 (by B.11), 5.24 (by 8.10); 2 step-clildren, Sf.72 and Wels (of earlier marriage in her Mushand’s menage, parentage not recorded). UL8. TARDARUKINGATI (TADABUNRATEREINT) debudehe (rock cod); b, o 1905; dc. 1985; aged o, 30 years; f, 3} 7. ; married V.8; 1 child, V£.9, UL8. WERUNGATUNGAT! boroti (sole); b. 0, 1905; d, 1995 at Kongara of fish poisonin from a species of sardine-like fishy aged c, 30 years; f- j me ; Marries 8.4; 2 children, T.7, T.9 (probably both children by au earlier husband). Uf10, DANGRANKURUNGATE ngarunati (spoonbill); b, o 1907; d, e, 1944, killed at Tarnuruki with a spear by 2.8; aged o, 37 years; £, ; my ; married 1,8, 8.9; 8 children, UfL1G (hy 1.8), BL.21, S£.25 (hy 8.9), UfAL, TALMANGKINGATI bidjarupa (dugong); b. e 1910; d. &, 1945, ab Bokatuu, of Karwar (sickness) after she had been clubbed by her husband (¥.1); aged o, 86 yeara; f. U.3; m, Vf15 married Y15 no children, DEI2. DITLAWANGATI (TILWIAKARANGATI) balibah (black spotted stingray); white name DINNY (sometimes JINNY); b, ¢, 1932; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; 7. 11 April 1958 of pneumonia; aged e. 46 years; f. ; me marrivd U.ld, T.9: 8 childven, Udd, 1.15, TAG (parentage of T15 is ascribed to firat lusband but T.15 is now elaimed as belonging to T.0’s dolnoro), Uf13. DANGEANKURUNGATT tadaoka (pumpkinhoad fish); white name VERA; »b. e. 1920; arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; A. 28 Maréh 1951+ aged e, 31 years; waa pregnant in December 1950, had stillborn ehild January, blood trana- fusions at Normanton Hospital 28 January; unable to swallow water 27th Marel 1961; ft, Ci; m, TH; Murried 8.14, 8.18 who gave her to 1.13 in 1950; 1 ehild, 8.27 (by 8.18) and one stillborn child not sexed T.16 (by T.14), ULit. MARALNGATI (DANGKANEURUNGA'TT) borsatant (hone fish); b, e. 1984; 4, 13947, drowned on rad’t voyage froni Bentinck to Allen Island; aged c, 23 years; #, U6; m, V¥.5; married 8.5; no children, Uf15, OMBOMARUTARUPANGATT (WOMBAMARUTARUPAINGATYI) tiapartw (sole) ; b. «, 1927; doo. 1947 of sickness of the stomach; death attributed to magic, by using her Taeees; aged ¢. 20 years; f UG; m, Uf.3; married 8.8; no children, UfiG. BALTAENGATI bidjarupa (dugong); white name MARGARET BENTINCK; b, ¢. 1927; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1047; d, ‘shortly sdter 1950"; aged co, 24 yoara; f, U.S; m, UF10; not twarried, but taken by 8.5 until he was forced to rolense her; had one child, Sf. 30, attributed to §.5; it was adopted and reared by V#£.10 to whom it has sometimes been aseribed, in error, Uf17. RATIARATARUPAINGATT (BATRAWATARUPAINGATT) tjilangand — (bifaee chopping stone); White nome PHOEBE) b, e. 1927; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age co. 33 years; measured as BI. no. 28; £, 8.73 m, Uf.6; married 8.8, 8.10; 2 children, 8.23, 8,33 (by 8.10); 1 child 8.33 after being widow for 1 year 6 months, Blood types:—O, MNes, Ry, Py—, Le(a—y, Fy (u-+), K—, Webb—, ‘ TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 329 UL.18. KABARATJINGATI; b, ¢ 19415 d. 1947; drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; aged ¢. 16 years; #. U.10; m, TYf.7; newly married to 8.5 when she Wied; no children, UEI9. OMBOMAKUTARUPANGATI ngarawunt (blue parrot fish); b. 6, 1932; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d. 1947, but no reeord available of her death; uged o. 17 years; father, not recorded; stepmother Uf,3; not married. Uf,20, RAIARATARUPAINGATI kapinta (water snake) and/or mingingur (woppa fish) ; white name AMY; b, 1 Joly 1942 (acwording fo late entry in Missiun Register) ; arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 17 youn 11 months; measured as BI, no, 84; £. stopfathor 8.8 (real father not recorded); m. “2.2; not married; no marriage arrangementa yet made, Blood types:—O, Mas, Ry Ro Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb. Tf.21, DANGRANKURUNGATI makulda (big-headed turtle); white name DAPHNE; b. 1942; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 23 December 1947 of stings af jelly fish, received while swimming; uged 5 yours; £. U.13; m. TY.9. U2.22. MILBULKAIKATARANGA'TT; b, 1945; d. 1946; aged ¢, 1 week; £. U4; m. 8f.10- Uf.23. --—-———. white nama ALISTAIR; b. 9 July 1952 on Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 7 years 11 months; f. said to be U.15; m. a Lardii] woman, TDA of Mornington Island; a widow oot married to U.15 [ly some woh recognized ae belonging to the Bentinck Island people, but regarded as a Lardiil person], Males of Dolnoro V Tarnrukingati warungalta (south-east wind); b, ¢. 1872; d. oc. 1918; aged o, 46 years; shot by a white man ou horseback at Korombali (identified by his son aa in a 1901 photograph taken by J. EF, Bailey); f ; ™, + married Zf.1, algo perhaps Bf.8 who passed to 8.2; 4 children, V.2, V#.2, V.38, V£.6 (by Zt), also perhaps V.4, V£.7 (by S£.3), V.2, Tadulkingati (Ngaiangaiangati) jukar (porpoise); b, ¢. 1893; 4, ©, 1915; aged o, 22 years; f. Vl; m, Sf.1; not married, V.a, Tadulkingati matali (sea-eagle); white name Jack; b, 6, 1900; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; hving June 1960; age oc. 60 years; measured as TT, no, 75 f, Vil; m, Zf.1; married Uf.8, Xf.9 (no children) and Wi.6; 1 child, Vf9 (by Ut.8); 2 children, Vf11, V.8 (by Wf.6) who had Yf.4 by previous husband, Blood typos:-—-O, Mss, Ry Ry, Py—, Lel(a—), Fy(a—), K—, Webb—, Jka—. V4. Tarurukingati jalunta (seaweed); b. ¢, 1903; d, o. 1918; aged «, 15 years; shot at and killed by white Man froin « small ship at Baltae (Fowler Tsland) at sama lime ag his father; f, perhaps V.1 with 8.2 as stepfather; m, 81.3; not marriad. V.5, Tarurukingati morukadi (groper fish); white name Pinto; b. « 1920; arrived on Mornington Island 17 October 1948; living June 1960; age ¢ 40 yeors; measured as BI, no, §; a photograph dated December 1947 with Dr. Spalding js available; f, 8.7; m. Sf.7; married Uf.3, widow of U.6 who had first passed tu U.10 then to 8.10; no children by her; a widower since 1954. Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry, P\—, Le(a—), Pyla+), K—, Webb—. : VA. Wartadangati bulunduntu ( 3; b. m. 1925; d, «. 1982, at Minakuri; aged e. 7 years, of kok, or sores all over his body; f, 8.7; m. UP.6. VT. Wartadangati bilti (tern); b. m 1942; d, co 1946, speared by 8.17; aged «. 4 years; f, 8.7; m, V2£.7, v.82. —————— wingingur (woppa fish); white namo James; b. July 19474 arrived on Mornington Island 4 August. 1947; d, 12 April 1950; aged 2 years 9 montha; f£. V.3; m WEE. V1. —T Females of Dolnoro V Vf.1. PINDINGARUPAINGATI balumbant ( ); hb. e, 1888; d. c. 1933 of siek- tess; aged o, 50 yrara; f, 7 m, ; Married 1.3; 2 children, Uf.7, Tl, 330 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM vfs. JUMUTANGATT jalunta (seaweed); b. c 1896; d, ¢, 1987 or after, at Medudingki of sickness; aged o, 31 years; said to have been a short fat woman; f, Vids m. Zt1; married T.2, 8.5; 2 ehildren, T¥.8 (hy T.2), 5.19 (by 8.5). Vf.3. TALMANGKINGATI kaiwaruki (big black fish); b, ¢, 18975 d, « 1926, at Dongalakara of sicknesa; face swelled wp; aged « 29 years; f ; ma. ; married W.1; 2 children, Wf.4, W1.5, Vf4. DUNGALAKARANGATI banga (turtle); b, o. 1908; d, ¢, 1947 at Minalkuri of spear wound inflicted by 8. 18; aged ec. 44 years; f. i tie ; married Y.2, W.3, U.5; 4 children, ¥.3 (by ¥.2), W-7, W.8, Wf. (by W.3); no children by U5. Vi.5, DODJONGAPANGATLI kambo (rock cod) and/or bidjarupa (dugong); b. ¢. 1905; d, a. 1944; speared in an open fight at Marant by 8.18 and died at Kongara; aged e, 89 years; Fy tn ; murried §.7; 2 children, Vf.10, V.7. Vf.6. TIORDJORORONGATI; b. c. 1906; d. ¢. 1919, af Tondoi, eause not indicated; aged e. 13 years; f, V1; m, 2f.1; not married, V0.7, DODJONGAPANGATT ftsliwindi (trumpet shell); b. 0. 1905; d, 0, 1920, of sickness at Njinjilki; aged o, 15 years; f, V1; m. 8.3; not married. V£i.8. KONGARANGATI bilti (tern); b, o, 1923; d, o, 1937, of stomach trouble at Barkowakar; aged ¢. 14 years; unmarried; f. 8.7; m, Sf.7, Vf.9. DONGKOROREINGATL warongalta (south-east wind); b, ¢ 1925; d. «, 1931, at Dongkororei; agod c. 6 years; f. V.3; m, Uf, Vt10. DONGKOROREINGATL kardakadi (a Bea bird); white mame MONA; b, o. 1930 (or earlier); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; aged 30 years (or older); f. 8.7; m. V£.5; married 8.17; 3 children, 8.32, 8.47, Sf£48 (Sf, 30 was an adopted child of Uf,16 (Ginmarried girl), reputedly by 8.5). Vili, KALNJIRINGATI mandatji (cat fish); white nume RITA; b. 1 July 1942 (late record in Mission Register); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living Junie 1960; age 17 years 11 months; not married; f, V.0; m. Wf.6, Males of Dolnoro W W.l. Kakongati burantant (bone fish); b, c. 1885; d. o 1915 at Botenki of stomach aieknesa and diarvhoca; aged 6,30 yeurs; £. ; i. ; married Vf.4; 2 children, Wf,4, WE.5. W.2. —————— -nguti toato (rainhow); b. before 1885; d. co. 1925; aged over 40 years; f ; ™. ; married Tf,3, Xf, 8f.7; 3 children, W.3 (by X£.7), W.4 (by S£.6), W.5 (by TE). W.da, Markurukandjingati toato (rainbow); b. ¢. 1905; (Le. 1985; aged «. 30 years, of sick- noss Hund lunger because he ¢ould not eat; f. W.25 m, Xe7; married 5 wives, Bf.6 (widow of W.2), X#.9, XV.10, Xf.11, Vf4; 5 children, W.7, W.8, WE.6 (by Vi4), ".7 (by Xt.9), no children by 24.6, W.6 (by X£.11), X10 is said to have ‘belonged’? to W.3 and she had had one child (Xf.14), but she was also atated to have ramained ‘‘single’? all her life; it will he noted that her daughter ‘belongs’? to her mother’s dolnore, (There are still doubta about the data for this mau und his family. He inherited his father’s wifo Xf.6, who already had a son of the same totem (tonto) as himself; his widowed wives were later taken by U.5, a man of the same ngati namo.) W.d. Walkareringati toato (rainbow); white name Rainbow; b. before 1910; removed from Allen Island to Aurukun by poli¢e in April 1941; d. 5 May 1945, aged over 35 yeara, of sickness during an influenza epidemic at Aurukun; deseribed aa ‘elderly’? at death; f, W.2; m, Xf6; married Xf15, X16; 4 children, Wf.8, W110, Wt.9 (by X£.15), W,11 (by Xf.16). W.6, Mala child of W.2; b,c. 1922; dio. 1025; aged o. 2 years, at antie time as its mother; f, W,2; m, TH,3, W.6. Knkongati kulpanda (Arce shell fish); b. e 1925; d. c. 1945; drowned at Taruruki on south coast of Bentinck Island: aged ¢. 20 years; not married; f, W.3; m, N#,11. TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 331 W.7. Dangkongarupaingati burantant (bone fish); b, e. 1927; d. 1947; drowned during raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; aged o, 20 years; \nmarried; f. W.a; m, Vin W.8. Dangkongarupaingati ngarawunt. (blne parrot figh); b. ¢. 1930; d. 6, 1942, aged o, 12 years at Dungkongurupai; cause of death not stated; f. Wd; m. VF4, W.9, Walkureringali; b. «. 1936; d. 19475 deowned during raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; aged o, 11 years; £- } me . W,10, Minakuringati jakuri (red snapper fish); white name Bobbie Kummari; b, 3 April 1937 (jide lato entry at Aurukun Mission); remoyed by police from Allen Island to Aurnkun, April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June 1960; age 23 years; not married; measured as BI. no, 12; f. W.4; m. X£,15; was ree away from his dolnoro, Blood types:—B, Ness, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy (a+),. c-, W.11, Dalendurungati; white name Barney Walpo; b, 11 April 1940 on Allen Island; removed. to Aurukun by police April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June 1960; age 20 years 2 months; not married; f. W.4; m. X£.16. Females of Dolnoro W Wr.l. KAKONGATI walpukuteri (raft); b, c. 1864; d. o, 1924; aged o. 60 years, ** just died’?; f, ; m- ; married 8.1 (probably was widow of a man of 'T, dolnoro); ¢ children, TZ, Std, 9.3, 8.5. W£.2. DANGKRONGARUPAINGATI burantant (bone fish); b, o 1870; d.c, 1920; killed in a fight after being chased into the sea at Malunji; aged c, 50 years; f- r ni. ; married T.2; 2 ehildren, 'T.4, 'TP,7. We.3. KAKONGATE mali (fresh water turtle); white name LAURA; b, ¢. 1910; arrived on Mornington Island 21 October 1948 on the launch Martin; last family to leave Bentinck Island; d, 21 January 1949; aged c. 89 years; f- 7 me + marriad T.6; 1 child, Xf,20. W4, DAWARINGATI kulkitji (ahark); white name MAUDIE PAT; b, o, 1913 at Duwarinap; took part in a short visit to Mornington Tsland July 1945; arrived permanently Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age e. 47 years; meusured as BI. no, 32; f W.l; m V8; married ¥.1, 7.5, X.3, 8.18; 5 children, Y.5, Y.6 (by Y,1), Té14 (hy 7.5), XF.20 (by X.3), 8.34 (by 818), Blood types:— B, MSE, Ry Ro, Pi-, Le(a—), Fy(at+), K—, WHS. BOTENKINGATL burantant (bone fish); b, c. 1917; d. o, 1937; killed at Birarnki, struck down by Y.1, her husband; aged ¢. 20 years; £. W,1; m. Vf.3; married Y,1; nu children, WH.6. BIRARUKINGATI dadowokara (brown fish); white name JENNY; b, ¢, 1922; arrived on Mornington Tsland 4 August 1947; living Jims 1960; age o. 38 years; moastired as BI, no, 19; f, W.3 (U5 is a atepfather); m. Vid; married Y.2, V.3; 8 ehildren, Yf.4 (by Y¥.2), Vf4 (considered as V. dolnoro bat probably belongs to Y.3, V.8 (by V.3).° Blood types:—B, Nes, Ry Ro, Py—, Letw—), Fy (at), K—, WET. DANGKONGARUPAINGATI javkati (jabiru); white name DULCIE; b, ¢, 1925; romoved from Allen Island to Aurukun by police in April 1941 (age then estimated ag 14-16 years); living at Aurukun Mission June 1960; not seen, but reported alive by Rev. W. F. MacKenzie; aged c. 35 years; £. W,33 m. X£.95 married Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Avrukun; 2 children, Of.1, Of.3. Wwi.s8. WALKARERING ATI —————-; b. ¢. 19338; d. ¢, 1935 at Minakuri; aed c. 2 years; t, W.4; m, Xf.15, Wo. DALENDURUNGATE riningati (tiger shark); white name JUDY WALPO; b. 15 August 1940 on Allen Island (fide Aurnkun Mission Records); removed to Aurukun by police in April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June 1960; age 19 years 10 months; not married; f, Wt; m, Xf,16, 332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Males of Dolnoro X Xl. Minakuringati —————-; bh, ©, 1855; d. probably before 1900; f. > 2——; married: ; 1 known child, Nf.J, X.2, Minakuringati kulkitji (shark); b. ¢. 1880; a. ¢ 1925, of sickness of stomach at Walkareri; £. } m. ; married 3 wives, Xf.4, Uf2, ¥f.1; 7 children, X4, Xf.11, Xf.13 (hy Xf4), XE (by Ut’), XE,8, Xf.10, X.6, NES (by Y£.1). %.3, Dalwaingati; b, 0, 1885; no record of death but perhaps between 1944 and 1946; f, ; m, ; married Wf, 4 and anothor; 2 children, Xf.12 (by unrecorded wife), X£,20 (by Wrf.4), X4. Birarukingati kulkitji (shark); b. ¢, 1903; d. c. 1936; killed at Dalwa on Albinia Island; aged ¢, 33 years; f. X.2; m, Xft; married X£.12 (widow of ¥.2)3 1 child, XLT. X.5, Minakuringati kulkitji (shark); white tame Shark Koolkitcha, given at Aurukun; b. 0, 1905; removed from Allen Island to Aurukun by polices in April 1941, after killing of a Mornington Island Mission native tamed Cripple Jack; arrived on Mornington Island from Aurukun September 1958; living Tune 1960; age co, 55 years; measured as BI, no, 10; f. X.2; m. UL2; married Xf14; 2 children, X18, Xf.19, X.7- Rev. MacKenzie considers this child ia by an unknown Aurukun man, principally on the ground that X.5 is reputed to have ‘‘castrated’’ himself in 1941 while in’ jail at Cloncurry on trial for the murder of Cripple Jack at Allon Island, In the eyes of a Forsyth Islander this fumily was a model one; the marriage was ‘straight!’ and othera should have ‘‘gove this way’’. Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ro, Py—, Le(n+), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—. X.6. Unggultakarurnki [ugati] —————. (fish); b, ¢. 19155 d. ‘as baby’'; aged ¢. 1 year; f. X.2; m. Yf.1, (The ngati name of thia child probably has becn incorrectly recorded and it may be a totem name.) X.7.'*Kooindoambin’’ (name in Aurukun records) kulkitji (shark); white name Royee; b, 23 October 1950 at Aurukun; arrived on Mornington Tsland September 1953; living June 1960; aga 9 years 8 months; f. ostensibly X,5 (but see note above) ; m, X14. Females of Dolnoro X Xf... BARAKURUNGATI mariwu (oyster pick stone); b. c. 1875; d. after 1910 of poigon- ing from food she had eaten; aged over 35 years; £, X.1; m, not indicated; marricd 8.2; 3 children, Sf.8, 8.10, S£.10, Rf.2. MEANGATT leband (brown fish); b,c, 1880 at Mean = Miant; d. ¢. 1940, of sicknosa at Bilmaru; 4. ; my ; Married T.3; 1 child 1.5 (may have been step- child only of T,3), Xf.3. MOROKONOBAINGATL karnda (bushfire) and tantamant (water spout); karnda was the “‘proper one''; b. ¢, 1880; was shot at. by white man ¢. 1918 but eseaped; diced 1946 or 1947 at Baltae of sickness; aged ¢. 67 years; f, } Me 3 married 8.2; 4 children, 8.8, 8.15, 8.17, S£.17. Xf4, WARANTJINGATY bidjarnpa (dugong); b. ¢, 1883; d. 1947, at Dangkongarupai of sickness; aged c. G4 years; f£. } my 3 Married X.2; 3 children, X4, Xf.11, Xf.13, Xf,5, KUDAURUNGA'TT —————.; b. c. 1883; d. 0, 1928, in the mangroves at Kombali of exposure and cold in south-east trade wind weather; described as having a large growth on left side of her body which stretched down to her feet; this when it grew big, sho supported under her arm; aged ¢, 45 veurs; ff + me : married 8.5; 1 child, Sf,19, Af.6. BADATJINGATT ——————, , oc. 1885, ontside her dolnoro arsa; d, o. 1920, at Kuldangki of sickness; aged #, 35 years; f- ; mM. 5 Married W.2, then her husband’s son, W.3; 1 child, W.4 (by W.2). Ef.7. WARANTJINGATI tantamant (water spout); b, e. 1888; d. o. 1925 at Markaruki; aged c, 37 years; f, } ma, 3 married W.2; 1 child, W.3, TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 333 X£8. MINAKURINGATI kulkilji (shark); white name SUSIE; b. ¢, 1905; arrived on Mornington Island & August 1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 55 years; measured us BL, ny, 82; £. X.2; i. YP.1; married 8.10, 8,19; now a widow; uo children. Blood typesi—O, Nxs, Wy Ry, Py—, Lel(a—), Fyia+), K—, Webb—. X19, KAWULNITRINGATT wardundi (mangrove-dwelling rat); b. ec 110; d. oe, 1930 at Tondot (Dundui); aged « 20 years; f. ae ; married V.3; no children. Nf.10, PAKATTIJLINGATI worobari (bone fish); white namnw SARAH No, 2; b, 6. 1907 at Bakuendja — Pukaitji on Dalwai Island; removed from Allen Island to Aurukuo by police in April 19415 arrived ou Mornington Island September 1953; living June 160 ; age «. 58 yenrs; measured as BI. no, 18; is a very (leaf woman; considered as a widow now; said to have remained ‘‘single all her life’’ although she had had a ohild and ‘helonged’’ to W.8; f. X.2; m, Yf.1; 1 child, Xf44 (father swnluown), Blood typess—O, Nas, By Ry, Py—, Lew), Py(@+), K—, Webb—, Thka~, Xf.11. MINAKURINGATE kulkitji (shark); b. ¢ 1907; d. ¢, 1928 of sioknoss; aged ¢. 21 years; f, X28; m, Xft; married W.8; 1 child, W,6. Mf.12. MINAKURINGATIY bidjarupn (dugong); white same MOLLY BENTINCK given in 1045; bo & 1910; doe 1946 at Dangkankuru, by spearing; £. 3.3; m, ; marvied Y.2, 4; 2 children, Vid (by Y¥.2), Xf.17 (hy Kt). Kf.15. MINAKURINGATY kulkitji (shark); b. ¢ 1912; 4, ec. 1927; aged o. 15 years; not married; f. X.25 m, Xt. Xt14, MINAKTRINGATE walpu (raft), tjariru (flat-tailed slingray) and/or toato (rainbow); white name JEAN TAWDU; b, ¢, 1918; removed from Allen Teland to Aurukun by police April 1941; died 29 April 1953, from sickness and rib injury received in a fight with another woman; aged o, 35 yeara; f. unknown; m. Xf.10; married X.5; 8 children, Xf,18, X#.19, X.7 (see notes under X.5).. XY.15, MOROKONOBAINGAT! walawa (a fish); while nume MOLLY WOLAT, WOOLA or OOLA (as used at, Ancukun); b. 6, 1919 on Dalwai Island; removed from Allan Island to Aurukun by police April 1941; arrived on Mornington Tsland September 1963; living Tune 1960; ago c. 41 years; measured as BI. no, 14; F, X23 m, Yt; married Wit, (hen Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun on 20 February 1946; also had a. child by Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River; 5 children, W£,8, W110, WE9 (by W.4), Of3 (by Robert), O.1 (by Nigel). Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry 2), Py--, Leta), Fya@a+), K—, Wehb—, Jka—. KL16, MEANGATT bidjarupa (dugong); white name |‘OOJTNJINT''; bh, ©, 19205 removed from Allon Island 1941 by police and died at Mornington Island in 1941 from weaknesa after giving birth; her child was taken to the father at Aurulun, 17 September 1941; f. > m ; moarried W,4; 1 child, W.11. : Xf17. MINAKURINGATHI kulkit}i (shark); white name CARMEL; b. ¢. 1936; arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age ¢, 24 years; measured as BI. no, 26; £, X4; m, NF 12; married 8.19, 1.13; 1 child, T.21 (by T.15). Blood typos:—O, Nas, Ra Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(et+), K—, Wabb—, Xf.18. TALIWINDIWURUNGATTI iculkitji (shark); white name ANN OQOLOOKO gor) OOLOBRA; b. lL May 1940 (fide Aurnkun records), on Allen Island; remover to Aurikun April 1941; arrived on Mornington Tsland September 1953; living June 1960; age 20 years L month; not married; f. X.5; m. Xf.14. Xxf.i9, +; white name EMILY; b, 17 Augnst 1943 at Auruknn; d. 7 May 1950 at Aurulkun; aged G years 9 months; f, X.5; am. Xf.14. Xt.20. MINAKTURINGATL banga (tortle); white name ELSTE; b, % July 1945, ostensibly at. Minaluri but netually on Morningtou Island on day mother was taken back to Bentinck Tslimd (after flvst short, visit); returned permanently to Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age 14 years 11 months; measured ag BI. no. 41; f, 3.3; m. Wf. Note: The father was also said to be 8.18, which may sugvest X,3 died before her birth. Blood types:—O, Mss, Ry Ro, Py—, Leta—), Fyis+), K—, Webb—, Jkat. 334 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Xf.21. MINAKURINGATI raerupuda (a fish); white name SYLVIA; b, & May 1947; arrived on Mornington Tsland 21 October 1948 (last child to arrive); living June 1960; age 18 years 1 month; measured as BI_ wo, 42; f. 1.6; m. W£.3 (reason for child being in dolnore X, not yet evident). Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ro, Py, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—, Jks+, Males of Dolnoro Y ¥.1. Tawaringati kulkitji (shark); b. o. 1900; d, o, 1940; killed with spear at Munawurui by 8.8; aged e« 40 years; ‘‘a tall man’’; £, 3 mM, 3; married Wf.4, Wi.5, Uf11; 2 children, Y.5, YG (by WF.4), Y.2. Birarukingati bidjarupa (dugong) and/or Walpu (raft); b, o& 1905; d. « 1945; drowned from a raft in an aecident; syed a 40 yeara (widow claims he was a *‘young’’ man; it is possible that there was also an older man with walpu totem who is confused here); f. ; me ; married Vf4, WH6, Xf12; 3 children, Y,3 (by Vi.4), Yf4 (by WG), V4 (by X£12), also V£3 is probably his daughter (by Sf.14), Y¥.3, Tjodjongatjorongati burantant (bone fish); b. eo. 1988; d. co 1943; “just died’; not married; was dumb from birth; f. Y.2; m, Vf.a. ¥.4, Tawaringati bininj (mullet); white aame Charlie Woollo; b, 2 October 1930 (date us given in Aurukun revords, authority not evident); removed from Allen Tsland to Aurokun by police in April 1941; arrived at Mornington Island 1950; 4. 1950 at Burketown, of encephalitis; not married; aged ¢, 20 years; f. X.4; m. X£12 (reason for dolnoro placing not established), Y.5, Ngarangati banga (turtle) and/or tantamant (waterspout); white name Smilers db. 1935 at Ngara on south side of Bentinek Island; arrived on Mornington Island from Allen Tsand 2 July 1947; d. 10 July 1952; aged c. 17 years; f, Y,1; m. Wf.4; married Tf.13; 1 child, Y£5 (born 13 months after father’s death, but ascribed to him). ¥.§. Birgrukingati tantamant (water spout); white name Billy; b. 1940; arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living Juno 1960; age 20 years; moasured aa BI, no, 14; not married; f. Y.1; m. Wf4, Blood types:—B, “Mss, Ry Rp, Py—, Le(a—), Fylab), K—. Females of Dolnoro V Yt. BIRARUKINGAT! bidjarupa (dugong); b. «. 1885; d. a 1940 3 killed with a spear at Tjiltjadji on south side of Bentinck Island when her daughter X£.15 and daughter’s dangliter W£.8 were taken away to Allen Island hy Wt; £- 3 m. j murried X.2; 4 children, X48, XP10, Xt, X15 (by X.2), Y¥f.2. BIRARURINGATT kulkitji (shark); b, e& I898; d. 1943; killed with spear at Markaruki by 8.16, aided by 8,16; aged o, 45 years; f, > Mm, } Married %4; 4 children, 20.2, 2.8, Bf.5, ZL.6 (by Za). Y¥f.3. BIRARUKINGATI bidjarupa (dugong); white name ANNA; b. 1936; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; living June 1960; age 24 yeurs; mot married; no children; f. 8.5; m, S£,14, (Dolnaro positively identified;’ no explanation for difference trom that of father.) Y£4, DIODJONGATIORO rurupururupu (black fish hawk); white name VALMAE; hb, «, 1940 (was alive on 1 July 1941); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ec, 20 -yenrs; not married; f. Y.2; m, WE; 1 child, Of5 (by Oolin Williams of Lardiil Tribe, Mornington Island), ¥£.5, ————— banga (turtle); white name SYBIL; b. 10 Angust 196% at Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 6 years 10 months; f. supposedly Y.5 but child born 18 months after his death; m, TFf,13, Males of Dolnoro Z ZA. Ngiltalnguti; b, «. 1855; d. e, 1918; shot, by white tman who cama in a boat from Sweera Island; ran away to top of sand hills at Berumoi and died; aged « 63 years; f. ; m. ; 2 known children, Zt, 2,2. TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 335 Z.2. Dodjongapangati korpanggi (butterfiah); b. ¢, 1880; d, ¢. 1930; speared in the throat during a fight on a saltpan at Tjapiluru by V.3; £, 2.1; m. ; Married Tf.4 (widow of 2.3); no children (by 4.2). %.3. Markarukingati; b. ¢. 1890 or earlier; d. ¢, 1928; speared on a saltpan at Tjapiluru; £, 7 My ; married Tf.4; 5 children, T.8 (perhaps his stepchild only), Z.5, Z.7, Z£.3, Zf4 (by TY.4), 2.4, Ngolotalkurunaijarupangati riningati (tiger shark); is said to have left dolnoro 2. and joined Y.; b, c 1892; d, o. 1928; killed at Tjapilurn by 8.7; aged o, 36 years; t; ; m. ; married Y£2; 4 children, Zf.2, Z.8, Zf.5, Zf.6 (all by Yf.2). 2.5. Dodjonapangati; b. «. 1920; d. e, 1946, of sivkness of stomach; f, 3 mH, - married Tt4, widow of Z.38 and Z.2; no children; also had beon promised 67,23, who wags drowned during a raft voyage to Allen Island in 1947, Z.6. Bokanaijarupangati; b, ¢, 1921; d, ¢. 1944; aged c, 23 years; not married; f. 2.3; m. TF4, “7, Ngiltalngati; b. ¢ 1923; d, ¢ 1945; aged ¢, 22 years; not married; with 2,8 was killer of B.9; f. 2.8; m, Tf4, %8. Danitjingath burantant ( y; be ce 1918; d, 1947 (beforo June); killed by 3.8: was killor of Uf10 and jointly with Z.7 killer of 8.9; unmarried; f. 2.45 m. Yt.2. 2.9, Dodjododjongati (Dodjongapangati); b. e 1927; d, 1948 of sickness of stomach; aged ow. 20 years; just before his wife loft the island in October 1948; f. 7 1,——; Wag newly married to T£.7 (widow of U0) when he died; no children, Females of Dolnoro Z Zf.1, BILINAPANGATI bidjarupa (dugong); b. c. 1875; d, o 1925 at Dolkalatji; aged ¢, 50 yoars; f, 41; mm, ; married V.1; 4 vhildren, V,2, Vf.2, V.3, Vi.6 (by V1). 4£.2. TONDOINGATT danuk (shark); white name THELMA; b. 1922; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 38 years; moasured as BL no, 27; f, Z4; m. Yf.2; married unknown, then 8.8, 8.17; 2 children, 02,20 (by 7), S£.28 (by 8.8). Blond types:—O, MNss, Ry Ro, Py-—, Le(a—), Fy(+), K—, Webb—. 28.3. DODJONGAPANGATTI; b, c, 1925; d. ¢, 1942 at Dodjongapa; aged ¢. 16 yaara; not married; f. 243; m Tra, Zf.4. RALTURINGATL djolwaki ( ); white name DULCIE BOOTH; b. ¢. 1928 at Kalturi (in her stepfather’s dolnoro); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 32 years; measured as BI, no, 25; f, Z.d; m. TE4; married S18, received by 8.17 but passed to T.12; 4 children, T£.16, Tf.17, T.20, T?.19; also two stillborn unsexed ehildren, T.16 and T.18, prior to Tf£16, Note: This won, in one place was listed as of dolnoro U, but no check was made. Blood types:—O, MNsa, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—. 21.5. TARUKUNGATI dentjorara (salmon); b. e. 1930; d. o, 1944 of spear wounds inflicted at Parpkaringes cliypan apparently by 8.8; aged o, 14 years; unmarried; ¢, 4.4; m, Y#2. 74.6. DANGKAUKENATIARUPANGATI (also called TIILIRUNGATI) walpu (raft); b. 1987; d. o, 1943; killed with a spear at Markaruki by §.15, shortly before he atrasked and was killed by the R.AA.F. man at Milt; aged o, 6 years; f, ZA; m.. ¥f.2, Male Whose Dolnoro is Unknown and Cannot be Assigned Because of Extra-Tribal Male Parentage 0.1. —————-; white name Russell; b. 23 November 1953 at Mornington Island shortly ufter mother’s urrival from Aurukun; living June 1960; age 6 years 6 months; ft. Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River; m, Xf,16. 336 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Females Whose Dolnoro is Unknown or Cannot be Assigned Because of Extra-tribal Origin of the Male Parent Of.1. —————_NGATI; white name MOLLY; b., c. 1918; arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; d. 13 February 1949, cause of death not given; aged ec, 31 years; f, 3; m. } married 8.18; no children. Of2. MUNUKKA ANJUMBIN (name at Aurukun); white name BEATRICE; b. 10 November 1944; still liying at Aurukun June 1960; age 15 years 6 months; not married; f. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Aurukun; m. Wf.7. O0£f.3. PAMPUTTA pulkududu (crocodile) ; white name ALMA; b, 20 July 1947 at Aurukun; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June 1960; age 14 years 10 months; measured as BI. no. 39; f. Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun; m. X#.15. Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Py(at+), K—, Webb—, Jka+. Of.4. NDORNDORIN ANJUMBIN (name at Aurukun); white name DAWN, in some records incorrectly given as LORNA; b. 6 May 1948 at Aurukun; still living at Aurukun June 1960; age 12 years 1 month; f. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Aurukun; m, W4.7, Of.5. —————— warung (goana); white name BETTY; b. 8 October 1958 at Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 1 year 7 months; f. Colin Williams, fullblood of Lardiil tribe, Mornington Island; m. Yf.4. Persons who are not Kaiadilt, who have Married, or have had Marital Relationship with them Extratribal 1. Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun; b. 3 d. October 1948; married Xf.15 on 20 February 1946 at Aurukun; 1 child, Of.3 (by Xf.15). Extratribal 2. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Aurukun; b. ; living June 1960 at Aurukun; f. ; In. ; married Wf.7; 2 children, Of.2 and Of4 (by WE.7). Extratribal 3. Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River, Queensland; b. ; living June 1960 at Aurukun; 1 child, 0.1 (by Xf.5). Eixtratribal 4. Colin Williams; Lardiil tribe of Mornington Island; b. at Mornington Island; 1 child, Of.5 (by Yf.4). Extratribal 5. IDA; Lardiil tribe of Mornington Island; b. ;_ living at Mornington Island June 1960; f. } my, } 1 child, Uf.23 (by U.15), ; living June 1960 AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES OF THE GENUS CINCLOSOMA By H. T. CONDON, CURATOR OF BIRDS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary Quail-thrushes are a small Australian genus of Passerine birds (Family Timaltidae), of problematical affinities. The different species occur in a variety of habitats on the Australian continent, from the stony plains (gibber deserts) and semi-arid shrub communities of the interior to the drier woodlands and sclerophyll forests of the eastern coastal regions and Tasmania. Apparently in the early days of European settlement they were extremely numerous in certain places, but during the last one hundred years many forms have been extirpated from the more closely settled areas and wheat-growing districts in several States; others are now threatened by expanding economic development and habitat losses in all parts of the continent. Outside Australia the genus is represented by a single species in New Guinea, where it is widespread in the lowland forests (fig. 1). AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES OF THE GENUS CINCLOSOMA By H. T. CONDON, Curator or Binns, Sourn Avustratian Musrum Plates 12-13 and text fig. 1-4 CONTENTS Page Introduction and acknowledgments .. .. .. .. 337 The Genus Cinclosoma Vigors and Horsfield TS2D cg ase to Re ot eee ae be be fe oy SRO The number of Species .. .. .. .. 2. ss ss) O44 Sexual differences . .. 6... 6. ee ee ee ee ee B46 Key to the Species .. .. .. .. «2... we ee. = B49 Systematic treatment .. .. .. ........ .. 380 Literature cited .. .. 2. 6. 0. ee ee ee ee ee = 868 INTRODUCTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Quail-thrushes are a small Australian genus of Passerine birds (Family Timaliidae), of problematical affinities. The different species occur in a variety of habitats on the Australian continent, from the stony plains (gibber deserts) and semi-arid shrub communities of the interior to the drier woodlands and sclerophyll forests of the eastern coastal regions and Tasmania. Apparently in the early days of European settlement they were extremely numerous in certain places, but during the last one hundred years many forms have heen extirpated from the more closely settled areas and wheat-growing districts in several States; others are now threatened by expanding economic development and habitat losses in all parts of the continent. Outside Australia the genus is represented by a single species in New Guinea, where it is widespread in the lowland forests (fig. 1). The quail-thrushes frequently are referred to as ground-thrushes, groundbirds, ‘‘rail babblers’’ (Gilliard, 1958) or ‘‘ground doves’’ (in Tasmania). The Australian forms have been the subject of a careful study by A, J. and A. G. Campbell (1926). Unfortunately, no one museum RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The known limits, in Australia, Tasmania and New Guinea, are shown in black, la is a South Australian isolate of! Spotted Quail- Thrush (Cinclosoma punctatum). There are four described subspecies of the New Guinea Quail-Thrush (Cinclosoma ajax), whieh is confined to lowland forests: a—ajaz; b—muscalis; c—alaris; d—goldei (after Mayr, 1941). Fig. 1. Distribution of the genus Cinclosoma. CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUATL-THRUSHES 339 possesses a representative series of all the known forms, among which are some of the rarest of birds. It is not surprising, therefore, that opinions are divided and much bewilderment exists regarding the taxonomy and nomenclature of the genus. Some consider that the work of the Campbells was imdecisive (they refrained from using trinomials) and certain contradictory proposals have been put forward by G. M. Mathews and other writers. However, numerous specimens of the different forms have been taken during the last twenty-five years [rom new localities and a good deal more is now known, than formerly, about distribution and the morphological differences between the species. The principal aim of this contribution ig to add to the series of revisions of the genera of Australian birds, which have been com- menced by Mayr, Serventy, Amadon, Keast, the author, and others (see Keast, 1961). To this end the writer has re-examined nearly all the specimens which were deseribed in great detail by the Campbells (loc, cit.) and ean vouch for the accuracy of their work, Fresh material hag been compared in the museums in Adelaide, Brishane, Melbourne, Perth and Sydney. Dr, Ernst Mayr has kindly supplied comments and measurements of specimens in the American Mnsenm of Natural History and Dr, Allen Keast generously has made available his notes on the same collection, together with some details of speci- mens in the British Museum, Other information and comments have been received from Dr, D. L. Serventy and Messrs. N. J. Favaloro, W. B, Hitcheock, N. Jack, J. Jones, A. R. MeGill, A. R. McEvey and G, Mack, to all of whom thanks are due. The eonelusions reached in the text which follows are the writer’s own, . Throat and upper breast black . - . Breast grey, a large white iialae patch . . Breast rufous, a white malar stripe extending from near the gape . . A whitish band on the fotelieck: ‘which vontanelien the black of the throat and wea h breast Ager text) . Foreneck black . . Sides of breast grey, pte malar tripe ere Bt UH Sides of breast chestnut, an enlarged white malar BUTIPC eb orneligs Se thle aps, Sos . Superciliary stripe white .. .. .. 2... .- 4. Superciliary stripe buff . Females (the throat is never black), . Coloration of throat and malar region uniform Malar region distinct from throat .. . Throat and malar region white .. Wok os Throat and malar region orange-buff .. .... .. . Breast grey; a large orange-buff malar patch .. Breast grey; a malar ating extending from near the gape... ........ Je PERG Su . Throat pale; malar sting orange- “buff: Hrenat fawn grey . by) a ye Throat same shade as s breast, ‘prey . . A white malar stripe .. .. ~ wifi ats An enlarged white malar stripe obn+ ; Superciliary stripe buffy-white ; Lreast ‘deap cinnamon .. .. Superciliary stripe pale orange-buft breast pale brown... .. .. 349 ajax punctatum 6 cinnamomeum 5 castanotum alisteri marginatum castaneothorax ar why) punctatum 4 cunmamomeum 5 castanotum. alistert mar ginatum castaneothoraa 350 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM SYSTEMATIC TREATMENT 1. Cinclosoma punctatum (Shaw) 1795 (Spotted Quail-Thrush) The Spotted Quail-Thrush is a denizen of the drier sclerophyll forests of the highlands of eastern and southern Australia and Tasmania (fig. 2). Tt is a declining species which has been wiped out in many districts following the destruction of its natural habitat. A set of two eggs in the South Australian Musemn (Malcolm Murray collection), labelled ‘near Mt, Gambier, Dr. Morgan, November 11, 1898”, is the only evidence that the species may have once occurred in that part of South Australia, In the sonthern Mount Lofty Ranges the Spotted Quail-Thrush, unlike much of the indigenous faina, has found a temporary haven in some of the government-owned pine forests, where its future is uncertain, But wherever the native vegetation remains undisturbed the birds occur in fair numbers and there is little doubt that they were very numerous in the early days of settlement. on the mainland as well as Tasmania, where they were often killed for food. The species shares with ©. ajax, of New Guinea, the distinction of having flesh-colonred or pale brown legs and feet. Judging from the eggs, the nesting record of C. custaneothorax from Gladstone, Queensland by Barnard (1900), should be referred here. The Spotted Quail-Thrush is ‘‘still a well-known bird on the Darling Downs’? (A, C, Cameron, in litt., January, 1962). (a) Cinclosoma punctatum punctatum (Shaw) 1795 Turdus punctatum Shaw 1795. Zool. Nov, Holl., 3, pl. 9. New South Wales, Synonym; neglectum Mathews 1912. Frankston, Victoria. Range: Southern Queensland from Gladstone (?), Bunya Moun- tains and the Brisbane area south to coastal New South Wales (as far inland as Grenfell) and Vietoria (north to beyond Bendigo) and westwards towards the Glenelg River district in suitable localities; extinef in many districts. In South Australia, confined to parts of the Mount Lofty Ranges; probably extinet in the Mount Gambier district. Not on Kangaroo Island. Diagnosis: Grey breast band margined with black in male only. General coloration and size variable and similar to the Tasmanian form, Wing—Males, 111-112 (Queensland), 113-120 (New South Wales), 103-115 (Victoria), 105, 114 (South Australia) ; females, 108- CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 351 111 (Queensland), 104-115 (New Sonth Wales), 106, 112 (Vietoria), 102-111 (South Australia). arsus—30, Bill—16-17 mm. Bill black, iris grey, legs and feet pale brown (male); bill black, iris grey with a tinge of lilac, inside mouth orange, legs and feet pale brown (female), Judging from variation in wing measurements, which is probably elinal, the largest birds of both sexes come from New South Wales. Tt hag not been established that the members of the relict Mount Lofty population are smaller than those from Victoria, as suggested by Campbell (1926), but it is thought that they may differ in having more grey on the wings. Mathews (1912) introduced the name neglectum for Victorian birds, saying ‘differs from C. p. pumctatum in its darker coloration, but paler than C. p, dovei’’, According to Hartert (1931), the type was an adult female from Frankston, Vietoria, taken on March 13, 1909. The name negleclum was dropped by its author from his Working List (1946) and hag been rejected by most other workers, Localilies: (see fig. 2, Nos. 1-38). 1. Sydney (type locality; 2. Port Hacking and National Park area; 3. Colo River; 4. Lithgow; 5. Lake Wallis area; 6, Barrington Tops; 7. Cobbora; 8, Wellington district; 9. Grenfell; 10, Upper reaches of Macleay River; 11. Copmanhurst (North, 1904, p. 325); 12. Emu Vale and Warwick (specimens, American Museum); 18. Brisbane (specimens, Queens- land Museum); 14. Darling Downs (eggs, Wmu, p. 63); 15, Bunya Mountains (specimens, American Museum); 16, Gladstone (Barnard, 1900); 17. Goulburn-Braidwood district; 18. Bega district; 19. Wonboyn (Favaloro); 20, Buffalo Mountains; 21 Mallacoota (S. A, White); 22. Marlo (Bryant); 23. Wilson Promontory; 24. Mornington Peninsula (Frankston) (type locality, neglectum. Mathews); 25. Gippsland; 26, Lang Lang; 27, Miteham-Ringwood area; 28. Anglesea (Purnell, Emu, 15: 41); 29. neat Geelong; 30, Ballarat (specimen); 31. Gisborne- Macedon area; 32. Castlemaine; 33, North of Bendigo (Hitcheoek, pers. comm,); 34, Pyrenees Mountains, near Ararat; 35. Grampians; 36. Hotapur; 37. Mount Gambier (eggs, South Australian Museum) ; 38. Mount Lofty Ranges, Other localities not shown on map: New South Wales:— Between Bermagui and Tathra (Edwards) ; Lockwood; Mount Irvine; Wolgan (specimens). Victoria:—A. Gippsland and eastern Victoria; north of Buchan (specimen); Deddich road, near Gelantipy (speci- men); Drouin (Batey); Glenarona; Hazelwood (specimens); Monnt 352 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Cobbler, 4,500 feet (Cole); Mount ‘William, near Lancefield (Batey); Merriman Creek (Ingle); Nyora; Reeves Riyer; Tambo River (specimens); Tanjil River and Ranges (Mord); Sheep Station Point, Gippsland lakes; Yinnar (specimens). B. West and north of Melbourne :—Dog Rocks, near Geelong (Hill); Toolern Vale (30 miles west of Melbourne) (Campbell); You Yangs (Bird Observers Club). South Australia (Mount Lofty Ranges): near Adelaide; Amble- side; Basket Range; Belair; Blackwood; Blakiston; Bridgewater; Cape Jervis; Chain-of-Ponds; Hden Hills; Eneounter Bay; Kuitpo; Lobethal; Meadows; Mitcham; Mount Lofty; Teatree Gully; Upper Sturt; Uraidla (specimens and/or observations in each case), (b) Cinclosoma punctatum dover Mathews 1912 Cinclosoma punctatum dovei Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p. 330. Tasmania, Range: Tasmania. Diagnosis; The male differs from the mainland bird in being, usually, more greyish on the head and back. There is a black margin to the grey breast band in both sexes. The ahdomen, in females, is pure white. Wing—‘‘Males, 107-111; females, 102, 109’’ (EK. Mayr). Tarsus—31. Bill—16 mm. Some of the differences to be found in Tasmanian birds were first recognived by Campbell (1926) and they have been confirmed by examination of material in the Mathews collection in New York by Drs. Mayr and Keast. Ag pointed out by Hartert (1931), in size dower falls within the range of the mainland form. Referring to Mathews’ description of the type (‘*smaller and darker’’), Hartert notes that it has no original label and that a second specimen in Mathews’ collection is not ‘darker’? than mainland examples, Actually, plumage coloration is variable, some birds being more greyish above than others. Also the throat of the female may be either mottled greyish or buff y-white. Howe (1931) stated that the eggs of Tasmanian birds are ‘‘rather larger’? than those from the mainland; also that the clutch “often”? consists of three or four eggs, perhaps even five. Campbell (1900) referred to reports of large elutch sizes; see also Littler (1910). Sharland (1958), who gives the clutch size as two to three, considers that the Spotted Quail-Thrush is ‘‘a diminishing species in southern Tasmania and does vot appear to be common anywhere” for which he blames the domestic cat, Littler (1910) says ‘*. , . in no locality is CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 353 it as plentiful as it was before the country was opened up. . . *?, when it was ‘‘extremely plentiful’? and sold in the markets as a food delicacy. Localities: (not shown on map, fig. 2). Cullenswood; Freycinet Peninsula; Hobart; Mount Wellington; Sandford; Wilmot; near Koonya and Impression Bay. 92, Cinclosoma castanotum Gould 1840 (Chestnut Quail-Thrush) The Chestnut Quail-Thrush, which is confined to the southern half of Australia, is the most widely-distributed of all the species of Cinclosoma (fig. 3) and shows the greatest geographical divergence. Tt does not occur in localities with an annual rainfall of more than 30 inches. In the northern parts of its range the natural habitat is arid scrub, with eucalypts in the minority, whilst in the south the habitat is semi-arid or sclerophyll mallee, with Eucalyptus species predominating. Pam pos Tae Fig. 3. Distribution of Chestnut Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castanotwm. The subspecies are: a-—castanotum; b—mayri; ¢c—morgani; d—dundast; e—clarwm. Stippled areas — probable range, from which no specimens have been taken. Note that C, ¢, clarum over- laps the geographical range of C. cinnamomeum (cf. fig. 4). x = subsp. (7) (Parsons, 21); y = subsp, (7) (Keast, pers. comm., 1959), 354 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Keast (pers. comm.) observed the Chestnut Quail-Thrush at Nymagee (fig. 2, No, 47; fig. 3, y) near the northernmost extension of the mallee in New South Wales, but failed to obtain a specimen. Like the preceding species, Cinclosoma castanotum has been driven from much of its former habitat in the wheat-growing districts and its range and numbers must continue to diminish. The following subspecies, some of which are isolates, may be distinguished : A, Dark chestnut rump in male (greatly reduced or absent in female) : (a) Size small, general coloration olive brown castanotum (b) Size larger, general coloration darker... mayri nov, B. Chestnut rump brighter and more extensive: (¢) Coloration of rump equally developed in both sexes .. 2... wo ve ve we we ee es) morgani (d) Coloration of rump reduced or absent in females... 0. 6. eee ee ce we eee Cundasi (¢) Back, seapwlars, rump and portion of upper tail coverts light chestnut and eqnally developed in both sexes... .. ,, .. .. olarum (a) Cinclosoma castanotum castanotum Gould 1840 Cinclosoma castanotum Gould 1840. Birds Austr., part 1, Dee. 1. Belts of the Murray, South Australia, Range: Semi-arid Mallee districts of south-eastern South Aus- tralia (as far north as Leigh Creek) and adjacent parts of New South Wales (east to about Mossgiel) and north-western Victoria (south to Tronbark Ranges) (Howe, 1909), and south of Ararat (Hill, 1907), Diagnosis; Olive brown above (greyish) with a dark chestnut band (40 mm, maximum width) restricted to the rump in males and absent or greatly reduced in females and young birds. Flanks brown. Kar coyerts olive brown, Measurements: Wing—Males, 98-105; females, 95-103, ‘Tail— Males, 94-99; females, 95-98, Tarsus—28. Bill—13-16 mm. Gould’s cotypes, which are housed in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, were obtained east of the Mount Lofty high- lands in Mallee scrub near the River Murray in the direction of Morgan, De Schauensee (1957) says ‘‘Gould’s plate shows a male and a female, the male being a particularly richly coloured individual, CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 355 with which the type agrees’, He gives the following measurements: ‘Adult male, wing 105, tail 94; adult female, wing 98; culmen 16". Campbells’ description (1926) of a male from Karoonda, South Australia (B516), which they eall a ‘‘plesiotype’’, fits most individuals of this race, A specimen in the Australian Museum, Sydney (0.18077) bears the label ‘‘ Adelaide, 1864°’, which is questionable. Localities: (see fig, 2, Nos, 39-46). 39, Belts of the Murray River (type locality); 40. Chauney’s Line; 41. Pinnaroo area; 42. Mossgiel; 43. Ouyen; 44. near Ararat (Hmu, 44: 190) ; 45. Oodlawirra; Leigh Creck (specimens). Other localities, not shown on map:—Victoria—Antwerp (near Jeparit; between Hattah and Kulkyne; lronbark Ranges (near Stawell) (Emu, 8: 135); Kow Plains; Lake Boga; Nhill; Panitya; Pine Plains; Red Cliffs; Turriff; Wyperfield. South Australia—Alawoona; Bowhill (specimen); Copley; Flinders Ranges near Lake Frome (8. Austr, Orn., 4: 73); Loxton; between Murray Bridge and Karoonda (ibid., 10: 32); Mannum; Paringa; Patsy Springs (Copley) (eggs); Renmark area ( thid., + 72); Sutherlands; Taplan; between Truro and Blanchetown; Turner Well. (b) Cinclosoma castanotum mayri subsp. nov. Type locality; 20 miles south of Rankin Springs, New South Wales. ‘ype: Australian Museum No. O 39745; adult male. Allo- type: Australian Museum No, O 39688; adult female. Diagnosis: Larger and darker than the nominate form, Adult male :—Crown, ear coverts and dorsal surfaces olive brown, without a greyish tinge; chestnut rump 47 mm. wide (against 40 mm, in castanolum); white malar stripe 40 mm, long (against 30 mm. in castanotum); extent of black from chin to lower breast 80 mm, (in castanotum this does not exceed 52 mm.). Flanks reddish brown. Wing, 107; tail, 112; tarsus, 31; bill, 17 mm. ‘Gonads developing; no surplus fat; stomach contents seeds and insect remains”’ (collector's label), Fresh plumage. Collector, J. A, Keast, September 15, 1957. Adult female:—Large. Dorsal coloration similar to male, except for rump, which is tinged with dark chestnut only; malar stripe well developed. Wing, 100; tail, 99; tarsus, 30; bill, 16 mm. ‘‘Stomach. contents, seeds.”? Fresh plumage. Collector, H. J. Frith, April 8, 1955, Locality, 27 miles north of Griffith, New South Wales. 356 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM The presence of the Chestnut Quail-Thrush in some scattered belts of Mallee serub in the Murrumbidgee Irrigation area of New South Wales has long been known (Fimerson and Gannon, 1934; Chisholm, 1938), Rather surprisingly, specimens collected have proved to be almost as large in body size as the Spotted Quail-Thrush; the population is, of course, an isolate, Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 48-51), 48, Rankin Springs (type locality) ; 49. Griffith; 50. Barellan (Zmu, 37: 307); Leeton (ibid. 22: 311). Also 36 miles north of Narrandera (Chisholm), (c) Cinclosoma castanotum morgani Condon 1951 Cinclosoma castanotum morgani Condon 1951. 8. Austr. Orn., 20, p. 42, 18m, north-west of Kimba, South Australia, Fange: Kyre Peninsula, South Anstralia, Probably extinet in many localities. Diagnosis: Upper back (mantle) olive brown, Tower back, rump and portion of the upper tail coverts bright chestnut and equally developed in both sexes. Har coverts olive brown. Wing—Males, 102, 105; females, 92, 97. Bill, 18. Tarsus, 30 mm, In size and coloration this geographical variant, which is mentioned by Campbell (1926) and Morgan (1926), is intermediate between clarum and nominate castanotum. Like clarum, it is exceptional in having the male and female similarly coloured on the upper surface, but the chestnut on the back is less extensive (47 mm, wide). The type, a breeding male, is in the South Australian Museum (No, B 5673). Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 52-53). 52. 18 m. north-west of Kimba (type locality); Gawler Ranges area (specimens), (d) Cinclosoma castanotum dundasi Mathews 1912 Cinclosoma castanotum dundasi Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p, 830. Lake Dundas, Western Australia. Range; South-western Australia (‘‘north to the mulga-eucalypt line . . . but excluding the heavy forested area’? (Serventy and Whittell, 1951). Probably extinct in a number of localities. Diagnosis: The male resembles morgani, with the chestnut rump about 47 mm. wide, but differs in having a shorter bill and longer tarsus, Female is dull-coloured, the rump being either tinged with chestnut (in the more easterly parts of the range) or plain. Ear CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 357 coverts olive brown. Wing—Males, 97-101; females, 95-99. Tarsus, é4. Bill, 12-L5 mm, The type, which is in the Mathews collection, was collected by FE. L. Whitlock, at an altitude of 850 feet, on July 16, 1905; Mathews’ figure (1921, pl. 424) is hardly reeognizable. A topotypieal male, taken by Dr. D. L. Serventy at a place 10 miles south of Widgiemooltha, near Lake Dundas, on March 22, 1937, has been examined. Details of specimen; ‘Iris, port-wine red; feet lead grey, Length, 250; head 47; wing 98; tail 105 mm.’’ (Serventy/Whittell collection, No. 746), Most authors accept dundasi; some have suggested that clarum (below) should be included with it. Further collecting in the western part of its range may show clinal differences with the trend, in the western parts of the range, towards a darker chestnut rump, The habitat is mainly semi-arid scrub (Mallee), but it may include areas of temperate woodland, Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 68-79), 68. North of Southern Cross; 69. Lake Dundas (type locality); 70. near Norseman; 71, Widgie- mooltha (specimens); 72. Coolvardie (Mmu, 27: 180); 73, 80 m. east of Kalvoorlie (ibid., 10: 70); 74. near Nullarbor Plain; 75, Parker Range; Dwaladine; Woyaline (Ibis, 3 (ser. 9): 683) (specimens); 76, Wongan Hills; 77, Broome Hill; 7% Cranbrook; 79, Albany (specimens). Specimens from other localities not shown on map:—Gracefield; Woryantilla; Mongup (Salt River); 53 m. from Fremantle (on York road) (Gould), (e) Cinclesoma castanotum clarum Morgan 1926 Cinclosoma. castanotum clarum Morgan 1926, 8S, Austr, Orn, 8. p. 188. Wipipippee rocks, near Lake Gairdner, South Australia. Range: From the MacDonnell Ranges, Northern Territory west- wards to Separation Well, Callion, and north of Kalgoorlie, Western Australia; Mnsgrave and Everard Ranges south to about Lake Gairdner, South Australia. Diagnosis: The most brightly coloured of all the forms of eastanotum, The back, scapulars, rump, and portion of the upper tail eoverts are light chestnut (‘burnt sienna’’) in both sexes, The white tips of the wing coverts are enlarged. Har coverts blackish in the male. Examples from the northern parts of the range are more tawny on the flanks. Wing—Males, 98-102; females, 97-102, Tarsus, 30. Bill, 19 mm, hb 358 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Specimens of clarwm have now been taken from such widely separated localities as Lake Gairdner, Everard and Maedonnell Ranges and north of Kalgoorlie, There is a specimen in the Australian Museum which was collected by the Horn Expedition at Deering Creek, Northern Territory and another, a female, from Callion, Western Australia in the Queensland Mnseum (No, 06768). A further skin, from near Ooldea is contained in the National Museum of Victoria (No. R9574). The type, a male, was collected by Dr, A, M. Morgan at a spot about 5 miles east of the southern end of Lake Gairdner on August 17, 1905; it is housed in the South Aostralian Musenm, No. B77065. An adult pair was taken by RB. Williams at a place between the Musgrave and Everard Ranges, South Australia, in September, 1926, Other records which ean he referred to clarwn are from Hdward Creek (Simpson, 1983), Myrtle Springs, South Australia (Cain, 1935) and near Separation Well, North-west Australia (eartland, in North, 1909), Whitlock (1910), knowing nothing of this rufous form of C@. castanotum, which was not described until sixteen years later, suggested that Keartland met with C. marginatum, not C, castanotum, at Separation Well. However, althongh the latter’s specimens were lost before he returned to civilization, there is no reason to doubt his identification. Females should not be confused with those of any other desert species; the foreneck and throat, as in all forms of C. castanotum, ig grey, The habitat of clarwm differs from that of other subspecies of C. castanolum, being an arid Mulga serub formation, rather than Mallee. In northern Sonth Australia, the range of clarwm overlaps that of the Cinnamon Quail-Thrush (see figs, 3, 4), but the latter is restricted mainly to open stony (gibber) coutitry and in the strietest sense should not be regarded as sympatric with clarwm, In Western Anstralia the vanges of clarum and marginatum are probably con- tiguous, and, depending on the nature of the terrain and vegetation, the occurrence of the former may be limited to ‘‘pockets’’ of trees and taller shrubs within the central desert areas of Western Australia from which, as yet, no member of the genus has been collected or reported, Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 54-67), South Australia, 54, Wipipippes Roeks (type locality); 55, near Ceduna (S. Austr. Orn., 9; 144) ; 55. Ooldea (specimen) ; 57. Myrtle Springs (S, Austr. Orn., 13: CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 359 10) ; 58. Hdward Creek (ibid., 12: 129); 59. Everard Ranges (ibid., 17: 6); 60. Officer Creek (eggs) (Mmu, 15: 35); 61. between Musgrave and Mann Ranges (specimens); 62. Hermannsburg (Horn Expedition) ; Deering Creek (specimen) (Horn Expedition). Western Australia. 64, Separation Well (Trans. Roy Soc. S. Austr., 22: 180); 65. near Menzies (North, 1: 326); 66. north of Kalgoorlie (specimen). Queensland. 67. Diamantina Gates (identity uncertain (Parsons, S, Austr. Orn., 6: 20), 3. Cinclosoma alisteri Mathews 1910 (Nullarbor Quail-Thrush) Cinclosoma alisteri Mathews 1910. Bull. Brit, Orn. Cl., 27, p. 160. Waddilinia, Nullarbor Plain, Western Australia. Synonym: nullarborensis Campbell 1922. Haig and Naretha, Western Australia, Range: Nullarbor Plain, Western and South Australia (fig. 4). Fig. 4. Distribution of the arid species of Cinclosoma. 3, Nullarbor Quail-Thrush, ©, alisterit, which is confined to the shrub steppe region known as the Nullarbor Plain; 4, Cinnamon Quail-Thrush, 0. cianamomewm, in the areas of lowest rainfall, the environ- ment being arid grasslands and stony (gibber) deserts; 5, Western Qail-Thrush, C. marginatum, in a region isolated from the other forms; 6, Chestnut-breasted Quail- Thrush, C, castaneothorar, which lives in open scrublands, Note that all, except the last-named, are contained within the 10-inch annual isohyet. 360 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Diagnosis; The entire upper surfaces, including the central rectrices, are rich rufous (‘tauburn’’ or ‘‘russet’’) in the adult male, which has the ear coverts, throat, and breast black. The adult female is duller rufous on the head and back, the superciliary and malar stripes are whitish, and the ear coverts, throat, and breast are grey. In both sexes the under tail coverts are buff, spotted with dark brown. duvenals are dull rufous above and the feathers of the breast have dusky or blackish edgings which become more intense with age, in males, Measurements: Wing—Male, 81-92; male juv., 78; female, 85, 86. Tarsus—Male, 28; juv., 24; female, 25. Bill—16 (adult); 14 mm, (male juv.). The Nullarbor Quail-Thrush is a rarity in collections. There is a small series, of about seven skins, in the H. L. White collection (National Museum of Victoria), two skins in the Australian Museum, Sydney, and three males in the Mathews collection (American Museum of Natural History). There are no specimens in the South Australian Museum. It is worth while emphasizing that C. alistert, which has no subspecies, is a much deeper rufous bird than C. cimnamomeum, with the markings of the throat and breast, in both sexes, more as in Cc. castanotum. Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 80-85). 80. Waddilinia (type locality) ; 81, Haig (type of nullarborensis Campbell) ; 82. Loongana; 83. Forrest; 84, 40 miles S.W. of Cook (eggs); 85. Ooldea, Not shown on map:— Naretlia. 4. Cinclosoma cinnamomeum Gould 1846 (Cinnamon Quail-Thrush) ‘he Cinnamon Quail-Thrush lives in the stony (gibber) deserts and sandhill country of Central Australia, where the annual rainfall is less than 10 inches (fig. 4), The geographical range extends further north and south than shown in the map by Campbell (1926). This is a variable species, both in size and coloration, and two subspecies muy be recognized. (a) Cinclosoma cinnamomeum cinnamomeum Gould 1846 Cinclosoma cinnamomeum Gould 1846. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, p. 68. Sturt’s Depot, north-western New South Wales. CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 361 Synonym: todmordeni Mathews, 1923. Todmorden, South Australia. Range: Wastern desert regions of lower Northern Territory (extending to just above the Tropic of Capricorn) far south-western Queensland, far north-western corner of New South Wales, and northern South Anstralia south to about Lake Torrens, Lake Frome and the vicinity of Leigh Creek, Diagnosis: Larger in body-size (not shown by wing and tail measurements), Head more greyish than the back; ear coverts dark greyish brown. Wing—Males, 85-90; females, 81-87. Tarsus, 28, Bill, 16 mm. Females are usually paler than males with the wing coverts brownish black with prominent white tips. The [female figured by Mathews (1921, pl. 426) is a apecimen from uear the Macumba River, South Australia, Young birds have the feathers edged with black, forming crescents, especially on the under surface. Abrasion causes gome variation in the plumage pattern of males, Birds from near the centre of the range, separated as fodmordeni ty Mathews, are often palest (cansed by fading and wear), but light and dark individuals have been examined from the same locality. Specimens from Todmorden, Oodnadatta, Birdsville and Lake Frome are indistingush- able in most. instances, Of special interest is a specimen taken for the Northern Territory Administration by Mr. W. B. Hitchcock, on May 9, 1955; the locality was ‘19 miles east of Cockroach W-IL, Jervois 8. R.’*. The specimen, an immature male, is temporarily housed in the National Museum of Victoria, Details from the colleetor’s label are:—** Male, skull n-f.o.; irig warm sepia; moult-legs; humeral (slight). On road and on stony ground in Acacia georginae and Cassia sp. community’’. This represents the northernmost record of the genus in Australia, although previously (1949), the late L, J. Hillis took a set of two eggs of a species he was unable to identify in rocky country in the Jervois Ranee, Northern Territory, at a spot south-west of Cockroach W.H. Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 86-104). 86. Sturt Depot (type locality); 87. Monnt Arrowsmith; 88. Lake Baneannia; 89. west of Wileannia; 90, west of Paroo River; 91. Naryileo Station; 92. Lake Frome; 93. Leigh Creek; 94. north of Marree; 95. Murturee, Strzeleckt Creek; 96. Mirramitta; 97, Blood’s Creek; 98. Todmorden (type locality of fodmordent); 99. near Oodnadatta; 100. Horseshoe Beud; 101, Crown Point; 102, near Hermanusburg; 103, Jervois Range; 103A. 19 m. BH. of Cockroach W.H., Jervois S.R. (Hitchcock) ; 104, Ooldea (specimen). 362 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM (b) Cinclosoma cinnamomeum samueli (Mathews) 1916 Samuela cinnamomea samueli Mathews 1916. Austral Av. Rec., 3, p. 60. Gawler Ranges, South Australia. Range: South-west of Lake Eyre, extending through Stuart Range to Ooldea and the Gawler Ranges. Diagnosis: Cinnamon coloration brighter and more intense; the crown and ear coverts have a rufous wash and the amount of white on the band separating the black breast and throat is somewhat reduced. Wing—Males, 85-90; females, 80-85. Tarsus, 27. Bill, 15 mm. It has not been possible to determine exactly the northern limits of samuelt, Probably it does not extend beyond a line drawn from Stuart Range to the northern shores of Lake Torrens. The type, a male in the Mathews collection, came from Sandford’s paddock, a holding in the Gawler Ranges; it was taken on September 3, 1912, by S. A. White. Hartert (1931) correctly points out that this form has nothing to do with the North-western Australian form C. marginatwm, which Mathews calls ‘‘nea’’ in his 1931 List. Samueli can be distinguished by its small body size and greater amount of rufous coloration on the crown and ear coverts; it can in no way be confused with castaneothorax, from Queensland, with which Hartert was inclined to unite it. Material examined suggests that females may have more grey on the throat than those of the nominate form, but occasional examples are met with the throat pale buffy white. The general coloration, in both sexes, is more rufous, or of a deeper shade, than in the northern race, not ‘‘paler’’ as stated by Mathews, whose type was ‘‘very worn and in poor condition’’ (Hartert, loc. cit.). Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 105-107). 105. Mount Eba; 106. Stuart Range; 107. Gawler Ranges (type locality of samuelt). 5. Cinclosoma marginatum Sharpe 1883 (Western Quail-Thrush) The Western Quail-Thrush occupies the Mulga serubs of the huge pastoral area of North-western Australia, its range, so far as known, extending from just north of the Tropic of Capricorn southwards to the agricultural areas and eastwards towards the sand dune desert country where hummock-forming xeromorphic grasses (Triodia, etc.) predominate (fig. 4, No. 5). CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 363 Much confusion has arisen regarding the correct name for this form of Cinclosoma following Mathews’ decision (1927) to treat O. marginatum and CG. cinnamomeum as conspecific, Previously the former had been combined with GC. castaneothorar (see Australian Oficial Checklist, 1926), Making an erroneous assumption, Mathews suppressed the name marginatum Sharpe and substituted for it instead one of his earlier names, vea. He argued, correctly, that, Mlsey, whom Sharpe had named as the collector of the type of C. marginatum, had never heen in Western Australia and then went on to propose ‘‘North- west New South Wales’? as the type locality for C. marginatum. In doing so, he ignored an entry in the British Museum register which stated that Sharpe's type was ‘‘from an Australian Expedition, probably Mr. Austin’s, W. Anstr.’’. Robert Austin was a surveyor who arrived in Western Australia in 1840, Four years later he made a trip via lakes Coweowimg and Austin to the upper reaches of the Mnrehison and then proceeded to Geraldton. The route of this expedition is shown ou early published maps of Western Australia (¢.g., Philip's Handy General Atlas of the World, 1882). Austin returned with a small collection of bird skins for the British Museum. Among them were two skins of Cinclosoma, eolleeted in the vicinity of Mount Kenneth, 70 miles south of Mount Magnet (Whittell, 1954); the type locality of Sharpe’s C, margimatum shonld be amended accordingly. The inland form of C, marginatum is smaller and paler than the bird deserihed by Sharpe, and Mathews’ name, wea, is available for it. Unfortunately, Hartert (1981) treated nea as a form of C, cinnanomeum and the true situation has been further obscured by Whittell and Serventy (1948), who have rejected both marginatum and nea, employing instead the naine castancothorax (type locality “Sonth Qneensland’’?) as a subspecifie designation in combination with Cinelosoma cinnamomeum for birds from North-western Anstralia. This eourse hag reeently beeu followed by Lindgren (1961) whose reference to the ‘(Cinnamon Qnail-Thrush’’ at Jigalong (Lat. 23 deg. 24 min. 8. Long, 120 deg. 46 nin. M1.) should, of course, be applied to the Western Quail-Thrush, As pointed out by Gentilli (1961) the habitat of C. marginatum has suffered great changes owing to overgrazing by sheep and the plant cover “‘in some places has beeu almost wiped out’. Thus it seems that, like other members af the genus, C. marginatum will have little opportunity to adapt itself to the new conditions imposed by man. 364 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM (a) Cinclosoma marginatum marginatum Sharpe 1883 Cmclosoma marginatwm Sharpe 1883. Cat. Bds., Brit. Mus., 7, p. 336. Type locality, amended herein, Mount Kenneth, Western Australia. Range: Coastal regions from about the Tropie of Capricorn, extending to south-east of the Murchison River, within the 10-inch rainfall belt, Western Australia. Diagnosis: Males have a bright rufous (cinnamon) breast band, dark brown ear coverts and a well-defined dark crown. The eyebrow is white and the breast and flanks are bordered with black. The under tail coverts are black edged with white. The back rump, central rectrices and flanks are bright rufous in both sexes. Females have a dark crown, brown ear coverts, the throat, super- ciliary stripe and malar region deep buff, the back is streaked darker, and there is very little white on the rufous abdomen, The under tail coverts are reddish-brown tipped with white, with a narrow subterminal black band. Wing—Males, 91, 97; female, 97. Tail—Male, 95; female, 101. Tarsus, 29-31. Bill, 14. Locahties: (see fig. 2, Nos. 108-110). 108. Mount Kenneth (type locality) ; 109. near Yalgoo; 110, Mount Ida. (b) Cinclosoma marginatum nea Mathews 1912 Cinclosoma castaneothorax nea Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p. 331. Day Dawn, Western Australia. Range: North-western Australia (inland). Diagnosis: Smaller and paler than the preceding form. Ear coverts rufous, lores brownish in the female. Wing—RMales, 91-92; females, 81-91. Tarsus, 27. Bill, 15 mm. There is little doubt that specimens from the lower rainfall regions of North-western Australia can be separated from those nearer the coast and this is borne out by descriptions published by Mathews, Campbell and other writers. Day Dawn, the type locality of nea, is about 50 miles north of Mount Magnet. Further material may indicate that the variation in this species is clinal, in which case some authors may prefer to drop nea altogether. A small female, taken at Carnarvon, has the ear coverts brownish instead of rufous and could be referred to either form. CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 365 Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 111-120). 111. Carnarvon; 112, Day Dawn (type locality); 113. Wiluna (Zmu, 9: 196); 114. Lake Darlot; 115-116. Canning Stock Route (specimens); 117, Brockman Creek (Calvert Expedition); 118. Jigalong (W. Austr, Nat., 7: 114); 119 Wanery River; 120. Barlee Range. 6. Cinclosoma castaneothorax Gould 1849 (Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush) Cinclosoma castaneathorae Gould 1849. Proc, Zool. Sac., London, 1848: 139, pl. 6, Near the Dawson River, Queensland. Range: Interior of southern Queensland and adjacent areas in New South Wales. Diagnosis: Tn the male there is a glossy black throat; rich rust-red breast band edged with black; eyebrow buff; the rump and back are deep rust-red, The female has the throat and malar region orange-buff and the eyebrow is of the same colour. The breast, which is pale brown, merges into the dull cianamon-brown of the flanks, There is no black on the under surface of the female, which has the back olive-brown and the ramp reddish-brown, with indistinct darker streaks. Bowdler Sharpe (1881) pointed out that Gould's name for this species, being a ‘‘vox hybrida’’, should be amended to ‘Cerythrothoran’’, but the altered spelling has never been used. In Gould’s original deseription it was stated ‘‘Hab. Darling Downs, New South Wales” and this has been quoted generally as the type locality. However, it seems certain that the type, a male, was taken by Charles oxen at a place north of the Darling Downs nof far from where Gilbert, when collecting [or Gould, saw some birds in the Valley of Ruined Castles, near the upper reaches of the Dawson River, Queens- land (Chisholm, 1945) (see fig. 2, No. 121). Only four specimens have been taken of this little known species, viz. (a) Gould’s type, acquired by the British Museum, and, T am informed, now missing; (b) an adult male, collected by F. lL. Berney, at Barearolle, Thomson River, Queensland, September 4, 1925 and now in the Queensland Museum (O 3501). This bird has been deseribed by Campbell (1926) and described and figured by Mathews (1928, pl. 44). (ce) An adult female (South Australian Museum, No. B 21432), collected by Dr. W. MacGillivray, Adavale-Charleville road, August 27, 1923. It has been figured by Mathews (1928, pl. 44). (@) An adult male, taken in Thryptomene heath scrub country at Eungonia (near Bourke), New South Wales, September, 1960 (National 366 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Mnseum of Victoria, No. B7383). Eggs were also taken near the same place in 1959. Measurements: Type male (adapted from Gould)—Total length, 212, Wing, 100. Tail, 106. Tarsus, 25. Bill, 25 (?). Male (Berney’s specimen)—Wing, 99. ‘Tail, 105, Tarsus, 27. Bill, 14. Male (Enngonia)—Wing, 99, Tail (worn), 102, Tarsus, 28. Bill, 14, Adult female—Wing, 98. Tail, 96. Tarsus, 28. Bill, 15 mm, The male preserved in the National Museum of Victoria had a black bill and grey legs, Gould’s type was figured with the original description (1849) and a different illustration of the same bird was given in the “Supplement to the Birds of Australia’? (1855, pl. 32). A farther illustration of the type was supplied by Mathews (1936, pl. 70, left hand figure). It would seem that the accompanying descriptions given by Mathews at this time, wherein C, castaneothorax and C, marginatum are compared, became transposed by the printer. The male in the Queensland Museum, which is the same specimen as described by Camphell (1926), now bears the date May 20, 1926 instead of the proper date “September 4, 1925’. Cameron (1932, 1938) reported secing the species at Quilpie and Moombidary Station (Hungerford), Queensland and more recently near Bourke, New Sonth Wales. The Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush was combined with C. marginatum im the Australian Checklist (1926) heeanse there is a superficial resemblance between the males of the two species. Of late, especially among those who have not examined specimens, the tendency has been to regard both C. marginatum and ©. castaneothoran as forms of C. cinnamomeum. The male from Emgonia, in which the plumage is fairly fresh, is darker on the back than the specimen taken by Berney. The sternum has heen preserved. A. R. McEvey has written, ‘Tn the TH. L, White collection is a set of two eggs labelled C. custaneothorax—taken by IT. Lau, Darling Downs, Queensland, Octoher, 1888 (see Emu, 8:63). These are distinet from others labelled marginatum alisteri and castanotum. Though smaller than those of punctatum, they are clearly of the punctatum type, haying a white ground colour sparingly speckled with very small umber, mauve and purple spots’’, The writer agrees that these eges are probably punctautum, Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 121-124). Near Upper Dawson River (type locality). 122. Barearolle, Thomson River, 123, Adavale- Charleville road. 124. Quilpie. 125, Enngonia, CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 367 7. Cinclosoma ajax (Temminck) 1835 (New Guinea Quail-Thrush) Eupetes ajax Temminck 1835, Planch. Col. d’Ois., pl. 573. Lobo, Triton Bay, South-west New Guinea, Range: New Guinea (lowland forests). Tredale (1956) does not regard this species as a true quail-thrush, which it seems to be in every way. The male differs from all other members of the gents in lacking a white eyebrow and in having no white on the black wing coverts. The differences between the sexes are more marked than in any Australian species. The adult female has a white eyebrow, the throat and malar region are pure white (merged), and the wing coverts are nearly black or brown, aceording to the subspecies, with prominent white markings. In size Cinclosoma ajax approaches C, punctatum of the Australian mainland, being approximately 94 inches (242 mm.) in length, The following is a synopsis of the subspecies listed by Mayr (1941) :-— (a) Cinclosoma ajax ajax (Temminck) 1835, Triton Bay, New Gninea. Larger and darker brown above than the following, with the lores and postocular stripes black. Wing—‘‘Male, 114; female, 109, 110”. Range: Western coast of Geelvink Bay and Triton Bay. (b) Ginclosoma ajax muscalis Rand 1940. Palmer Junction, upper Fly River, south New Guinea. Resembles ajax above, with the flanks and sides of the breast much paler and less vividly coloured. Wing— ‘*Male, 108, 110’. Range: Upper Fly River, south New Guinea. (c) Cinclosoma ajax alaris Mayr and Rand 1935. Wuroi, Oriomo River, south New Guinea, Known only from the female, which is larger and more deeply rnfous above than the female of goldei, with the wing coyerts more brownish, (d) Cinelosoma ajax goldei (Ramsay) 1879. Port Moresby, New Guinea. Smaller and paler olive brown above than the nominate form. Wine—‘ Male, 103, 104’’.. Two males, which are similar to that ficured by Iredale (1956), are contained in the Australian Museum, Sydney. Range: Milne Bay to Hall Sound, south-eastern New Guinea. 368 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM LITERATURE CITED Amadon, Dean, 1957: Proc. Zool. Soc., Calcutta; Mookerjie Mem. Vol.: 259-268. Barnard, E. D., 1900: Emu, 1: 26. Beecher, W, J., 1953: Auk, 70, 270-337, Cain, W., 1935: 8. Austr. Orn., 13:10. Cameron, A. C., 1932: Emu, 32: 104. 1938: Ibid., 37: 316, Campbell, A. J., 1922: Ibid., 21: 161-2. 1926: Ibid., 25; 152. Campbell, A. J. and A. G., 1926: Ibid., 26: 26-40, Chisholm, A. H., 1938: Ibid., 44: 190. 1945: Ibid., 44: 190, Condon, H. T., 1954: §. Austr, Orn., 21: 17-27. Delacour, J., 1946: L’Oiseau, 16: 14-31. Delacour, J. and C. Vanrie, 1957: Contrib. Sci., No. 16. de Schauensee, R. M., 1957: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 109: 199, Emerson, R. and R. Gannon, 1934: Hmu, 33: 311. Gentilli, J., 1961: W. Austr. Nat., 7: 180. Gilliard, EK. T., 1958: Living Birds of the World. London. Hamish Hamilton. Gill, EH. L., 1945: First Guide to South African Birds. Cape Town. Maskew Miller. Gould, J., 1840: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 5: 116. 1849: Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1948: 68, pl. 6. 1848: Suppl. Bds, Austr., pl. 32. London. 1865: Handbk. Bds. Austr., 1: 439. London. Hartert, E., 1931: Nov. Zool., 37: 48. Hill, G. F., 1907: Hmu, 6: 179. Holmes, A., 1959: Trans. Edin. Geol. Soc., 17: 183-216. Howe, F. E., Emu, 8: 135. 1931: Ibid., 20: 292. Huxley, J. S., 1938: Proc. 8th. Int. Orn. Congr., 1934: 430. Iredale, T., 1956: Birds of New Guinea. Melbourne. Georgian House. CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 369 Keartland, G., in North, 1909: Ree, Austr. Mus., Sydney, 7, No. 4. Keast, J. A., 1958: Austr. Journ, Zool., 6: 33-52. 1961: Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 123: 305-495, Lea, A. M. and J. T. Gray, 1935: Hmu, 35: 93. Lindgren, E., 1961: W. Austr. Nat., 7: 174. Mathews, G. M., 1912: Nov. Zool., 18: 330. —— 1921: Bds., Austr., 9. London. Witherby. 1923: Austr. Av. Rec., 5: 35. 1927: Bds. Austr., 12: 427. London. Witherby. 1931: List Bds. Austr., 287-8. London. Taylor and Francis. 1936: Suppl. Addit., Bds. Austr., London. Witherby. 1946: Working List Bds. Austr., Sydney. Shepherd and Newman. Mayr, E., 1941: List Bds. New Guinea: 110, New York. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 1944: Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 83: 123-194. Mayr, E. and D. Amadon, 1951: Am. Mus. Novit., No. 1496, Mayr, E. and J. ©. Greenway, 1956: Breviora (Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard), 58: 1-11. Meinertzhagen, R., 1954: Birds of Arabia. London. Oliver and Boyd. North, A. J., 1897-8: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 22: 180. 1901: Nests and eggs of birds found breeding in Australia and Tasmania. Vol. 1: 326. Sydney. Australian Museum, Parsons, F. E., 1921: 8. Austr. Orn., 6: 20. Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union, 1926: Official Checklist Austr, Birds. Roberts, Austin, 1948: Bds. South Africa. Witherby. Serventy, D. L. and H. M. Whittell, 1951: Birds of Western Australia. Perth. Paterson Press, Sharland, M., 1958: Tasmanian Birds. Sydney. Angus and Robertson. Sharpe, R. B., 1881: bis: 605. 1883: Cat. Bds., 7: 331 et seq. 1903: Handlist Bds., 4: 2-5. 370 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Simpson, H., 1933: S. Austr. Orn., 12: 129. Specht, R. L., 1958: Rep. Amer.-Austr. Sci. Exped. Arnhem Land, 3: 433-438. Vigors, N. and T. Horsfield, 1827: Trans. Linn. Soc., London, 15: 219. White, H. L., 1922: Emu, 21: 164. Whitehouse, F. W., 1940: Univ. Queensld. Papers, 2, n.s., no. 1. Whitlock, F. L., 1910: Emu, 9: 196. Whittell, H. M., 1954: Bibliogr. Austr. Orn., p. 27. Perth. Paterson Brokensha. Whittell, H. M. and D. L. Serventy, 1948: Syst. List Bds. W. Austr. Perth. Govt. Printer. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 12-13 Plate 12. Genus Cinclosoma. Heads of adult pairs, males on left, la, Spotted Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma punctatum punctatum; 2a, Chestnut Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castanotum castanotum; 2b, Cinclosoma castanotwm mayri; 3, Nullarbor Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma alistert. Plate 13. Genus Cinclosoma. Heads of adult pairs, males on left. 4a, Cinnamon Quail- Thrush, Cinclosoma cinnamomeum cinnamomeum; 5, Western Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma marginatum marginatum ; 6, Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castaneothoraz ; 7, New Guinea Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma ajax ajaz. Ree, 8.A, Moseum Von, 14, Puate 12 H FCoNDON - 196/ To faves poye 370.) Ree, §8.A, Musevy ABERRANT AUSTRALIAN BRACHYPTEROUS MYODOCHINE BUGS (LYGAEIDAE, RHYPAROCHROMINAE) By GORDON F. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary This paper deals with the systematics of a predominantly brachypterous group of rather specialized Australian bugs of the Lygaeid tribe Myodochini. Three new genera are erected and fourteen species of the Australian fauna discussed. Five of the species are new and some synonymy of the others is proposed. ABERRANT AUSTRALIAN BRACHYPTEROUS MYODOCHINE BUGS (LYGAEIDAE, RHYPAROCHROMINAE) By GORDON F. GROSS, Curator or Insucts, SourH AUSTRALIAN Museum Plates 14-16 SUMMARY This paper deals with the systematics of a predominantly brachypterous group of rather specialized Australian bugs of the Lygaeid tribe Myodochini. Three new genera are erected and fourteen species of the Australian fauna discussed. Five of the species are new and some synonymy of the others is proposed. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This paper was made useful through the unstinting help of Mr. G. G. EH, Scudder of the University of British Columbia, Vancouver and of Dr. T. E. Woodward of the University of Queensland. The latter, when in England, took the trouble to examine all available and relevant type material. Mr. Seudder supplied much useful criticism at the generic level. I am indebted to the Directors and Boards of Trustees of the National Museum, Melbourne, the Australian Museum, Sydney, the British Museum, the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Stockholm, the Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide, and the Division of Entomology C.S.I.R.O. Canberra, for loans of material, freely made to Mr. Scudder, Dr. Woodward, and myself. ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in citing the location of material, S.A.M—South Australian Museum, Adelaide; N.M.— National Museum, Melbourne; A.M.—Australian Museum, Sydney; C.8.1.R.0.—Division of Entomology, C.8.1.R.0., Canberra; W.A.R.I— Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide; B.M.—British Museum (Nat, Hist.), London; R.M.S,—Riksmuseet, Stockholm. 372 RECORDS OF THE §,A, MUSEUM INTRODUCTION Classification of the subfamily Rhyparochrominae on the tribal and subtribal level has always presented considerable difficulties, and several markedly different sehemes have been proposed. Stal (1872) divided the subfamily into six divisions—Myodocharia, Rhyparochro- maria, Beosaria, Gunianotaria, Lethoearia and Drymaria, then again in 1874 placed the subfamily in five divisions—Cleradaria, Myodo- charia, Rhyparochromaria, Beosaria and Lethoearia, Distant (1903) recognized the first three of Stal’s 1874 divisions, but lumped the last two into the group Aphanaria, Gulde (1934) added iwo other tribes to these of Stal (1874), Pterometini and Stygnoeorini, Seudder (1957) found the characters used up to that time to be rather nnreliable and based a new classifica- tion on the position of the trichobothria and spiracles, together with the spermathecae. He divided the subfamily into four tribes, Rhyparochromini, Lethaeini, Drymini, and Stygnoeorini, He further subdivided the Rhyparoebromini into three subtribes Gonianotina, Rhyparoehrornina, aud Plociomerina, Slater (1957) sugeested the names for the Rhyparochrominae and Rhyparochromini should be Megalonotinae and Megalonotini, but this has been shown to be incorrect. Slater and Sweet (1961) and Sweet and Slater (1961) raised the number of tribes to eight, retaining Scudder’s (and others’) concept of Lethaeini and Drymini but splitting his Stygnocorini into Cleradini and Plinthisini, rearranging his Rhyparochromini into four tribes, Myodochini, Rhyparochromim, Beosini, and QGonianotini, of which only the first tribe is still substantially the same as in Sendder’s concept. In fact all of these classifications agree an placing in the one section a group of genera which have the pronotum constricted near the middle (and hence divided into two lobes) and in which the lateral margins of the pronotum are not explanate or acate but obtuse or rounded. Stal and Distant called it the division Myodocharia, Scudder the subtribe Plociomerina, Slater and Sweet the Myodochini, but all agree in placing in it genera of the general appearance of Erlacda Signoret, Hucosmetus Bergrath, Myodocha Latreille, Pachy- brachius Hahn, Paromius Wieber and Ptochiomera Say. Scudder’s classification differs in one point. Whereas his Plociomerina (without exception so far as I can judge from published figures) contains genera of the general appearance of those just listed, not all genera GROSS—-AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 373 of this appearance helong to the ‘Plociomerina’’; ¢.g., Beduma Stal (= Austropamera Distant) belongs to the Stygnocorini. It came as a considerahle surprise to both Seudder and myself when working on our joint revision of Dieuches Dohrn to find the anomalous Dieuches rafaeli Evans belonged to the Myodochini. Subsequently I found D. rafaeli to be a synonym of Euander lacertosus (Brichson) and that related to Huander in our collections were a series of other genera including Udeocoris Bergroth, the Anstralian species of *‘Lamprodema’’, and several new genera, all belonging likewise to the Myodochini, Seudder working independently discovered that ‘‘Lamprodema’’ coleopteroides belongs to the Myodochim, but that L, maura belongs to the Rhypar ochrérini (im litt. ). These make up a group of genera and species related to Eyander, and in general do not resemble closely the other Myodochines. An incipient transverse constriction of the pronotum is present in several of the genera (Zuander Stal and Porander gen, noy.) but in two other genera (Udeocoris Bergroth, and Telocoris gen, nov.) this is quite absent. All the species tend to he flattened and shiny and brachypterous forms are common, aloug with normal, macropterous ones in the same species, Several of the species are known only from brachypterous forms. Frequent development of brachyptery tends to link this group with a group of genera which, although the pronotum is distmetly divided into two lobes, are brachypterons. This second group includes Fantejus Stal (= Albanyaria Distant) and two new genera Cryptocoris gen. noy, and Zygocoris gen. nov., all from Australia, and from other regions Aegyptocoris China, Carpilus Stal, Cnemedus H, and 8., Erlacda Signoret. (sometimes), Ptochiomera Say (sometimes), Prytanes Distant and Sisammes Distant, amongst others. Tt is hard to avoid the conclusion that the first group makes up a section of the brachypterous Mydochini diverging from the general facies of the tribe. It is possibly a late development in the group towards specialized small shining forms, and linked through E'uander, Porander and the Fontejus, Ptochiomera group of genera with the more typical fast-noving Myodochines of the litter and soil surface. Euander and Porander definitely live on low shrubs in the forests of hicher rainfall areas, [(/deocoris is a soil surface inhabitant of either wet or arid areas, but the exact habitat of the others, whether heath- like plants or the deep litter layers, remains wndetermined, Although genera like Udeocoris and Telocoris are very distinet. in appearance from the other Myodochini they are very close in structure a 374 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM to forms like Huander and Porander, where the transverse construction between the two lobes of the pronotum is fully developed. These in turn grade into forms like Cryptocoris, Zygocoris and Fontejus where the pronotal constriction is very well marked. This has necessitated this paper including all the Australian genera of Myodochini in which brachyptery oceurs. x tw The genera and species of the brachypterous section of Australian Myodochini may be distinguished by the following key :— Pronotum with an incipient transverse constriction near or well behind the middle .. .. .... Pronotum without any trace ‘of: a trans: verse constriction, although the hind portion may be paler than the AnteTIOr ce Be ze «4 +o eee. Pronotum with transverse constriction just behind middle... .. .. .. +t Pronotum with transverse constriction well behind middle . Hemelytra always macropterous, hind margin of pronotum coneave in front of seutellum . . Hemelytra macropterous or with very reduced membrane, hind margin of pronotum shallowly curved over whole length .. . Hind lobe of pronotum mostly pale, likewise hemelytra, at least in brach- terous form .. Hind lobe of pronotum dark with two prominent pale lateral patches, hemelytra mostly dark... .. Pronotum and head for the most part smooth and shining .. .. Pronotum, head and seutellurn coar rsely and densely punctate .. Fuander lacertosus ( Erichs.) Euander torquatus (Hrichs. ) Euander cicero sp. nov. 6 Porander scudderi gen. noy. & sp. nov. GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 375 6, Pronotum not markedly longer than wide, fore femora incrassate or not Pronotum conspicuously longer than wide, fore femora inerassate .. .. 8 ~ 7. Fore femora not incrassate, corium dark with a pale oblique marginal fascia... .. .. 6. we we ee ee ee es )~©6Cryptocoris fasciata gen. nov. & sp. nov. Fore femora inecrassate and_ finely spined beneath, corium ochraceous with three lateral black spots .. .. Fontejus multicoloratus ( Dist.) 8, Hemelytra not surpassing middle of abdomen .. .. -. .. .. .- +. +s +. Sygocoris tindaler gen. nov. & sp. nov. Hemelytra surpassing middle of abdo- reat oie AES ste ott Bamnicegs wb! ite -8 9. Hemelytra dark, at least apically, with conspicuous oblique pale marginal fascia near apex .. .. . Fontejus sidnicus (Stal) Hemelytra ochraceous or ohirabedus- piceous, nearer black... ........ 10 10. Hemelytra evenly coloured pale ochraceous, or ochraceous-piceous, with only the vaguest suggestion of two pale lateral lighter areas .. .. Fontejus collaris (Walker) Hemelytra castaneous with several areas of yellowish-ochraceous on the disc, and two Inteous patches on margin near apex. Scutellum with a paler patch near each basal angle Fontejus westraliensis sp. nov. 11. Hind portion of pronotum lighter in colour than anterior region... .... 12 Hind portion of pronotum for the most part concolorous with anterior region, and possibly humeral angles BIE V-lehov eNews aie dhe A, 376 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM 12. Hemelytra with small scattered fuscous patches .. .. .......... Udeocoris rolandi (Dist.) comb. nov. Hemelytra with a large curved band of fuscous in the posterior region of corium running from behind middle of outer margin to claval suture running along claval suture to hind margin of corium and along hind margin to outer margin... .. .. .. Udeocoris scuddert Sp. nov. 13. Corium and clavus mainly dark .. .. Udeocoris nigroaeneus (Erichs. ) Corium and clavus mainly pale .. .. Telocoris vittata (Dist.) gen, nov. & comb, nov. Fontejus Stal 1862 Fontejus Stal, 1862, Stettin. ent. Ztg., 23: 314. 1865, Hemiptera Africana 2: 153. 1874, K. svenska Vetensk Akad, Handl., 12 (1): 145 & 154. Albanyaria Distant, 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9) 2: 258, new synonymy. Head triangular, somewhat longer than wide, eyes not touching anterior margin of pronotum, Antennae moderately long, first segment surpassing apex of head. Pronotum elongate, constricted near base. Anterior margin almost straight, hind margin feebly convex. Lateral margin feebly convex in front of constriction. No obvious collar to pronotum, Scutellum a little longer than wide. Hemelytra abbreviated, not reaching apex of abdomen, membrane very reduced and dividing line between clavus and corium obscure. Fore femora very incrassate with a number of teeth in the apical halves. Fore tibiae feebly curved with in the male a prominent spine beyond the middle. Head, pronotum, hemelytra and fore femora with long sparse hairs in addition to the normal fine pilosity shown throughout this group of genera. GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 377 Type of genus: Fontejus sidnicus (Stal) This genus is the most closely related of this whole group of Australian brachypterous genera of Myodochini to the normal Pachybrachius and Eucosmetus type. The constriction in the pronotum is placed well posteriorad (except in F’. multicoloratus); the whole facies is typically Myodochine and is not greatly different from that of extra-Australian brachypterous Myodochine genera, Fontejus sidnicus (Stal) Plate 14, fig. B Rhyparochromus sidnicus Stal, 1859: K. svenska Fregatten Engenies Resa ete. 11 (1); 246. Black or dark choeolate brown with brown and yellowish-white markings. Head with eyes black or dark chocolate brown. First three segments of antennae dark brown, second and third infuscated at apex. Fourth black with a broad luteous band near base. Pronoitum concolorous with head, except for two pale luteous points, one on either side just behind constriction. One specimen has two additional Iuteous patches along the hind margin. Hind margin shallowly excavate, exterior margin with distinct wide collar, lateral margins convex to constriction, behind that convex again, Scutellum always black with extreme apex luteous, Sparsely punctate, Corium and ¢lavus difficult to distinguish and chocolate brown, either becoming black apically, or all black. On the lateral margin three luleous patehes, one at the extreme apex and the second at about level of tip of scutellum small, the third on the margin at the three-quarter spot, large, oblique, reaching almost to mid-line of each hardened ‘‘elytron’’. Without membrane, and hemelytra reaching back to about two-thirds length of abdomen. Abdomen above always black, with two pale luteous patches, one alongside the large luteous patch on hemelytra, the other just behind apex of hemelytra, Body beneath black or chocolate brown. Rostrum dark brown, Pale spots above insertion of coxae and on lateral margins of abdomen contiguous with those above. Fore femora black, armed beneath with a single row of six stout spines. Legs otherwise dark brown, femora paler basally. N 378 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Head, pronotum, hemelytra and fore femora covered with sparse long hairs. Length: 6 mm. Locality: South Australia: Stickney Island, N. B. Tindale; Meningie, 12 September 1959, H. V. Mincham; Ardrossan, February 1879, collector not indicated; attracted to light, Ravine des Casoars, Kangaroo Island, 18 October 1951, G. F. Gross (S.A.M.). New South Wales: North Sydney, Taronga Park, 14 October 1913, A. Musgrave (A.M.). Fontejus collaris (Walker) Plate 14, fig. D Rhyparochromus collaris Walker, 1872, Cat. Heter., 5: 111. Distant, 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 8: 510. Fontejus collaris Stal, 1874, K. svenska Vetensk, Akad. Handl., 12 (1); 154, Walker and Stal’s descriptions appear to apply to the same insect although in Stal’s account no reference is made to Walker’s deserip- tion. Distant says Walker’s type is lost. Black and chocolate brown, Tlead, anterior lobe of pronotum, scutellum, fourth segment of antennae (except for pale luteous sub- basal ring) and sometimes apices of first, second and third segments and femora black, Antennae, hind lobe of pronotum, hemelytra, upperside of abdomen (except for a broad median longitudinal yellowish or pale brown strips), tarsi and tibiae (latter apically infuseated) brown to chocolate brown. Some small pale patches on hemelytra and hind lobe of pronotum, tip of scutellum pale, Beneath head and thorax black, exeept just above insertion of coxae, which is lutcous. Rostrum and abdomen chocolate brown, abdomen beneath and above with a fine reddish pilosity. Head, pronotum and hemelytra with a sparse long pilosity. Length: 6-8 mm. Locality: Tasmania; one male in tussocks, New Norfolk, A. M. Lea; one male, Hobart, 6-16 November 1928, C. Cole; one female No, 2218, Seamander (8.A.M.); Maglehawk Neck, 12 February-3 March 1913, R. EK. Turner (B.M.). South Australia: Cooper Oreek, W. BE. Hodson (B.M.). Walker records the species from Tasmania and South Australia (Adelaide), Stal from New South Wales (Sydney). GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 379 Fontejus westraliensis sp, nov. Plate 14, fig. C Very similar in general appearance to F. collaris Walker. Choco- late brown, yes and first and fourth segments of antennae black, the latter with a pale luteons subbasal ring. Pronotum with a dark median longitudinal stripe and sometimes the very lateral margin infuscated. Scutellum mostly black, but with reddish-chocolate basal angles and a luteus tip. Henielytra chocolate, with a pattern of paler and darker patches, two feebly marked pale lateral fasciae near apex of hemelytra. Upperside of abdomen reddish-chocolate and black variegate, Underside of head, pronotum and abdomen black. Luteous immediately above fore and hind coxae, reddish-chocolate patches on the hind margin of the abdominal segments, lateral margin of abdomen also reddish-chocolate variegate. Middle and hind femora and all tibiae and tarsi apically infuscated. Underside of abdomen with a fine golden silky pilosity, pronotum and on hemelytra with long sparse hairs. Length: 7 mm, Locality: Western Australia: Holotype male and allotype female, Katanning, 2 May 1938, K, R. Norris (C.8.1.R.0.). This species ts easily distinguished from F. collaris by the variegated hemelytra, which contain several areas of black, by the brown head, and the wholly brown pronotum, which has a darker longitudinal median streak, Fontejus multicoloratus (Distant) noy. comb. Albanyaria multicolorata Distant, 1918: Ann. Mag. nat, Hist., (9) 2: 258. ‘‘Tlead, anterior lobe of pronotum, and the seutellum black; the narrow posterior pronotal lobe and the extreme apex of scutellum greyish white; antennae ochraceous, apex of third joint and more than apical half of fourth black; corium ochraceous, the lateral marginal areas with the three prominent black spots, the smaller near base, the largest near middle, and the third at apex, the exposed apical area of the abdomen black; body beneath black; posterior sternal segmental margins very pale ochraceous; legs reddish ochraceous, apical halves of the anterior femora and apices of the tibiae and tarsi black; 380 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM antennae with the second joint slightly longer than the third and about subequal with the fourth; scutellum more or less rugosely punctate; clavus linearly somewhat coarsely punctate; rostrum ochraceous, the basal joint black, remaining joints imperfectly seen in carded type.”’ (Distant’s original description.) Length: 5% mm. Locality: Western Australia: Albany (J. J. Walker) Distant’s type (B.M.) King George Sound, no collector (G. G. EH. Seudder, Vancouver). I have not seen this species. Fontejus multicoloratus along with Cryptocoris fasciata seems to mark the next step forward in the divergence of certain Australian Myodochines from the characteristic facies of the group. In these two genera the pronotum is considerably shortened and is barely longer than wide and this is also typical of all the following forms treated in this paper. Genus Zygocoris gen. nov. Head elongate, rather acuminate, eyes not very prominent and placed well in front of pronotal margin. Pronotum hardly wider than head with eyes, with an incipient transverse sulcus placed only a short way in front of the hind margin. Anterior margin of pronotum concave, posterior margin almost straight, lateral margins almost straight from forward of sulcus curving in just before apex and also in region of suleus. Margins of posterior lobe somewhat divergent from suleus backwards. Collar flattened, not very distinct. Seutellum small, about as long as wide. Hemelytra very coriaceous and ‘‘elytra like’’, corium and clavus not separable and no trace of membrane, abbreviated, not reaching behind middle of abdomen. Fore femora very expanded, only twice as long as wide, not quite circular in cross section but feebly flattened laterally with three moderate teeth and a number of only slightly smaller ones on the underside in the apical half. Fore tibiae shorter than femora, strongly curved, apices expanded, with two rows of denticles on their under surfaces. Hind tarsi with the first segment not longer than apical pair together. Type of genus: Zygocoris tindalei sp. nov. This genus has affinities with the previous one, Fontejus, but differs from it in its longer head and pronotum and massive front GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 381 femora, It also appears to be quite close to Fontejanus Breddin from India. Like F'ontejanus it has massive front femora, curved and armed front tibiae, a suleus on the pronotum placed just in front of the hind margin and very abbreviated hemelytra, It differs from Fontejanus in not having the eyes touching the anterior margin of the pronotum; it does not appear to have ocelli; the mid femora are unarmed and the first segment of the third tarsi is shorter than the apical pair together. Fontejanus must be considered a member of this new group of Myodochini by virtue of the brachypterous condition of the hemelytra, although the transverse sulcus of the pronotum is strong and gives it a more typical Myodochine pronotum than others of these Australian genera, The link between typical Myodochini appears to be either through Zygocoris and Fontejanus or through Euander. Zygocoris tindalei sp. nov. Plate 15, fig. E Chocolate brown with hind lobe of pronotum and ground colour of ‘elytra’? Inteous white. ‘‘Elytra’’ with a T-shaped fuscous patch with the head of the T laying along the inner margin, and the stem of the T reaching the outer margin at about the middle. Middle and hind femora, all tibiae and tarsi, extreme apices of fore femora, second segment of antennae (except at apex), and base of third segment, yellowish or yellowish brown. Head smooth and shining, with sparse long hairs. Anterior lobe of pronotum sparsely punctate, otherwise smooth and shining and also with sparse long hairs. Hind lobe of pronotum and ‘‘elytra’’ sparsely punctate, the punctations are brown in the pale areas. Sentellum black, with pale tip, feebly transversely impressed in front of middle. Hemelytra very abbreviated into coriaceous ‘‘elytra’’, apical margin truncate, feebly sinuate, outer apical angles rounded, Body beneath shining brown, with a short sparse white pilosity. Length: 4-5 mm. Locality: South Australia: Holotype male, allotype female and three paratype females, Mount Lofty Ranges, N, B, Tindale (S.A.M.), Paratype male and two paratype females, ex soil Gile’s Corner, July 1950 (W.A.R.I.), Australia: Four paratypes, with Camponotus or Iridomyrmex (Formicidae) (8.A.M.). 382 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Genus Cryptocoris gen, nov. Head about as long as wide, feebly convex, eyes not very prominent, almost touching anterior margin of pronotum. No ocelli. Pronotum as wide as or slightly narrower than head with eyes, widest at anterior and posterior margins, Anterior margin of pronotum straight, posterior margin feebly concaye. Lateral margins straight and converging as they run back towards constriction which is placed well posteriad, thence diverging again to hind margin. No collar. Seutellum fairly small, almost equilateral. Hemelytra coriaceous and elytra-like, corium and clavus not separable and strongly but sparsely punctate: a very reduced membrane present. Hemelytra reach a little behind middle of abdomen, Fore femora somewhat enlarged, with some terminal teeth beneath. Fore tibiae feebly curved. First segment of hind tarsi longer than remaining two together, Type of genus: Cryptocoris fasciata sp. nov. This genus appears to have some aflinities with Zygocoris. The fore femora are neither so markedly expanded nor so conspicuously armed. In common with several other genera in this section it has abbreviated hemelytra, but the pronotum is not so elongate and in this feature it appears to be allied to the next genus. Cryptocoris fasciata sp. nov, Plate 15, fig, C Shining black. Hind lobe of pronotum and a spot on the lateral margin of hemelytra luteous. Membrane milky white. Basal exterior margin of hemelytra, tibiae, tarsi and second segment of antennae pale brown infuseated at apex. Eyes, third and fourth segments of antennae and basal two-thirds of first segment dark brown, Beneath black, hind margin of prothorax and metathorax broadly, and a spot on the mesothorax above insertion of coxae, luteous. Head smooth and shining, with several long sparse hairs. Anterior lobe of pronotum likewise smooth and shining, with a few shorter pale hairs. Hind lobe with a few pale brown punctations near transverse constriction, Seutellum and coriaceous portion of hemelytra also smooth and shining. Scutellum and hemelytra with a moderate number of course punctations arranged in rows. Hind margin of GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 383 abbreviated and fused corium and clavus straight. Oblique lateral margins broadly convex. Hemelytra with short and sparse pilosity. Beneath with a fine short pilosity. Length: 3-4 mm. Locality: South Australia: Holotype, Lucindale, Fenerheerdt (S.A.M.), A.C.T.: Allotype and one paratype, Blundell’s’, under stones, 16 September 1930, W. K. Hughes (C.8.I.R.0.). Genus Euander Stal. Euander Stal, 1865, Hemiptera Africana 2: 154, 1874, K. svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl, 12 (1): 156. Pronotum at apex as wide as head with eyes, as long as wide or a little longer, lateral margins obtuse, narrowed towards apex, behind middle slightly sinuate. Anterior margin of pronotum slightly elevated and forming a feeble collar, pronotum with an obsolete transverse suleus behind middle, hind lobe paler than fore lobe. Scutellum distinctly longer than wide. Corium and clavus with distinet rows of punctations with scattered punctations between them. Fore femora moderately incrassated, beneath with three largish teeth and many smaller ones, fore tibiae of male curved and with a large tooth towards apex. First segment of hind tarsi as long as apical pair together. Type of genus: EF. lacertosus (Hrichson) Euander marks the next step forward in the development of the peculiar endemic group of Australian genera, the transverse con- striction of the short pronotum has moved anteriad to the middle, changing the whole facies of the insect. Euander lacertosus (Erichson) Plate 16, fig. A Pachymerus lacertosus Erichson, 1842: Archiv fiir Naturges., 8 (1): 279, Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc. Qld., 1: 50, figs. Rhyparochromus lacertosus Dohrn, 1859, Catalogus Hemipterorum: 34, 1 This locality, which appears in several other places in this paper, was a farm 18 miles west of Canberra at the eastern foot of Mount Coree, since resumed for water conservation purposes, and now largely planted in pine forest, 384 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Euander lacertosus Stal, 1867, Berlin ent. Ztg., 10: 161. 1874: K. svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl., 12 (1): 158. Rhyparochromus pictipennis Dallas, 1852: List. Hem. Ins., 2: 571. (new synonomy) Dieuches pictipennis Distant, 1901; Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 504, Dieuches rafaeli Evans, 19389: Bull. ent, Res., 30: 305, (new synonomy) The species is also mentioned and figured but not named by Lea, 1908, Insect & Fungus Pests of Orchard and Farm (Hobart 3rd Ed., 73-74, Black, with brown and yellowish white markings, Head and eyes mainly black, head has patches of heavy pubescence. First segment of antennae black with a few small strong spines, second segment mostly brown, apex black, third segment with basal third brown, distal two-thirds black, last segment black with a pale band near base, Anterior lobe of pronotum black with hoary punctations near edge, collar brownish with three conspicuous yellowish points, Hind lobe luteous with black punctations. Hind margin of pronotum excavate in front of seutellum, lateral margins with a whitish- or yellowish-spot in the position of the sulcus. Scutellum black, with extreme apex white and usually two orange points near the apex on the disc. A few scattered punctationgs on the dise. Corium and clavus in the main yellowish—testaceous with several rows of dark punctations, mostly following the curve of the veins, and many other scattered punctations. There are several small fuscous spots and a large black spot on the dise of the corium two- thirds of the way back. Also the extreme apex is black. Reflexed margin Iuteous, Membrane blackish or brownish with veins pale, together with many pale points, Hemelytra always fully developed, Body beneath black, with a very fine adpressed silky pilosity, episterna and epimera of each thoracic segment pale. Trochanters, bases of second and third femora, tibiae except at apices and tarsi brownish. Fore tibiae always curved expanded at apex, and in the males with a prominent tooth at base of expansion. Length: 5-7 mm, Foodplants: Common in dry selerophyll forest in Sonth Australia; a pest of strawberries in Tasmania. Our figure checked by Dr, T, E, Woodward in Enrope, against Erichson’s type. GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 385 Locality: Queensland; Cedar Creek, Mjéberg; Mount Tambourine, Mjéberg; Herberton, Mjéberg (R.M.S.). New South Wales: Three, Bombala, January 1930, Rev. A. J. Barrett (Reg. Nos, K 61432 and K 61180); Mount Irvine, 31 January 1944, B. A. Messmer; Nepean River, Glenbrook Creek, 25 February 1923, A. Musgrave; Sawpit Creek, Mount Kosciusko, 8 January 1929, A. Musgrave (A.M.) Dorrigo (S.A.M.); two, Nullo Mountain, 20 m. N.B, of Rylstone, 20 November 1950, T, G. Campbell; two, Island Bend, Snowy Mountains, 20 Oetober 1951, D. J. Wimbush (C.S.LR.0.). Australian Capital Territory: Six, attacking strawberries, 4 December 1940, A. J. Nicholson; three, Blundell’s, 7 January 1930, J. Evans; Canberra, May 1929, J. Evans; Canberra, February, G. F. Hill; Cotter River, 24 (month not distinct), 1929, M. Fuller; Jervis Bay, 18 September 1951, T. G, Campbell (C.8.1,B8.0.), Victoria; Toora, 16 December 1987, R, V, Fyfe (C.S.LR.0.); near Melbourne, G. F. Hill; Kewell (S.A.M.); Mallee District 1913, donated 5 October 1922 by F, P. Spry (N.M.); Ferntree Gully, 16 October 1927, F. E. Wilson (A.M.), Tasmania: Three, Launceston (No, 2218); Launceston 12 February 1914; Launceston, 1 March 1914; Launceston; Launceston, 1 April 1916, F. M, Littler; five Hobart (Nos. 7-6-.16/1, 3-6-17/21, 23, 24 and 25— possible these are dates), C. E. Cole; in fallen leaves, Hobart, Lea (S.A.M.) Lake St. Claire, 13 Jannary 1937, G. and ©, Davis; Rinadeena Siding, Mount Lyell Line, 11 January 1937, G. and C. Davis; Lake Margaret, 12 January 1937, H. and C. Davis (A,M.); Moogara, January 1938, T, Raphael (coll. G. G, EK. Scudder, Vancouver). South Australia; Thirty-seven, by sweeping undergrowth, Fucalyptus obliqua dry sclerophyll forest, Naracoorte Cave Reserve, 25 October 1958, G. F. Gross; on Poa caespitosa scrub, Hundred of Joanna, 28 October 1958, N. B. Tindale; three, Clare, 19 April 1884, J. G, O. Tepper; two, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island, Museum Expedition, February 1926; St. Marys (8.A.M.); in large numbers on Cape Weed, Cryptostemma calendulaceum, Inman Valley, 25 Jannary 1955, P. M. Grosveuor; attacking strawberries; Ashton, November 1945, Mr. Hook (W.A.B.1.). Western Australia: King George Sound (B.M.); Collie, 13 January 1957, A, Snell (N.M.). Euander cicero sp. nov. Plate 14, fig. A Black with brown and yellowish-white markings. Head black, with patches of hoary pubescence, more elongate than in 2. lacertosus. First segment of antennae black, second black at apex and third black 386 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM in terminal half, otherwise brown, fourth segment black with a Inteous band near base, Anterior lobe of pronotum velvety black with three pale points on anterior margin. Hind lobe likewise velvety black except for two large Iuteous areas along each lateral margin and two obsolete brown longitudinal bars, one on each side of mid line, Scutellum completely velvety black, Corium and eclavus velvety black with most of the basal half of corium and outer half of clavus contiguous to it luteous, also a large oblong luteous area on each lateral margin near apex, Some brownish marks on apical exterior angle of clavus and apical interior area of corium. Membrane dark grey with some lighter points, very reduced, Distinction between corium and clavus clear, Body beneath black, abdomen and underside of head with a hoary white pubescence. Propleurae and mesopleurae strongly punctate and with a trace of a pale lemon yellow around each punctation. Metaplenrae basally strongly rugulose. A spot above insertion of coxae on propleurae and metapleurae to dorsum luteous. Second segment of rostrum, basal third of all femora, tarsi (except apically), and tibiae brown. Apices of fore tibiae expanded. Length: 4-5 mm. Locality: New South Wales: Holotype female and one paratype (head and thorax only), Hotel Kosciusko, Snowy Mountains, October 1957, D, J. Wimbush (C.8.I.R.0.); three paratype females, Mount Kosciusko, January 1957, H. J. Carter (A.M.), Australian Capital Territory: One paratype female, Mount Gingera, 5 December 1950, H. Cane (0.8.LRB.0.). Evander torquatus (Erichson) nov. comb. Plate 16, fig, C Pachymerus torquatus Erichson, 1842: Archiv fiir Naturges. 8 (1): 280. Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc, Qld., 1: 52, figures. Rhyparochromus torquatus Dohrn, 1859; Catalogus Hemipterornm: 34, Black with brown and yellow markings. Head black, with traces of a heavy pubescence, more elongate than FE. lacertosus. First segment of antennae black, brownish at apex, second segment and extreme base of third segment pale brown, third segment otherwise and fourth black. GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 387 Anterior lobe of pronotum black with a faint tinge of brown, collar a shade paler. Hind lobe pale yellow, with a few brownish puncta- tions and a few blackish spots one of which is largish and runs along the midline into the black of the fore lobe, Hind margin broadly excavate, lateral margins fairly straight, narrowing towards head, Seutellum black with extreme apex white and two orange points near the apex on the disc. Sometimes these run into the white tip. Corium and elavus yellowish-white with nomerous blackish-brown punctations which coalesce to form a longitudinal black streak on the clavus and a vaguely triangular black pateh in the basal third of the corium, The corium also has a large blackish patch just behind middle connected by one or two black bars to the black apical area of the corium, In the maeropterous specimen the black on the corium is very much more extensive. Membrane complete or very reduced, if the latter then distinction between clavus and corinm not obvious and hemelytra apparently hardened and rather ‘elytra’? like, Body beneath black, episterna and epimera of each thoracic segment pale. Trochanters pale, bases of second and third femora, tibiae, except at apices, and tarsi brownish. Apices of tibiae not expanded, Length: 4-5.2 mm, Locality: Australian Capital Territory: One macropterous specimen, Canberra, November 1929, J. Evans. Victoria: In moss, Ferntree Gully, 1 November 1918, F, E. Wilson; two in tussocks, Ringwood, F, B. Wilson (S.A.M.); Millgrove, 13 April 1927, F. EH. Wilson (A.M.); Ferntree Gully, 27 July 1919, I. P. Spry; six same locality and collector, without date; two same locality and collector, 7 October 1920; fourteen, same locality, 17 and 24 July 1920, 26 July 1924 and 26 April 1925, F. EH. Wilson; Eltham, September 1927, ¥. E, Wilson; six, Upway, J. E. Dixon; five without exact date or locality, J.B, Dixon; five also without exact locality or date, F. P. Spry (N.M.). Onur figure was checked, in Europe, by Dr. T. E. Woodward, against Erichson’s type, from Tasmania. Genus Porander gen. nov. Pronotum at apex narrower than head with eyes, wider af base than length, dise somewhat flattened with an incipient transverse sulcus well behind middle. Anterior margin raised to form a conspicuous collar which has two short lateral tooth-like processes, Lateral 388 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM margins curved in just before collar, sinuate in region of sulcus, obtuse in front of sulcus, with an acute margin behind. Scutellum about as long as wide, hemelytra with abbreviated membrane and dividing line between corium and clavus obscure. Punctations on hemelytra numerous but not so obviously placed in lines as on Huander. Head, anterior lobe of pronotum and scutellum with numerous large pit-like punctations, each containing a short white hair. Fore-femora much more incrassated than Euander with four prominent teeth beneath and many smaller ones. Fore-tibiae curved. First segment of tarsi longer than remaining two together. Type of genus: Porander scudderi sp. nov. This genus is apparently closely related to Euander. It differs from it in the curious punctations of the head, fore lobe of pronotum, and scutellum, and the much more incrassate fore femora. The pronotal constriction is well posteriad and Porander, although related to Euander, appears to be also on a side branch from the main line of development. Porander scudderi sp. nov. Plate 15, fig. D Black with luteous white markings. Head black, eyes dark brown. Head has a rather short white sparse pubescence mainly located in the punctations. First, third and fourth segments of antennae black, second segment brown. Anterior lobe of pronotum black with numerous coarse deep punctations each bearing a hair and with odd small smooth areas scattered over disc. Collar narrow, brownish-luteous with a single row of punctations across it. Hind lobe of pronotum luteous with numerous coarse brownish punctations many of them concentrated into about five longitudinal fuscous areas. Scutellum black, with same hair bearing pit-like punctations as head, extreme apex white and also two white points on disc near apex, sometimes confluent with it. Hemelytra with a vestigial membrane, luteous with numerous blackish-brown punctations and some odd small infuscated patches. Body beneath black, rostrum brownish. A luteous spot on the propleurae on the frontal margin beneath and marking the end of sulcus above. Visible portion of connexivum (except for a transverse dark GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 389 bar), hind margin of metapleura (except for a cluster of dark puncta- tions), and patches on upper hind corners of abdominal pleurae V, VI, and VII, luteous. All tibiae and tarsi brownish, extreme apices of femora and bases of tibiae luteous, Length: 4-6 mm, Locality: South Australia: Holotype male, allotype female, two paratype males, sweeping undergrowth, Eucalyptus obliqua dry sclerophyll forest, Naracoorte Cave Reserve, 25 October 1958, G. F. Gross; two paratype males, one nymph, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island, Museum Expedition, February 1926 (S.A.M.). New South Wales: One paratype male, Gosford (S.A.M.); Sydney, 2 November 1930, K. Spence; Waverley, Sydney, 1 November 1901, W.G.B.; North Bondi, October 1930, K.K.S. (A.M.), Australian Capital Territory: Three paratype males and one paratype female, sweepmg vegetation, Black Mountain, Canberra, 26 November 1959, G. F’, Gross (S.A.M.). Victoria: One paratype female, Woori Yallock, F. BK. Wilson; two paratype females, Eltham, J. H. Dixon (N.M.). Tasmania: One paratype, Bridport, October 1913 (8.A.M.); in fallen leaves, Hobart, Lea (G. G. BE, Scudder Coll., Vancouver). Genus Udeocoris Bergroth Udeocoris Bergroth, 1918: Ann, hist, nat, Mus, hung., 16: 310. Head oblong, with eyes a little wider than apex of pronotum. Byes touching or not anterior margin of pronotum, ocelli present, close to eyes, Pronotum wider than long, without a collar or any trace of a suleus; anterior margin straight, lateral margins straight, con- verging towards apex, fairly acute or almost carinate. Humeral angles of pronotum rounded, hind margin shallowly coneave. Dise of pronotum nearly flat, a little more arched in the anterior region, Scutellum about as long as wide or longer; very flat, sometimes finely punetate, just a trace of longitudinal keel. Hemelytra with or without an abbreviated membrane, when membrane is abbreviated the hemelytra become coriaceous and the division between corium and clayus obseure. Fore femora moderately incrassated, with a row of four to seven robust spines on the apical half on the inner ventral margin, the teeth becoming regularly smaller from apex of femora to middle. Hind and middle femora flattened, first segment of last tarsus longer than the apical pair together. 390 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Type of genus: Udeocoris nigroaeneus (Erichson) The genus is evidently close to Euander which it resembles in general coloration, in the black fore portion of the pronotum and stramineous but darkly punctate hind region. It differs in showing not the slightest trace of a transverse constriction on the pronotum, It therefore seems to be the first member of a sub-line of genera of these peculiar Myodochini in which the typical Myodochine constriction is completely lost. Udeocoris is the apparent link between Euander and Telocoris, Udeocoris nigroaeneus (Erichs) Plate 15, fig. B Pachymerus nigroaeneus Erichson, 1842: Arch, fiir Naturges., 8 (1): 280. Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc. Qld., 1: 54, figures. Rhyparochromus nigroaeneus Dohrn, 1859: Catalogus Hemipterorum: 34, Udeocoris nigroaeneus Bergroth, 1918: Ann. hist. nat. Mus. hung., 16: 311, Shining black, with or without yellowish-brown markings. Head shining black with scattered long hairs, eyes dark brown, First and last segments of antennae dark chocolate brown, second and third segments brown. Last three segments with scattered long hairs and a fine adpressed pilosity. Pronotum shining black, very sparsely punctate. Sometimes the humeral angles are obscurely brownish. Seutellam black, sparsely punctate, extreme tip usually pale. Hemelytra occasionally developed but generally with very reduced membrane and distinction between clavus and corium obscure. When humeral angles of the pronotum are pale the costal margin is also narrowly brown along the basal half. In one macropterous specimen there is also a pale spot on the costal margin just before the apex, Membrane when developed hyaline, brownish near apical margin of corium. In the fully winged form the punctures on the clavus are not in three regular rows. Beneath shining black, connexivium, bottom edges of epimera and episterna, trochanters, apices of femora, tibiae and tarsi yellowish- brown. Tibiae with scattered black spines. Rostrum dark brown. The Rockhampton specimen is castaneous. Length: 4.5-6 mm, GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 391 Locality: Torres Straits: Three, Moa Island, C. T. McNamara (S.A.M,), Queensland; Cairns; Townsville (S.A.M.) Serubby Creek, 1 mile EB. of Fairy Bower, Rockhampton, 3 August 1950, T, G. Campbell (C.S.LR.0.). This last specimen is wholly castaneous, with pale eyes, antennae, tibiae and tarsi. New South Wales: Two, Island Bend, Snowy Mountains, 20 October 1957, D. J. Wimbush; Hotel Kosciusko, Snowy Mountains, 10 October 1957, D, J. Wimbush (C.S.LR.0.); Mount Kosciusko, 5,000ft., February 1926, H. J, Carter (A.M.). Australian Capital Territory: Blondell’s, 10 Oetober 1930, W. K. Mughs (C.8.1.R.0.), Victoria: Bogong Plains, 5,600-6,000ft., January 1928, F, E. Wilson; Mildura (N.M.). Tasmania; In tussocks, Stanley; Lake Margaret, 12 January 1937, G. and C, Davis—this specimen is fully winged; Magnet, G. P. Whitley; Cradle Mountain, Carter and Lea; same locality, 27 December 1915, Prof, Flynn; twelve, Great Lake, December 1906 and 1907, J. W, Mellor; in tussocks, Huon River, Lea; Waratah, 12 March 1916 (8.A.M.). South Australia: Berlese Funnel out of leaf debris, Naracoorte Bog, February 1959, P, Aitken (S.,A.M.), Western Australia: Boyup Brook, March 1936, D, Q. Norris; Fremantle, 15 November 1934, K. R. Norris (C.8.1.R.0.) ; Warren River, W. D. Dodd; Swan River; two without exact locality (S.A.M.), Timor: There is a species hardly distinguishable from this in Timor, but all specimens I have are macropterous, whereas macroptery is very rare in the Australian specimens. A larger series igs needed from the island before its identity can be established, these I hope to obtain from a coming second expedition to the island. Our figure was checked by Dr. T. KE. Woodward against Hrichson’s type and specimens labelled ‘‘Udeocoris (n.g.) nigroaeneus’’ in Bergroth’s handwriting, in the collection of the British Museum, from Fremantle, Western Australia, Udeocoris rolandi (Distant) Plate 16, fig. B Naudarensia rolandi Distant, 1918: Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9) 2: 492. Black, with luteous and brown markings. Head black with sparse black hairs, finely rugulose, eyes brown. First segment of antennae (except at apex, which is paler) and fourth segment dark brown, second and third segments yellowish-brown. Tirst, second and third segments with long hairs. Anterior two-thirds of pronotum shining black, densely punctate, but extreme anterior margin yellowish-brown, Hind portion of 392, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM pronotnm Iuteons but with numerous black or brown punctations tending to darken the whole area, five vague fuscous longitudinal bands further darken the area. Seutellnm black, feebly arched with punctations arranged in two longitudinal rows, apex white sometimes with odd white points on the dise in the apical region. Hemelytra may be normal, or brachypterous with membrane very reduced, Ground colour of eorium and clavus Iuteous but with many brown or black punctations making the whole appear darker, there are seven fuscous areas, the largest being on the apical margin of the corium and the other in the apical angle. When the membrane is reduced the ‘‘elytra’’ leave uncovered the last two, and half of the third-to-last abdominal segments. Membrane black with white veins. Beneath black with some long white hairs and an extremely fine white adpressed pilosity. Rostrum, rostral canal, the anterior ventral portion of the prothorax, posterior margin of pro-, meso-, and meta- plearae, coxae and femora brown. Epimera and episterna of all three thoracic segments, trochanters, tibiae and tarsi -yellowish-brown, connexivum Inteous. Length: 4-6 mm, Locality: New South Wales; Bogan River, October 1981, J. Armstrong; Euralie, Narrandera Road, 9-19 October 1932, K. C. McKeown (A.M.); Broken Hill (S.A.M.); two, Coolabah, November 1905, W.G.B. (C.S8.1.R.0.), Vietoria: Melton, 25 October 1917, F.E.W. (S.A.M.), Bass Strait; Cliffy Island, 25 November 1949, D, J. Tughy (N.M.). South Australia: Tapanappa near Cape Jervis, 5-9 December 1949, G. F, Gross and N. B. Tindale; two, roadside swamp, Myponga, 26 November 1947, G. F. Gross; Yurgo, M. H, Hopgood; Port Wakefield; two, Flinders Island, F. Wood Jones; [ka Creek, Flinders Ranges, 24 November 1948, D, R. Hall; Italowie Gorge, Flinders Ranges, 30 October 1955, EH. T. Giles; Leigh Creek; Flinders Ranges, September 1925; twenty-five, Moolooloo, 2,000ft., Flinders Ranges, 1921, H, M. Hale; Upper Arcoona Creek, Gammon Ranges, 18 September 1956, G. F. Gross; Purple Downs; Miller Creek, F. Wood Jones; two, Blow Hole entrance, near Koonalda, 1 Jannary 1960, P, Aitken (8.A.M.); Blowhole near Ooldea, Troughton and Wright (A.M.), Western Australia: Mullewa, Miss F. May; Beverley, BH. F. du Boulay 8.A.M.). Port Hedland, October, Mjéberg (R.M.S.). Northern Territory: Fourteen, Double Punch Bowl meteorite crater, Henbury, 15-17 October 1953, G. F. Gross; six, near Alice Springs, GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 393 M. W. Mules; Finke River, J. W. Roe; Coniston Station near Alice Springs, M. W. Mules (S.A.M.). Udeocoris scudderi sp. nov. Plate 16, fig. D Black with dark brown and creamy white markings, Head shining black with a few long black hairs. Hyes, and first and last segments of antennae dark brown, third segment brown, second yellowish-brown. Anterior two-thirds of pronotum likewise shining black with a few sparse long hairs, extreme anterior margin reddish-brown. Hind third ereamy-white with scattered pale brown punctations. Scutellum shining black, with sparse long black hairs, apex white. Corium and clavus creamy-white in the main, with brown puncta- tions, a small brown spot on clavus just behind middle. On corium two-thirds of the way back a wide transverse irregular brown band which may or may not be joined along the apical margin to the brown apical angle, Membrane when developed hyaline, otherwise hemelytra hardened and distinction between corium and clayus obscure. Beneath shining black, punctate, pilose, hind margins of all thoracic pleurae, all epimera and episterna and connexivum creamy white. Anterior portion of prosternum reddish-brown. Coxae, trochanters, fore femora and apical halves of mid- and hind-femora dark brown, remainder of legs yellowish-brown, tarsi darker. Length; 2.5-4 mm. Locality; Western Australia: Holotype male, seven paratypes (three of them larvae), Beverley, E. F, du Boulay (8.A.M.). Victoria: Allotype female, fully winged, Lake Hattah, J. EK. Dixon, donated January 1940 (N.M.). New South Wales: Paratype, Bogan River, January 1932, T. Armstrong (A.M.). Differs from U. rolandi in its smaller size and the different pattern on the hemelytra. Genus Telocoris gen. nov- Head triangular, eyes not very prominent, touching anterior margin of pronotum. Pronotum a little wider than head with eyes, lateral margins faintly curved, obtuse, no trace of a transverse sulcus. Collar indistinct. Scutellum relatively large, longer than wide, Hemelytra normal and fully developed, clavus with punctures in three regular rows. 394 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fore femora somewhat incrassate, without spines. Mid- and hind-femora not noticeably expanded. Fore-tibiae about as long as femora, hind-tarsi with first segment about as long as apical pair together. Type of genus: Telocoris vittata (Distant) This genus seems to stand naturally at the end of the line of these modified genera. The pronotum is absolutely without trace of a transverse constriction, the fore-femora although still somewhat thickened, are unarmed, and the habitus is much more like that of a Lethaeine than a Myodochine. Its nearest relation would appear to be Udeocoris. Telocoris vittata (Distant) nov. comb. Plate 15, fig, A. Lamprodema vittata Distant, 1901: Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 500. Black or dark castaneous; hind angles of pronotum, antennae, basal two-thirds of corium and the whole anterior margin, outer half of clavus, and tibiae and tarsi, paler, almost luteous. Apical third of corium and immer half of clavus castaneous may be coarsely punctate, the latter then is laevigate along the central longitudinal area. Length: 4-5 mm. Locality: North Western Australia: Parry Harbour, Cape Bongainville, J. T. Walker (Distant’s type—B.M.); Broome, Mjéberg (R.M.S.); Northern Territory: Roper River, N. B. Tindale (S.A.M.). Queensland: Clermont, K. K. Spence (A.M.). REFERENCES Bergroth, E., 1918: Hendecas Generum Hemipterorum novorum vel subnovorum, Ann. hist. nat. Mus. hung., 16: 298-314. Dallas, W. 8., 1852: List of specimens of Hemipterous Insects in the collection of the British Museum IT: 369-592, four plates, Distant, W. L., 1901: Rhynchotal Notes—XT Heteroptera: Fam. Lygaeidae. Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 497-510, 1903-4: The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and Burma. Rhynchota—2. i-xvii, 1-503, 319 text figs, 1918: Contributions to a further knowledge of the Rhyn- chotal Family Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., 9 (2): 257-470, GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 395 Dohrn, R., 1859: Catalogus Hemipterorum, Erichson, W. F., 1842: Beitrage zur Insecten—Fauna von Vandiemans- land mit besonderer Berucksichtigung der geographischen Verbreitung der Insecten. Arch. Naturgesch., 8 (1): 83-787. Pls. 4 & 5, Evans, J. W., 1939: A new species of Dieuches, Dohrn (Hem. Ly gacidae) injurious to strawberries in Tasmania. Bull. ent. Res., 30 (3): 305-6. 1 text fig. Gulde, J., 1984: Die Wunsen Mitteleuropas 3. Frankfurt. Seudder, G. G. E., 1957: The Higher C ‘lassification of the Rhyparo- chrominse (Hem. Lygaeidae). Ent. mon. Mag., 4 (18): 152-156. Slater, J. A., 1957: Nomenclatorial Consideration in the Family Lygaeidae (Hemiptera: Heteroptera). Bull. Brooklyn ent. Soc., 52 (2): 35-38. Slater, J. A, and M, W. Sweet, 1961: A contribution to the Higher Classification of the Megalonotinae (Hemiptera: Lygaei- dae), Ann. ent. Soc, Amer., 54: 208-209. 1961: A Generie Key to the Nymphs of North American Lygaeidae (Hemiptera: Heteroptera). Ann. ent. Soe. Amer., 54: 333-340. Text figures. Stal, C., 1859: Konelign svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa Omkring Jorden, under Beful af G. A. Virgin 1851-1853. Zoologi I. Insecta Hemiptera Species novas descripsit, 219-298, Stockholm. 1862: Hemiptern mexicana enumeravit speciesque novas descripsit. Stett. ent. Ztg., 23: 81- 118, 273-281, 289-825, 437-462. 1865: Hemiptera africana, 2: 1-181. 1872: Genera Lygaeidarum Europae disposnit. Ofvers. Vetensk Okad. Férh. Stoekh., 29 (7): 87-62. 1874: Bnumeratio Hemipterorum. Bidrag till en Fortech- ning ofver all hittills Kirda Hemiptera, jemte system- atiska Meddelanden 4. K. svensk Vetensk Akad, Hand1., 12 (1); 1-186. Walker, F., 1872: Catalogue of the Specimens of Heteropterous- Hemiptera in the Collection of the British Museum. 8 Volumes. Rec, S.A. Musern Vou, 14, Pruare 14 eo ~ <£ is Ta fire qeege | Rec. S.A. Museen Vow, 14, Pouare 15 Rec. S.A. Messer Vou. 14. Phare 16 SACRED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA TRIBE, WESTERN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary This paper records twenty sacred objects (kulpidji) of the Pitjandjara tribe who inhabit the western deserts of central Australia. Seventeen of them are associated with Kikingura, the totemic place of the Windulka (mulga-seed) aborigines, on the western end of the Petermann Ranges, and three are from Katatjuta, a group of isolated monoliths about twenty miles west of Ayers Rock. Being unable to visit Kikingura, the totemic place of the mulga-seed people, I could not link the designs on the kulpidji with the associated topography. To a limited degree, however, I was able to do so with those associated with Katatjuta, and even more fully with a series belonging to the totemic groups of Ayers Rock. SACRED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA TRIBE, WESTERN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Associate IN Erxunotocy, Sovran Ausrratian Museum Fig. 1-5 INTRODUCTION This paper records twenty sacred objects (kulpidji) of the Pitjandjara tribe who inhabit the western deserts of central Australia, Seventeen of them are associated with Kikingura, the totemic place of the Windulka (mulga-seed) aborigines, on the western end of the Petermann Ranges, and three are from Katatjuta, a group of isolated monoliths about twenty miles west of Ayers Rock. Being unable to visit Kikingura, the totemie place of the mulga- seed people, I could not link the designs on the kulpidji with the associated topography. To a limited degree, however, I was able to do so with those associated with Katatjuta, and even more fully with a series belonging to the totemic groups of Ayers Rock.” BELIEFS ASSOCIATED WITH THE KULPIDJI Spencer and Gillen (1899, Chap. 5), give a particularly full account of the beliefs and functions of the sacred objects, the churinga (¢jurunga) of the Aranda tribe of Central Anstralia, which, in some respects, perform the same functions as the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara. Among other things, the Aranda believe that the child spirit leaves the tjurunga and entering the body of a woman that happened to be passing, starts life as a human being. At death, the spirit of the dead returns to the tjurunga from which it had emerged previously. My research into the Pitjandjara beliefs of conception and life after death, although far from complete, indicate that the kulpidjr is neither associated with the life cyele of the Pitjandjara in the same manner as the tjwrunga is with the Aranda, nor does it ocenpy such an important place in the philosophical beliefs. (1) A description of the Ayers Roek kulpidji will be published elsewhere. (2) Por the purpose of this paper, this belief has been much simplified. *9 398 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM Nevertheless, the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara are objects of con- siderable sanctity and value. ‘They are a record, in particularly limited symbolism, of the mythical beliefs of the tribe, and occupy an important part in the ceremonies (belonging to the same totem as the kulpidyi), when the old men, laying the sacred object on the ground, relate the myth and explain the meaning of the designs engraved on its surface, The aborigines, also, believing that the kulpidji is impregnated with a life essence (kurunba or kurunita; Mountlord, 1948, pp. 111-113), often press the sacred objects against their body, believing that some of the kuwrunba, by leaving the kulpidji, and entering their body, gives them increased strength and vitality, The kulpidji, too, are particularly sacred, and all knowledge of them rigidly confined to the fully initiated men. Under no condilions must they be seen by the women or the uninitiated youths, or even mentioned within their hearing. DESIGNS Spencer and Gillen (1899, p. 145) when referring to the Aranda tjurunga, point out that ‘the whole design consists, with few exceptions, of a conventional arrangement of circular, semi-circular, spiral, curved and straight lines, together with dots’’, As one travels from central to north-eastern Australia, however, the concentric circles of the Aranda change, first to concentric squares, then to the inter- locking key pattern, a characteristic of the art of north-western Australia (Davidson, 1937, p, 78, fig. 57). The majority of the designs on the kulpidji in this paper are of the typical Aranda type, those on figs. 1 and 2 being typical, There are two examples of the concentric squares, fig, 30, and 4QGH (Davidson, 1937, fig, 55), A number of the kulpidji, however, figs. 3AB, 3HK, 8D, 40D, 5A, and 5B, are engraved with unusual designs which, so far as T am aware, previously haye not been recorded, On these kulpidji, the irregular designs are outlined with shallow holes, about three-sixteenth of an inch in diameter, and the spaces of the designs filled in with a series of straight, parallel lines. METHODS OF ENGRAVING When carrying out research among the aborigines of the Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of Western Australia, I Vig. 1, AD, Unecircumeised Windulka (mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura. B. Muna Sisters at, Kikinguya, C, Paratata (wallaby) men at Kikingura. FH, Uncireumcised Windulka (mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura. Q. Paratata (wallaby) tien at Kikingura, J, Yoong Windulka (mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura, 400 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM watched an aboriginal engrave a spiral design on a spearthrower. Using, as an engraving tool, the incisor tooth of an opossum, still in the skull, the aboriginal held and operated the tool in somewhat the same manner as that of the modern engraver in metals. He was able to maintain such an efficient control over his primitive engraving tool that, not once, during the engraving of the design, did he allow the tool to slip and over-run his cut. Further east, however, the aboriginal engravers I have watched, apparently not so sure of their skill, placed their thumb-nail at the end of the cut to prevent any damage to the design should the tool slip, DESCRIPTION OF SACRED OBJECTS FROM KIKINGURA There are seventeen saered objects (kalpidji) desertbed in this paper that belong to the totemie place of Kikingura. They are:— (A) The Windulka (mulga-seed) men, women and uncireumecised youths (eleven), (B) The Tjukula men (one), (C) The Paratata (wallaby) men (two). (D) The Maua sisters (two), (E) The Kaduna women (ore), (A) The Windulka (mulga-seed) People Hight of the kulpidji belong to the adult mulga-seed people of Kikingura: (i) fig, 2DE; (ii) 2AH; (iii) 80D; (iv) 3NF; (v) 4AF; (vi) 4BE; (vii) 4CD; and (viii) 4GH, and three to the uncircumcised boys: (1) IAD; (ii) 1FH; and (iii) 1J, (i) The kulpidji illustrated on fig. 2DK, pictures the camps of the mulga-seed women (the wives of the men shown on kulpidja, fiz, 4GF), On 2D, the three large groups of concentric cireles, a, b, e, are the camps of the married women, and the four small groups, g, d, and h, e, their breasts. The donble lines joining these groups of smaller concentric circles are the sears hetween the breasts of the women, and the smaller series of triple lines, mostly curved, that join the larger to the smaller concentric circles, the scars on their arms. The crescents on either end of the kulpidji represent the windbreaks of the camps of the mythical women. On the reverse side of the hulpidji (fig. 2E), the larger groups of concentric circles represent the camps of the married women; the MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 401 smaller a, b; ¢, d, their breasts, and the lines joining them, the sears between the breasts. The designs, n, t, are the windbreaks of the camps of the women, and the crescents on the edges of the kulpidgi, the hoomerangs of their hasbands. (ii) This kulpidji (fiz, 2AT1), illustrates a group of young and old Windulka men at. Kikingura. The larger groups of concentric circles on fig, 2A, represent the older Windulka men, and the smaller groups, the younger men, The lines joining the smaller circles together are the chest scars of the young men and the groups of short marks on the edge of the sacred objects, the scars on their upper arms. The curving lines throughout the whole of the engraved design represent the boomerangs of both the older and the younger men. On the reverse side (fig. 2H), the larger concentric circles, as before, are the old men, the smaller, the young men; the horizontal group of lines joining the smaller concentric circles, the chest sears and the triple groups of lines, the spearthrowers of both the old and the young men, (iii) The engraved designs on this kulpidyi (fig. 8CD), represent a gronp of Mulga-seed people travelling northward from a soakage at Kikingura, Fig. 3D deals with the first section of that journey from the soakage at Kikingura to a spring in the side of a hill at Tjukula, The design b, on the top of 3D, is the soak af Kikingura, and a, on the bottom, the spring at Tjukula, The meandering design, W, running up the middle uf the kulpidji, symbolises the track made by the mythical people as they travelled from one locality to the other, and the irregular shapes, on either side of the design W, the footmarks of the travelling people. On 3C, the obverse side of the kalpidji, the larger groups of concentric squares represent groups of mulga-seed men at Kikingura sitting eross-legged in the ground, The smaller groups of concentric aqnares, q,m; p, 1; and x, o, refer to twin peaks in the mountains of Kikingura. (iv) The kulpidji Wustrated by fig. 3EF refers to mythical mulga trees that grew at Kikingura during the time of creation. The irregular designs on fig. 83E (made up of a series of holes drilled in the surface of the kulpidji, and filled with a series of (3) This is a point of some interest, because the Pitjandjara aborigines do not use the hoomernang. 402 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig. 2. AH, Old and young Windulla (mulga-seed) men at Kikingura, BC. Mana Sisters at Kikingura. DE, Windulla (mulga-sced) women at Kikingura. EG. Kaduna women at Kikingura. MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 403 parallel lines), symbolise groups of Windulka men sitting quietly in their camps at Kikingura. The design, o, on the top, indicate a group of living mulga trees (almost certainly of totemic importance), On the other side of the kulpidji (fig. 8F), the irregular designs (similar to those on 3B), indicate the eamps of the M ulga-seed men at Kikingura and the short meandering design at k, a track made by the people as they walked from camp to camp. (v) The kulpidji illustrated on fig. 4AF, refers to a number of Mulgs-seed men who had always camped at Kikingura. The series of concentric cireles on both sides of this kulpidji show the adult men seated mm their camps; the vertical parallel lines, the spearthrowers of the Windulka men leaning against their windbreaks, and the diagonal lines, the men earrying their spearthrowers in the erooks of their arms, The designs on the top of fig. 4A illustrate the boomerangs and shields of the men. (vi) Fig. 4BE illustrate a group of Windulka men and boys in their camp at Kikingnra. The largest groups of concentric cireles on both sides of the kulpidji are the camps of the adult men; the inter- mediate size, those of the adolescent youths ready for initiation, and the smallest, very young boys. The central group of triple lines on the sides of both 4B and &, indicate the spears of the aborigines, and the diagonal lines, their spearthrowers. There is a slight variation in the design on fig. 41, the horizontal groups of lines representing the chest scars on the bodies of the men and the older boys. (vii) Fig. 40D also deals with the mythical Mulga-seed men camping at Kikingura, The irregular designs at fig. 4C symbolise groups of men seated on the ground and the euryilimear lines on the top of the kulpidji, their windbreaks. The lines of holes separating the groups of parallel lines, indicate the piles of mulga seed which had been collected by the wives of the mythical mulga-seed men. The designs on the reverse side: (fig. 4D), represent mniga trees, the seed of which, during the early days of the world, fell to the ground in such quantities that the men and women of those times always had an abundance of food, As on the obverse side (fig. 40), the lines of holes on the surface of the kylpidji symbolise piles of mulga seed," (4) Mulga seed when ground into flour, made into a eake and baked in the ashes of the camp fire, is a favourite food of the aborigines. 404 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM (viii) Both sides of the kulpidji illustrated on fig. 4GH have identical meanings. ‘lhe diamond shapes indicate the camps of the Mulga-seed men and women at Kikingura, the lines of holes, the sticks in the windbreaks of the camps, and the horizontal parallel lines, the scars on the upper arms of the men. Three kulpidji, figs. 1AD, 1FH, and 1J, deal with the mythical uncireumeised boys of Kikingura. (i) On fig. LAD, the larger of the concentric circles, a, b, e, d, on fig, 1A, are the camps of the elder uncireameised boys (called bulga at this stage of their life), and the groups e, f, ¢, hb, those of the younger boys. The triangular patterns on the borders of the kulpidji symbolise the boomerangs of the older boys. The designs on the reverse side (fig. 1D), althongh slightly different, have similar meanings. (ii) Mig. JF also deals with the mythical uninitiated Mulga- seed boys at IGkingura, The concentric circles on the obverse side (fig. 1), are the boys in their camps, and the two designs at @ and h, pairs of boys playing see-saw on a log balanced across a tree trunks, The hoomerangs of the youths are indicated at a, b, and ¢; and their body sears by group of triple lines at d. On the reverse side of fig, 1H, the series of coneentric circles, a, b, ¢, d, are the camp-fires of the mythical youths and the groups of curved lines e, f, g, h, the hoys lying beside their fires. The groups of concentri¢ circles at i, k, indicate other boys resting in the shade of the trees. (iii) On the third hulpidji of the mythieal boys (fig, 17), the groups of concentric circles, a, b, e, d, ete., are the eamp fires, and the groups of curving lines, g, h, and j, the uninitiated boys warming themselves beside those fires. The smallest cirele, f, on the extreme left represents a small child sitting by himself, (B) The Tjukula Men One kulpidji (fig. 3AB), over five feet long, deals with the journey of a group of mythical (unidentified) Tjukula men, The obverse side (fig. 3A), illustrates a journey from Kikingura northward to Tjukula, where there is a spring of that name in the side of a hill, and the reverse side, the journey from 'ljukula to a rock-hole called Pulitjilda, From this point, according to my informants, which was the end of the Tjukula line of songs, the mythieal men ‘flew’? away, and the owners of the kulpidji had no further knowledge of them. MOUNTFORD—PITJANDIARA SACRED OBJECTS 405 My L rf Nc i i WH “i i ) i ik i) al Fig. 3. AB, Journey of Tjukula men from Kikingura. CD, Windulka (mulga-seed) mun at Kikingora, EP. Windulka (mulga-seed) men at MKikingura. 406 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM On fig. 3B, the meandering pattern, o, outlined with small holes and filled in with short parallel lines, symbolises the track made by the mythical Tjukula men as they travelled from Kikingura, a, to Tjukula, «. The irregular designs covering the remainder of the kulpidji represent the tracks made by the Tjukula men as they travelled from one locality to the other. The other side of the kulpidji (fig. 3A), the irregular patterns represent the footmarks of the Tjukula men as they continued their journey from the spring at Tjukula, a, to the rock-hole at Pulitjilda, b. (C) The Wallabies, Paratata Two kulpidji, figs. 1C and 1G, belong to the totem of the mythical wallaby (Paratata) men. These mythical creatures, relatives of the Mulga-seed men, lived permanently at Kikingura. (i) Fig. 1C, a beautifully-engraved, stone kulpidji, deals with an old wallaby man at Kikingura. The concentric circles at m is the place where the Paratata man once camped. The cireles, q and o are his feet, and the groups of parallel lines a, b, his legs. The U-shaped design, p, was onee his windbreak, and the groups of crescents, young wallabies lying down. It is likely, although my informants did not say so, that these young wallabies were the children of the old man. The camp of the wallaby is now a large spring of water; his feet are two rock-holes; his legs, stony ridges, and the bodies of the young wallabies, outcrops of stones, (ii) On the small stone kulpidji (fig. 1G), the concentrie circles at m,n, are places at Kikingura where a Paratata man once camped. At u, rand v, s, are his feet, and the parallel straight lines joming them to m and m respectively, his legs. The designs, k, w, x and y, are the painted decorations on the back of the Paratata man. The designs on this side of the kulpidji, like those on fig. 10, almost certainly refer to topographical features, (D) The Mana Sisters Two kulpidjis (fig. 1B and fig, 2BC), deal with the Mana sisters who lived at Kikingura during creation times. (i) The four series of concentric circles, on fiz. 1B, are the Mana wamen sitting on the ground; the triple diagonal lines, symbolising their legs, The smaller pairs of circles, indicate their breasts; the MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 407 short transverse lines along the edge of the kulpidji, the scars on their chests, and the triple parallel horizontal lines, the windbreak behind which the Mana women slept. The engraved designs on the reverse side have similar meanings. (ii) The four large groups of concentric cireles on fig. 2C, again represent the Mana women seated on the ground; the paired groups of concentric circles, q, j; p, k; and o, m, their breasts, and the short transverse lines joining the smaller circles their chest scars. The diagonal lines on this kulpidji represent the outstretched legs of the women (see fie. 1B). On fig. 2B, the five series of concentrie circles represent the Mana women sitting down and the meandering lines, the hair-string ornament whieh the women wore around their neck and over their shoulders, (KX) The Kaduna Women The kulpidji (fig. 2FG), belongs to a group of Kaduna women, the wives of the Mulga-seed men (see fig. 8CD), The large concentric cireles j, k, on 2F, are two of the Kaduna women; q, a, and ¢, 1, their breasts and the three crescent designs on the wpper part of the kulpidji, the scars on their arms. The body of a third Kaduna woman is indicated at m. On the reverse side (fig. 2G), a, b, e, d, are places where four of the adult Kaduna women sat down and e, that of a young girl. The paired concentric circles are the breasts of the older women. SACRED OBJECTS FROM KATATJUTA Three kulpidji are associated with Katatjuta, a group of enormous domes of rock about twenty miles west of Ayers Rock, the highest. of them, Mount Olga, rising to almost eighteen hundred feet above the surrounding plain, One kulpidjz (fig. 5A), belongs to the myth of the viant Pungalunga men of the western side, and two, fig. 5B and 5C, to the mythical Mingiri (brown desert mouse) women of the eastern face. (A) The Pungalunga Men (i) The irregular designs, j, k, ] and m, on one side of fig. 5C (the other side is plain) symbolise the footmarks of the giant Pungalunga men of creation times, whose camps, at the close of the ‘“ereation’’ period, were transformed into a series of huge monoliths on the western side of Katatjuta, Mountford (1948, p, 98) gives a RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM i 155) ty is rth a aD He et Bath ‘ ‘) hy i = el in : ayer ns \\ SF Sates se sph 5 Seetne ch Ms —s : SS — Ne Fig. 4 AF, Windulka (mulga-seed) men at Kikingura. BE, Mindutka (mulga-seed) men at Kikingura, CD, Windulka (mulga-seed) man and poye ut Kikingura, Windulka (wwulga-sed) men at Kikingura, GH. MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 409 short description of the Pungalunga myth. The engraved rectangles at a, b, ¢, ete, and g, h, i, refer to unidentified trees associated with the Pungalunga myth, (B) The Mingire Women Two kulpidji (fig. 5A and fig, 5B), belong to the myth of the Mingiri (mice) women who lived on the eastern side of Katatjuta. (i) The kulpidji, 5A, like 5B, is engraved only on one side. The meandering design, a, along the middle of the kulpidji represents a watercourse at Katatjuta, ealled Gundundura, which is associated with the myth of the Mingirt women, The irregular patterns are piles of the yellow-fruited solanum jirtunba, which the Mingiri women collected as food. At the close of the creation period these piles of food were transformed into high rocky monoliths. (ii) Fig. 5B is a kulpidji with a series of simple circles that is associated with the Mingiri myth of Katatjuta, Those at a, a, repre- sent the camps of the women; b, b, the breasts of one of the women; e, ¢, a pregnant Mingiri woman who gave birth to her child, d, d, under the mulga trees, e, e, At present, a, a, are high rocky domes, b, b, patehes of level ground, ¢, ¢, small rock-holes, d, d, a cave and e, c, mulga trees. Fig. 5. Katatjuta, AB. Mingiri (mico) women at Katatjuta. Q, Pungalwnaga men at Katatjuta. 410 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM DISCUSSION An examination of the Pitjandjara kulpidji and of others I have studied among the Aranda, Ngalia and Walpiri (Wailbri) tribes of Central Australia has shown that the aborigines of this area use a remarkably limited number of art motifs to illustrate the mythical stories they engraye on their sacred objects, motifs which are particularly simple, being almost entirely limited to circles, spirals, parallel straight and meandering lines, rows of dots, and little else. Figs. 1 and 2 in this paper are typical of these motifs. Among the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara, however, are two different motifs, concentric squares, fiz, 83C and 4GH, and another curious and previously unrecorded motif, i.e, 83AB, 3HF, ete. The motifs on these kulpidji are even more limited than the curvilinear designs on the remainder, This paucity of design elements has meant that the same motif, will, on different and sometimes on the same kulpidji, have different meanings. Until, however, we have a much wider range of fully interpreted kulpidji or other sacred objects available for study, it is not possible to make an analysis of the designs and to find out the stability, or otherwise, of any particular motif. TECHNIQUES OF RECORDING The method employed for recording the engraved designs was to first make a rubbing with black lumber crayon of the design on strong tissue paper. On this rubbing I wrote the meanings of the engraved designs and in my field note book, details of the associated myth. The drawings on figs. 1-5 were traced from the rnbbings made in the field. By this method, a much more accurate record is possible than by any other means. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to the Minister for Territories (The Hon, Paul Hasluck, M.P.) and hig staff for their unstinted help in making this research possible, to the South Australian Museum for the use of their facilities, and to Miss Brenda Hubbard for her excellent drawings of the kulpidji, (5) Although the aborigines were willing to part with the majority of these sacred objects, departmental regulations did not allow me to aceept them. However, the rubbings and tho associated data gave mo the information I required, MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 4i1 SUMMARY This paper records the designs, the meanings, and to a limited degree, the myths belonging to twenty-one sacred objects of the Pitjandjara tribe of western central Australia. LITERATURE CITED Davidson, D. 8., 1937: A Preliminary Consideration of Aboriginal Decorative Art. Memoirs of American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, 9. Mountford, ©. P., 1948: Brown Men and Red Sand. (Melbourne.) Spencer, W. B. and Gillen, F. J., 1899: Native Tribes of Central Australia. (London.) voLUME 14 No. 3 1963 de ; : | RECORDS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Published by the Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide. Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical. FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS OF THE LATE TERTIARY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By ALDEN H. MILLER, MUSEUM OF PALEONTOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA Summary Two kinds of ratite birds occur in the late Tertiary of the Lake Eyre region of Australia. These fossils are part of the Palankarinna fauna, tentatively referred to the early Pliocene, and were found in the Mampuwordu Sands at Lake Palankarinna. One specimen is described as a new species of emu, Dromiceius ocypus, which shows foot specialization equivalent to that of the modern emus of the continent. It is a smaller species than the living emu of the area but has foot proportions like the even smaller insular species of Pleistocene and Recent times. The other specimen is a fragmentary pelvis which is referred to the genus Genyornis. It is equivalent in size to the giant extinct Genyornis newtoni of the Pleistocene. The fossils here reported extend the paleontologic record of the avian families Dromiceiidae and Dromornithidae from the late Pleistocene back to the Pliocene. FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS OF THE LATE TERTIARY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By ALDEN H. MILLER, Museum or PatsontoLocy, UNIVERSITY or CALIFORNIA Fig. 1-2 SUMMARY Two kinds of ratite birds occur in the late Tertiary of the Lake Eyre region of Australia, These fossils are part of the Palankarinna fauna, tentatively referred to the early Pliocene, and were found in the Mampuwordu Sands at Lake Palankarinna. One specimen is described as a new species of emu, Dromiceius ocypus, which shows foot specialization equivalent to that of the modern emus of the continent. It is a smaller species than the living emu of the area but has foot proportions like the even smaller insular species of Pleistocene and Recent times. The other specimen is a fragmentary pelvis which is referred to the genus Genyornis. It is equivalent in size to the giant extinct Genyornis newtoni of the Pleistocene. The fossils here reported extend the paleontologie record of the avian families Dromiceiidae and Dromornithidae from the late Pleistocene back to the Pliocene. INTRODUCTION The discovery of Tertiary fossil-bearing deposits in the Lake Eyre basin of South Australia was made known in 1954 by R. A. Stirton. One of the fossil assemblages found was of late Tertiary age and has been tentatively referred to the early Pliocene. It has been designated the Palankarinna fauna (Stirton, Tedford, and Miller, 1961, p. 37). In our preliminary listing of this fauna, a ratite bird was mentioned (p. 38). This may now be described as well as an additional ratite from the same formation that was obtained in the course of the field expedition of 1961. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Work on fossil vertebrates of South Australia has continued to receive the generous support and encouragement of the South A 414 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Australian Museum and its staff, In 1961 we were especially aided by Mr. Norman B, Tindale and Paul F, Lawson and in the field by Lawson and Harry J, Bowshall. The expedition in that year was made possible by a grant from the National Science Foundation of the United States. For opportunity to examine Pleistocene and Recent emu bones I am indebted also to Edmund D, Gill and Allan Mefvey of the National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, and to H. T. Condon of the South Australian Museum. DESCRIPTIONS Family DROMICEIIDAE The tarsometatarsus of an emu was obtained at the Lawson Quarry (U.C.M.P. locality V 5769) at Lake Palankarinna in 1957. It is essentially complete and lacks only the tip of the intercotylar prominence, The surface of much of the shaft is checked and in places eroded, but the distal articular area is complete and well preserved as is the hypotarsus, ‘he shapes and relative sizes of the trochleae, the configuration of the plantar surface, the presence and location of the distal foramen, and the details of the hypotarsus all conform to those of the modern emus (Dromiceius) and in no respect suggest the conditions in the cassowaries (see fig. 1). The shortness and relative stoutness of the fossil is somewhat like the condition in cassuwaries (Casuarius wnappendiculatus) but in proportions it is even closer to the extinct forms of Recent and Pleistocene emus of the islands off the southern border of the Australian continent, namely Dromicetus diemenianus and Dromiceius minor, Comparisons huve been made with seven skeletons of the modern emn of the continent, Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, and with measure- ments I have taken of 14 tarsometatarsi of mimor, including those labelled as ‘‘hypotypes’’ at Melhourne and with two complete tarso- metalarsi of diemenianus in the South Australian Museum, The measurements show that the Pliocene emu was significantly shorter- legged than the modern continental bird and larger than the insular forms while possessing the relatively greater width of the latter, The Plineene species may be known as: Dromiceius ocypus sp. nov. Type: Right tarsometatarsus, essentially complete. South Australian Mus, No, P 13444; Univ. Calif. Mus, Paleo. locality No. V 5769, Mampuwordu Sands, Lake Palankarinna, late Tertiary, apparently early Pliocene. MILLER—FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS 415 *1 i fa: 2 3 13 3 nt 5 Fig. 1. Right tarsometatarsi of emus and cassowaries, plantar view, & 4. a. Ob. Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, large and average individuals. ¢. Dromiceius ocypus, type. ad, Casuarius unappendicilatus, 416 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Diagnosis: Similar in foot structure to Dromiceius novae- hollandiae but relative breadth of distal end of tarsometatarsus greater and linear dimensions less. Ratio of width across trochleae to length of tarsometatarsus 15.7 per cent as contrasted with 13.3 to 14.5 (average 13.6) per cent in novae-hollandiae and length 15 per cent less. Analysis and comparison: Individual variation in size in emus is rather great as casual examination reveals. One can readily set aside the tarsometatarsi of individuals that are not yet fully grown by reason of the evidence of immaturity in the incomplete fusion of the tarsal region, the imperfect ossification in the area of the distal foramen and at the junction of the trochleae, and the roughness of the surfaces of the shaft. But even in bones of adults linear dimensions show considerable range of variation. For example, the coefficient of variation in tarsal length of the seven adult modern emus is 4.6 per cent. The bones of Dromiceius minor and of D. diemenianus represented in table 1, as well as the tarsometatarsus of D. ocypus, are those of adults. The departure of the fossil from the modern emu in tarsal length and relative width of the distal end of the tarso- metatarsus was found to be significant (t test, P — < 0.02 and < 0.01, respectively). Although the individual measurements of the series of Dromiceius minor were not recorded, the range of the 14 specimens and the values for D. diemenianus are such that there seems to be no possibility of overlap of either with D. ocypus. The latter exceeds the maximum of D. minor by 4.7 em. or 16 per cent. The ratio of the width across the trochleae to tarsal length is, however, the same in minor, diemenianus, and ocypus. Table 1 Measurements of Tarsometatarsi of Emus (Dromiceius) in Millimeters D. novae-hollandiae D. ocypus D. minor D. diemenianus (7 specimens) (14 specimens) (2 specimens) Mean Standard and Range deviation Mini- Maxi- (N-1) mum mum Total length ............. 399 (377-431) 18-2 337-0 231-0 290-0 252-0 250-0 Distal width across trochleae 54-5 (51-0-58-9) 2:8 53-2 42-0 45-0 42-7 42:8 Proximal width .......... 53-2 (51-1-56-7) 2-4 50-5 36-5 42-0 35-8 37-8 Least depth of shaft ...... 13-5 (12-5-14-8) 0-85 12:6 8-4 10-5 10-4 9-9 Ratio of distal width to length (per cent) ........ 13-6 (13-3-14-5) 046 1567 155 166 17:0 171 Three names have been created for late Pleistocene emus from the continent of Australia by De Vis (1884, 1888, 1892). Two of these MILLER—FOSSIL, RATTITE BIRDS 417 are based on very unsatisfactory fragments, Dromiceius queenslandiae (De Vis, 1884) is known from a proximal part of a left femur. Hntton’s report (1893) on this brings out characteristics of shape which seem to relate it either to the emus or the Dromornithidae rather than {0 the moas, contrary to the original view of the describer. Oliver (1949, pp. 80-88, 183) makes no appraisal of Hutton’s allocation and returns yueenslandiae to the moas. Oliver’s photographs and description of this fossil compared with bones of moas (Pachyornis), emus, and eassowaries at hand do not convince me that his assignment is well established, In any event the bird was roughly 50 per cent larger than Dromiceius novae-hollandiae and thus it is wholly distinet from 2D. oeypus, DPromiceius gracilipes (De Vis, 1892) was based on a very fragmentary distal end of a tarsometatarsus that should never have beer nained. Because it, lacks the distal tarsal foramen characteristic of emus, it may not even belong to this group. The figure of it suggests that there has been consideruble abrasion of the specimen and. there- fore evidence of immaturity may have been lost. The specimen could have been part of an immature emu iy which the distal foramen had not yet formed, or it could be from a small cassowary, Clearly it has no close affinity with D. seypus. Dromiceius patricius (De Vis, 1888) was based on a tibiotarsus; a coracoid was also deseribed and provisionally referred to it. The tibiotarsus was stated to reflect a heavier, more muscular leg than that of the modern emu. De Vis’ description of differences in configuration leave one in doubt as to their significance, and examina- tion of his figures of tibiotarsal fragments gives no assurance of the validity of the differences. The size of patricivs as measured from the figures is not greater than in large individuals of modern emus, nor is the hone heavier. Much other Pleistocene material has been referred to patricius, including remains from the Pleistocene of the Lake Eyre region. Whether or not patricius or this referred material in fact represents a distinct Pleistocene form close to movae-hollandiae cannot be determined until the Pleistocene fossils are assembled and fully analyzed for variability and significance of differences. At present the validity of patricius seems questionable, but it is safe to say that it shows no features that suggest identity with ocypus. The geveral conclusion to be drawn from the discovery and analysis of Dramiceius ocypus is that the structure of the foot of amus of the late Tertiary had alresdy reached the level of specializa- tion seen in the group today, The changes to be noted sinee then in 418 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM this group of birds on the mainland have been an inerease in size and moderate slenderizing of proportions. The insular emns, if direct descendants, did not, change proportions and either became small or represent persistence of a line of small forms. Family DROMORNITHIDAE At the Lawson Quarry (locality V 5769) in 1961 a Fragment of a pelvis (U. C. Mus, Paleo. No, 60613) was obtained which, although very incomplete, shows features distinctive of the giant Pleistocene bird Genyornis. The fragment consists of the base of the left pubis and ischiun: surrounding the obturator foramen, the posterior and ventral parts of the acetabulum, and the ascending bar of the ischium. These parts of the pelvis have been compared with those of emus, with photographie plates of Genyornis newtoni (Stirling, 1913; pls. XXXVI and XXXIX), and with a large moa (Pachyornis elephantopus). The Pliocene fossil shows (fig. 2) the following features characteristic of Genyornis which distinguish it from Dromiceius: The pubis at its base, below the obturator foramen, is broader (25 per cent greater) than the isehinm rather than the converse (50 per cent less); the ascending bar of the ischinm is relatively longer and more slender, and the external surfaces are much more rugose. In these respects the moa is like Dromiceius and not Genyornis, The fossil from Lake Palankarinna matches Genyornis in size rather closely, It differs somewhat in the angle of the ascending bar of the ischium to the axis of the pubis. In Genyornis newtont this is a somewhat obtuse angle posteriorly whereas in the Pliocene bird it is essentially a right angle, The har also shows greater taper dorsally and some differences in surface configuration. These features may well suggest that a different species is involved but the fragmentary nature of the material affords imadequate basis for naming it as new. The pelvis can be referred with confidence to the genns (renyorms, although no comparison is possible with the one other genius of this extinet family, namely Dromornis, of which the pelvis is unknown, This Pliocene fossil has significance in demonstrating that the giant birds of the family Dromoruithidae existed as massive specialized ratites in the late Tertiary as well as in the late Pleistocene of Australia and that, in so far as the meagre evidence shows, they have changed little over the considerable time interval involved. Fig. 2. a. Pelvis Genyornis from Lake Genyornis newton, MILLER—FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS of Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, X %. b, Fragmentary pelvis Palankarinna, xX £€. Partial reconstruction based on figures 419 of of 420 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM LITERATURE CITED De Vis, C. W., 1884: The moa (Dinornis) in Australia. Proc. Roy. Soe. Queensland, Brisbane, vol. 1, pp. 23-28, 2 pls. 1888: A glimpse of the post-Tertiary avifauna of Queens- land. Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W., Sydney, vol. 3, pp. 1275-1292, 4 pls. 1892: Residue of the extinct birds of Queensland as yet detected. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Sydney, vol. 6, pp. 437-456, 2 pls. Hutton, F, W., 1893: On Dinornis (?) queenslandiae. Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W., Sydney, vol, 8, pp. 7-10, 1 fig. Oliver, W. R. B., 1949: The moas of New Zealand and Australia. Dominion Museum Bull. No. 15, Dominion Museum, Wellington, New Zealand, x + 206 pp., 143 figs. Stirling, E. C., 1913: Description of some further remains of Genyornis newton, Stirling and Zietz. Mem. Roy. Soc. 8S, Aust., Adelaide, vol. 1, pp, 111-126, 4 pls. Stirton, R. A., 1954: Digging Down Under. Pacifie Discovery, San Francisco, vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 3-13, 28 figs. Stirton, R. A., Tedford, R. H., and Miller, A. H., 1961: Cenozoic stratigraphy and vertebrate paleontology of the Tirari Desert, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, vol. 14, pp. 19-61, 4 figs. A TURTLE SHELL MASK OF TORRES STRAITS TYPE IN THE MACLEAY MUSEUM, UNIVERSITY OF SYDNEY By GRAEME L. PRETTY, ASSISTANT CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary This paper describes a hitherto unpublished turtle-shell mask of Torres Straits type. Study of the records suggests a provenance of Darnley Island. It is possible that some of its constituent parts may have been re-used from other masks. General features suggest a human face but general form compares with the animal head masks of these islands. The mask is surmounted by a crest of fretted turtle shell plates which bears comparison with feathered head ornaments of Torres Straits. One such ornament, registered No. A40566 in the South Australian Museum collection, is figured and described. A TURTLE SHELL MASK OF TORRES STRAITS TYPE IN THE MACLEAY MUSEUM, UNIVERSITY OF SYDNEY By GRAEME L. PRETTY, Assistant Curator or ANTHROPOLOGY, Sours AusrraLiAN Museum Plates 17-18 SUMMARY This paper describes a hitherto unpublished turtle-shell mask of Torres Straits type. Study of the records suggests a provenance of Darnley Island. It is possible that some of its constituent parts may have been re-used from other masks. General features suggest a human face but general form compares with the animal head masks of these islands. The mask is surmounted by a crest of fretted turtle shell plates which bears comparison with feathered head ornaments of Torres Straits. One such ornament, registered No. A40566 in the South Australian Museum collection, is figured and described. INTRODUCTION The Macleay Museum collection came to the University of Sydney in 1889 from the estate of the late Sir William Macleay. Although rich in Macleay’s main interest, Natural History, it contained a small but significant collection of Australian and Melanesian ethnology of the period around 1875-1885. Most of it was obtained on his collecting expedition to Torres Straits and New Guinea in 1875, and was added to hy collectors in various parts of Australia, Fiji, and the Solomons. It includes a complete mummy from Darnley Island, Torres Straits, a description of which 1 am preparing for publication. In past years, the trend of the Museum’s major activities has been somewhat at the expense of the ethnological collection. It is now receiving the full attention of the Curator, Miss B. Hahn, who is anxious that its existence should become more widely known. Although the mask is unlabelled, its general appearance suggests it to be of Torres Straits type (Meyer 1889 plates 1-4). A search of the Macleay Museum papers and correspondence in the Sydney 422 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM University archives yielded no references to it. Maeleay in his Journal of the expedition, recorded ethnological collections from Mokatta, at the mouth of the Katan (now Binaturi) River, Warrior and Darnley Islands in the Straits, and Hall Sound in the Gulf of Papua, Since, of these localities, most time was spent at Darnley, it would seem the most likely provenance for this specimen. Although there are several masks in his collection, Macleay nowhere made specific mention of them. Darnley (Mrub) is one of the eastern islands of the Straits. DESCRIPTION The mask (plates 17 and 18, fig. 1) has been constrneted of plates of turtle shell, which are drilled at the margins, and sewn together with hoth two strand rolled and three strand plaited vegetable twine 0.2 em. in width, It is crested hy an arch of plates of fretted turtle shell, supported by a central strip of the same material, Beneath and forward, a rod of wood has been lashed to the lower margins. According to Haddon (1912, y. 4, p. 303) this would have been clasped between the teeth by the wearer. It would also have served to strengthen the mask. The mask measures 87 om, in length and is 18.5 em, in width. The total height is 45 em. Some of the plates of which it is composed show signs of previous use. The holes that have been drilled in them are so placed as to rule out any useful function, e.g. the lashing together of the plates. Presumably they had formed parts of earlier masks. Other plates seem, at some previous time, to have been engraved and lime-filled, though they are now cut down, drilled, lashed and painted over like the rest of the mask. Other holes, e.g., around the margins of the ‘‘ears’', have elearly been nsed to tie on tufted and stringed decorations, as may be seen on other masks from the same area and referred to by Linton and Wingert (1946, pp. 124, 127). Turtle shell has been used to form a well made aquiline nose 10 em, long. A thin strip, projecting from its tip, has been brought underneath, giving the semblance of a pierced nose, The pierced ears, quite cliaracteristic of these islanders, have been represented by ovoid plates of turtle shell, 10 em. long, with the lower halves cut out. These margins, as aforementioned, have been drilled, probably for tufted decoration, The mask was originally fitted with two artificial eyes of shell nacre, 3.0 x 1,5 em. One of these has since been lost, A blob of some black resinous substance, perliaps the isau or black beeswax mentioned PRETTY—-TURTLE SHELL MASK 423 by Haddon (1934, v. 1, p. 325), forms the pupil. The same substance has been used to fill and strengthen the joints between the plates on either side of the eye cavities. The snot has been furnished with a white painted double row of turtle shell **teeth’*. A strip of serrated turtle shell runs along the basal margin, on each side of the mask, probably to represent a beard. From the rod beneath, hangs another fretted and serrated strip of turtle shell of a type, Which according to Haddon (1912, v. 4, p. 303) usually represented animal teeth, Probably re-used from a previous mask, it may have been meant to strengthen the impression of a beard, however, it has been attached to the rod with modern Kuropean string. The whole mask, except for the facial parts, has been covered with red ochre, As an upper boundary on the face two bands of white run up from the bridge of the nose, branching out parabolically, each meeting the periphery of the mask at the ear. Ina similar fashion a double row of stitching sweeps out from below the tip of the nose, each meeting the white line at the ear, The space in between, including the nose, has been left free of paint. The erest is made from plates of fretted turtle shell, decorated with white lime-filled engravings. These designs have the zig-zags and handed decoration, adjudged by Haddon (1894, pp. 14-21, 63-66) to be characteristic of the Torres Straits—Kiwai cultures. If taken in conjnnetion with the bands of white paint sweeping out from the bridge of the nose, the whole bears a strong resemblance to the feathered head ornaments worn in some Torres Straits dances. According to Ray (1907, pp, 137, 140) these were called dri, or d(a)ri, in the eastern islands, One such ornament, specimen numbered A40566 in the South Australian Museum collection, is illustrated for comparison (pl, 18, fiz. 2). Behind there has been affixed a shell of the egg cowrie, Amphiperas ovum Linnaens 1758. This has been painted red with the rest of the mask. Probably if served as a rattle. CONCLUSION In general form this mask compares with the animal head masks once common in the Torres Straits. Nevertheless, the over-riding intention seems to have been to represent features of the human face, perhaps adorned with one of the feathered head ornaments typical of this area. 424 RECORDS OF THE. S.A. MUSEUM Haddon (1912, v. 4, p. 302, pl. 34) illustrates a turtle shell mask from Mount Ernest Island (Nagir) where a crocodile head form is surmounted by a human face, fashioned on its upper surface. In the Macleay Museum specimen, the human face is dominant and only the generalized long-snouted animal form remains to point to its possible morphological origins. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Acknowledgement is made, first of all to Miss EB. Hahn, Curator of the Macleay Museum, for her many efforts on my behalf. Thanks are offered to Mr. S. Woodward-Smith, Illustration, New Medical School, University of Sydney, for photographs, and to Miss I. Allpress, Librarian of the Linnean Society of New South Wales, and Mr. D. 8. Maemillan, Archivist, University of Sydney, for making available documentary material. Mr. N. B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology, South Australian Museum, and Mr. H. M. Cooper, Hon. Associate in Anthropology, have read the manuscript and made helpful suggestions and comments, REFERENCES CITED Haddon, A. C., 1894: Decorative Art of British New Guinea. Junningham Memoirs 10, Dublin, pp. 1-278, pl. 1-12. Haddon, A. C. (Ed.), 1904-1935: Reports of the Cambridge Anthro- pological Expedition to Torres Straits, Cambridge. Vols. 1-6 (especially vol. 4, 1912: Arts and Crafts). Linton, Ralph and Wingert, Paul S., 1946: Arts of the South Seas. New York. Macleay, William, 1875; Journal of his New Guinea Expedition, commencing 29th May 1875, ending 28th August 1875. (Manuscript in the Library of the Linnean Society of New Sonth Wales.) Meyer, A. B., 1889: Masken von Neu Guinea und dem Bismarck Archipel. Kdénigliches Ethnographisches Museum zu Dresden, 7; pp. 1-14, pl. 1-15, Ray, Sidney H., 1907: Linguistics im Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition &e. (ed. A. C. Haddon, Cambridge), Vol. 3. PRETTY—TURTLE SHELL MASK 425 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 17 AND 18 PLATE 17. The mask, full face, showing the features described in the text. Specimen, without registration number, in Macleay Museum, University of Sydney. Scale to be read in centimetres. PLATE 18. Fig. 1. The mask, rear view, showing the re-used and engraved plates, the posterior surface of the centrepiece of the crest, and the Amphiperas ovum shell affixed behind. Scale to be read in centimetres. Fig. 2. Head ornament, from Torres Straits (no specific locality). Greatest length 42 em., greatest width 31 cm. White feathers. Frame coloured blue, vermilion and white. Specimen No. A40566 in South Australian Museum collection. Scale to be read in centimetres. Ree. S.A. Musrun Von. 14, Pare 17 To juve puge 426.) Rec, 8.A. Museum Von. 14, Prarn 18 THE AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI (HEMIPTERA: LYGAEIDAE) By GORDON F. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM AND G. G. E. SCUDDER, UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA Summary This paper deals with the systematics of the tribe Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae) in the Australian region. Twenty species, six of them new, belonging to five genera are described and figured. Most of the species belong to the genus Dieuches; species from this area formerly ascribed to Aphanus are shown all to belong either to Dieuches or to Elasmolomus. THE AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI (HEMIPTERA: LYGAEIDAE) By GORDON F. GROSS, Curator or Insscts, Sourn AusTRaLiaNn Moussevum, anv G. G. E, SCUDDER, University or Britise CoLuMBIA Plates 19-24 SUMMARY This paper deals with the systematics of the tribe Rhyparo- chromini (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae) in the Australian region. Twenty species, six of them new, belonging to five genera are described and figured. Most of the species belong to the genus Dieuches; species from this area formerly ascribed to Aphanus are shown all to belong either to Diewches or to Elasmolomus. INTRODUCTION The insects considered in this paper belong to the Lygaeid sub- family Rhyparochrominae, which is characterized by having the suture between sterna IV and V laterally curved anteriorly and not reaching the lateral margin of the abdomen. The tribe Rhyparochromini is distinguished by having the spiracles on abdominal segments IIT and IV dorsal, whilst all other segments of the abdomen have ventrally placed spiracles: in Scudder (1957) the group is considered as the subtribe Rhyparochromina, but now the taxon is considered to be a full tribe (Scudder 1962b). Only five genera so far are known to oceur in Australia, namely Bosbequius Distant, Dieuches Dohrn, Elasmolomus Stal, Narbo Stal and Poeantius Stal. All Australian and Eastern Pacific Island species formerly con- sidered to belong to the tribe Gonianotini and described as species of the genus Aphanus Laporte or Pachymerus Lepelletier—Serville are shown to belong to the tribe Rhyparochromini and are treated here. This results in the elimination of the Gonianotini in this sub-region. Australian and Eastern Pacific Rhyparochrominae belong only to the tribes Cleradini, Drymini, Lethaeini, Rhyparochromini and 428 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Myodochini in the present arrangement of the tribes. Sweet (personal communication) indicates the imminent erection of some additional tribes but these will not alter the disposition of genera treated in this paper. KEY TO GENERA OF AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI : bo Lateral margins of pronotum gently convex and corium without a pale subapical spot Pronotum usually with lateral margins straight or concave; corium with a more or less distinct pale subapical spot... .. . Lateral carinae to pronotum narrow but distinct; corium brown with irregular ochraceous maculae; scutellum without dis- tinct ochraceous marks apically .. Lateral carinae to pronotum broad and expanded in middle; corium ochraceous with irregular brown maculae; scutellum with distinct ochraceous marks apically .. . Elongate insects with lateral margins of pro- notum lacking a distinct laminate carina; male genital capsule with a small tubercle Robust insects, the pronotum with distinct lateral laminate carinae, although some- times rather narrow .. .. .. . . Basal half of the corium pale, apical half ceastaneous with a pale subapical spot; pronotal lateral carinae narrow; middle femora in male unarmed; male genital cap- sule without a small tubercle; membrane if with pale spots then these basal... .. Basal half of corium distinctly marked with eastaneous; pronotal lateral carinae usually broad and turned slightly dorsal; middle femora in male armed with small spines; male genital capsule with small tubercle; membrane if with pale spot then this apical .. .. lees oe ak Ld, oe Bosbequius Distant Elasmolomus Stal Narbo Stal Poeantius Stal Dieuches Dohrn GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 429 Bosbequius Distant 1903 Bosbequius Distant 1903, Faun. Brit. Ind. Rhynch, 2: 64. Head triangular, minutely punctate, and with antennal tubercles visible from above; clypeus extending well beyond paraclypeal lobes; antennae with stiff semierect hairs; first segment of antennae extend- ing beyond apex of head, second the longest; rostrum with first segment extending less than half way to base of head. Pronotum wider than long; dise flat and without distinct trans- verse impression; lateral margins continued laterally as a laminate carina; lateral margins gently convex; posterior margin slightly concave; dise in anterior half more or less impunctate; lateral and anterior margins and posterior part of pronotum with distinet punetures, Scutellum longer than wide; basal half of disc slightly excavate; distinetly punctate. Fore femora incrassate and with small spines more or less along the whole length, terminal ones the most prominent; posterior tarsus with basal tarsomere longer than combined length of the two distal tarsomeres, Hemelytra without distinct and contrasting dark and pale mark- ings and without a distinct pale subapical spot to coriam; clavus with three or more rows of punctures; corium quite densely punctate. Type species: Bosbequius latus Distant 1903, from Tenasserim. Bosbequius australis Distant 1918 Plate 19, fig, A Bosbequius australis Distant 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)2: 260, Colour. Head brown-black with apex of elypeus— slightly ferruginous; antennae pale ferruginous with first segment and apical parts of second and third brown; rostrum ferruginous. Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins and lateral areas of posterior part, ferrngino-ochraceous; rest of dise ferrnuginous, with anterior part brown black. Seutellum brown with apical part slightly ferruginous. Legs brown or dark ferruginons with tibiae and tarsi ferrugino-ochraceons. Hemelyitra ferruginous to dark brown with irregular ochraceous maculae, usually along apical margin of corium and near Cu; membrane fuscous with basal parts of veins and smal] spots near their apex, somewhat pale. 8B 430 RECORDS OF THE S.A: MUSEUM Venter dark ferruginous. Structure. Head finely punctate; antennal ratio 7: 22: 17: 20; rostrum reaching between fore and middle coxae. Pronotal width; Length, 48:34. Total length: 7 mm. Distribution; Queensland, Northern Territory. Australian records: N,W. Australia, Adelaide River, J. J. Walker (B.M,); Cape York, Coen, 1921-1922, W. McLennan (A.M.), Dieuches Dohrn 1860 Dieuches Dohrn 1860, Stett. ent. Z. 21: 160. Dieuches Stal 1872, Ofvers. Vetensk. Akad. Férh,, Stockholm, (7): 58. Dieuches Stal 1874, K. Vetensk, Akad. Handl., 12(1): 161, Dieuches Seudder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94 (7); 766. Abavus Distant 1909, Ann. Mag, nat. Hist., (8)3: 493. Maxaphanus Distant 1918, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., (9)2: 265. HKlongate robust inseets; head and much of pronotum fuscous; head triangular with antennal tubercles clearly visible from above; eyes more or less touching anterior margin of pronotum; finely punctate; first antennal segment surpassing apex of head. Pronotum with lateral margin carinate, the earina laminate, often broad and usually upturned; dise usually with a distinct transverse impression uear middle; distinctly punctate; posterior margin slightly concave, Seutellam usually longer than broad; distinetly punctate; with basal half of dise flat or slightly excavate; often with a vague Y-shaped elevation. Legs with fore femora moderately swollen and with subapical ventral spines; middle femora in male usually with small ventral spines; tibiae with stout outstanding setae; posterior tarsus with basal tarsomere 1wice as long as the combined leneth of the two distal tarsomeres. Hemelytra distinctly marked with brown or black and ochraceous; usually with a distinct subapical pale spot to corium; membrane if with pale spots, then these apical; clavus with more than three rows of punctnres; corium distinctly punctate. Venter fuscous; often with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae, coxal covers and lateral spots on abdomen, ochraceous. Male genital capsule with a small ventral tubercle, GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 431 Type species: Dieuches syriacus Dohrn, from Syria and the Mediterranean area. Dieuches leucoceras (Walker) was recorded from Murray Island by Carpenter (1891): 189, ‘one of the specimens from Murray Island seems to me to be identical with Walker’s type from Ceylon, in the British Museum,’ but it would appear that this record is based on a misidentification; we have seen no specimens of this species from this Tsland. KEY TO AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA SPECIES OF DIEUCHES . Large insects; over 10 mm. in length; pro- notum conspicuously broad and with a raised central line Bosiealuery Banks Island . ere Smaller insects, dintadty uid 9 mm, in length, if longer then pronotum not con- spicuously broad and with a raised central line posteriorly .. . Dorsum and/or legs with long waiisbandting hairs .. a. 4 Insects not fhixdyte: without ib ute tatu ing hairs . . Inner angle of pals sibugiont Sith of corium, truneate .. .. ... Inner angle of pale subapical spot of corium, acute ....... . Anterior two-thirds of siranatal lateral carinae white and often translucent, if black, then only extreme anterior part so coloured . ign 2 Anterior third to fifth of pronotal fateral carinae, black . . Klongate insects, with lage and esitenneie appearing long and slender; subapical pale spot of corium constricted in middle Insects not greatly elongate; legs and antennae not appearing conspicuously long and slender; subapical pale spot of corium not constricted in middle. .. .. grandicus sp. nov. consanguineus Distant hirsutus sp. noy, 11 longicollis (Dallas) 432 10. RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM . Inner angle of pale subapical spot of corium, truneate: . ce es he de oe Inner angle of pale subapical spot of corium, not truncate .. .. .. .. .. .. . Pronotum longer than wide, conspicuously constricted laterally and not conspicu- ously tapering anteriorly; inner angle of corium with a pale triangular spot . .. Combination of characters not as above .. . Pronotum with posterior lobe without pale markings or with a central pale streak and sometimes also one pale spot on each side of streak, near transverse impression .. Pronotum with posterior lobe with a central pale streak and two pale spots on each side; anterior margin of corium, seen from side without fuscous spots in basal half; sterna V and VI with pale lateral BPOES copies nah ghey wd eS Retr acer Pele . Anterior margin of corium, seen from side, without fuscous spots in basal half; dorsum of insect chocolate brown .. .. Anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with fuscous spots in basal half; dorsum of insects rather black .. .. .. .. 2... Anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with two pale spots in basal half and apically a large pale area coincident with pale subapical spot of corium, and the pale spot laterally on sternum V .. .. Anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with three pale spots in basal half and apically a large pale area coincident with the pale subapical spot of corium, and the pale spot laterally on sternum V .. oceanicus (Distant) 7 torpidus sp. nov. 8 finitimus Van Duzee obscurtpes (Walker) 10 scutellatus Distant enigmaticus sp. nov. GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 433 11. Inner angle of pale subapical spot of corium truncate or acute and continued to inner angle of corium through a fainter and generally more ochraceous spot; pronotal lateral carinae aiient ory, rather narrow .. .. . : 12 Inner angle of pale ssieribeed abot of corium not truncate and not continued to inner angle of corium; pronotal lateral carinae not much narrower anberiotle 2. ain oh HE. Bann G8 12. Hemelytra reaching almost to apex of abdomen .. .. .. notatus (Dallas) Hemelytra not conahing pikoes to end of abdomen, but leaving apical segments of abdomen exposed .. .. .. .. .. .. mudus sp. nov. 13. Terminal sean of antennae completely black . Cieen rae maculicollis (Walker) Terminal Secret of datennne with basal part white... ................ .. distanti Bergroth Dieuches grandicus sp. nov. Plate 20, fig. A Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with whole of first segment, apex of second and third, and extreme base and apical half of fourth ferruginous brown; fourth antennal segment with an ochraceous basal annulation ; rostrum with first seement ferruginous brown, second and third rather ochraceous and fourth ferruginous with brown apex. Pronotum with lateral carinae in basal third brown black, in middle ochraceous and in anterior third pale ferruginous; disc dark ferruginous brown to black with pale markings posteriorly consisting of a very short median raised longitudinal line and an ochraceous spot each side situated near transverse impression; anterior margin of pronotum with two vague pale spots. Scutellum dark ferruginous brown to black with apex slightly pale and with two distinct lateral luteo-ochraceous spots. 434 RECORDS OF THE §$.A. MUSEUM Legs ochraceous with coxae and most of femora dark ferruginous brown to black; tibiae fuseous; tarsi more or less ferrugino- ochraceous, Hemelytra luteo-ochraceous with dark brown to black markings; clayus except for streak and spots at base, and corium except for subapical pale spot and four complete or broken streaks in basal half, dark brown to black; pale subapical spot to corium with inner angle rather obtuse, basal side slightly concave and apical side convex; membrane fuseous, the apex slightly pale. Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Insects not hireante. Antennal ratio 20: 44: 40: 40; rostrum reaching posterior coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and concave at level of transverse impression of disc; pronotal width: length, 60; 57, Hemelytra reaching apex of abdomen. Fore femora with seven or eight small spines and a single long spine ventrally in anterior row; middle femora of female with four small setigerous spines. Total length female 10.4 mm, Type: Holotype a female, Moa 1., Torres St. (S.A.M.). Para- types: 2 females, Moa, Banks I, Torres St., 18 December 1919, W. MeLennan; 1 female, id., 17 December 1919 (A.M.). A species easily recognized by its size. Only D. obscuripes (Walker) is also known from this island and this latter species is only about 7.5 mm, in length, is much narrower and on the posterior part of the pronotum, the pale central line is not conspicuously raised, Dieuches consanguineus Distant 1904 Plate 21, fig, B Dieuches consanguineus Distant 1904, Ann. Mage. nat, Hist, (7)13: 268, Head dark ferrnginous brown with clypeus flavescent; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apical part of first and third segments slightly fuscous; fourth segment with extreme base and apical 2 dark brown, the rest ochraceous to white; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous. Pronotum with lateral earinae, except for extreme posterior corners ochraceous; anterior part of dise dark ferruginous; posterior part of dise ochraceous with punctures, humeral angles and patches each side of mid-line, dark ferruginous. There is a very distinct line GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 435 of transverse punctures just behind collar and a faint longitudinal keel on both lobes. Sentellum dark ferruginous brown with apex and two large lateral irregular spots luteo-ochraceous. Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical parts of femora dark brown; apex of tibiae and tarsi usually fuscons. Hemelytra ochraceous with dark ferruginous-brown markings; subapical pale spot to corium distinet and with inner angle truncate, basal side concave, apical side convex; bagal half of anterior margin of corinm, seen from side, completely pale; much of clavus, apical halt of corinm and eorium adjacent to claval suture, castaneons; membrane fuscous with apical pale spot; sterna V, VI and VII with lateral pale spots. Specimens oceur which have the darker parts of pronotum, sentellum and hemelytra a deep chocolate with a velvet texture, Insects distinctly hirsute; dorsum with long upstanding hairs; femora with long outstanding hairs. Antennal ratio 15; 33: 30: 33; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and slightly concave at. level of distinct transverse impression of dise. Hemelytra reaching tip of abdomen; fore femora with row of 11-12 short spines; middle femora with three or four short spines in male. Pronofa] width: length, 45: 35. Total length 6,2-8,.2 mm, Distribution: Australia. Australian records: Queensland: Cooktown, 1939 J. L. Mrben (Prague); 1 female, Almaden, Chillagoe District N.Q,, June-Sept. 1929 W. D. Campbell (A.M.); 1 male, 1 female, Ayr, 25 July 1954 G, Saunders (U.Q.); 1 male, attracted to light, Cairns District A. M. Lea; Birri, Mornington 1, 8 May 1960, P. Aitken, N. B, Tindale (S.A.M,); 1 female, Redlynch, 14 Ang. 1938, R. G. Wind (C.A.8,). Torres Straits: 1 male, Prince of Wales L, 21 Feb, 1989, R. G, Wind (C.A.S.), Northern Territory: Daly R. (G. G. EB. Sendder, Vaneouver) ; 1 male, Stapleton, G. F. Hill; 1 female, Port Darwin: 3 males, § females, 6 nymphs, Darwin Botanie Gardens, 6 Jan. 1961 G. F’. Gross; 1 female at light, Mitchell Street, Darwin 5 Jan. 1961. G. I’, Gross (S.A.M.); 6, Northern Territory Administration Grounds, Darwin, 21 Sept. 1956 L. D. Crawford; 1, Darwin 8 Oct. 1956 L, D. Crawford (A.N.I.C.). Similar to D, oceanieuws (Distant) but dorsum and femora with long outstanding hairs. 436 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Dieuches obscuripes (Walker 1872) Plate 22, fig. D Rhyparochromus obscuripes Walker 1872, Cat. Het. B.M. 5: 104, Rhyparochromus obscuripes Carpenter 1891, Proce. R. Dublin Soc, 1891: 139, Dieuches obscuripes Distant 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 509. Head dark ferruginous; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apex of fourth segment dark brown; rostrum ferruginous with tip brown. Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous in middle and with extreme anterior and posterior parts fuseous; dise dark ferruginous with pale markings posteriorly consisting of a short longitudinal median streak and one pale spot on each side near transverse impression. Seutellum dark ferruginous with apex and two lateral spots ochraceous. Legs ferruginous brown with base of middle and hind femora ochraceous. Hemelytra dark ferruginous with a distinct subapical ochraceous spot and in basal half, with anterior margin of corium pale and with three ochraceous spots in transverse series in middle of ecorium; clavus with a short basal ochraceous streak; subapical pale spot to corium with inner angle acute, basal side more or less straight and apical side slightly coneave; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side, without fuscous spots except for extreme base; apical margin of corium dark brown especially in anterior half; extreme apical angle luteous; membrane fuscous with a pale tip. Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral ochraceous patches. Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 14: 30: 31: 32; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins slightly convergent anteriorly and slightly concave at level of transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 37: 33. Fore fernora with nine small and one large spine ventrally in anterior row; middle femora of male with about six small spines basally. Hemelytra reaching tip of abdomen, Total length 7.4 mm. Distribution: New Guinea, Murray Is,, Banks Is. Australian records: Moa, Banks Is., Torres St., 18 Dee. 1919 W. MeLennan (A.M.), GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 437 Similar to D. finitimus Van Duzee but with posterior part of pronotum with different colouration, There is an Australian series, many specimens of which approxi- mate the type of Aphanus oceanicus Distant, but which are very close in certain details to obscuripes. They are very similar in shape and size and the pronotum is on the whole flatter than in the average Australian Dieuches. The large apical spot is somewhat truncate along the inner margin in extreme Northern and North Western examples (pl. 23, fig, C) but tends to be more rounded on the interior margin in Central Australian and Western examples (pl. 22, fig. C). In North Eastern examples, this large spot is narrower and. very like a New Guinea example of obscuripes in the South Australian Museum. The South Australian Museum specimen from New (Guinea and the Banks Island specimens of obacuripes both have the basal half of the corium almost devoid of prominent pale markings although a faint pattern appears as a trace and seems to he of the oceanteus type, Both specimens of obscuripes have only a single pale streak on the elavus along the corial commissure. These Australian specimens are being provisionally kept distinet as the next species, Diewches oceanicus, but it may be that oceanicus is only a subspecies of obscuripes. All these specimens have two pale spots on the clavus, the longer along the claval commissure and ihe shorter along the seutellar margin, and prominent pale markings in the basal half of the clavus, Dieuches oceanicus (Distant 1901) Plate 22, fig. C and plate 238, fig. C. Aphanus oceanicus Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist, (7)8: 502. Dieuches oceanicus Scudder, 1962a, Canad, Ent., 94(7)< 767. Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae dark ferruginous brown with basal half of second segment ochraceous and fourth segment with a sub-basal whitish annulation; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous with apex brown. Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous and with extreme posterior part fuscous and extreme anterior slightly ferruginons; dise dark ferruginous brown with pale markings posteriorly consisting of a median longitudinal ochraceous streak and two ochraceous spots on each side near transverse impression, Sentellum dark brown with an apical and two lateral ochraceous spots. 438 RECORDS OF THF S.A, MUSEUM Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical parts of femora dark brown; posterior tibiae ferruginous brown. Hemelytra dark ferrnginous brown and ochraceons; corium with a (istinet pale subapical spot and basal half of corium almost eom- pletely pale; clavus with two short basal pale streaks; subapical spot of corium with inner angle truncate; basal side concave and apical side slightly convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side without fuseous spots; membrane fuseous with pale apex. Thoracic yenter with coxal covers and posterior margin of meta- pleurae pale ferruginons; abdominal sterna V, VI and VII with lateral ochraceons patelics. Sometimes the colour pattern is more varied than here described with more cream and castaneous colours in place of the nsual darker eolours. Inseets not hirsnte; antennal ratio 12; 87: 27: 28; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronetum generally rather flattish and with broad lateral margins convergent anteriorly and more or less straight ; dise with distinct transverse impression; pronotal width; length 42: 30. Wore femora with seven small and one large subapical spine in antero-yertral row. Hemelytra reaching end of abdomen. Total length: 7.8-8.5 mm, Instribution: Australian. Australian records: Northern Territory: Indinda Well, 3 miles west of Andado Stn.; Newcastle Waters, 5 May 1929 T. G. Campbell (A.N.LO,); Darwin, Jan, 1939 M, Kamper (A.M.); Darwin, 30 Jan, 1914 G, FP, Will; Hermannsburg Capt. 8. A. White; Macdonald Downs (S.A. Mus. Exped. Aug, 1980) (S.A.M.); Mt, Olea, Sept, 1948 Bechervaise (N.M.), Queensland; Mt, Isa, Feb, 1954 Lamberts; Coen, 14-27 May 1951 ©, Oke (N.M.) Bathnrst Head, Jan, 1927 Hale & Tindale; Stewart R., Jan.-Meb, 1927, Hale & Tindale (S.A.M,); Olsen Cave, Rockhampton, Oct. 1924, A, Musgrave; Thargomindah, Apr. 141 N. Geary; Clermont, Dr. K, K. Spence (A.M.); Torres St.: Prince of Wales Is., 21 Nov. 1939 R, G. Wind (C.A.S,). Western Australia (North): Cossack, J, J, Walker (B.M.); Kimberley Dist., Mjéberg (Stockholm). Western Australia (Central): Nicol Bay Distriet, Clement (G. G. E. Scudder, Vanconver); Tambrey Stn., 24-96 July, 1958 F, J. Mitchell; Pilgangoora near Pilbara, 5 May 1953 N. B. Tindale (S.A.M,); 6, Cocoa Beach, Trimouille Is., Monte Bello Ts., 12 Nov. 1953 T, G, Campbell (A.N.L.C.). South Australia: At light, Goyder Lagoon Ruins, 28 July 1957 B. Daily; Fowler Bay (S,A.M.). Plate 22 fig. C shows a dark example, plate 23 fig. C1 a chocolate coloured specimen from Darwin. GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 439 Dieuches hirsutus sp. nov. Plate 21, fig. © Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae dark ferruginous brown (colour of terminal segment unknown) ; rostrum ferruginons brown. Pronotum with lateral ecarinae dark brown anteriorly and posteriorly and ochraceous in centre; dise dark brown to black with pale marks posteriorly consisting of an ochraceous central streak and two pale spots on each side near transverse impression. Seutellum dark brown to black with apex pale, no pale spots on dise, Legs with base of femora ochraceous; coxae and most of femora dark brown to black; tibiae dark ferruginous and tarsi ferrugino- ochraceous. Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown to black markings; clavus dark brown with a pale basal streak; corium dark brown with a pale subapical spot, three basal pale streaks and a pale central spot; subapical pale spot with inner angle acute, hasal side concave and apical side convex: membrane dark brown to black with apical third to half pale and with a luteous spot near apical angle of corium and a luteous spot on base of inner eurved vein. Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Dorsum and legs with long outstanding hairs; antennal ratio 18: 38: 35: ?; third antennal segment thicker than second and both densely hirsute; rostrum reaching posterior coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and concave at level of transverse impression on disc; pronotal width: leneth, 47; 42. Fore femora with a long subapical ventral spine. Total length: Female 10,0 mm, Type: Holotype female, Northern Territory, Darwin G. F. Hill (S.A.M.). Paratype; Female, same data (G. G. EH. Scudder, Vancouver). tn general appearance similar to D. finitimus Van Duzee, but with distinet upstanding hairs on dorsum and on femora. Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee 1940 Plate 24, fig. A Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee 1940, Pan-Pacif. Ent, 16: 184. Dieuches finitimus Scudder 1958, Nat. Hist. Rennell Is., B.S.I. 2: 138. 440 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apical part of first three segments ferruginous; fourth antennal segment with apical half dark brown and basal half luteo-ochraceous: rostrim ferruginous with apex brown. Pronotum with lateral carinae pale ochraceous with extreme anterior and posterior parts brown to black; dise dark ferruginous brown to black with pale markings on posterior lobe eonsisting of a central longitudinal ochraceons streak and two ochraceous spots, on each side of streak near transvérse impression. Seutellium dark ferruginous brown to black with apical and two lateral lnteo-ochraceous spots. Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical half of femora dark brown; apical half of fore tibiae and most of middle and hind tibiae dark brown; tarsi ferrugino-ochraceous. Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown markings; apical two- thirds of clavus, most of apieal half of corinm and basal half of corium partially, dark brown; corium with a distinct transversely elongate subapical pale spot, with inner angle somewhat acute, basal side slightly concave and apical side convex; basal half of anterior margin on corium seen from side, without fuseous spots and with apex slightly pale. Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous; abdominal sterna V, VI and VII with lateral pale spots. Insects not greatly hirsute; antennal ratio 13: 28: 28: 30; rostrum reaching middle eoxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and more or less straight; dise with a distinct transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 38: 30, Hemelytra almost reaching apex of abdomen, Total length: 7.4 myn. Distribution; Solomon Is,, New Guinea, New Britain, and Australia, Australian records: Queensland: Alice River, Mjoberg (Stock- holm); 1 male, Horn Is., 2 April 1940 R, G. Wind. Torres St.: 3 males, 1 female, Prince of Wales Is.,.3 Nov, 1939 R. G. Wind; 3 males, same data but 28 Nov. 1939 (C.A.8.), The figure is based on a series from Misima Island, Louisiade Archipelago, collected by the Rev. If, K, Bartlett and in the S. A, Museum, Somewhat similar to D. obscuripes (Walker), but with two pale spots on each side of pale median streak on posterior lobe of pronotum, instead of just one on each side, as in obscuripes. GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI dal Dieuches torpidus sp. nov. Plate 24, fig. B Head dark brown with anterior part rather ferruginons; antennae ferruginous with fourth segment basally ochraceous and apically dark brown; rostrum ferrugino-ochraeceous with first segment and apical segment dark brown, Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous, narrowly margined with black and posteriorly fuscous; dise dark brown with ferrugino- ochraceous markings posteriorly consisting of a short median longi- tudinal streak and two spots on each side near transverse impression. Sentellum dark brown with apex and two obscure lateral spots, ferrugino-ochraceous, Legs ferruginous brown with base of middle and hind femora and middle and hind trochanters, ochraceous. Hemelytra dark brown and Inteo-ochraceous; corium with a subapical pale L-shaped spot and a C-shaped mark proximally; inner angle of corium with a pale triangular spot; basal half of corium with anterior margin ochraceous and margined with dark brown, with a longitudinal streak and two spots on each side, in middle, and with two or three pale spots along claval suture; clavus with a pale streak along basal party of suture margin and with an obscure ferruginous spot basally; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with a median fuscous spot; membrane fuscous and with an obseure basal pale area, Venter with coxal covers and postero-dorsal corner of meta- pleurae pale ferrnginous; abdominal sterna IV, V, VI with distinet lateral ochraceous patches and sternum VII with indistinct pale spots laterally. Dorsum of insect not hirsute; antennal ratio 20-23; 3438: 35-87: 35-40, with third segment thicker than fourth and densely covered with short semi-erect hairs; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins not convergent anteriorly, but deeply coneave at level of transverse impression on dise; pronotal width: pronotal length, 38-46; 39-438, that is sometimes longer than broad. The longest ratio is 38-43 (in the type), the widest ratio is 46:40; these differences are due to differences in development of the wings. Seutellum with basal half deeply excavate, Fore femora with about eight small spines, Hemelytra with much of basal area and a subapical spot appearing ‘‘frosted’’; membrane reaching middle of tergum VII but not beyond. Total length: 8.5 mm. 442 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM Type: Holotype male, New Guinea, Madang, W. Lohe (S.A.M.). Allotype female, Finschhafen, Apkr. 1944 B. 8. Ross, Paratypes: 2 males, Finschhafen, Apr. 1944; 1 male, 1 female, same loc., 20 Apr. 1944; 2 females, same loc., 21 Apr. 1944; 1 male, same loc. 15 May 1944, all E. S. Ross (C.A.8.). This species differs from obscuripes and all other specimens by the shape of the pronotum and the colour of the hemelytra, Dieuches scutellatus Distant 1904 Plate 24, fig, C Dieuches scutellatus Distant 1904, Ann. Mag, nat. Hist. (7)13: 268, Head black; antennae brown to black with a distinet whitish sub- basal annulation to terminal segment; rostrum ferruginous brown with black apex, Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous and with extreme posterior part black and anterior part obscurely fuscous; dise black with ferrugino-ochraceous markings posteriorly consisting of a short median longitudinal streak and one spot on each side near transverse impression. Seutellam black with apex ochraceous and with two lateral ferrugino-ochraceous spots. Legs brown to black with basal part of middle and hind femora ochraceous. Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown to black; corium with a distinct subapical pale spot and in basal half with two pale spots on anterior margin and two pale spots near claval suture; elaviis with two short pale streaks; subapical pale spot of corium with inner angle somewhat acute and with both basal and apical margins conyex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen [rom side, with a median fuscous spot and base black; membrane fuscous with a pale apex, Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous; abdominal sternum V with distinct lateral ochraceous patch and sternum VI sometimes with an obseure ferrugino-ochraceous small spot laterally. Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 11: 25; 25: 28; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and concave at level with transverse impression of disc: pronotal width: pronotal length, 42: 32. Fore GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 443 femora with four or five short spines in anterior row. Hemelytra just reaching apex of abdomen, Total length: 7.3 mm. Distribution; Australian and possibly New Guinea, Australian records; North-western Australia :—Derby, Kimberley District and Noonkanbah, Mjéberg (Stockholm); Flora Valley Stn., 12 Oct, 1953 N, B. Tindale (G. G. E. Seudder, Vancouver). Onslow, Nov. 1955 KE. T. Smith; North-west Australia, from C. French Jn. Collection (N.M.), Central Western Australia: 3, Pilgangoora, 5, 6 & 9 May 1953 N. B. Tindale; Tambrey, 24-26 July 1958, I’, J. Mitchell (S.A.M.) Tambrey Stn, 28 July 1958 R. P. MeMillan (W.A.M.), Northern Territory: 2, Katherine, 26 Sept, 1953, G. F. Gross; 2, Tennants Ck. J. K. Field; Finke R,, MacDonnell Ranges, Capt. 8. A. White; Macdonald Downs, §.A. Museum Exped. Aug. 1930; Taast Bluff Stn., 2,000 feet, 62° F., at mercury vapour light, N. B. Tindale (S.A.M.), Queensland: Laura and Alice River, Mjéberg (Stockholm), Townsville Distr. (S.A.M.); 2, Almaden, Chillagoe, 10 Oct. & Oet-Nov. 1927, W. D. Campbell (A.M.), South Australia: Madigan Gulf, L. Eyre, 5 Nov, 1955, at light, HK. T. Giles (G. G. BH, Sendder, Vancouver), Similar to D. distanti Bergroth, but with anterior part of lateral pronotal carinae pale instead of broadly black anteriorly. A very variable species; the hind lobe dise of the pronotum is generally black or concolorous with the dise of the fore lobe. However examples oceur with the fore lobe black on the dise and the hind lobe chocolate. Several examples also have three colours on the corium, black or deep brown, ochraceous and luteous; such an example is figured, Dieuches enigmaticus sp. nov. Plate 21, fig. D Head brown-black; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apical part of segments fuscous, the fourth segment quite brown with a basal pale annulation; rostrum with basal segment brown, other segments ferrngino-ochraceous. Pronotum with lateral carinae pale except for extreme posterior corner; dise brown-black with three spots posteriorly near transverse impression, Scutellum brown-black with an apical and two lateral pale spots. Legs ochraceous with apical part brown-black and with a distinct pale subapical spot; subapical spot to corium with inner angle rather 444 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM obtuse and sides convex; basal half on anterior margin of corium seen from side, with three or four fuscous spots; membrane fuscous with tip pale. Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Fore femora and midfemora in male with a row of short spines beneath, hind femora with several fine spines. Anterior lobe of pronotum, scutellum, and a long patch on head between eyes, finely punctate. Total length: 7-8 mm, Type: Northern Australia, Marrakai Stn,, 28-31 July 1929 I. M. Mackeras & T. G. Campbell (A.N_LC.). Paratypes: 1 female, Western Australia, Wyndham, 4 Oct. 1929 T. G. Campbell; 1 female, Western Australia, Wyndham, 16-28 Feb. 1931 H, J. Willings; 1 male, Monte Bello Is., Trimonille Is., Cocoa Beach, 10 Nov. 1953 T. G. Campbell (A.N.1.C.), Similar to D. scutellatus Distant, but slightly smaller and with basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with more than a single fuscous spot. Dieuches distanti Bergroth 1916 Plate 22, fig. B Dieuches distanti Bergroth 1916, Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict. (n.s.) 29: 10. Head dark brown to black; antennae dark ferruginous to brown, the fourth segment with a basal pale annulation; rostrum ferruginous- ochraceous with apex brown, Pronotum with lateral carinae pale only in middle; dise dark brown to black, the posterior part with a short median pale longi- tudinal streak and usually one pale spot on each side. Seutellum dark brown to black; sometimes with apical and lateral pale spots. Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical part of femora dark brown to black; tibiae fuscous; apex of tarsi brown. Hemelytra ochraceous with apical half of clavus and corium dark brown to black, the latter with a distinet pale subapical spot; subapical pale spot of corium with inner angle obtuse, and with both basal and apical sides convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen in side view, with a single fuscous spot; membrane fuscous with an apical pale spot. GROSS inp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 445 Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Insects not distinctly hirsute; antennal ratio 14: 30: 32; 33; rostrum reaching middle eoxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins conyergent anteriorly and more or less straight; dise with transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 43: 82, Fore femora with seven to nine short spines in anterior row; middle femora in male with six or seven spines, the basal four longer than apical ones, Hemelytra just reaching tip of abdomen. Distribution: Northern Australia. Australian records: Western Australia:—Pilgangoora Well, 8 June 1953 N. B. Tindale (G. G. E. Scudder, Vancouver). Pilgangoora, 5 Apr, 1953 N, B. Tindale; Meekathara-Billilina Pool, Canning Stock Route Expedition, Apr. 1930-Aug, 1931 (S.A.M.), Northern Terti- tory; Areyonga, 1958 A. G. Wooleock; Finke Crossing, 1933, J. W. Rose (S.A.M.). Queensland: Mt. Isa, Jan. 1954 Lamberts (N.M.); Clermont, Dr. KK. K. Spenee (A.M.), In general appearance similar to D. oceanicus (Distant) but with anterior part of pronotal carinae distinctly and broadly fuscous instead of white. Dieuches maculicollis (Walker 1872) Plate 22, fig. A Rhyparochromus maculicollis Walker 1872, Cat. Het. B.M. 5: 111, Dieuches atricornis Stil 1874, K. svenska, Vetensk. Akad. Hand. 12(1): 161. Dieuches maculicollis Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 508. Dieuches maculicollis Seudder 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7) : 767. Head, rostrum and antennae, including fourth antennal segment, dark brown to black. Pronotum with lateral carinae dark brown to black on anterior and posterior thirds and ochraceous in middle; disc dark brown to black with posterior pale markings consisting of a short median longitudinal streak and two ochraceous spots on each side near transverse impression. Seutellum dark brown to black with apical angle ochraceous and with two lateral pale spots. Legs dark brown to black with base of femora and trochanters of second and third pairs of legs only ochraceous. 0 446 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown or black; clavus dark with a basal pale streak; corium with a subapical pale spot and basal half with anterior margin pale and with four or five pale spots; subapical pale spot of corium with inner angle more or less acute and basal and apical sides convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side, without fuscous spots; membrane opaque yellowish with basal and apical margins broadly dark brown, Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous; abdominal sternum V laterally with distinct ochraceous spot and sternum VI laterally with obscure small ferruginous spots. Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 19; 25: 27: 30; rostrum reaching middle coxae, Pronotum with broad lateral earinae; lateral margins hardly convergent anteriorly and more or less straight; pronotal width; length 33: 29; dise with distinct transverse impression and with anterior lobe distinctly convex, Fore femora with five or six small spines and one or two large subapical spines, Hemelytra alinost reaching apex of abdomen, Total length: 6.6 min, Distribution; Anstralia, Australian records: Queensland:—1 female, Nangram Lagoon, 12m. H & 3 m, N of Condamine, 16 Ang, 1954 R. A. Stirton (C.A.8.); 2 males, Somerset Dam, 24 Oct. 1953 T.E.W.; Deception Bay, 25 March 1954 Y. P, Beri; Brisbane, Feb, 1954 N. J. Thompsou (U.Q.) 5 Cunnamulla, 1, 17 Dee. 1940, 2, Oct. 1941, 1, Nov. 1941 N. Geary (A.M.), New South Wales; Sydney, Apr, 1931 K, K. Spence; Como, Dee. 1951 J, Freeman (A.M.), Anstralian Capital Territory: Molongolo, 4 Apr, 1930 L. Graham (A.N.LC.). Vietoria: Mildura, Feb, 1955 C. Flynn (U.Q.), 5, Kerang, 28-30 Apr. 1946 R.E.T.; Redeliffs, presented 18 Apr. 1925 A, 8S, Cndmill (N.M.). South Australia: Adelaide distr., Mar, 1920 W. E. Hodson; Prospect, 5 Aug. 1954 G. FB, Gross (G. G. E. Sendder, Vancouver); 2, same data; Prospect, 22 Mar, 1952 G. F. Gross; Prospect, 6 Sept, 1952 G. F, Gross; 7, Highgate, 23 July 1959 KE. C. Lindsay; Wild Horse Plains 10-16 Apr. 1956 C, J, Martin; Upper Arcoona Ck., Gammon Ranges, 16 Sept, 1956 G. F. Gross; Italowie Gorge, 30 Oct, 1955 EK. T. Giles; no locality Mar, 1921 (S.A.M,). At roots of vine, Barossa Valley, 2 Apr, 1949 (W.A.B.1). A species easily recognized by the completcly black terminal segment to the antennae and black bases of the fore femora. GROSS aNb SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 447 Dieuches notatus (Dallas 1852) Plate 23, fig. A Rhyparochromus notatus Dallas 1852, List. Hem. B.M. 2: 569. Dieuches notatus Stal 1874, K, svenska Vetensk, Akad, Handl, 12(1): 161. Head dark brown to black with two small ferruginous spots on vertex on level with anterior margin of eyes; antennae dark brown to black with a basal ochraceous annulation to fourth segment; rostrum ferruginous to dark brown. Pronotum with lateral margin dark brown to black in anterior and posterior thirds aud ochraceous in middle; dise on anterior half black; posterior half of dise ochraceous with fuseous punctures, with humeral angles black and with four longitudinal fuscous streaks. Scutellum black with apex ochraceous and with two lateral ferrugino-ochiraceous spots. Legs ochraceous with coxae and most of femora dark brown to black; fore and middle tibiae with apex and base fuseous, the hind tibiae more or less completely ferruginous to dark brown; tarsi with apical part of tarsomeres fuscous, the posterior tarsi almost com- pletely dark ferruginous. Hemelytra ochraceous with ferruginous and dark brown to black markings; clayus with punetures and irregular intervening areas ferrnginous, the extreme base black; eorium with a distinct pale sub- apical spot, apieal margins and an almost complete transverse band, black; basal half of corium with punctures and streaks dark ferruginous brown; subapical pale spot to eorimm if continued to iijer angle of eorium then with inner angle of spot aeute, if not continued to inner angle of ecorium then with inner angle of spot truneate; basal margin of spot slightly concave, the apical margin straight; basal half of anterior margin of corinm, seen from side, without fuscous spots; membrane completely fusecous, Abdominal sterna V, VI, and VIL with lateral pale spots. Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 15: 27: 27: 34; rostrum reaching middle ecoxae, Pronotum with lateral carinae very narrow towards anterior; lateral margins strongly convergent anteriorly and sligltly concave at level of transverse impression of disc; pronotal width: length 88:33. Fore femora with about six small and one large ventral spine. Hemelytra almost but not quite reaching apex of abdomen. 448 RECORDS OF THF S.A. MUSEUM Total length: 6.9-8 mm. Distribution: Australia, Tasmania, Lord Howe Island, and New Zealand, Australian records: Queensland:—13, Brisbane, Mar, 1957 J. H. Martin; same loc, 10 Feb. 1951 M. Carpenter; same lue,, 8 June 1951 J. Denmead; same loc,, Ang. 1955 N. J. Thompson; same loe,, 3 Mar, 1956 8. Sekon; Lawes, 20 Feb, 1956 W, F. William; 'ambo, 16 Ang. 1955 B, R. Grant; Mbore, Jan. 1951 Lipsett; Beaudesert, 5 Jan, 1954 R, EH. Harrison; Stanthorpe, 1 June 1956 J, Bonner (U,Q.); same loe.; Dalby, Mrs. F, H, Wobbler; Mt, Tambourine, A. M. Lea; Cunnamulla, H, Hardeastle (S.A.M.); same loc., Oet. 1941 N. Geary; Miles, 10 Jan, 1939 N. Geary; Olsen's Caves, Rockhampton, Oct. 1924 A. Musgrave; Rockhampton, Oct, 1926 A, Musgrave; Warwick, Sept. 1947 Mrs. Miller, (A,M.) 1 male, 5 females, Roma, 5 Ang, 1954 R. A, Stirton; 1 male, Taloona Stn., 48 miles north of Roma, 6 Aug. 1954 R. A. Stirton (C.A.8.), New South Wales: Ganowindra 7 Jan. 1955 F. EB, Wilson (S.A-M.) Caldwell, 30 Dee. 1951, V. Robb; Deniliquin, 1914 B, Reeves (N.M.) 5, Bombala, 4 Mar. 1931 Rev. A. J. Barret; Bogan River, Sept. 1931 J. Armstrong; same loc, & collector, no date; Nyngan 7 Apr. 1981 J. Armstrong; Hornsby, G. Gibbons; Sydney, 24 May 1925 W. W, Froggatt (A.M.); Sydney, ridge between Mossman’s Bay and Middle Harbour J, Langhans (G. G. E. Sendder, Vaneouver) ; 4, Gunnedah, 23 Aug. 1950 A. Dyce; 2, Pilliga, 1925 W. W. Froggatt; 5, Forbes, 20 May 1925 and 24 May 1925 W. W. Froggatt; Tweed R., 17 July 1904 W. W. Froggatt; Coolibah, 20 Oct 1905 W. W, Frogeatt; ur, Bourke, 26 Oct. 1949 8. J. Paramanov (A.N.LC.). Australian Capital Territory; 3, Canberra, Jan. & May 1930 J. Evans (A.N.I.C.). Victoria: Bamawn, W. F. Hill (S.A.M,) 10, Studley Park, 2 Aug. 1923 J. EH. Dixon; 3, Kerang, 2 May, 25 Ang., 8 Oct, 1946 R. B. Tillyard; Redeliffs, 18 June 1925 A. S. Cudmore; Fern Tree Gully, J, E, Dixon; loc.?; (N.M,) Melbourne (Stockholm). Tasmania; 3 (one a nymph), E. point of Babel J., 16 Mar. 1960 T, G. Campbell (A.N,1C.); Launceston (S.A.M.). South Australia: 2, Whyalla, 16 & 23 Ang. 1947 DS. (N.M.); Underdale, 18 Jan. 1959 G, PF, Gross (G. G. E. Scudder, Vancouver) ; 2, same loc & collector, 1 & 21 Jan. 1959; Fulham Gardens, Jan. 1959 G. F. Gross; ‘*Kurlge’’, Blackwood, 850ft., at merenry vapour light, 84° I, 27 Feb. 1957 N. B, Tindale: Blackwood, 13 Dec, 1959 M. Kenny; Mylor, 5 May 1948 G. F, Gross; 2, Coomandook, 4 June 1948 G, F, Gross; 2, Maitland, 1M. R. Waite; Curramulka, 3 Dee. 1954, G, F, Gross; Kielpa, Aug. 1958, P. W, Greeufield; Nth, End, GROSS ANp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 449 Pt. Lincoln, 20 Nov. 1957 M. Garrick (5.A.M.). Western Australia: 2, Warren River, W. D. Dodd (8.A.M.); Lord Howe I., 2, A, M. Lea (S.A.M.). whe species is also represented by a series of six specimens from New Zealand collected amongst litter on the ground at P.D.P, Owairaka, Anckland, 19 May 1960 Mrs, B. M. May (Plant Diseases Division, D.S.T.RB.), A distinet species recognized by the slightly brachypterous condition, the very narrow pronotal earinae, usually pale truncate inner angle to spot on corium subapically, and the two ferruginous spots on vertex. Dieuches nudus sp. nov. Plate 23, fig. B Similar to D. notatus (Dallas) but with head lacking the pale spots; with a narrower pale annulation to fourth antennal segment; with anteunal ratio 18: 35: 32: 38; pronotal lateral carinae broad anteriorly and not distinctly narrowed; lateral margins of pronotum not distinctly convergent anteriorly and more or less straight; posterior half of pronotal dise more or less completely pale and without fuscous markings except on humeral angles; corium without distinet fuscous markings except in apical half; inner angle of subapical pale spot to corium always truncate; hemelytra reaching only onto fergum VI and not beyond; fore femora in both sexes with two prominent spines, one near apex, and a series of smaller spines. Venter with coxal covers and posterior margin of metapleurae pale. Total length: Male 7.7 mm., female 8.5 mm, Loe. Holotype male, Whittata, Andamooka Ranges, South Aus- tralia, 22 Aug, 1948 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.). Allotype female, Whyalla, South Australia, 7 Sept. 1947 D.S. (N.M.). Paratypes: South Aus- tralia:—2 females, Whittata, Andamooka Ranges, 20 Aug. 1948 G. F. Gross; 1 female, same loc. 22 Aug, 1948 G. F, Gross; 1 male, Andamooka Ranges, Aug.-Sept. 1948 G. F. Gross; Leigh Ck., (S.A.M.) 4 males, 3 females, Ooldea, July 1921 J, A, Kershaw (N.M.) 1 male, 2 females, same data (G. G. BE. Seudder, Vancouver). Vietoria: 1 male, 2 females, Kewell, Nov, 1892 (N.M.), Western Australia: 2 males, Clampton 46—1922 & 1923 (W.A.M.). Northern Territory: Double Punch Bowl, Henbury, 15 Oct. 1953 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.). 450 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Dieuches longicollis (Dallas 1852) comb. nov. Rhyparochromus longicollis Dallas 1852, List, Hem. B.M. 2; 570. Plate 19, figs. B, C The badly damaged type of this species is said to come from Australia but we have seen no other specimens from here. In the Paris Museum is a female specimen purported fo be the same species from Sumatra (Padang), and in the South Australian Museum is a male from Timor which appears to have the necessary characteristics ol the species, but is at first sight rather different in appearance to the Sumatran specimen. A close comprison of the basic elements of the colour pattern of the Sumatran and the Timor examples suggests that the two may be the same species. A comparison of various dimensions in com- parison to one measurement (the total length) adjusted to the same value (1,000) gives a close correlation, except that the Timor example has a much shorter rostrum; we are of the opinion that these are the same species. Mr. R. Izzard of the British Museum kindly supplied a similar set of measurements from the head and thorax of the type (all that remains) in the British Museum. These measure- ments do not agree as closely, especially in that the thorax is longer than wide, whereas in the other two it is wider than long. Neverthe- less as the one species appears to oeeur with fair differences from opposite ends of the Indonesian Archipelago it seems reasonable that an Australian race of the same species would be more divergent. The Sumatran and Timor examples are therefore considered to be probably races of the Australian longicollis and both are figured (Timor plate 19 fig. B; Sumatra plate 19 fig. C). The actual measurements considered in the comparison were -— Example Sumatra Timor Tyne Measurement (Australia) Length Antennal Segment T..., , L:30mm, 01mm. missing Length Antennal Segment If ., , , 2-38mm. 163mm. missing: Length Antennal Segment IIL... 2:19mm. 163mm. Missing Length Antennal Segment I'V..., missing 2-38mm. missing: Length Rostral Segment [.... |, 123mm. 0-63mm. 140mm, Length Rostral Segment IT .,.., 1-3)mm. 0-8Imm. 1-87mm. Length Rostral Segment LIT ..., 119mm. 0-69mm, ‘| 2:13mm. Length Rostral Segment IV ..... 0-68mm. 034mm. Length of head ....,,...022.455 1-30mm. 1-l6mm, 1-73mm., Width of head across eyes .... 1-30nmm, 119mm. 1-60mm. Length of Pronotum.....,,..... 1-88mm, 163mm. 2-93mm. Width of Pronotum ..,.. thedees 2:25mm., 1-84mm. 280mm. Total Length ...........-....-- 9:18mm. 7-36mm, app. 10-5mm. (Cale, from Dallas’ cited length) GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 451 The adjusted measurements for closer comparison are :— Example Sumatra Timor Type Factor Ryepiece Byepiece Tzzard's Divisions Divisions Eyepiece Divisions KO734 0-63 x 1-05 Measurement Length Antennal Segment I ...:, 142 129 missing Length Antennal Segment IT .... 260 230 missing Length Antennal Segment TIT ... 240 230 missing Length Antennal Segment [V.... missing 302 missing Length Rostral SegmeniT,...... 132 90" 133 Length Rostral Segment If ..... 143 103* 178 Length Rostral Segment [It .... 128 s7* 203 Length Rostral Segment IV ...., 68 41* Length of head .......+5 bed anbs 142 148 165 Width of head across eyes 64-5) 142 150 1h2 Longth of pronotum ......-.--- 202 206 279* Width of pronotum ......------ 243 233 269* Total Length .....- 1,000 1,000 1,000 Measurements which are noticeably divergent from the other two are marked *. The description of the species given here is based on the Sumatran and Timor examples. Head black; antennae black with an ochraceous sub-basal annulation to fourth segment; rostrum brown to black with second segment ochraceous. Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous; dise black with two luteous spots on anterior margin or absent. (Timor example) and posterior part with luteous or ochraceous markings consisting of a pale spot on transverse impression laterally, a median longitudinal narrow streak and a pale streak on each side, sometimes divided into anterior and posterior spots. Seutellum black with apex luteous and with two lateral Inteous or ferrugino-ochraceons spots. Legs ferrugino-ochraceous with base of femora and trochanters ochraceous; apical part of femora dark brown to black; base and apex of tibiae fuscous. Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown to black; clavus fuscons with scutellar and commissure margins narrowly pale and with a pale streak emitted from base; corium with most of anterior margin pale and with a pale subapical spot, the latter constricted in middle; base of corium with a long streak and a spot. near claval suture, the streak often incomplete; another streak between this and the luteous exterior margin with a spot on either side behind level of apex of scutellum, 452 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM the outer spot continuous with the pale costal margin. Membrane fuseous and without a pale apical spot, Venter with lateral parts of sterna V to VII predominantly and narrowly pale, Dorsum of insect non-hirsnte; elongate insect with relatively long legs and antennae; rostrum reaching to or almost to hind coxae. Pronotum appearing rather elongate, lateral carinae broad and distinct; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and slightly concave; dise with distinet, transverse impression behind middle, Fore femora (female) with about eight small and a large subapical spine ventrally in anterior row; middle femora with five or six small spines. Uemelytra reaching to, but not beyond middle of tergum VII, Total length: 7,9-10.5 min. Distribution; Sumatra, Timor and Australia. Specimens seen; 1 fomale Sumatra, Padang (Paris Museum); 1 male Uato Lari, Portuguese Timor, 19 May 1959 [. B. Freytag (S.A.M.). This species is easily recognized by relatively long legs, antennae and general appearance and by the constricted pale subapical spot to the corium. The species is rather similar to Narbo biplagiatus (Walker), but may be distinguished by having distinct laminate lateral earinae to the pronotum. Elasmolomus Sti] 1872 Elasmolomus Stil 1872, Ofvers. Vetensk, Akad. Férh. 1872 (7): 58. Klasmolomus Stal 1874, K. svenska Vetensk, Akad. Handl. 12(1): 160, Aphanus Barber 1958 (nee LaPorte), Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 215. Elongate oval inseets; head triangular with antennal tubercles visible from above; eyes more or less in contact with anterior margin of pronotum; finely punctate; antennae with first segment exceeding apex of head. Pronotum wider than long with anterior half of dise dark brown or black and posterior half pale with fuscous punctures; dise some- times with a median transverse impression, but lateral margin of pronotum with a distinct larninate carina and gently convex through- out; posterior margin slightly concave; distinctly punctate with punctures on anterior half of disc smaller than those on posterior part. GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 453 Sentellum longer than wide; dark brown with an apical V-shaped pale mark; distinctly punctate; basal half of disc shallowly excavate. Legs with fore femora moderately swollen and with a few small ventral well spaced spines; tibiae with distinct outstanding stout setae; posterior tasi with basal tarsomere more than twice combined length of the two distal tarsomeres. Hemelytra pale with brown mottling and punctures, the anterior margin with a distinct fuscous bar in apical half and with apical angle fuscons; clavus with more than three rows of punctures; corium rather densely punctate; apex of membrane just reaching or almost reaching tip of abdomen, Venter dark brown with coxal covers and postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae pale; sterna laterally usually with pale spots. Type species: Cimex sordidus Fabricius 1787. Key to Australian species of Elasmolomus. 1. Over 6.5 mm.; pronotal dise with distinet transverse impression .. .. .. vy we sordidus (Fab.) Under 6.5 mm.; pronotal dise without a distinet transverse impression .. .- --:- ss +. e205 2 2. General colour brown or ferruginous, 6-6.5 mm. Toner. ns te! (3. Bn papuanus (Dist.) General colour black, 5.5-6 mm. long .. .. .. v-album (Stal) Elasmolomus sordidus (Fab. 1787) Plate 21, fig. A Cimex sordidus Fabricius 1787, Mant. 2: 302. Lygaeus sordidus Fabricius 1794, Ent. Syst. 4: 164. Lygaeus sordidus Fabricius 1803, Syst. Rhynch.: 231. Rhyparochromus sordidus Dallas 1852, List. Hem. B.M. 2: 566. Beosus sordidus Stal 1868, Hem. Fabr. 1: 78. Pachymerus (Elasmolomus) sordidus Stal 1874, K. Vet. Akad. Handl. 12(1); 161. Aphanus sordidus Distant 1903, Faun, Brit. Ind. Rhyneh. 2: 79. Aphanus littoralis Distant 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)2: 262. Aphanus sordidus Hoffmann 1932, Lingnan J. Sci. 11(1): 130. Aphanus littoralis Corby 1947, Bull. ent. Res. 37: 611. 454 RECORDS OF THE 5.A, MUSEUM Aphanus littoralis Lindherg 1958, Comment, biol. Helsingf. 19(1): 66. Aphaaus sordidus Barber 1958, Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 216. Head dark brown; antennae ochraceous with a few spots at apex of first segment, apical parts of second and third, and apical half of fourth, dark brown; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous with apex dark brown, Pronotum ochraceous with anterior half of dise and punctures, fark brown; luteral carinae and posterior part of pronotum ochraceous, the extreme posterior part ol carinae fuseous, and the anterior part of carinae also sometimes fuscous. Sentellum dark brown with apical half with a more or less distinct broad ochraceous V-shaped area and with fuseous punctures. Legs ochraceous with apical half to third with two fuscous annula- tions, these sometimes united; apex of tibiae and tarsi frequently fuscous. Hemelytra, like posterior part of pronotum, ochraceous with fuscous punctures and with odd and irregular brown maculae; membrane with brownish maculae and with tip rather pale. Antennal ratio 15; 31: 30: 31; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Fore femora ventrally with an anterior and posterior row of five or six small spines; fore tibiae of male with two small blunt projections on apical half, Pronotal width: length, 50; 38; dise of pronotum with a distinct transverse impression. Total length: 7.7-9.2 mm. Distribution: Throughout the tropical regions of the Bastern Hemisphere, Specimens seen from Cape Verde Is., Senegal, Guinea, Rodriquez Is., Nigeria, Blue Nile, Sudan, Tanganyika, 8. India, Indo- China, Laos, Bengal, Burma, Assam, Ceylon, Hong Kong, China, Malay Archipelago, Philippine Is., Okinawa, 8. Mariana Ts., Sumatra, Molnecas, N. Australia. Australian records: Northern Territory:—13, C.8.1.R.0. Experi- mental Station, Katherine, Mar, 1951 W. Arndt; 2, Katherine, 18 Apr. 1956 L. D, Crawford; 4, Berrimah, N.T., 80 Aug. 1956 L. D. Crawford; 1, N.T.A. grounds, Darwin, 29 Sept. 1956 Th. D. Crawford (A.N.LC.); Darwin Botanic Gdns., 6 Jan, 1961 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.), The Waite Agricultural Research Institute in Adelaide is now main- taining an experimental colony of this species originating from a series from Katherine, N.T., taken 16 July 1960, collected by P. W. M. Our friend and colleague Mr. L. D. Crawford kindly passed on the following notes and extracts from index cards on the habits of GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 455 this bug kept while working as an entomologist with the Northern Territory Administration. We quote— ““Prawur Trasw Buas’’, From Annual Report—Entomologist, N.T.A., L July 1955-80 June 1956. “This loeal species is universally present wherever peanuts and other oil crops are grown and stored on Northern Territory farms, and it is quite obvious that, left unchecked, as is usually the ease, they cause serious losses in oil content, and adversely affect the germination. These bugs are able to extract all the oil out of unshelled peanuts, and have also been observed (feeding on sunflower seeds and even sorghum grain. It would seem that the use of control measures should be considered for all oil erops, as these bugs appear to be equally at home out in the field under plants or in storage sheds, where they feed on the bagged peanuts at night time. ‘““Gammexane dust has been found to control them, but, owing to the risk of tainting, lindane dust would be preferable. The bugs have also been observed in and under matured bnt inpicked Jettuees and Chinese cabbage at the Berrimah Farm. Lygacid bugs (Aphanus spp.) with similar habits have been observed from Nigeria, where they eanse poor germination, loss of oil content, and make the remaining oi] in the peanuts rancid’, From Monthly Report, April 1956. (Visit to Katherine.) ‘*Peanut Storage. A number of bags of peanuts kept in the one place for two years in a shed at the N.T.A. Farm were crawling with peanut trash bugs, which were also present on the walls of the shed and the surrounding grass. Most of the peanuts were soft and spongy, being devoid of oil. At night the bugs were observed feeding on unshelled peanuts, and even on sorghum grain. As this pest is common wherever peannts are harvested and stored, it would appear that it is of considerable importance, and control measures are therefore justified on all peanut farms. It was reported later that a dusting with 4 per cent Gammexane dust had given an adequate control of the bugs at the N.T.A, Farm.’’ Extracts from index eards kept while working as Entomologist, N.T\A,, Darwin. 456 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM Peanuts, Storace, ‘Aug, 1955, Bill Alexander, Daily River farmer, reported that the black peanut trash bugs were in swarms amongst his bagged peanuts, and that he was sure that they were living on fhe oil in the nuts, In previous years he had found that many of the nuts had been dry and shrivelled when he was ready to plant.’? 20 Feb. 1956. Stored peanuts and sorghum at Katherine N.T.A. Farm swarming with black bugs according to manager, Several bags of peanuts at Berrimah sent up from Katherine a month or so previously, showed heavy insect damage . . .’ (Mainly Rice Moth and yarious beetles. Some buys present.) ‘17 Apr. 1956. Inspection of dozen bags of peanuts stored for two years in shed at 205 mile farm (Katherine N.T.A. Farm), Thousands of peannt trash bugs swarming oyer bags, over tin walls of shed, and in and over nearby machinery and grass. Many of them actively feeding on peanuts, even in the shell. Most of the peanuts are depleted of oil, and are spongy and white.’’ “2 May 1956. Peanut trash bugs at Katherine migrating out of sheds to house. Gammexane 4 per cent dust applied heavily around sheds—gave good control.’’ Peanut Trasu Bucs (Lygaeidae). “These bugs seem to be present whereyer peanut trash or peanuts shelled or unshelled are stored on N.T. farms, and it ig quite obvious that they cause serious losses in oil content, being able to feed right through the shell into the interior of the kernals. Also observed feeding on sorghum grains. “RAH (A) 35: 216; 86: 44. Aphanus (Lygaeidae) in Nigeria 24 May 1956, Also present in and on ripening sunflower heads at Berrimah N.'l.A. Farm. “27 July 1956. Bugs still present at Berrimah Farm, also being found in lettuce plants. “8 Aug, 1956. Visit to W. Christie’s, Katherine, by T. Officer Moore. Reports that there bugs have been bad, and he considers that growing sunflowers has bred them up. They are even attacking pumpkins, which they honeycomb. When a pumpkin is kicked, large numbers of bugs fly ont!’’ (1 can’t think of anything else that could have been confused with the bugs by this person.) GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 457 ‘‘Oct. 1956. Bill Alexander reports that he has had very little trouble with peanut trash bugs this season. Late rains prevented him from either drying out his dug crop, or digging out the remainder. The previous season there were many bugs about, and seed used for planting had numerous small bruises in the kernels.”’ SuNFLOWER. ‘(94 May 1956. Sunflower plants at Berrimah Farm with heads almost mature. Heads infested with moderate number of peanut trash bugs. “8 Aug. 1956. Sunflower heads from Banyan Farm, Bachelor, very poor. .. . (caterpillar damage) . . . quite a number of peanut trash bugs also in sample.’’ Peanut Trasn Bucs Aphanus sordidus (‘Groundnut Bug’’). ‘Groundnut Cultivation in India.’ Farm Bulletin No. 2. Indian Council of Agricultural Research. ‘‘The Groundnut bug has been reported to cause appreciable damage to groundnut in Bombay. The bugs appear in large numbers and suck the oil out of the kernels both in the field and on the drying floor and occasionally from stored material.’’ ‘‘Recorded from Madras on stored groundnuts, from Burma in millet heads. From Bombay, attacking groundnuts both during and after the harvest, also infests Sesamum and Carthamus tinctorius. Attacks may be prevented by putting the nuts into thick sacks immediately they are gathered. RAE (A)5: 101.’’ Elasmolomus v-album (Stal 1859) Plate 19, fig. D Rhyparochromus v-album Stal, 1859, Kongl. svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa Om. Jordan ete. 1851-1853. Zool. 1, Insecta: 247. Pachymerus (Elasmolomus) v-album Stal, 1874, Kongl. svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl., 12(1): 161. Aphanus v-album Barber 1958, Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 215. Aphanus australis Distant, 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 502. Elasmolomus australis Scudder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 767. Elasmolomus imsularis Kirkaldy, 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33: 360. 458 RECORDS OF 'THE S.A. MUSEUM Aphanus (Elasmolomus) insularis China, 1930, Insects of Samoa 2(3): 138. We have seen specimens of this species from Java (which Barber equates with the Philippine and Micronesian v-albwm), Timor, North Queensland, and Fiji and all are certainly the same species. The Javan specimen and one Australian tend to be brownish, and the others blacker, but this is hardly a specifie difference. The Australian specimens have a general transverse darkening on the corium inwardly from the dark spot on the margin 3 of the way back, but so also does one of the three Timor specimens. In all other respects the specimens are identical, Pachymerus nerceis was described from Lifu, but Wirkaldy’s generie placing and his description leave little doubt that his material belongs to this species, or to the next. Head dark brown to black with a silvery pilosity; eyes con- eolonrous, ocelli reddish. First segment of antennae black or brownish with five or six robust spines, one near base on interior margin, another on the same margin about halfway, another between this and apex but on the superior margin, and an apical inner vluster of three or four; second sogment yellowish brown vaguely infuseated at apex, third black or brown, pale at base; fourth with basal half pale yellowish brown, apical half blackish or brown, Pronotum luteous to vellowish brown with anterior lobe within the reflexed margins (except two small lnteous points or streaks along anterior taargin), {wo spots on each lateral reflexed margin, one near apex and the other almost at base, and numerous punetations on the hind Jobe blackish or brown, Scutellum black or brown with a prominent V-shaped apical luteous or yellowish brown mark which bears a few fuscous punetations. Legs yellowish, apices of tibiae, fore femora (except at apex), and a broad sub-apieal band to the second and third femora black or dark brown. Hemelytra luteous to yellowish brown with numerous fuscons punctations for the most part arranged in longitudinal lines but also some areas of scattered punctations. Corium with four distinct black spots two on the exterior margin, one past the half way mark towards the apex and the other at apex, a third spot in the middle of the dise in the apical quarter and a fourth near inner margin and its apex. Membrane fuscous, with elongate lightenings, principally on the veins. GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 459 Underside dark brown to blackish with light patches above insertions of coxae, hind upper angles of pro- and metasterna, and extreme lateral margins of abdomen on segments V and VI. Rostrum reaches mid coxae, mainly pale. Antennal ratio 30-35: 75-82: 65-71: 75-90. Length: 4.90-5.40 mm. Specimens seen from Java, Timor, Fiji, Northern Australia, Distribution: Indonesia, Philippines, Micronesia, Australia, I"iji, Tonga, Solomon Is. (but see note under next species). Australian records: N.W. Australia, Troughton Is., J, 0. Walker (B.M.). 1 female, Claudie R., N. Queensland, May 1914, 0. MacGillivray (N.M.). 1 female, Daly R., Northern Territory (8.A.M.). It may very well be that the distribution of v-albwm is much more extensive than we have claimed here. An examination of the types of Fi, transversus (Signoret) from Madagasear, 2. consocialis (Dist.) from Seyehelles and FF, lineosus Dist. from Burma and Ceylon, indieates that a single species may be involved, ranging from Africa to Tonga. In this case, the oldest name in the complex appears to be v-album, Such a distribution is quite credible in view of the almost parallel distribution of EF. sordidus. This problem is being considered further by G.G.E.8. Elasmolomus papuanus (Distant 1901) nov, comb. Plate 24, fig, D Aphanus papwanys Distant, 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 502. Head chocolate brown, with silvery pilosity. Eyes concolorous, ocelli reddish. First segment of antennae brown with eight or nine robust spines, four or five of them at apex. Second and third apical half of fourth segment a paler brown; basal half of fourth yellowish, Pronotum luteous yellow with anterior lobe between the reflexed margins (except two obsolete luteous marks on the anterior margin), two spots on each lateral reflexed margin, one at middle of fore lobe and the other almost at the hind angles, and numerous punctations on the hind lobe brown. Seutellum brown and with a V-shaped apical yellowish mark bearing a few brown punctations. Levs yellowish, fore femora (except at apex) and a broad sub- apical band on the second and third femora brown, 460 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Hemelytra brownish with numerous fuscous punctations for the most part arranged in longitudinal lines but also some areas of scattered punctations. The basal half of the lateral margins, a pre- apical spot and a basal streak running back paralleling the outer margin paler, yellowish. Membrane pale brown, extreme tip yellowish. Underside chocolate brown with light patches above insertions of coxae, hind upper angles of pro- and meta-sterna and two small patches on margin of abdomen on segments V and VI. Rostrum reaching mid coxae, mainly pale. Antennal ratio (to same seale as v-album) 42; 95: 85: 100, Length: Female, 6,25 mm. Distribution: Australia, Australian record: 1 female, Dunk Is., North Queensland, Dee. 1932 P. MaeIndoe (S.A.M.). Distant’s type of this species cannot be found in the British Museum; it came from Peak Downs, also in Queensland. The species described here fits Distant’s deseription fairly well although the head and anterior lobe of the pronotum and the underside of the tibiae and tarsi seem to be rather paler in colour. The size is about right, This species is very little different to v-albwm; it is 25-80 per cent larger, paler overall and with much less contrast in its coloration, It could be a sub-species of v-album were it not that v-album already occurs in Queensland. It shares with both the Australian specimens of v-album a similar pattern of infuscation in the apical area of the corium, but this is also present in one Timor specimen of the latter species. This distribution is quite credible in view of the almost parallel distribution of EB. sordidus, Note: Elasmolomus nereis (Kirkaldy 1905) nov, comb, Pachymerus mereis Kirkaldy, 1905, Trans. ent. Soc. Lond.: 647, pl. 18, fig. 7, described originally from Lifu, was recognized by one of us (G.F.G,) from several specimens in the Institut Francais d’Oceanic in Nouméa during a recent visit to New Caledonia. It is a distinct species of Elasmolomus, and differs from the other three in the very narrow pronotal laminae and more shiny appearance, It is small like papuanus and v-album and would run down to the former in our key. GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 461 Poeantius Stal 1865 Poeantius Stal 1865, Hem. Afr. 2: 154, 163. 1874, Kongl. Vetensk Akad, Handl. 12 (1); 159, 162. Distant, 1903, Faun, Brit, Ind. Rhynch. 2; 85. Breddin 1907, Dtsch, ent. Z.: 208. Bergroth 1918, Philipp. J. Sei., 13 (2 & 8): 84. Naudarensia Distant, 1904, Faun. Brit, Ind. Rhynch, 2: 86. Head triangular and with antennal tubercles not visible from above. Pronotum with narrow lateral laminate carinae; dise with a distinct transverse impression; posterior margin concave; anterior lobe with punctures finer and denser than on posterior lobe. Scutellum longer than wide; deeply punctate. Fore femora not greatly swollen and with a small sub-apical spine and a few stiff hairs; posterior tarsi with the basal tarsomere twice as long as the combined length of the two distal tarsomeres. Hemelytra usually with the apical half more or less castaneous and with a subapical pale spot to corium; membrane if with pale spots, then these basal; clavus with more than three rows of punctures; corium with rather dense punctuation. Venter dark brown with coxal covers and posterior margin of metapleurae ochraceous. Type species: Rhyparochromus nigropictus Stal, from Africa. Both Breddin and Bergroth regarded Poeantius and Naudarensia as synonymous and we are accepting their opinion here. The species described by Distant (1918) as Naudarensia rolandi does not belong in the genus Naudarensia, but in Udeocoris Bergroth which is in the tribe Myodochini (Gross, 1962, Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 14(2) ; 391), Poeantius australopictus sp. nov. Plate 23, fig. D Female. Head dark brown; antennae pale ferruginous with basal part of first segment, apex of second and most of third, dark brown; terminal segment of antennae without a distinct pale annulation; rostrum dark brown. Pronotum with anterior half dark brown; anterior margin ferrugino-ochraceous; lateral carinae ochraceous with extreme b 462 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM posterior part dark brown; transverse impression laterally pale ferrugino-ochraceous, but centre distinctly fuseous; hind lobe of pronotum ochraceous with dense dark brown punctures. Scatellumn dark brown to black with tip ochraceous; apical half laterally slightly ferruginous to brown. Legs dark brown with base of middle and hind femora ochraceons, Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown punctures; clavus with a dark brown longitudinal streak; corium with apical half from inner angle to anterior margin, dark brown, but with slender subapical ochraceous spot; membrane suffused with brown, but with a distinct pale spot near apical angle of corium. Venter dark brown or slightly ferruginous, with coxal covers and posterior margin of metapleurae ochraceous. Mead inclined ventrally; antennal ratio 5: 13-14: 11-12: 1617 H rostrum almost reaching middle coxae, Pronotum not greatly wider than long, the width: length as 23-27: 20; dise with a distinct trans- verse impression near middle, ratio length of anterior lobe; length of posterior lobe, as 9-10: 8; lateral margins of pronotum distinetly concave near middle, Hemelytra macropterous. Total length: 4,5 mm, (4.0-5.0 mm.), Male, Similar to female, but usually a little smaller. Total length: 4.8 mm, Type: A female, Queensland, Townsville, 1902 F. P, Dodd (B.M.). Paratypes: 1 sex undetermined, NW. Australia, Kimberley district, Mjoberg (Stockholm); 1 female, Queensland, 17 Jan. 1929 Dr. K, K. Spence (A.M.); 1 female, Brisbane, 31 Apr, 1957, 8. S. Sekhon (U.Q.) ; 1 male, 1 female, Normanton, R. Kemp (S.A.M.), 1 male, Northern Territory, Darwin, G. F. Hill (G. G. BE. Seudder, Vancouver); 1 female, Townsville, 18 Apr, 1902 W. W. Froggatt (A.N.L.C.), This species is similar to P. variegatus Distant from Africa in general appearance, bat has the pronotum less tapering anteriorly and the claval white streak less evident. P. australopictus differs from P. lineatus Stil from the Philippine Is. by the shape of the pronotum and the coloration of the corium, In the latter species, the pronotum lacks a distinct transverse impression and the fuscous markings on the apical half of the corium do not extend to the anterior margin, A single brachypterous female specimen in the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum in Stockholm, with the data ‘Queensland, Alice River (Mjéberg)’ has the coloration of the corium similar to P. lineatus but GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 463 on structure of the pronotum appears to be conspecific with the specimens of australopictus listed above. It would appear that the specimens here considered to be a new species were, by Distant (1918) considered to conspecific with P. lineatus. This is not so as has been pointed out above. Narbo Stal 1865 Narbo Stal, 1865, Hem. Afr. 2: 154, 163. 1874, Kongl. svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl., 12(1): 159. Distant, 1903, Fauna Brit. Ind. Rhynch., 2: 85. Breddin, 1907, Dtsch. ent. Z., 208. Bergroth, 1918, Philipp. J. Sci., 13 (2 & 7): 84. Barber, 1958, Inseets of Micronesia, 7(4): 216. Sendder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 769. Laxamana Distant, 1906, Ann, Soc. ent. Belg. 50; 416, Wlongate insects; head porrect, eyes removed from anterior margin of pronotwmn; antennal tubercles clearly visible from above; antennae long and slender; first antennal segment extending beyond apex of head and subequal to head length, Pronotum wider than long; distinctly punctate; with a conspicuous transverse impression; lateral margins weakly carinate and without a distinct laminate carina; lateral carmaé ending abruptly on humeral angles; lateral margins deeply concave at level of trans- verse impression on disc; posterior margin slightly concave. Seutellum longer than wide; distinctly punctate; basal half of dise excavate; dise with a vague Y-shaped elevation, Legs slender and elongate fore femora slender and with a row of short spines along ventral surface; hind tarsi with basal tarsomeres more than twice combined length of the two distal tarsomeres; tibiae with short fine hairs and longer, outstanding, stout hairs; apex of tibiae with a circle of stout setae, Hemelytra distinetly marked with brown and ochraceous; corium with a more or less distinct pale subapical spot; membrane with a faint pale spot apically; clavus with more than three rows of punctures; corium rather densely punctate. Abdomen ventrally with a median longitudinal vague keel; male venital capsule with a small tubercle ventrally. Type species: Narbo longipes Stal, from Borneo and Sarawak. 464 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Narbo biplagiatus (Walker 1871) Plate 20, fig. B Noliphus ? biplagiatus Walker 1871, Cat, Het. B.M, 4; 177. Rhyparochromus terminalis Walker 1872, Cat. Het, B.M. 5; 105. Dieuches terminalis Lethierry & Severin, 1894, Cat. gén, Hém., 2: 220. Narbo biplagiatus Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat, Hist. (7)8: 510, Narbo biplagiatus Seudder 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 769. Narbo metochoides Bergroth 1918, Philipp, J. Sei, (D) 13: 82. Barber 1958, Insects of Micronesia 7 (4); 217, fig. Head dark brown to black; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with first segment, apical parts of second and third, extreme base and apical part of fourth, dark brown; terminal antennal segment with a broad pale ochraceous annulation; rostrum ferruginous to brown. Pronotum dark brown to black with lateral margins ochraceous and posterior lobe with a median longitudinal short pale streak on anterior part. Seutellum dark brown to black with apex ochraceous and with two medio-lateral pale spots. Legs ferrugino-ochraceous with apical parts of femora, apex of tibiae and tarsi dark brown. Hemelytra dark brown to black with basal half of anterior margin and a subapical spot to corium, ochraceous; a short basal streak to clavus, an interrupted streak on corium near claval suture and a median spot to corium, ochraceous; membrane with basal part of some veins and apex, vaguely pale. Venter dark brown with extreme postero-dorsal corner of meta- pleurae ochraceous and sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots, Antennal ratio 13: 22: 18: 23; rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotal width: length, 23:17. Fore femora with five or six ventral spines. Total length 10-10.3 mm. Distribution; Ceram, Gilolo, Philippine Is., Palan Is., New Guinea, New Britain, Celebes, Sumatra, Queensland, Samoa, Caroline Is., Borneo, Sarawak, Assam, Indo-China, Samboangan and Java, Australian records: New South Wales (Munich); Queensland, Cairns District, A. M. Lea (G. G, E. Scudder, Vancouver); Queens- land, F. P. Dodd; Stewart River, Queensland, Jan. Feb. 1927 Hale & Tindale (S.A.M.). GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 465 TYPES EXAMINED AND THEIR DEPOSITION. In the course of this work, the following types have been examined by one of us (G.G.E.S8,)+ their location is noted, Boshequius australis Dist. in B.M. Dieuches consanguineus Dist. in B.M. D. distanti Bergr. not examined, deposition of type unknown, D, finitihus Van Duzee in C.A.8. D. longicollis (Dallas) in B.M. D. maculicollis (Walk.) in B.M. (D. atricornis Stal in Stockholm). D. notalus (Dallas) in B.M, D, obscuripes (Walk.) in B.M. D. oceanicus (Dist.) in B.M, Elasmolomus nereis (RKirk.) type not examined, deposition unknown. E. papuanus (Dist.) type not examined, not in B.M,. E. sordidus (Fab.) represented by two specimens, one male, one female, in the collection of Kiel examined by G.G.H.S. in Copen- hagen. The female has been selected as lectotype and so labelled. (Aphanus littoralis Dist. also examined in B.M.) E. v-album (Stal) in Stockholm (Z. insularis Kirk in Hawaiian Sugar Planter’s Association; 2. australis (Dist.) in B.M.). Narbo biplagiatus (Walk) in B.M. (N. metochoides Bergr. in Helsinki), ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This work was done while one of us (G.G.E.S.) was in receipt of a grant from the National Researeh Council of Canada and University of British Columbia. We wish to thank the following for loan of material and/or permission to study types in their care: Dr. W. E, China, Mr, R. J. Izzard and the Trustees of the British Museum (Nat. Hist.); Mr. H. B. Leech (California Academy of Sciences) ; Dr. BE, Kjellander (Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum, Stockholm); Dr. W. Forster (Zoologische Sammlung des Bayerischen Staates, Munich) ; Dr. J. W. Evans (Australian Museum Sydney); Dr. L, Hoberlandt (Narodni Museum, Prague); Dr, K. H. L. Key (0.8.1-B.0., Canberra) ; Mr, A. N. Burns (National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne); Dr. W. D, L. Ride (Western Australian Museum, Perth); and Dr. T. HE. Woodward (University of Queensland, Brisbane). ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations of names are used for collections from which material has been obtained for studies in this paper. 466 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM A.M.—Australian Museum, Sydney; A.N.I.C.—Australian National Insect Collection, formerly the collection of the C.S.LR.0., Division of Entomology, Canberra; B.M.—British Museum (Nat. Hist.) London; C.A.S.—California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco; Munich— Zoologische Sammlung des Bayerischen Staates, Munich; N.M.— National Museum, Melbourne; Prague—Narodni Museum, Prague; S.A.M.—South Australian Museum, Adelaide; Stockholm—Naturhis- toriska Riksmuseum, Stockholm; U.Q.—University of Queensland, Department of Entomology, Brisbane; W.A.M.—Western Australian Museum, Perth; and W.A.R.I.—Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide. BIBLIOGRAPHY Barber, H. G., 1958: Insects of Micronesia, Heteroptera: Lygaeidae. B. P. Bishop Mus. Insects of Micronesia, 7 (4): 173-218, 11 text figs. Bergroth, E., 1916: New genera and species of Australian Hemiptera. Proce. roy. Soc. Vict. (N.S.) 29(1): 1-18. 1918: Studies in Philippine Heteroptera, 1. Philipp. J. Sci. (d) 13(2&3): 43-126. Breddin, G., 1907: Berytiden und Myodochiden von Ceylon aus der Sammelausbeute von Dr. W. Horn. Rhynch. Het, Dtsch. ent. Z., 34-37 & 203-220, 9 text figs. Carpenter, G. H., 1891: Rhynchota from Murray Island and Mabniag. Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soe. 1891: 137-146. China, W. H., 1930: Hemiptera-Heteroptera. Insects of Samoa 2(3): 1-162, 28 text figs. Corby, H. D. L., 1946-47: Aphanus (Hem. Lygaeidae) in stored Ground-nuts. Bull. ent. Res., 37: 609-617, 11 text figs. Dallas, W. S., 1852: List of the Specimens of Hemipterous Insects in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus. Pub., Pt. 2: 369-592, 4 plates. Distant, W. L., 1901: Rhynchotal Notes—xXT. Heteroptera: Family Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 464-486 & 497-510. 1903 & 1904: The Fauna of British India including Ceylon and Burma. Rhynchota. 2: i-xvii & 1-242 (1903) and 243-503 (1904). 319 text figs. GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 467 1904; Rhynchotal Notes—XXII. Heteroptera from North Queensland. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)13: 263-276. 1906-7: Oriental Heteroptera. Ann. Soc. ent. Belg., 50; 405-417. 1909: Oriental Rhynchota Heteroptera. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (8)3: 491-507. 1918: Contributions to a further knowledge of the Rhyn- chotal Family Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)1: 416-424 & (9)2: 173-179, 257-270 & 486-492. Dohrn, F. A,, 1860: Hemipterologische Miscellaneen. Stett. ent. Ztg. 21: 99-109, 1 plate, 158-162, 208. Fabricius, J, C., 1787: Mantissa Insectorum. 1794: Entomologia Systematica 4: 1-6, 1-434, 435-462, 463-472. 1803: Systema Rhyngotorum. Gross, G. F., 1962: Aberrant Australian Brachypterous Myodochine Bugs (Lygaeidae Rhyparochrominae), Ree, 8, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 14(2): 371-396, 3 plates. Hoffman, W, E., 1932: The Economic Status of the Lygaeids and Notes on the Life History of Lygaeus hospes Fabr. and Aphanus sordidus Fabr. (Hemiptera, Lygaeidae). Ling- nan Sei. J., 11(1): 119-135. Pls. 1-2. Kirkaldy, G. W., 1905: Memoir on the Rhynchota collected by Dr. Arthur Willey, F.B.S., chiefly in Birara (New Britain) and Lifu. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond., 327-362. Pl. 17. 1908; A catalogue of the Hemiptera of Fiji. Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S.W., 33(2): 345-381. Pl. 4. Letherry, L. and Severin, G., 1892-6: Catalogue générale des Hémiptéares. Bruxelles. Tome 1 (1893): 1-x & 1-286 pp. Tome 2 (1894): 1-277 pp. Tome 3 (1896): 1-275 pp. Lindberg, H., 1958: Hemiptera Insularum Caboverdensium. Sys- tematik Okologie und Verbreitung der Heteropteren und Cicadinen der Kapverdischen Inseln. Comment. biol., Helsingf, 19(1) : 1-246, 114 text figs. Scudder, G. G. E., 1957: The Higher classification of the Rhyparo- chrominae (Hem. Lygaeidae). Ent. mon. Mag., 93: 152-156, 468 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM 1958: 24. Lygaeidae (Hemiptera) of Rennell and Bellona Islands. Nat. Hist. of Rennell Is., Brit. Solomon Is., Copenhagen, vol. 2: 135-142, 2 text figs. 1962a: The World Rhyparochrominae (Hemiptera: Lygaei- dae). 1. New Synonymy and Generic Changes. Canad. Ent., 94(7): 764-773. 1962b: The World Rhyparochrominae (Hemiptera: Lygaei- dae) II. New Genera for Previously Described Species. Canad. Ent., 94(9): 981-989. Stal, C., 1865: Hemiptera Africana, 2. 1859: Kongliga svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa omkring Jorden, under Befal af C. A. Virgin Aren 1851-1853. Zoologi I, Insecta. Hemiptera species novas descripsit 219-298, Stockholm. 1868: Hemiptera Fabriciana. Fabricianska Hemipterater efter de i Kopenhamm och Kiel forvarade type- exemplaren. granskade och beskrifne. Fase. I-II K. svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl., VII, No. 11, 1868, pp. 1-148; op. cit. VIII, No. 1, 1869, pp. 1-130. 1872: Genera Lygaeidarum Europae disposuit. Ofvers. Vetensk Akad. Foérh., Stockh., 29(7) : 37-62. 1874: Enumeratio Hemipterorum 4. K. svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl., 12(1): 1-186. Van Duzee, H. P., 1940: New Species of Hemiptera collected by the Templeton Crocker Expedition to the Solomon Islands in 1933. Pan.-Pacif. Ent., 16: 178-192. Walker, F., 1871: Catalogue of the Specimens of Hemiptera Heterop- tera in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus. Pub., Pt. IV: 1-211. 1872: Catalogue of the Specimens of Hemiptera Heteroptera in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus. Pub., Pt. V: 1-202. LEGENDS TO PLATES PLATE 19. Fig. A. Bosbequius australis Distant. Figs. B and C. Dieuches longicollis (Dallas). Fig. D. Elasmolomus v-albwm (Stal). Ree. S.A. Mussum Vou. 14, Phare 19 Yo fdee paige 470.) Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Prater 20 Rec, §8.A. Museum Vor. 14, Puare 21 Rec, S.A. Museum Von. 14, Prare 22 Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Phare 28 Ree. S.A. Museum Vou, 14, Puarn 24 GROSS AND SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI PLATE 20. Fig. A. Dieuches grandicus sp. nov. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Uap Sop SonP Narbo biplagiatus (Walker). PLATE 21. Elasmolomus sordidus (Fabr.). Dieuches consanguineus Distant. Dieuches hirsutus sp. nov. Diewches enigmaticus sp. nov. PLATE 22. Diewches maculicollis (Walker). Dieuches distanti Bergroth. Dieuches oceanicus (Distant). Dieuches obscuripes (Walker). PLATE 23. Dieuches notatus (Dallas). Dieuches nudus sp. nov. Dieuches oceanicus (Distant). Poeantius australopictus sp. nov. PLATE 24. Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee. Dieuches torpidus sp. nov. Dieuches scutellatus Distant. Elasmolomus papuanus (Distant). 469 AQUATIC AND SEMIAQUATIC HEMIPTERA TAKEN IN PORTUGUESE TIMOR BY G. F. GROSS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM” By HERBERT B. HUNGERFORD AND RYUICHI MATSUDA Summary Since the material sent us by the Basel Museum in Switzerland turned up several new species from Timor, we knew that this lot would at least add new distributional records. This it has done although only four familes are represented: Notonectidae, Gerridae, Hydrometridae and Micronectidae. AQUATIC AND SEMIAQUATIC HEMIPTERA TAKEN IN PORTUGUESE TIMOR BY G. F. GROSS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM" By HERBERT B. HUNGERFORD ann RYUICHI MATSUDA Since the material sent us by the Basel Museum in Switzerland turned up several new species from Timor, we knew that this lot would at least add new distributional records. This it has done although only four families are represented. NOTONECTIDAE Anisops nasuta Fieber. ‘‘Pantai Macassar, QOe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 14 and 18, 1961 G. F. Gross*’ 4 males, 4 females. A new record for Timor. Anisops timorensis Brooks. Same label as above. 1 male, 1 female, 1 nymph. GERRIDAE Limnometra ciliata Mayr. ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 14 and 15, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 1 male, 1 female. While this is a new record for Timor it is to be expected to occur, for we have previously recorded it from the Lesser Sunda Islands. Limnogonus australis (Skuse). ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 14 to 23, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 64 adults, both apterous and macropterous; four of them are kept at the University of Kansas. 90 nymphs. Tenagogonus robustus Hungerford and Matsuda. ‘‘Hstacao Zootée- nica and foot of Mundo Perdido nr. Ossi, Timor Portugués, Mar, 9, 1961 G. F. Gross’? 1 male, 1 female: ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 19, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 1 male, 1 female. All of these are apterous. Timor is a new record for this species which was previously known from Hast Java and West Sumba. (1) Contribution No. 1166 from the Department of Entomology, The University of Kansas. This is a by-product of a research project aided by a grant from the National Science Foundation, 472 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM HYDROMETRIDAE Hydrometra maidii Hungerford and Evans. ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 14 to 23, G. F. Gross’? 3 males, 3 females. This species was described from Sumatra and Java, and this is a new record for Timor. MICRONECTIDAE Micronecta sp. ‘‘Pante Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 18, 1961 G. F. Gross’? 3 females. While this is a new record for the genus occurring in Timor, males are needed to determine the species. A NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM (ACARINA, LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE) FROM BAT GUANO By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary A new species of larval Neotrombidium, N. gracilipes (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) is described from a single specimen obtained from bat guano from Fig Tree Cave, Wombeyan, New South Wales. Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov. Fig. 1 Holotype larva: Shape, slightly engorged, broadly oval. Length of idiosoma 960, width 580y. Dorsum: With the scutum triangular with a broadly rounded anterior apex, furnished with three pairs of ciliated setae and a pair of fine filamentous sensillae shortly and sparsely ciliated distally, no trace of a crista, the lateral margins do not run in a straight and oblique line, but are roughly longitudinal and parallel from the antero-median setae to the antero-lateral setae which they contour, and then similarly to the postero-lateral setae which they outwardly surround, posterior margin lightly convex. A NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM (ACARINA, LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE) FROM BAT GUANO By H. WOMERSLEY, Sours Avusrrauian Museum Fig. 1 SYNOPSIS A new species of larval Neotrombidium, N. gracilipes (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) is described from a single specimen obtained from bat guano from Fig Tree Cave, Wombeyan, New South Wales. Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov. Fig. 1 Holotype larva: Shape, slightly engorged, broadly oval. Length of idiosoma 960n, width 580p. Dorsum: With the scutum triangular with a broadly rounded anterior apex, furnished with three pairs of ciliated setae and a pair of fine filamentous sensillae shortly and sparsely ciliated distally, no trace of a crista, the lateral margins do not run in a straight and oblique line, but are roughly longitudinal and parallel from the antero- median setae to the antero-lateral setae which they contour, and then similarly to the postero-lateral setae which they outwardly surround, posterior margin lightly convex. The antero-median setae, AM, and postero-lateral setae, PL, are fairly short and blunt, but the antero- lateral, AL, are long and tapering, the sensillae are shortly ciliated distally and arise from fairly large alveolae a little in front of PL. Dorsal surface posterior of the scutum with 31 pairs of tapering finely ciliated setae to 60% long and arranged in irregular transverse rows of 4 to 6 setae. The Standard Data in micra are as follows: AW 29, LW 52, PW 89, SB 38, ASB 87, PSB 20, SD 107, AM-AL 35, AL-PL 70, AM 41, AL 64, PL 35, Sens. 90, SW 96. Venter: As figured; coxae I and IT separated by the width of the urstigma, all coxae with only one pair of slender ciliated setae, between coxae I with one pair of setae situated just off the inner margins of coxae, a single pair of setae between coxae III and posterior coxae III with 10 pairs of setae, all coxae with slight porosity. 474 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig. 1. Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov. Larva. A. dorsum, B. venter, C, dorsal scutum, D, mandible, E. palp, F. tibia and tarsus, leg I., G. same of leg III. WOMERSLEY—NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM A75 Mandibles (fig. D) long and narrow, with strong simple cheliceral blade. Palpi slender as figured, tibial elaw bifid and tarsus small. Legs unusually slender, I and IT 526» long, III 6204. Tibia and tarsi about 8 times longer than high, all tarsi with a single claw, tarsi I 154» long by 17» high, without any solenidia as far as can be seen, tibia I 994 long, tibia and tarsi II] as figured, tarsi 168» long by 17» high, and tibia 128, long. Locality: A single specimen from bat guano from Fig Tree Cave, Wombeyan, New South Wales, 21st August 1960. Remarks: This species differs from the other deseribed larvae of Neotrombidiwm, barringunense Tlirst, tenuipes (Wom.) and tricuspidum Borland, in the very slender legs. It also differs from the first larva to be described, barringunense (Southeott, 1954) in that coxae I and II are separated by the width of the urstigma, as is also the case in tenwipes and tricuspidwm, These coxae are also similarly separated in Monimguls streblida Wharton, the genus of which Southcott 1954 synonymised with Neotrombidium, but which the writer has shown in a current paper on other grounds to be valid. It seems therefore that the separation or otherwise of coxae I and IT is not of generic importance, Adults of a new species of Neotrombidium, N. gracilare Wom. and described in a current paper (Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Austr., Adelaide, 1962) are known from bat guano from other bat caves in Hastern Australia and it is probable that the larva described above is that of N. yracilare. The occurrence of two different species of Neotrom- bidiwm in such a localized specialized biotope as bat guano seems extremely unlikely. However, until the larva and adult can be correlated by rearing, a new specific name is proposed. REFERENCES 1. Borland J. G., 1956: The genus Neotrombidiwm (Acarina, Trom- bidioidea) in the United States. J. Entom. Soc, Kansas 29(1); 29-35, 8, Southcott, R-V., 1954: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina, Leouwen- hoekiidae), I. Description of the ovum and larva of Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst 1928, with an account of the biology of the genus, Traris. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 77: 89-97. 3, Wharton, G, W., 1938: The Acarina of Yucatan Caves, Carnegie Inst. of Washington, Publ. 491: 137-152. 476 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM 4, —_—_—— 1947: The relationship between Trombiculid and Trom- bidiid Mites. J. Parasitol. 33, sect. 2. 5. Womersley, H., 1954: New genera and species apparently of Apoloniinae (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) from the Asiatic-Pacific Region. Malaysian Parasites VII; Studies, Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No. 26: 108-119. 6. ————— 1962: Two new species of Acarina from bat guano from Australian caves. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide. 7. ————— 1962: Monunguis Wharton 1938, a valid genus (Acarina, Trombidioidea). Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 14(3). “MONUNGUIS” WHARTON 1938, A VALID GENUS (ACARINA, TROMBIDIOIDEA) By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary The genus Monunguis Wharton 1938 was erected for a new larval species of mite, Monunguis streblida Wharton, found parasitic on bat flies (Diptera, Streblidae) from caves in Yucatan, Mexico. Considered by recent workers as synonymous with the genus Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 (fam. Leeuwenhoekiidae) it is now shown, on re- examination of a paratype, to be valid and that while probably more nearly rated to Neotrombidium it does show some relationship to Johnstoniana George 1909 = Rohaultia Ouds. 1911 (fam. Johnstonianidae). “MONUNGUIS” WHARTON 1938, A VALID GENUS (ACARINA, TROMBIDIOIDEA) By H. WOMERSLEY, Sovrn Avstranmn Musrum Fig. 1-2 SYNOPSIS The genus Monunguis Wharton 1938 was erected for a new larval species of mite, Monunguis streblida Wharton, found parasitic on bat flies (Diptera, Streblidae) from caves in Yucatan, Mexico. Considered by recent workers as synonymous with the genus Neotrombidiwm Leonardi 1901 (fam. Leeuwenhoekiidae) it is now shown, on re-examination of a paratype, to be valid and that while probably more nearly rated to Neotrombidium it does show some relationship to Johnstoniana George 1909 — Rohaultia Ouds. 1911 (fam. Johnstonianidae). The paratype examined, one of the three specimens comprising the type and two paratypes in the United States National Museum, is redescribed and refigured. Genus Monunguis Wharton Wharton G. W. 1938, Acarina of Yueatan Caves. Carnegie Institute of Washington, Publ. 491, pp. 150-151, fig. 25-28. Type Monunguis streblida Wharton. In 1938 Wharton (loc. cit.) erected the genus Monunguis for a curious larval trombidiform mite, Monunguis streblida found parasitic upon bat flies, Péerellipsis araneae Coq. and Trichobius dugesti Towns. (Diptera, Streblidac) from the Cinque de Mayas Cave, Tekax, Yucatan, Mexico. The description was very brief and the figures, especially that of the dorsal seutum, somewhat crude and puzzling. Since the original description few references have been made to the genus and species, and it was overlooked both in Vitzthum’s big work in Bronn’s Tiereich, vol. 6 Acarina, 1943, and in Sig Thor and Willman’s work E 478 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM in Das Tiereieh, Lfg. 71b. 1947, In a brief note in 1947 Wharton (9) suggested the possibility of the synonymy of Monunguis with Neotrombidiwm Leonardi 1901, The next reference appears to be that of Baker and Wharton 1952 (1) when they listed the genus in the subfamily Trombellinae, In 1954 Southeott (5) in describing the larva of Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst, discussed its generic affinities with Monunguis but without having had access to any of the original material. He concluded that Monuwnguis was synonymous with Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901. Borland J. G. 1956 (2) was the first and only one who has in any degree re-examined a specimen of the original material and, although he gave little or no further data and no figures, on com- parison with the larva of Neolrombidium tricuspidum he was of the opinion that as more data became available the two genera might be validly separated. With a view to clearing up the question I have been endeavouring for some time to trace the deposition of the original material and lately, through the good offices of Dr. D. E, Johnston of the Institute of Acarology, Agricultural Kxperiment Station, Wooster, Ohio, I have heen privileged to receive on loan from Dr. J. F. Gates Clarke and Dr, Hi, W. Baker of the Division of Insects, Smithsonian Institn- tion, Washington, D.C., a paratype slide of Monunguis streblida Wharton, and I am indeed grateful to these gentlemen for the opportunity of redescribing the species. The paratype slide examined is labelled as follows: on the let hand side as— ““Mononyx streblida n.g. n.s.p, G, W. Wharton, Duke U. Co-type”’ Alongside this label is another red one marked— “*Co-type No, 1393, U.S.N.M.” on the right hand side as— “On Trichobius dugesti, Cinque de Mayas Cave, Tekax, Yueatan, A.S. Pearse coll. no. 162, July 29-1936 Lot. 36-31564"", Dr, Baker informs me that the other two slides in the collection are similarly labelled, except that both specimens were from Pterellipsis araneae. One of these is marked “Type’’, the other “*Co-type’’. WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 479 The generic name used on the slides ‘‘Mononyx’’ was evidently changed before publication on realization of its having been used earlier. Before considering the affinities and validity of the genus, the species is redescribed and refigured from the paratype specimen seen, as follows: Monunguis streblida Wharton Wharton, G. W. 1938, Acarina of Yucatan Caves. Carnegie Institute of Washington, Publ, 491, p. 150-151, fig. 25-28. Fig. 1, A-B, 2, A-E Larva: Body elongate oval (pear shaped; Borland), nearly twice as long as wide, 514p by 298». Scutum triangular with anterior apex, with 3 pairs of blunt ciliated rod-like setae and one pair of long filiform nude sensillae arising from large alveolae, a crista is distinctly present extending from the more or less straight posterior margin Fig. 1. A-B. Monunguis streblida Wharton. A. dorsum, B, venter (Original, from paratype). 480 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig. 2. A-E. Monungwis streblida Wharton. A. dorsal scutum, B. palp, ©. chelicerae, D. tibia and tarsus of leg I, E. dorsal setae (Original, from paratype). WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 481 to the anterior apex of the seutum, it is more clearly defined anteriorly, between the sensillae bases and at the posterior end; in between these areas it is less demarcated and bulbous. The Standard Data in micra are AW 9, MW 46, PW 73, SB(p) 35, A-P 67, AL 26, ML 29, PL 15, Sens. 58, SD 78, The eyes are large, two on each side, on ocular shields in line with the sensillae bases, posterior eyes the smaller. Chelicerae with well selerotised and strongly angled blade without teeth, Galeal seta short and as far as ean be seen shortly ciliated. Palpi stout, feraur with a loug strongly branched seta as figured, genu with a similar shorter seta, tibial setae not clearly seen but elaw strong thick and hilureate, tarsus not clear. Dorsum with approximately 50 pairs of ciliated tapering setae, lengthening posteriorly from 17 to 30x, in irregular transverse rows. Ventrally with the coxae as figured, I and IT separated (as stated by Wharton (6)), but only narrowly so and for not more than the width of the urstigma, IT and IIT widely separated, all coxae with a long tapering ciliated seta. Between coxae I with a pair of setae, between coxae IIT with two pairs of setae, and posterior of coxae TIT with approximately 30 piars of setae similar to dorsal. Legs: All 6-segmented, although there is an indefinite division of the femur, leg I 293 long, I] 283, IIT 2370p, tarsus I 72 long, each tarsus with a single strong claw 24 long, tarsi I and [T each with a long solenidia and other sensory setae as in fig. 2D. AFFINITIES OF THE GENUS In his original description of Monunguis, Wharton considered it to be closely related to Rohaultia Ouds. 1911 (4) (now regarded as synonymous with Johnstoniana George 1909) agreeing with it in the possession of two pairs of eyes, a crista, a rostrnm, divided femora aud a single scta on each coxa, but differing in having only a single pair of psendostigmata and a single claw on each tarsus, In a brief research note in 1947 (7) however, he raised the possibility of Monunguis being synonymous with Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 as follows: ‘The larvae of Neotrombidium have not been previously recognized, THowever they have been described under the generic name Monunguis . .. .”’ In 1954 Southeott (5) described the larva of Neotrombidiwm barringunense Hirst, and in discussing the relationship with Monunguis streblida Wharton stated that ‘There are so many resemblances 487 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM between these larvae that there appears little doubt that Monunguis and Neotrombidium are congeneric and as the latter genus has priority it must take precedence aver Monunguis.”? In 1956 Borland (2) in disenssing the genus Neotrombidium in the United States, described a new larval species N, tricuspidum as well as the adults reared from the larvae. In this paper he also refers to two larvae of a second but undeseribed species, He had the opportunity of examining a ‘‘eo-type’ of Monunguis streblida Wharton, and concludes ‘it is the opinion of the writer that while reeognition of the synonymy (with Neotrombidium) may be expedient af this time, as more data becomes available the two genera may be validly separated, At present consolidation of the group appears desirahle.’’ Borland unfortunately did not give any fresh figures of the specimen examined and only made the following comments on morphological features: ‘The larval seutum of M,. streblida bears an incipient crista which is not present in the known larvae af Neotrambidinm although upon earefal comparison faint traces can be seen in Neotrombidium, Therefore with respect to the scutum, M, streblida differs [rom Neotrombidinm larvae in degree only. However both the form of the body setae and the body shape seem to set M. streblida apart from the lurva of Neotrombidium. The setae, particularly those of the sentum, are much more plumose, hearing strong branches, and are more numerous on the dorsum than in either M, tricuspidum or N, barringunense, whose setae are sparse and with indistinct barbs. Monwnguis streblida is pear-shaped, as opposed to the ovoid body form of N. triouspidum and N. barringunense. The cheliceral blades of M, streblida are peculiarly modified’. Sonutheott in lis 1954 paper (5), and again in 1957 (6), notes that althongl Wharton did not figure the vertral surface he did state that eoxae IT and IL were separated as in ““Rohaullia’’. We also noted that the single tarsal claw and the shape and chactotaxy of the seutum strongly resembled that of Neotrombidiwm, Wat that the curious structure between the sental sensillae figured by Wharton has no comparable structure in Neotrombidium and might from its appearance be an artefact, From the figures now given, of the paratype specimen examined it will be seen that while the shape and chaetotaxy of the sentum do resemble those of Neotrombidium there is a very definite erista whieh is moderately wide posteriorly, narrows between the posterior sensillae and then swells ont, narrows again and then expands to a rounded knoh on which are situated the anterior median pair of setae. From this shape it is easy to trace that shown WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 483 diagrammatically by Wharton. The anterior pair of setae on the erista are not sersillary in form but stiff and shortly ciliated as are the ML and PL sental setae, whereas the posterior sensillae laterad of the erista are sensilliform. In Johnstomana (Rohaultia) the anterior pair are sensilliform and on a fairly well defined sensillary area, shaped very much as in M. streblida. In his intensive study of the Johnstonianidae, Newell 1957 (3) has shown fairly conclasively that the anterior pair of setae, although very much modified and resembling the other setae of the seutum are but modifications of the anterior pair of seutal sensillae. In this feature then, plus the presence of a distinct crista, M. streblida resembles Jahnstoniana rather than Neotrombidiwm. In Neotrombidium coxne I and II are not separated, except outwardly, by the urstigma while in M, streblida they are separated for the whole length and for the width of the urstigma, In Neotrombidium spp. and also the genera of Johnstonianidae coxae I carries two pairs of fine ciliated setae, one at the anterior lateral corners and one on the extreme inner margin (off, but close to in a new species at present being studied by the writer), with the exception of Johnstoniana errans (Jolmst.) which from Ondemans figure of 1912 lacks the inner setae of coxae I (this is the only figure I have been able to see and I have not seen actual specimens). Oudemans also does not figure any setae in the intereoxal area of coxae I. In M. streblida, however, coxae I bear only one seta, rather strongly ciliated at the anterior lateral angles, and there is a pair of similar setae in the intercoxal area. Here Moniwiguis appears to be distinct fram both Neotrombidium and the genera of the Johnstonianidae. The palpal tibial claw is bifid in Monunguis as in Neotrombidium while in Johustoniana errans it is simple, but in J, latiscuta Newell, it ig terminally bifid, and in Centrotrombidiwm distans Newell it is simple. In Diplothrombium monoense Newell and D. cascadense Newell (Johnstonianidae) it may be simple or bifid. This character therefore seems to be of little, if any value generieally. Tn having only a single tarsal claw on all legs, Monwnguis agrees with Neotrombidium, The various larval species of Johnstonianidae possess tarsi with two or three claws, The dorsal setae in the species of Neolrombidium are generally long and sparse, and abont 12-15 pairs, whereas in Monunguis streblida they are shorter, much more numerous and about 50 pairs in number. In this respect the chactotaxy resembles that of the many 484 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM species of Acomatacarus, family Leeuwenhoekiidae, to which the genus Neotrombidium has been assigned. CONCLUSION Monunguis must therefore be considered as a valid genus distinct from Neotrombidium. It does, however, show some features relative to Johnstonianidae, but on the whole its affinities lie more with Neotrombidium than elsewhere as shown by the following table of larval characters. Johnstonianidae Neotrombidium Monunguie Crista 2, cteta ager dhe. abe.. + _ + A.M. setae .. 0.0... eee sensilliform setiform setiform Coxae I and IT touching ....... — + (1) _ Comal setae ....... cc. eee eee L.AL.L. or 2.1.1. 2.1.1, Lid, Tarsal claws .....,6::.4.-.0.. two or thres one one Palpal tibial claw ............. simple or bifid bifid bifid Dorsal setao ............2.-.. sparse sparse numerous Leg segmentation ....,........ 7.6.6. 6.6.6. (2) Only in barringunense Hirst; separated by width of urstigma in tenuipes (Wom.) and tricuspidium Borland, as well as in a new speeies being deseribed elsewhere. Until such times as the adults should be known, Monunguis must be considered as a valid genus belonging to the Leeuwenhoekiidae different form, but closely allied to Neotrombidium Leonardi. REFERENCES 1. Baker, EK. W. and Wharton, G. W., 1952: Introduction to Acarology. . Borland, J. G., 1956: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina Trom- bidioidea) in the United States. J. Entom. Soc. Kansas 29(1) : 29-35. 3. Newell, J. M., 1957: Studies on the Johnstonianidae (Acari, Parasitengona). Pacific Science 11: 396-466. 4. Oudemans, A, C., 1912: Die bis jetzt bekannten Larven von Thrombidiidae und Erythraeidae. Zool. Jahrb. Supplt. 14. . Southcott, R. V., 1954: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) I. Description of the ovum and larva of Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst 1928, with an account of the biology of the genus. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 77: 89-97. to on WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 485 6. ——_——— 1957: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina, Leeuwenhoek- iidae). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 80: 157-164. 7. Wharton, G. W., 1938: Acarina of Yucatan Caves. Carnegie Inst. of Washington, Publ. 491: 187-152. 8, ————— 1947: The relationship between Trombiculid and Trom- bidiid Mites. J. Parasitol. 33, sect. 2. NEW RECORDS OF DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF THE HITHERTO UNKNOWN LARVAL STAGE By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary A small collection of Diarthrophallidae (Acarina) in the Coll. Samsindk in the Entomological Institute of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences in Praha has been submitted to the author by Dr. K. Samsindk. The specimens, seven in all, were collected from Passalid beetles from Brazil and India in the National Museum in Praha, all of which were of long standing. Five of the specimens were from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil, all of which can be referred to known species. One of these however, is a larva of Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) and the first larval Diarthrophallid to be described. NEW RECORDS OF DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF THE HITHERTO UNKNOWN LARVAL STAGE By H. WOMERSLEY, Sourn Ausrratin Muszum Fig. 1-7 SYNOPSIS A small ecolleetion of Diarthrophallidae (Acarina) in the Coll. Samsinak in the Entomological Institute of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences in Praha has been submitted to the author by Dr. K. Samsinak. The specimens, seven in all, were collected from Passalid beetles from Brazil and India in the National Museum in Praha, all of which were of long standing. Five of the specimens were from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil, all of which can be referred to known species. One of these however, is a larva of Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) and the first larval Diarthrophallid to be described. The other two specimens from Coimbatore, India are a female and a larva of a new species, Brachytremella epiphenus, the first record of the family from India. The specimens are all figured in detail and are to be returned to the Academy of Sciences in Praha. Family DIARTHROPHALLIDAE The following small but extremely interesting collection of mites of the family Diarthrophallidae has been submitted to me for study and determination by Dr. K. Samsinaék of the Biological Institute of Czechoslovakia and I tender to him my sincere thanks for the opportunity of so dong. The specimens, seven in all, were recovered by Dr. Samsinak from old specimens of Passalid beetles in the collections of the National Museum in Praha. Five of them, all from beetles from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil can be referred to known species; one specimen however, is the first true Diarthrophallid larva to be described. The other two specimens are from a Passalid from Coimbatore, India, one 488 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM a female, the other a larva. These are the first Diarthrophallids to be described from India, and belong to a new species Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. Genus Diarthrophallus Trigirdh Tragardh I. 1946. Ent. Meded., 24 (6), 371. Type: Uroseius quercus Pearse et al, 1936. Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse ef al.) Fig. 1 A-C, 2 A-B Uroseius quercus Pearse et al 1936, Ecol. Monogr., 6: 478, fig. 31-34. Diarthrophallus quercus Tragirdh 1946, Ent. Meded., 24(6): 371-380, fig. 1-2, 4-5; Womersley 1961, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 84: 11, 29-32, fig. LA, 2A-B. ——— 113 Fig. 1, A-O Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse et al) female. A, dorsum; B, venter; C, tarsus of leg I. (Specimen from Coll, Samsinak.) WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 489 This species is represented in the collection by two specimens, one a female from a Passalid Veturius cephalotes from Sao Paulo, Brazil, the other a deutonymph from Passalus (Petrejus) sp., also from Sao Paulo. Both specimens are figured. The female, fig. 1 A-C, unfor- tunately lacks all the long dorsal setae; it measures 573» (idiosoma) in length. The deutonymph, fig. 2 A-B measures 386» in length. Fig. 2. A-B Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse et al) deutonymph. A, dorsum; B, venter. (Specimen from Coll. Samsinfik.) Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) Fig. 3 A-B, 4 A-B, 5 A-B Passalobia duodecimpilosa Lombardini 1938, Mem. Soc. ent. ital., 17(1): 48, fig. V, VII. Diarthrophallus simitis Tragardh 1946, Ent. Meded. 24(6): 380-384, fig, 6-7. Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa, Womersley 1961, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 84: 32-34, fig. 3 A-G. 490 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Three specimens in the collection are referred to the species; one, a deutonymph was from the Passalid, Veturius cephalotes (ex Col. Nicker) and just labelled ‘‘America’’, but as this beetle is a South American species, it was most likely from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil, as with the host of the female of D. quercus. Of the other two specimens, both of which are from Passalus (Phoronaeus) clypeo- marginatus from Brazil, one is a tritonymph, the other, the hitherto first larval Diarthrophallid to be described, The tritonymph, fig. 3 A-B measures 433. (idiosoma) in length, and the deutonymph, fig. 4 A-B, 445», The larva is described as follows: Larva morphotype, fig. 5 A-B. Idiosoma 249,» long, 192» wide; gnathosoma 81» long. Dorsum: Fig. 5 A, with only two pairs of long slender ciliated and apically capitate setae, the anterior pair at about the mid-length of the idiosoma and 316» long, the second pair subposterior and marginal to 2204 long. The dorsal shield covers most of the dorsum and is somewhat truncate posteriorly. Pig. 3. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) tritonymph. A, dorsum; B, venter. (Specimen from Coll. Samsinak.) WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 491 del & Fig. 4. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) deutonymph. A, dorsum; B, (Specimen from Coll. Samsindk.) 492 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig. 5. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) larva. (legs on left side shown dorsally). (Specimen from Coll, Samsin&k.) A, dorsum; B, venter WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 493 Venter: Fig, 5B. Sternal shield 200p long, 48» wide between coxae II then contracting before widening to 62u between coxae Il and ITI and again contracting before expanding to 96 posterior of coxae TV, its posterior margin is broadly rounded and fairly close to the margin of the anal shield; the sternal setae are all off the shield, two pairs between coxae II, one between ecoxae ITT, all are small and fine to 172 long. Anal shield a transverse ellipse 534 wide by 11p deep, and furnished with two long slender apically capitate setae to 300» long; there is a pair of short setae between the sternal and anal shields. Gnathosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in the later stages. Legs all rather thick and stout and directed forwards, I 6-segmented, tarsus apically bifureate with long apical taetile seta, dorsally with a long strong and ciliated seta to 2004 on genn, and a rather shorter one on the femur, legs IT and [HI 7-segmented, IT with a long seta on telofemnr, [TT with two long setae on telofemur and one on basifemur, tarsi of legs [LIL with large pad-like ambulacra, without claws; legs T 178 long, TL and IL 200s. Peritreme entirely absent, Remarks: This larva, the first true larval Diarthrophallid to be nown is associated with D. duodecimpilosa only because it was from the same host, Veturius cephalotes from Brazil, as the deutonymph; it may however be that of D. qguercus, Genus Brachytremella Tragardh Trigirdh, 1. 1946, Ent. Meded, 24(6): 384; Womersley H. 1961 Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., 84: 11. Type: Brachytremella spinosa Trag. Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. Fig, 6 A-B, 7 A-D Types: Holotype female and morphotype larva in the ‘Col. Samsinak’’, a part of the collections of the Entomological Institute of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences, Praha, Localities: Both female and larva from specimens of Epiphenus stoliezghae in collections of the National Museum of Czekoslovakia in Praha, from Coimbatore, India. Female holotype: fig. 6 A-B. A broad oval shape, with idiosoma 442. long and $124 wide. Dorsum: With the dorsal shield 389, long, almost entirely covering the dorsum with the posterior margin truncate, furnished with two pairs of short tapering and apparently nude setae anterior 5 494 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM dd Fig. 6. A-B Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. female, A, dorsum; B, venter (legs on left side shown dorsally). (Specimen from Coll. Samsinak.) of the mid-length, the anterior pair 38» long, the other pair 58» long, and at the postero-lateral corners of the shield with a long slender nude seta to 216» long. Venter: Sternal shield 307» long extending well past coxae IV, 144» wide at greatest width between coxae II and III, contracted between coxae II and again between coxae IV, with rounded posterior, furnished with 5 pairs of strong sternal setae, anterior pair 38» long and between coxae II, second pair 34» and third pair 29n, these between coxae III, fourth pair of setae rather close to third but between anterior margins of coxae IV to 24» long, fifth pair 291 long and posterior of coxae IV. The genital shield is large, situated in the middle of the sternal shield between coxae II and III, 144. long by 96» wide and open posteriorly, or rather without a clear cut hinge line. WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 495 Endopodal shields distinct as figured, Anal shield small, transverse, with a pair of long slender setae to 192» long and sparsely and shortly ciliated; on the cuticle and lateral on each side is a short fine seta. Gnathosoma as in the genus. Legs short and stout, directed forwards, I 163, long, II 221, IIT 230n, IV 240; tarsus of leg I apically bifureate, with terminal tactile seta, coxae fragmented as figured, tarsi of legs I-IV with large pad-like ambulacra without claws; the long dorsal setae on the femur and genu of legs II-IV relatively short. Peritreme short, in line with anterior margin of coxae TV. Larva, morphotype. A rather smaller species than the larva of D. duodecimpilosa described above. Idiosoma 268» long, 165% wide; enathosoma 72» long. del #, Fig. 7. A-D Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. larva, A, dorsum; B, yenter (legs on left side shown dorsally); C, leg I; D, ambulacra of leg III. (Specimen from Coll, Samsinak.) 496 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Dorsum: Fig. 7 A, with only two pairs of long slender ciliated and apically knobbed setae, the anterior pair at about the mid-length of the idiosoma, 125 long, the second pair subposterior and marginal to 115» long; the dorsal shield covers most of the dorsum except posteriorly, and its posterior margin is widely truncate and sinuous, Venter: Fig. 7 B, as figured; sternal shield 168 long, 29. wide between coxae II, then gradually expanding to 67» between coxae IT and III, then contracting slightly before widening to 72» behind coxae III, posterior margin broadly rounded and fairly widely separated from anal shield, with four pairs of sternal setae all situated off the sternal shield, setae I are small and fine and elose to base of gnathosoma, IT to TV are long, 294, and stont, a pair of medium setae between anal and sternal shields. Anal shield a transverse ellipse 43 wide by llp deep, furnished with two ciliated capitate setae to 192» long, Gnathosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in the preceeding species. Leys all rather stout and directed forwards, I 6-segmented, IT and IIT 7-segmented, tarsi of leg I apically bifurcate, with long apical tactile setae, the long seta on genu only 33», no very long setae on IT, and only one to 48» on telofemur of ITI; tarsi of legs I] and IIT with large pad-like ambulacra without claws; leg I 115, long, TI 182», ITT 192,, Remarks: From the larva of the preceding species, Diarthro- phallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.), it differs strikingly in the smaller size, the less constricted sternal shield, and the very much stronger and stouter sternal setae IT-IV. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Sincere thanks are expressed to Dr. K. Samsinak for submitting his material to me for study and to my assistant Miss B. Hubbard for her careful drawings of the specimens and the typescript, REFERENCES Camin, J. TH. and Gorirossi, F, E., 1955: Revision of the Suborder Mesostigmata (Acarina) based on New Interpretations of Comparative Morphological Data. Spec, Bull. II, Chicago Acad. Sei., pp. 1-70. Lombardini, G., 1926: Duo noya genera acarorum. Boll. Soc. ent. ital,, 58 (9-10); 158-161. 1938: Acari novi, Mem. Soe. ent. ital., 17(1): 44-46, WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 497 1938, Acari novi II. Mem. Soe. ent. ital., 17(1): 118-120. 1943: Acari. Il maschio adulto e larva di femina della specie Passalobia quadricaudata Lomb. 1’Agricoltura Coloniale, 27(3): 3-6. 1951: Acari nuovi. Redia, 36: 245-250. Pearse, A. 8. et al, 1936: The Ecology of Passalus cornutus Fabr., a beetle which lives in rotting logs. Ecol. Monogr., No. 6: 455-490. Trig&rdh, L., 1946: Diarthrophallina, a new group of Mesostigmata, found on Passalid beetles. Ent. Meded., 24(6): 369-394. Womersley, H., 1961: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea paraphagic upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family Passalidae. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 84: 11-26. 1961: On the Family Diarthrophallidae (Acarina- Mesostigmata-Monogynaspida) with Particular Reference to the Genus Passalobia Lombardini 1926. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 84: 27-44. TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA PART II” MUSICAL ROCKS AND ASSOCIATED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA PEOPLE By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary Large static (“kondala) or musical rocks, of the Pityandjara tribes-people of the Western Desert of Australia are described. Kondala stones may be incorporated either in arrangements of a formal character or stand alone. They may be given totemic names and identities; groups of them can denote families of ancestral beings. During ceremonies they may be decorated with painted designs and covered with the secret (‘mina) blood taken from a vein in the arm. They are the “voices” of totemic ancestors and may be played by striking with hammerstones during male initiation, during female puberty ceremonies and as part of “increase” or “fattening” ceremonies, at which dances are enacted for the stimulation of growth of totemic animals of economic importance. A notable series of such musical rocks are described from Makurapiti, near Mount Agnes on the border of South and Western Australia. TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA PART IL MUSICAL ROCKS AND ASSOCIATED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA PEOPLE By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or ANTHROPOLOGY, Soura AusrraLian Muszeum Plates 25-26 and text fig. 1-11 SUMMARY Large static [’kondala] or musical rocks, of the Pitjandjara tribes- people of the Western Desert of Australia are described. Kondala stones may be incorporated either in arrangements of a formal character or stand alone. They may be given totemic names and identities; groups of them can denote families of ancestral beings. During ceremonies they may be decorated with painted designs and covered with the secret [’mina] blood taken from a vein in the arm. They are the ‘‘voices”’ of totemie ancestors and may be played by striking with hammerstones during male initiation, during female puberty ceremonies and as part of ‘‘increase’’ or ‘*fattening’’ ceremonies, at which dances are enacted for the stimulation of growth of totemic animals of economic importance. A notable series of such musical rocks are described from Makurapiti, near Mount Agnes on the border of South and Western Australia. Small portable stone kondala also are used, A specimen of such from the Everard Ranges is described, and details are given of the part played by wooden kondala; both plain ones for secular use, and carved ones made for ceremonies associated with male initiation. INTRODUCTION In May 1957 the present writer, while on a visit to the Western Desert discovered that aborigines of the Pitjandjara tribe used musical sounds made by striking large rocks with hammerstones. (1) Part I appeared in these Records, vy. 13, 1959, pp. 805-332, 500 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM These bell-like tones represented the ‘‘voices’’ of ancestral totemic beings, at initiation and ‘‘increase’’ ceremonies. Therefore it was with some interest he discovered, on his return from the expedition, that similar discoveries of ‘‘rock gongs’? had been made in Africa and published by Fagg (1956, 1957). The observations in Africa and Australia were made quite independently of each other, and are not likely to be related in any way. More recent references to African rock gongs have been made by Lanning (1958), Robinson (1958), Conant (1960) and Vaughan (1962). MUSICAL ROCKS AT MAKURAPITI On 13 May 1957 we were examining the sandhill country around Mount Agnes in the Blyth Range near the border of South and Western Australia (129° 5’ E. Long. x 26° 50’ S. Lat.). The writer was in the company of Messrs. W. B. MacDougall and R. Macaulay, with two Pitjandjara aborigines, Peter and Willy. We had broken a new land-rover track across sandhill country from Mount Davies while in search of a family group of aborigines, strange to the Pitjandjara, who had been reported to have come into the area from the south-west. The signs of their presence had been of the nature of the smokes of distant fires. Passing around the south-western extremity of the Blyth Range we came upon an ordered arrangement of stones, which our native companions said was the ceremonial place of Makurapiti, and used for the ‘‘inerease’’ or ‘‘fattening’’ of the [’walkurari]. The phrase used by informants was ‘‘fattening the [’mako]’’. Walkurari are the large, larvae [’mako], of several species of Cossid moths. One of them is Xyleutes leucomochla Turner 1915. These larvae live in silk-lined tubes about a foot underground and feed externally on the roots of wattle shrubs, including Acacia Kempeana, A. victoriae and A. ligulata (Leguminosae). A good harvest of the grubs is a matter of vital concern since they form an appreciable part of the diet, not only of young children but also of adults (Tindale 1953). The ceremonial ground of Makurapiti is in a flat sandy area, with an underlying pediment of the rocks of the Blyth Range. The place is in a shallow basin some 80 feet long varying in width between 20 and 40 feet. The basin runs in a N.W. to S.E. direction, expanding at the southern end into a circular area with a diameter of some 40 feet. TINDALE—PITJANDIARA MUSICAL ROCKS 501 The hollow evidently had been man made; debris repeatedly had been swept away to the margins so creating a shallow depression which formed the dancing area. Near its northern eud stood a single subrectangular erect stone block, two feet, high, with a red and white painted figure on one face; the design was an inverted U-shape figure in white enelosing red (plate 25, fig, A). There was a vertical white line down the middle of the design on the stone, Beside this painted stone lay three smaller ones similar to native hanimerstones. Ou one corner of the big stone and facing away [rom the painted design was a shallow eup-shaped depression about three inches across. This had been rather freshly battered into the rock and therefore showed up in marked coutrast io the russet red eolour of the weathered surface of the undecorated parts of the stone, At the opposite end of the cleared area, in the centre of a circular expansion of it, was a complex arrangement of stones including as centve pieces two long semieylindrical stones, apparently the halves of a once still larger boulder, originally about nine feet long. This had fractured so that one half was about six feet long and the other somewhat shorter (three feet), The two halves either had moved apart or the space between had weathered so that there was a gap hetween them in which lay a cylindrical stone of smaller size with batter marke at one end. Other stones were piled on one side of the arrangement, Tn addition there were either thirteen or fourteen heaps of rounded stones arranged around in a circle at intervals of five to six feet, so that the central pile formed the hub of a large circle of stones, The two main stones are shown in plate 25, fig. B, They had been painted with narrow vertical stripes forming alternatively red and white bands. As on the stone at the northern end there were fresh-looking shallow eup-shaped battered impressions on the ends of the big stones as well as on the smaller one lying between ther. Some smaller rounded and subeylindrical stones with which the cups in the rocks had heen made were lying nearby. Our first reaction to the fresh-looking batter marks was that some vandal had mutilated these ceremonial objects. However we were several hundred miles removed from the haunts of such persons in virtually unexplored country and the native informants at once put our minds at ease. They indicated the marks were related to the ceremonial arrangement of stones, and demonstrated how they had been caused, 502 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The large rocks were rock bells, musical stones, or rock gongs, the [’wonka], ‘‘voices’’ or ‘‘talk’’ of ancestral beings; they were [’kondala], [’kondala ’bulka], [’japu ’kondala], or [’kondali] gongs, big gongs, rock gongs, or gongs. Old man ‘‘Peter’’ showed us how [’mina] or blood from a pierced small vein in the arm had been allowed to run down the rocks during their decoration, the stream of blood being directed so as to form a red line between each white one. Red ochre was also used. The white paint was made by crushing the white parts of the dung of the Australian eagle. This yields an intense white colour which photo- graphs well even when almost obliterated by time and weathering. Of the pair of large stones at the southern end, the larger decorated stone was the [’walkurari mama] or [‘’walkururi] grub father, in his human aspect as an ancestral being, and the smaller one the [’nondjo] or mother. Other smaller stones represented their [’kata] or children. The heaps of stones at a distance represented other [’walkurari] people of the past. Plate 26, fig. A shows two battering marks on the end of the [’mama kondala] and at the left in the general photograph may be seen one of the striker stones as left by the users. The striker stones are subspherical hammers each weighing several pounds. At the opposite end of the ground the single upright painted stone was the [’malu kondala] or [’kondalu] of the kangaroo, and had been placed there by the [’Wati Malu ‘tjukur] or ancestral kangaroo man being. The whole ceremonial ground gave the impression that it might have been intended as a gigantic representation of a Cossid larva [‘mako ’witjuti], or witchety grub, but this may be a fanciful idea. Fifty yards to the W.N.W. and forming part of the same sacred place was a large vertical rock slice some twelve feet long and probably weighing several tons, leaning against a larger mass and resting, with a blunt point downward on another rock. This was a gigantic [’kondala bulka] of the [’windaru], or desert bandicoot totem. Plate 26, fig. B shows a long pole-like white design which had been painted on it, with traces of red between. The red was human blood again from the arm vein of one of the owners of the site. The ‘‘voice’’ of the [’windaru] was evoked by striking at the base of the stone where the shallow cup-shaped battering mark is evident (plate 26, figs. B and C). With the informants’ permission I tapped the big [’kondala] just as the [’windaru ’tjokoratja] being had first struck it and heard the clear bell-like note it gave out. TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 503 The {'windaru] or [’wendari tjukur] of Makurapiti was an [‘Inma ‘bulka] or important ceremony and belonged to the [’tamm] — |‘tjamu], father’s father of my informant. Peter spoke the words of the following songs which had come from his [’tam:u]:— 1, Song. ’Warta ‘be:re ‘be:re ‘mina ‘mina ‘kanei:djara spear hook hook arm _ blood flowed out(?) 2, Song. ‘Koro:to ‘pimpa ‘jararo ‘wa:ni ja ‘murturfu na 3. Song, ‘Wanigi ‘tio :ko ‘jono ‘mani “bulka Thread eross attotem place cameout pole large In singing the last-named song the words were modified to— 3a. Song. ‘Wanigi ‘tjoka’bei ’tjoka’bei ‘mani ‘bulka On the large rock, against which the [’kondala] rests are a few rock carving marks, principally single cireles, concentrie circles [’kurikuri], U-shaped marks, and a meandering lines of dots, These ire [‘wati ‘mere ‘walku], the ‘‘marks made by men now dead". On the great flat rock above this [’kondala ’bulka] is a rounded {lat stone, several fect across, on which a shallow groove is present; this groove may be natural, at least in part. According to Peter this stone received applications of blood and human semen, The mixture was rubbed all over it. The whole stone [’kondala] appears to represent an aneient ceremonial pole called [‘mani]; it is a [guru ‘mani “bulka], a phrase for which I could not get an exact meaning, and the vertical painted red and white design on it represents the central pole of a [‘wanigi (thread cross) of the [’windaru ‘tjukur] or desert bandicoot totem. The painted marks were [’walka Jamal kutn]. During the eeremony of the [’windarn tjukur] a large [/wanigi] made of [‘pudurn], fur-and human hair-strings, was set up and displayed to [’ulparu] or youths about to undergo circumcision. Kodachrome photographs were taken on 13 May and others of larger size in black and white were made early on the following morning, Having examined country to the west of Mount Agnes and unsuccessfully searched for some aborigines of another tribe from the south-west, who had lately visited the area, we camped near Makurapiti for the night and much of the detail given above was told to us around the camp fire, Our Pitjandjara men, who had not visited this, the western limit of their country, for many years were indignant that strange aborigines had trespassed on their territory. 504 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM On the 14th, just before we left the area, our older informant, Peter, carefully cleared away all dead twigs, dry grass, Salsola kali bushes and other debris from around the large [/walkurari] arrange- ment of stones, paying partieular attention to the groove between the two halves of ihe stone. He said the place belonged to his people and that keeping it clean was a proper attention, even though it had been some fifteen years or more since his own folk had been able to visit the area, Not all of our informant’s statements could be understood at the time, because some words were new or strange, In particular the fnll meaning of the word [‘talundja] was not clear—it appears to relate to a place associated with the ‘‘increase’’ or, as Peter said. it in English, ‘‘fattening’’ of food animals. Another phrase not clearly understood was ["Kudutupiti]. This may be a place name, The word (’piti] appears to relate to the hole, eave or other site where an ancestral heing, having changed state remains today ‘inside the eround’’, |’Kudntu] we could not translate. We had already visited [‘Kalaiapiti], an important place in the Sir Thomas Range (129° 47’ 1, Long, x 27° 10’ 8. Lat.), where the spirit of the great Emu ancestor of the Pitjandjara, |’Kalaia ‘tjnkur], still remains, living in a place so important that no-one may visit the actual spot, although initiated men, as we did, were permitted to approach the nearby spring and soak at [‘Tpi:lina] and were able to examine other secret objects, such as the painted rocks of [’Minma ’tjuni ‘bulka], literally ‘‘big- bellied woman’, associated with the [’Wati ‘Kutjara], and with the [’Kuyka’ronkara), These are Beings who already have been referred to in Part J of this series of papers. Tpilinga is a place where special rites were performed, in part by women, They were considered important in stimolating the onset of puberty and the growth of breasts in young Pitjandjara girls, A few details of these ceremonies will he given in a subseqnent part of this series of papers. In later discussions we learned that not only were there large static |’kondala] in many places, inelnding ones near Kalaiapiti, but there were smaller, more portable stone [‘kondala] in use in many places where large musical rocks were not available. No opportunity came to examine one of the portable examples other than the casual observation of severa] smaller ones present at Maknurapiti. However the indication that such smaller stone examples did exist was confirmed shortly after return to Adelaide when one was identified among specimens received recently at the South Australian TINDALE—PITJIANDJARA MUSICAL, ROCKS 505 Museum. It had been collected by the late Capt. 8. A. White. This specimen, labelled as from the Everard Ranges, presumably had been obtained during his visit to the Eyerards in 1914 when he spent some time among the Jankundjara people, being the first white man to do so. During that stay he had as helper a young native whom he called “William”, now an elderly man, with whom I talked diving my 1957 visit, William showed me one of the rock shelters with paintings in it whieh White also had examined. Unfortunately this was before White's specimen became known to me and there is no mention of the elone in his writings. In the cirenmstances it is identified as a [’kondala] hy inference only; 1 base my identification on the existence of the familiar battering marks and on the fact that when struck it emits the expected musical tones. White (1916, p, 115) did witness, and deseribe a ceremonial dance which he called ‘‘Aboo-Warroo’’, In this performance three decorated men took part. This may be recognized as the [’Japu "Waru], an (inma /laka] of the semi-secret type and related to several witnessed in 1933 and during Jater visits among the Jangkundjara, The vame means ‘stone fire’’, In such a dance men prepare for the performance in a secret camp by bleeding one of their number, taking [’mina] blood from a vein in his arm and decorating their bodies with paint and blood, The mode of obtaining this blood is withheld from the knowledge of women as a great seeret. On the other hand the blood obtained by stabbing the under side of the subincised urethral stem with a sharp stick is less secret, After dark the non-secret part of the performance takes place in the presence of women and children, who may take part also in the singing. They see the dancers by the light of stage fires of T'rvodia grass and brushwood set alight for the purpose, According to my informant it is in the background of such dances that [‘kondala] may be struck. Since White made no mention of such a happening at the dance he witnessed it seems likely that the stone which came into his possession was a casual find, when aborigines were not about to indicate its funetion. Fig. 1 and 2 show two views of the Everard Range specimen, This is now A51658 in the Sonth Australian Museum collection, It is composed seemingly of an indurated sandstone or quartzite, and is in the form of an elongated pebble or small bonlder, Its length is 47.5 cro. and it is flattish-oval in section with diameters respectively of 8.5 em. and 6.0 em. The specimen probably originated as a waterworn boulder and was selected because it rang with a clear note when strnck. There is 506 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig, 1-2. Two views of supposed musical stone, kondala, from Everard Ranges, South Australia. Speeimen A,51658 in S.A. Museum. The scale in this and following drawings is to be read in centimeters, (Collected by 8. A. White.) evidence for only a minimum of deliberate shaping. The two ends appear to have been trimmed by battering; some of this may be of natural origin. A shallow, slightly oblique groove on one face may be due to a natural softer layer in the stone but seems to have been abraded a little after it became a musical instrument. The principal evidence for use takes the form of concentrated battering marks on one flat face, and other lesser marks which exist at the ends of both of the narrower faces. The last-named batterings, being fewer, suggest that the stone was not as often struck near the ends as on two areas on the upper flat face. At a point one-third from one end of the latter is a coneentrated area of coarse batterings, which have developed into a shallow cupped depression. When struck at this point the stone emits a clear musical tone. At a point one- third of the distance from the other end is a similar area, occupied by very much more delicate batterings and the surface of the stone here has a high degree of polish on it. The fundamental note emitted when the stone is struck has been identified for me by a musician as C. Higher notes are A flat and E sharp. By comparison with bruise marks on known larger [’japu ‘kondala] it seems evident that the coarser batterings were made by using another stone as striker. It seems equally plausible to suggest TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 507 that the more delicate batterings at the other end were made with a hardwood striker. The effects could have been produced by tapping ris sticks of the kind which have a ball of resin on one end, Experiments show that the batterings are focussed on the several places on the stone where tapping will evoke the purest and best ringing tones and that a wooden striker works best on the place where the delicate bruising is most evident. My conversations with Peter and Willy during other days of our association served to augment observations I had made in 1933 about two types of decorated wooden sticks, both of which are called Fig. 3-5. 3-4, Two views of tapping stick, South Central Australia (A.21577)- 5. Ceremonial kondala of cylindrical type, W. Australia (A,.50022). 508 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSEUM [‘kondala] or [’bunu ‘kondala], #.¢., ‘‘wooden kondala*’, and. used in ceremonies which precede the Pitjandjara initiation rites witnessed in 1933 at Konapandi (Tindale 1934). T also saw similar ones among the Ngadadjara tribespeople at Warupnju, in the Warburton Ranges, Western Australia, in 1935. Some details of the ceremonies at which they were used are published in the form of 16 mm, motion picture films by the Board for Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide (film Nos, 20, 26-28, and 38-39). At Konapandi on 22 June 1933 the elderly [’maijada] or leading old man of the Pitjandjara imitiation ceremonies then being held, whose name was ['Tgaryjgal, gave me three carved music sticks of eylindrical form; these he called [’kondala] (fig, 6-8). The speci- mens, A21648-21650, are now in the South Australian Museum, They functioned as musical sticks at an [’inma ‘laka ‘tinari], or secret ceremony seen only by initiated men. This ceremony was known as an [‘inma ‘kondala|. The men present had not made these particular examples which had been passed along from people living west of Peltadi in the Mann Range, The song which was sung when they were struck was :— Song. ‘Kondala ‘meil “neil ‘wagganda Music sticks meil meil make talk The term |’meilmeilba] can mean secret or sacred, and ig applied to anything which must not be known to women and children. At this time the full significance of these [‘kondala] was not apparent, but during the progress of the |’Puruka] ceremonies which we then witnessed (Tindale 1934), at which men ritually broke avoidance rules, several men spent time decorating fnrther tapping or nimsical sticks, this time making them very mueh like wooden lair pins, each with a ball of resin at one end but of wood which rings when struck, whereas hairpins are often of non-resonant wood, The designs they placed on these [‘inma ‘kondala] were patiently burned into the wood by applying and gently blowing a glowing twig. Terminal rings, burned near the pointed end of these sticks, were considered to be of particular importance because of the circumcision rites which were about to take place, Several of the examples made on the occasion are now present as A21652-21654 in the South Australian Museum collection and one A21653 has been depicted (fig. 9). Hach has a ball of Triodia resin at one end. In addition to their function as mnsical sticks they may serve also as hair pins or head scratchers, being part of the elaborate coiffure with chignon foundation which is worn by TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 509 young initiated men when in full dress. An example of the more normal wooden pin of the Pitjandjara men is shown as fig. 11. It was made at Pital, a place on the plain between the Marm and Musgrave Ranges, by a man who had taken part in the initiation ceremonies at Konapandi only a day or so earlier. The burning of such a design is shown in Reel 3 of ‘Day in the Life of Pitjandjara natives’ by N. B. Tindale, 1938. ee —— =—— Fig. 6&7, ‘Two wooden kondala from Peltadi, Minn Ranges, South Australia, used in initiation ceremonies ae Konapandd (A.21648-A, 21649), The cylindrical wooden [’kondala] bear rings carved on them, usually at both ends, It was learned that the number of earved rings may correspond to the number of young initiates who are to be cireumeised at the initiation ceremony for which they were made. They also may be sent out as message sticks. The specimen illustrated in fie. 5 very closely resembles the type used among the Ngadadjara. It can be interpreted to tell us that the [‘tjindulakalnuru] people, those who ‘sit in the sun’’, might provide three youths, while the [‘wiltjalanuru], the people of the other generation, those who “‘sit in the shade’? would be providing two for the coming rites. During the 1925 circumcisional ceremonies seen at Warupuju, eylindrical wooden musical sticks had been specially carved for the occasion, the designs on them being incised by means of an engraver made from the lower jaw of an opossum. The long incisor tooth with its tip broken off served ag a burin, ‘These music sticks, called [‘kondala] and ‘kundala] by the Ngadadjara, were used as time beaters in 510 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM the singing associated with the showing of [‘inma] or secret objects to the [’maliki] or initiates. At this time special marks called [’wa:li] were painted on the chests of the [’maliki]. There is probably much more to be learned about these wooden [’kondala] and their association with the stone ones. Fig. 8-9. Fig. 8. Wooden kondala from Peltadi used in initiation ceremonies at Konapandi (A.21650). Fig. 9. Hairpin made during Puruka ceremony at Konapandi (A.21653), To round out this report on [’kondala] it should be noted briefly that wooden musical sticks, or tapping sticks, also called time beaters, are used at evening dances in many parts of Australia, and are of varied form. There are many published references to them. In some areas such as coastal Arnhem Land, where the boomerang is unknown as a weapon, they may be made from pairs of traded Central Australian hunting boomerangs; the surface of the wood on these may be so worn, by generations of use as time beaters, that the original fluted design is only made evident by holding them against the light. Specially made tapping sticks are fashioned from particular hard woods which ring when struck. Some have prolongations at one end like the arms of a tuning fork. Fig. 3 and 4 show two views of a typical example of ones in secular use from South-Central Australia. It was collected by the late Dr. Herbert Basedow and bears a partly illegible india ink label which appears to read“ . . . S.A. 1904”? but the beginning is lost and the last figure of the year date could be read almost equally well as an 8 (specimen A21577 in South Australian Museum). The style suggests that this example originally had been traded down from further north in Central Australia. Pitjandjara ones of hardwood, with a ball of resin at one end, and used in ceremonies, have already been mentioned. TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS St Fig. 10-11, Fig, 10, Wooden kondala, Eruabella, Musgrave Ranges, Sonth Australia (A.21667), Fig, 11. Wooden hairpin for young adult male Pitjandjara. coiffure; mado at Pital, between Mann and Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (A.21655), DISCUSSION Pitjandjara nomenclature classes all objects for evoking musical sounds, whether of stone or wood, as [‘kondala). When it is necessary to differentiate, stone ones are [’japu ‘kondala] and wooden ones are (*bunu ’kondala]. Nomenclatorially the question of portability is not significant. Large static ones are [‘japu ‘bulka ‘kondala], ‘‘stone big musical’? or [’kondala ‘bulka]. Archaeologists may not be satisfied with this degree of differentiation, For their benefit I propose that the term kondala should apply to archaeological stone examples, many of which will undoubtedly be found in the future. Archaeological wooden ones, being less likely to be found may be known as bunu kondala. I nominate the example described and figured herein, from the Everard Ranges as a typical kondala. Large static ones which will also be discovered may be classed as kondalabulka. It is frequently noticed that there is a strong tendency for words associated with related objects and ideas to occur in widely separated parts of Anstralia, permitting the assumption there is an old element in common over large areas, The term [’kondala] is no exception. Attention may be drawn to the following casually noted examples :— Tn the Western Desert a [’kondala] is a stone or rock struck for musical purposes, also a musical stick. The Ngadadjara term varies as [’kundala], Among the Darumbal of Rockhampton, Queensland, kundala is an upper stone of a pair for pounding particular foods (Roth, 1904, p. 23). In the voeabulary of the Pangkala natives of the country south- west of Port Augusta there is a phrase walgi kundatanna about which 512 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM little is remembered except that it relates to a ‘‘mysterious song’’; their verb kundata means to beat or to strike and the noun walki is applied to ‘‘something hard, swollen, or of rounded shape’’. Is it possible to link this with the idea of a musical stone? Archaeologists should note this possibility. It does draw attention to how little we really know about our aborigines and points up the fact that we may yet be able to learn something if all sources of primary information on the living are gleaned and exploited before it becomes too late. In Africa the rock gong complex is linked with rainmaking (Lanning 1958), also with initiation into manhood, and there may be rock paintings associated with the gongs. Fagg (1957) considers that rock slides also may be an associated feature. In Australia musical rocks are associated with initiation and with ‘‘increase’’ ceremonies, of which one type at least is linked with the ‘‘increase’’ of rain. Despite these similarities it is unlikely that there is any direct connection between the practices of the two areas. From earliest times men everywhere have been concerned with initiations, and with the betterment of their circumstances by performance of magical rites using song, dance, rhythm, and paint. Therefore it is not surprising that parallel customs and ideas may have arisen in places as far sundered as Africa and Australia, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The writer is indebted to the authorities of the Long Range Weapons Establishment for permission to accompany their field officers, Messrs. W. B. MacDougall and R. Macaulay on patrols into the Western Desert, and to the Range Superintendent and these officers for their unstinting aid. Mrs. C. J. Hillis kindly identified the musical sounds emitted by the Everard Range [’kondala] stone when struck. Earlier portions of the work was done as leader of two Board for Anthropological Research Expeditions, one to the Mann Range, South Australia in 1933 and the other to the Warburton Ranges, Western Australia, in 1935. Both these expeditions were supported by grants from the Rockefeller Foundation, the University of Adelaide and the South Australian Museum. The present paper owes much to discussions with my colleagues, in particular with the Hon. Associate in Anthropology at this Museum, Mr. H. M. Cooper. The opinions expressed and any shortcomings in presentation are the author’s own. TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 513 REFERENCES CITED Conant, F. P., 1960: Rocks that ring: their ritual setting in Northern Nigeria. Trans. New York Acad. Sci. 23: 157-199. Fagg, B. E. B., 1956: Rock Gong complex today and in prehistoric times. Journ. Hist. Soe. Nigeria I: 31. 1957: Rock gongs and rock slides. Man, Feb. 32. 1957: Cave paintings and rock gongs of Birnim Kudu. Proc. III Pan-African Congress on Prehistory, London 1955 (1957): 306-312. Lanning, H. C., 1958: A ringing rock associated with rainmaking, Uganda, Sonth African Archaeological Bulletin 13: 83-84. Robinson, K. R., 1958: Venerated rock gongs and the presence of rock glides in Southern Rhodesia. S. African Archaeol. Bull. 13(50) : 75-77. Roth, W., 1904: North Queensland Ethnography, Bulletin 7: 1-34. Tindale, N.B., 1933: Day in the life of Pitjandjara natives. 16 mm. Films nos. 17-19. Board for Anthrop. Research, University of Adelaide. 1933: Initiation ceremonies at Konapandi. 16 mm. Film no. 90. Board for Anthrop. Research, University of Adelaide. 1935: Initiation among the Pitjandjara natives of the Mann and Tomkinson Ranges in South Australia. Oceania, Sydney 6; 199-224. 1953: On some South Australian Cossidae including the moth of the witjuti (witchety) grub. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 76: 56-65, 1959: Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia, Part I. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 13; 305-332. White, S. A., 1916: In the Far North-West. Adelaide, 1-200, illustrated. Vaughan, J. H. jr., 1962: Rock paintings and rock gongs among the Marghi of Nigeria, i» Man, London 62: 83. 514 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES 25-26 PLATE 25 Fig. A. [’Kondala] musical stone of the [’Wati "Malu 'tjukur] at north-western end of ceremonial ground of the [’walkurari] totem, Makurapiti, eastern end of Mount Agnes, Blyth Range, showing the face of the upright stone with the inverted U design and the median vertical line; note the battered corner at the right. Fig. B. [/Mama ‘kondala] (left) and [’ngondjo kondala] stones of the [’walkurari] grub totem at the south-eastern end of the Makurapiti ceremonial ground; the painted stripes are evident; in the background may be seen two of the many heaps of smaller stones. (Photos., 14 May 1957, by Norman B. Tindale.) PLATE 26 Fig. A. Close view of two battered places on the [’mama ‘kondala] stone of the Walkurari totem, showing also some detail of the decoration of red blood and white eagle dung paint. Fig. B. The giant musical [’kondala] of the desert bandicoot ['windaru ‘tjukur], with the painted vertical [’mani] design; the striking place is near the base. Fig. C. Close view of the cup-shaped battering place on the giant [’kondala] of the (’windaru ’tukur] at Makurapiti. (Photos. 14 May 1957, by Norman B. Tindale.) Re, S.A. Moseuat Vou. 14, Pare 25 Tu free page BLA Rec. S.A. Musrum Von. 14, Phare 26 PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF THE ABORIGINAL RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By ROBERT EDWARDS Summary This paper places on record the results of an examination of 226 slate scrapers. The literature has been reviewed; typical forms of the implement described and figured, and their manufacture discussed. The preliminary survey shows that the implements appear to have had a limited South Australian distribution and to have been used exclusively to scrape skins when preparing them for making rugs and cloaks. Some scrapers are decorated with surface markings and in a few cases they are the only surviving art forms of the aboriginals of the area in which they were found. PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF THE ABORIGINAL RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By ROBERT EDWARDS Plates 27-29 and text fig. 1 SUMMARY This paper places on record the results of an examination of 226 slate serapers. The literature has been reviewed; typical forms of the implement deseribed and figured, and their manufacture discussed. The preliminary survey shows that the implements appear to have had a limited South Australian distribution and to have been used exclusively to scrape skins when preparing them for making rugs and cloaks. Some scrapers are decorated with surface markings and in a few cases they are the only surviving art forms of the aboriginals of the area in which they were found. INTRODUCTION For many years various investigators have been collecting reniform or kidney-shaped stone implements from abandoned aboriginal camp-sites in many localities in South Australia (map, fiz. 1). Hach specimen found has increased our knowledge of these implements and widened the area of their known distribution, The collection now available is considered sufficient to enable the writer to make a preliminary survey. Campbell (1924), Basedow (1925), Hossfeld (1926), Howchin (1934), McCarthy (1946) and Cooper (1959) have described and figured some of these implements and their findings will be considered with the additional knowledge gained from the survey of this considerably larger collection of specimens than was hitherto available. Basedow (1925, pp. 173-176) described the implement as a skin scraper and from observations of its general form it seems reasonable to assume that it was so used, although no published record exists of any person actually seeing one in use, Sift RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM TYPICAL FORM A typieal example of this slate implement is reniform in shape (plate 1, A and B) with an average length of 11 em., 7 em. in width and 0.7 em, in thickness. The coneavity of the reniform outline is reduced to a relatively thin margin to form the functional edge of the implement, Its size is such that it can be conveniently held in the hand and is sufficiently robust to provide support for the thin working margin when in use. Measurements of the illustrated specimens are given at the end of this paper. MATERIAL EXAMINED This investigation revealed that at least 260 reniform slate scrapers have been found in South Australia and of this number it has been possible to examine 226 specimens; most of these are in the collection of the South Australian Museum, the remainder being in the possession of private individuals, including the author. The only specimens not available for this investigation are either in interstate collections or otherwise dispersed, These are 34 in number, but the localities where they were found have been recorded as South Anstralian by Basedow (1925, p, 1738); Hossfeld (1926, p. 291); Howcehin (1934, p. 79) and Tindale’, CLASSIFICATION The 226 slate serapers which comprise this survey vary widely in shape, size and thickness according to the particular quality of the material used (plate 29, A to H). The various shapes can be tentatively classified into four groups. Kighty-three haye a typical reniform outline (plate 27, A and B); thirty-eight are rounded, having almost the same width as length (plate 27, C and D); 18 are elongate, the length being approximately twice the width (plate 27, E and F), and 48 are of varied, irregular shape, Many of the specimens examined were found to be damaged and only a small proportion have survived in perfect condition. Thirty- nine are recognizable fragments which are too small to allow even tentative classification. (1) Mr, N. B, Tindale provided extracts from his unpublished journals on ‘ ‘Camp-sites and Tmplements’’ (vol, 1-3, 1940-1961) which refer to scraper finds. EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 517 Ii seems likely that this particular implement existed in greater numbers than present collections from camp-sites would indicate. The fragile material from which they were made makes them liable to damage by stock movement and other factors. Only by increased knowledge can the recognition and recovery of fragmentary specimens be effected. DISTRIBUTION Although Hossteld (1926, p. 291) placed on record P. de. Btapleton’s discovery of four reniform slate implements near the Patawalonga Creck in 1898, the first specimens actually recorded were found by Campbell (1924, pp. 74-78) at Moana, south of Adelaide, where a large camp-site is situated in an area of red sand-hills near the mouth of Pedler Creek. Extensive field work, carried out upon this eamp-site over a long period, has yielded a comprehensive series of stone implements. Basedow (1925, pp. 173-175) found 19 scrapers at Normanville, two at Woodville and suggested a distribution restricted to the tribes which originally oceupied the area between Adelaide and the River Murray, Hossteld (1926, pp. 287-297) extended the distribution to the Eden Valley aud Angaston distriets by finding a number of reniform implements when studying previous native occupation of that area. Thirty-nine specimens have been recovered from camp-sites in those districts. The formation of the Anthropological Society of South Australia in 1925 gave added stimulus to collecting and studying local aboriginal relies, {1 a meeting of the Society in March 1927 Stapleton exhibited a slate scraper collected from a camp-site near Hookina Siding in the Flinders Ranges’, This specimen (plate 29, C) appears to he the first recorded from northern Sonth Australia and was an early indieation of the wider distribution now accepted after the collection of many additional specimens, From 1927 until 1934, when Howchin (1934, pp. 79-82) reviewed the subject, a number of scrapers were added to the collection of the South Australian Museum® by T. D. Campbell, N, B. Tindale, II. L. Sheard and P, deS, Stapleton. These scrapers had been found on the Adelaide Plains and in the Angaston District. This area Howchin defined as the limit of their distribution. (2) Minutes of the Anthropological Society of South Australia 1926-1929, (8) Register of the South Australian Museum. 518 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM McCarthy (1946, pp. 56-57) described the reniform slate implement as a specialized type of reniform seraper-knife and reiterated the general opinion that its distribution appeared to be limited to the Adelaide Plains. It is only sinee detailed field-work has progressed that the number of sites where they have been found and their spread has greatly increased, These finds have made possible the preparation of a map (fig. 1) co-ordinating all the known slate seraper localities. This map shows a far wider range of distribution than that recorded by Howelun. MATERIAL USED To the choice of suitable materials for the manufacture of his slate scrapers, the aboriginal showed his intimate knowledge of the qualities and texture of stone necessary for the successful production of his implements, Most of the specimens examined are made from fine grained rocks such as siltstones, shales, phyllites and all the rocks commonly grouped under the term, slates. Besides being readily available, these rocks were admirably suited for producing reniform skin scrapers. In the case of shale it splits easily along its bedding planes into thin, regular layers, while slate separates in a similar manner, along its distinct cleavage planes. Once obtained, these thin, flat slabs were of con- venient proportions to be fashioned into implements of desired shape and size while still retaining sufficient strength for practical use. When slate was not available, either locally or by trade, mica schist and occasionally gritty quartzite were used, but as these materials were not so suitable, the resultant implements were erude and unshapely compared with the typical reniform slate specimens. MANUFACTURE There is no published record of anyone having observed the manufacture of a slate seraper, but the procedure seems fairly obvious from the implements themselves. The author has a piece of slate from a camp-site at Hdeowie, east of Lake Torrens, which had been roughly shaped to a reniform outline, The entire peripheral margin, including the coneavity, appears to have been shaped by pereussion with a light hammerstone. Most of the specimens examined for this survey still yetain evidence of the removal of small flakes from the edges of their rounded sides. Tt seems likely, therefore, that the entire edge of the implement was shaped at the same time until the desired reniform outline had 519 EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS CREEK W ai a BRACHINA B a — uw > o = _q — i AN ANY Distribution of slate scrapers in South Australia, Fig. 1. 520 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM been achieved, The concavity, after having been roughly shaped, appears to have been reduced by a rasping or rubbing action with some harder material to form a relatively thin, funetional edge. Evidence of this smoothing down is indicated by the marks left on the flat surfaces of the implement. Some serapers (plate 27, A and B) have had the entire peripheral margin finished in this way, so removing traces of the original trimming. Cooper (1959, pp. 55-60, plates 4, 20 and 21), who has been largely responsible for extending the area of distribution of slate scrapers, sugeests that many small pieees of slate, variable in shape, which he has fonud on a camp-site at Hallett Cove, show evidence of wear suggestive of skin scraping, and may be early equivalents of the slate scrapers described in tlis paper. INCISHD MARKINGS As already shown, many of the incised markings on slate scrapers were obviously due to the method of fabrication of the implement. Other deeper markings however appear to have a deliberate purpose. These could be simple decorations or have some totemic significance. Ji was the deliberate incised markings on the first specimens found by Campbell (1924, pp. 75-76) that led him to suggest they might be a simple form of tjurunga and Howehin (1934, p. 82) to suppose they were a ‘‘charm’’, These suggestions were not unreasonable as some years ago the author placed a similar interpretation on a number of small pieces of heavily meised slate which have since been recognized as definite portions of slate serapers, At the time of their recovery on a camp-site discovered by Cooper at Willochra, far beyond the then aceepted area of distribution of slate scrapers, the explanation that they were portions of some sacred object seemed a likely one. A comparative study of the collection of slate serapers now avail- able showed that, while over 60 per cent have surface striations, only 10 per cent or 22 specimens appear to have a definite pattern formed from straight lines of varying length and degree of complication; some others suggest dog and emu tracks. Plate 28, A to F, illustrates both surfaces of three of the best examples of deliberate surface markings on slate serapers. It is possible that the incised markings on other specimens could have been obliterated by weathering. Cooper (1947, pp, 292-298 and 1954, pp. 97-103) has recorded small, flat, water-worn pebbles from northern and north-eastern South EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 521 Australia bearing somewhat similar markings to those found on slate scrapers. In the case of Cooper’s finds, however, the incised markings have a regular pattern formed by a series of more or less parallel straight limes, The origin and meaning of these markings is unknown. USE Basedow (1925, p. 176) was the only person to describe and illustrate reniform slate implements as skin scrapers. Although he gives the following detailed aceount of their use to scrape fat and fleshy tissue from opossum skins whilst preparing them for making rugs and cloaks, this was not a personal observation. His informant was an old aboriginal of the ‘River Murray’’ tribe whom he considered reliable. ‘““The freshly removed skin was laid, fur downward, over a eylmdrical rod and drawn tightly around it with the fingers of the left hand. The implement was then gripped by the opposite hand in such a way that the convex edge was against the palm and the flat surfaces between the fingers and thumb. Holding the rod in a vertical position, the eonvave (or straight) cutting edge was placed against the skin over the rod and worked at an angle downwards, the cutting edge shaving off all adherent pieces of fat and other soft tissue in doing so. The position of the skin, relative to the rod, was frequently changed and the process continued until the whole inner surface of the pelt had been prepared and cleaned in a similar way. “The advantage of a concave cutting edge obviously was that by an accommodation of the two curves, presented by the implement and the rod, respectively, a greater area of skin was seraped with every downward movement of the hand; and the process was performed without so much risk of cutting the skin as would have been the case with the ordinary convex or straight-edged stone scraper or a plane surface.”’ DISCUSSION Monntford (1960, pp. 505-508, 1963, pp, 625-548) has shown that the Australian aboriginals, over a wide area of southern Anstralia, employed a number of different methods in dressing skins of animals for making rugs and cloaks. Mountford describes and illustrates (1963, plate 33, C), a large stone flake being used for this purpose in the Northern Pijudéra Ranges. This is outside the area of known 522 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM distribution of reniform slate scrapers. Schiirmann (1879, p. 210) describes how the aboriginals of the Port Lincoln Tribe, South Australia, gently pulled or shaved off fleshy substances adhering to skins, with a sharp-edged piece of quartz. In the south-east of Australia, Howitt (1904, p. 742) records that skins were not dressed but merely dried and made pliable by cutting marks on them with mussel shells. As far as the present investigation shows, the occurrence of slate scrapers appears to have been somewhat circumscribed and limited to the central area of South Australia, its southern and eastern boundary being the River Murray, and its northern approximately at Lat. 31° South (map, fig. 1). A description, recorded in Adelaide in 1842, of the manner in which skins were prepared for making garments, shows that the large, coarse skins had their inner layers shaved off with a digging stick, club or the handle on which stone adzes were mounted, while the smaller ones were rubbed slightly with stones to make them loose and flexible. It is suggested that the reniform slate implements were specially designed and ideally suited for scraping the smaller and more delicate skins, such as those of the opossum. The smooth, relatively soft, use-polished functional edge enabled them to be scraped effectively without damage. Flanagan (1888, pp. 56-58) states that the Australian aboriginal, when making his rugs and cloaks, his only articles of clothing, showed a very distinct preference for the skin of the opossum because it was of superior quality for his particular purpose. If this is so and the reniform slate scrapers were, as has been suggested, a specialized implement for scraping these delicate skins, this may indicate that the number and area of their distribution has some relation to the production of these garments in those areas. In the design, choice of material, manufacture and use of reniform scraping implements the aboriginal again illustrated his skill and craftsmanship in the art of converting simple, basic materials into efficient tools. A purpose of this paper is to give an account of this interesting implement so that it will be correctly classified among the implements of the Australian aboriginals. It is also hoped it will encourage their (4) Transactions of the Statistical Society published in South Australian News, 15 October, 42, p. 46. EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 523 collection, so enabling a more comprehensive survey to be made and the area of distribution further defined. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to express appreciation to the following :— The Board of the South Australian Museum for permission to work on the Museum Collection and for publication of this paper. Mr. Norman B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology of the Museum, who expedited the examination of the collection and supplied extracts from his personal journals which contributed greatly to the completion of the distribution map. Drs. P. 8. Hossfeld and W. I. North; Messrs. R. D. J. Weathersbee and R, EK. Teusner made their private collections of slate scrapers available for examination. Special acknowledgment is made to Dr. T. D. Campbell, Messrs. C. P. Mountford and H. M. Cooper, all of whom gave assistance by supervising the preparation of this paper. Mr. Mountford also helped with the illustrations, REFERENCES CITED Basedow, H., 1925: The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide. 1925: Slate Scraping Implements of the Extinct Adelaide Tribe. Man, London, 25: No. 106. Campbell, T. D., 1924: An Account of a Hitherto Unrecorded Type of Aboriginal Stone Object. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 48. Cooper, H. M,, 1947: Incised Stones of South Australia. Mankind, Sydney, 3(10). 1954: Incised Stones from South Australia. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 11: No. 2. 1959: Large Archaeological Stone Implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. of S. Austr., Adelaide, 82. Flanagan, Roderick J., 1888: The Aborigines of Australia. Sydney. Hossfeld, Paul 8., 1926: The Aborigines of South Australia: Native occupation of Eden Valley and Angaston Districts, Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Austr., Adelaide, 50. $24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Howchin, Walter, 1934: The Stone Implements of the Adelaide Tribe of Aborigines, Adelaide. Howitt, A. W., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-east Australia. London. McCarthy, F. D., 1946: The Stone Implements of Australia. Sydney. Mountford, C. P., 1960: Decorated Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Ree. 8. Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 13(4). 1963: Australian Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 14(3). Schiirmann, Rev. C. W. 1879: The Port Lincoln Tribe. The Native Tribes of South Australia. Adelaide. DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES 27-29 PLATE 27 A-B. Slate scraper. Paradise, South Australia, K. 8. Parsons, collector, length 10.8 cm., breadth measured from notch, 6.7 cm., specimen Reg. No. A.42813 in 8. Austr. Museum, O-D, ditto. Braehina Creek, 8. Austr., D. N, George, length 9.8 em., breadth 9.0 cm., A.30685. B-F, ditto. Paradise, 8. Austr., EK. §. Parsons, length 11.5 em,, breadth 5.5. cm, A.48090, PLATE 25 A-B. Slate scraper. Findon, 8. Austr., E. J. Copley, length 12.0 em., breadth 6.0 em., A,21329, G-D. ditto. Paradise, S. Austr., K. §. Parsons, length 11.2 em,, breadth 7.5 cm,, A.42814, E-F, ditto, Windon, 8. Austr., E. J. Copley, length 11.8 em., breadth 6.3 em., A.21340, PLATE 29 A. Slate scraper. Jutland, S. Austr., N, B. Tindale, length 10.4 cm., breadth 6.3 cm., A.28972, B. ditto. Christies Beach, S. Austr., N. B. Tindale, length 12.0 cm,, breadth 6.5 em.. A,28898, C. ditto. Hookina, 8. Austr., P. Stapleton, leugth 7.2 em., breadth 6.6 em., 4.21311. D. ditto. Sandy Creek, S. Austr., Adelaide Bushwalkers, length 11,0 em., breadth 7.5 em, A.36622, E. ditto. Port Augusta, S. Austr., H. K. Bartlett, length 9.2 em., breadth 6.7 em., A.52925, F. ditto. Brachina Creek, 5S, Austr., D. N. George, length 9.8 em., breadth 7.3 em., A.30686. G, ditto. Glenelg, 8S, Austr., P. Stapleton, length 12.0 em., breadth 6.9 em., A.17326. H. ditto. Cowandilla, 8. Austr., P. Stapleton, length 13.0 em., breadth 7.3 em., 4.17328. Ree. S.A. Musnum Vou. 14, PLare 27 Sh dai i * Paradise sa KS Parsons Mer se. ALBA Go° te i \-B Reniform. O-D Rounde E-F Elongate. Slute Scrapers—Typical Forms. Ta face pave a24.j) Rec. S.A. Musnum Von. 14, Pharr 28 Slate Serapers~ Examples va Surface Markings, Ree, S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Poatn 29 * h4b622 Sahoy c Slate Serapers—Typleal Forms and Variations, AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary When the first Europeans visited the southern parts of Australia, they found both the Tasmanian and the mainland aborigines wearing capes or rugs made from the skins of the indigeneous creatures. Although, in those early days, there would have been many thousands of those rugs in use, few have survived the ravages of time. Two main factors are responsible for this; the fact that, at death, everything belonging to the deceased, including his skin rug, was buried with him (Howitt, 1845, p. 189) ; and that, during those boisterous days of colonization, there were no institutions equipped, even if they were interested, in preserving those highly perishable examples of aboriginal handicrafts. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary AssociaTs IN Erunovosy, Soura Austratian Museum Plates 30-33 and text fig. 1-5 INTRODUCTION When the first Europeans visited the southern parts of Australia, they found both the Tasmanian and the mainland aborigines wearing capes or rugs made from the skins of the indigeneous creatures. Although, in those early days, there would have been many thousands of those rugs in use, few have survived the ravages of time. Two main factors are responsible for this; the fact that, at death, everything belonging to the deceased, including his skin rug, was buried with him (Howitt, 1845, p. 189); and that, during those boisterous days of colonization, there were no institutions equipped, even if they were interested, in preserving those highly perishable examples of aboriginal handicrafts. As far as ean be ascertained, there are only seven rugs and two decorated skins in existence. There are two complete rugs and a single decorated skin in the National Museum of Victoria, two rugs in the South Australian Museum, a complete rug in the Smithsonian Institution of Washington D.C., another in the Western Australian Museum, a badly damaged rug in Berlin and a single decorated skin in the British Museum. As it seems unlikely that many additional examples of skin rugs will be located, this paper will reeord all known examples, discuss their general distribution, the methods of manufacture and the function of the designs on their surface. At the same time the writer will assemble and discuss relevant information gathered from the writings of early explorers and colonists about these articles of aboriginal clothing. DISTRIBUTION Those early writings show that the aborigines of Tasmania, Victoria, New South Wales, the southern half of South Australia and i 526 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM the south-western districts of Western Australia all wore skin rugs to keep themselves warm during the inclement weather. A number of illustrations made by these early writers have been chosen to show the rugs in use; plate 80 A, Peron and Freyeinet (1807-16, plate 15), showing southern Tasmanians seated behind their wind-break; plate 30 B, Dumont D'Urville (1833, plate 24) depicting aboriginal groups from King George’s Sound, southern Western Australia; plate 32 A, Mitchell (1838, plate 31), two men on the Bogan River of northern New South Wales wearing skin rugs; plate 82 B, Angas (1847, plate 18), an aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe of south-eastern South Australia; and plate 31 B, Ratzel (1896, p. 364), a painting by G. Murtz showing a family group, probably Victorian, resting in their camp. The writer has also located in the collection of the British Museum, a much-laded photograph of a Muriz sketeh (plate 31 A), showing aborigines (probably in the same lveality as the Ratzel illustration) capturing opossums, skinning them and drying their pelts, pegged to rectunzular pieces of thick bark, in the front of their camp fire, Mountford and Harvey (1941, facing p. 162), illustrate how the women of the Adnjamatina tribe of the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia carry their children in a skin rug, and Tindale and Lindsay (1963, plate 15) an aboriginal of the Jambina tribe of the Logan Creek, east-central Queensland, wearing a decorated skin rng. Monntlford (1960, fig. 1) depicted a decorated skin rug from Condah, Victoria. In this paper he deseribes and illustrates five additional rugs and two decorated skins; fig. 2, a rug from Echuea, northern Victoria; fig. 8, from the Hunter River, New South Wales; fig. 4, from the northern Flinders Ranges of Suuth Australia; fig. 5, a skin cloak from Jarramungup, south-western Australia; plate 33 D, from Yorke Peninsula, South Australia; plate 383A, an wnlocalized skin from New South Wales, and plate 83B, another from the northern Minders Ranges of South Anstralia. On fig. 1, T have noted the localities where, according to records both in literature and in museum registers, the aborigines used skin rugs for clothing. (1) Geographe Bay, south-western Australia (Peron, 1809, p. 60). (2) Jarramungup, south-western Australia (rug in Western Australian Museum), (3) King George’s Sound, southern Western Australia (D’Urvyille, 1833, plate 24). MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 527 (4) Parnkalla tribe, Eyre Peninsula (Angas, 1847, plate 59, no, 1). (5) Marion Bay, Yorke Peninsula (rug in South Australian Museum), (6) Flinders Ranges, South Australia, skin in National Museum of Victoria; rug in South Australian Museum. (7) Lower Murray, South Australia (Angas, 1847, plate 42, no. 3). (8) Tatiara Tribe, south-eastern South Australia (Angas, 1847, plate 4, no. 3). (9) Echuca, northern Victoria (rug in National Museum of Victoria). (10) Condah, south-western Victoria (Mountford, 1960, fig. 1). (11) Gippsland, south-eastern Victoria (Howitt, 1904, p. 742). (12) Yandah Station, northern New South Wales (Dunbar, 1943, p. 142). (13) Narran, northern New South Wales (Parker, 1905, plate 31, p. 121). (14) Bogan River, northern New South Wales (Mitchell, 1838, p. 742). (15) Kamilaroi Tribe, northern New South Wales (Greenway, 1910, p. 196). (16) Hunter River, eastern New South Wales, rug in Smith- sonian Institution. (17) Maria Island, Tasmania (Peron, 1809, p. 75). (18) South-west Cape, Tasmania (Peron and Freycinet, 1807-16, plate 18), (19) Logan Creek, east central Queensland (Tindale and Lindsay, 1963, plate 15). This data suggests that the aborigines throughout Tasmania, Victoria, New South Wales, central Queensland, the southern part of South Australia and the south-western district of Western Australia, all utilized the pelts of animals for clothing. Although there are no records that the aborigines of the Great Australian Bight used skin rugs, it is reasonable to expect that they did so, 528 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM NORTHERN TERRITORY WESTERN AUSTRALIA SOUTH AUSTRALIA e cen Fig. 1. Localities of aboriginal skin rugs mentioned in literature. There is no evidence however, that the aborigines of northern Queensland, the Northern Territory or north-western Australia used skin rugs. This is understandable, for in those parts of the continent the average temperature would be much higher than in the southern half of the continent. MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL, SKIN RUGS 529 TYPES OF SKIN RUGS The skin rugs used as clothing by the aborigines of Australia vary considerably in size and shape, Tasmania Peron (1809, p. 175), when describing a woman he saw at South- west Cape, Tasmania states ‘‘She was almost entirely naked, with the exception of the skin of a kangaroo, wherein she carried a little female infant.’’ Later, on p. 217, when describing a number of men he saw on Maria Island, eastern Tasmania, Peron refers to a man ‘©. older than the rest . . . had a skin of a kangaroo over his shoulders’’. Plate 30 A, which is a copy of Peron and Freycinet’s drawing (1807-16) Atlas No. 1,") shows a number of Tasmanian aborigines, most of them wearing small skin rugs; the woman with an infant is, almost certainly, the same as mentioned by Peron (1809, p. 175), South-western Australia Peron (1809), described two meetings with the aborigines near Cape Geographe, on the extreme south-west of Western Austraha. On page 60, he wrote, ‘‘The native was an old man. . . he was entirely naked except that he had the skin of a kangaroo over his shoulders, which hung half way down his back’’. Later, on page 75, he noted, when describing a larger group of aborigines, that, ‘‘. . . the savages were entirely naked, excepting for a cloak made of the skin of a dog or kangaroo, which covered the shoulders of a few of them”’, Peron’s information was supported by a drawing of another early explorer, D’Urville (1833, plate 24), (plate 30 B is a copy), which shows the aborigines in King George’s Sound, southern Western Australia, wearing what appears to be a cape (fig. 5) held by a cord around their necks. (1) This drawing, with the addition of another aboriginal, carrying a barbed spear in one hand, a mainland type parrying shield in the other, and a stone axe in his belt and titled ‘Aborigines of New South Wales’! was used as a frontispiece for the English translation of Peron’s book, Foyage of Discovery to the Southern Hemisphere (1801-04), Luckily, Peron’s detailed account (p. 75) of the aboriginal camp he saw at South-west Cape, Tasmania, removes oll doubt that Peron and Freyeinet’s plate 18, in vol, 1 of their atlas, is the original avd authentic drawing. 530 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Hammond (1933, p. 30), states that the rugs worn by the aborigines of southern districts of Western Australia were made from one to three skins, according to the size of the wearer, hanging as low as the knees. Hassel (19385, p, 276), when writing about the kangaroo of this area writes that it ‘‘. . , contributes his skin for making cloaks and rugs’’, Calvert (1894, p. 25), in his book on ‘The Aborigines of Western Australia’ states that ‘‘in the colder parts of the continent he (the aboriginal), sometimes wears a small kangaroo-skin cloak’? Bates (1938, p. 60), states that the cloak of the aborigines in southern Western Australia consisted of the skins of seven kangaroos, The rug in the collection of the Western Australian Museum (fig. 5), is also made of seven skins, sewn together in the form of a cape. South Australia Angas (1847, plate 8, no. 1), illustrates a mother and child from the Adelaide tribe; another, his plate 18, no, 4 (plate 32 B is a copy), shows an aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe of south-eastern South Australia, and a third, his plate 8, no. 3, from the Parnkalla tribe of Hyre Peninsula, all of whom are shown wearing skin cloaks that reach below their knees. The skin rug from Marion Bay, Yorke Peninsula, (plate 33 D), in the collection of the South Australian Museum, is about four feet square, while the example from the Flinders Ranges (fig. 4), made up of 36 skins, is approximately five feet long and three feet wide. Victoria In Victoria, the skin rugs were much larger than those already described, The Condah rug, described by Mountford (1960, fig. 1), made up of 50 opossum skins, is approximately six feet long and five feet wide, and the Echuca rug, described in this paper (fig. 2), consisting of 81 skins, is seven feet, six inches long and five feet, six inches wide, In the Murtz sketch (plate 31 A), the rng worn by the aboriginal on the left reaches well below his knees. On the other hand, the man in the Ratzel illustration (plate 31 B), has only a single skin fastened around his waist. The two women on the right, however, are wearing voluminous decorated rugs. MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS oa ? V7: Nh Fig, 2. Aborigion! shin rug lrom Behies, northern Victorit ue 532 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM =—— ip = 2 E NN == SSS = a = SS - © 7 =. (A i = aN US AMVC” iS, Ne e 4 AE f : vil i a e: | Y IN % ‘ 71 ) WS \ ge \ sin Ki &S iy a H1())))) Ks, f Ne oy DK Wg 4 Of) AVE OCS. yy RIE \ ” Ni WW Al 0 ( BK ; i oN a ANN Mids f v=" AN SU ( = A UN) \ KN = uu Y) NLS ye > J) fy y @ 3 S ) MOUNTFORD—ARORIGINAT SKIN RUGS 7 oo Pitre Piy ry AP anne cH a a “aan ry ami eo = Ls ts t gael erate Ata { iat ai i ait Iwi fia ai Bi Viavigralines: iguana : ] a oH He a Hae (midi, MN as Loo : 534 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM New South Wales The rug (fig. 3), from the Hunter River, New South Wales, made up of 22 skins, is approximately five by four feet in area. Mitchell (plate 32 A), depicts two aborigines on the Bogan River area of New South Wales, one whose rug reaches to his knees, and the other wearing what appears to be a single skin barely covering his body. This survey shows that, although the rugs worn by the aborigines of Victoria, New South Wales, Queensland and South Australia were usually large enough to cover the whole body down to the knees, those used by the Tasmanians and the natives of southern Western Australia appear to have been considerably smaller in area. According to Tindale and Lindsay (1963, plate 15) the skin rugs worn by the aborigines of the Logan River of Queensland were almost as voluminous as those worn by the Victorians. TECHNIQUES OF MANUFACTURE Seattered throughout the early Australian writings are many details and several excellent descriptions of the techniques used by the aborigines in the manufacture of their skin rugs. The earliest of these records was by Daniel Bunce (1857, p. 75), who, when describing his experience in Victoria wrote:—‘‘Many opossums had been caught during our excursion, and the skins were now pegged out on sheets of bark and stretched to their fullest extent with wooden pegs . . . The points of these pegs, previously hardened in the fire, had been scraped with a piece of broken glass bottle . . . After the skins had been sufficiently stretched and dried, they were curiously marked, the work of the men, animals, kangaroos, emus, as well as human figures frequently represented by a piece of glass, or when not, by the bowl of a metal spoon, filed sharp for the purpose of scratching the skin when in the soft state. Prior to the introduction of needles and thread, they (the aborigines) used the finer tendons of the kangaroo and opossum for thread, and the sharpened bone of a fish or kangaroo as a needle for sewing their skin rugs’’. Bunce’s evidence is supported by several independent sources. Krefft (1862, p. 362), when writing of the customs of the aborigines of the Murray and Darling Rivers states, ‘‘Nearly all the trees along the river showed more or less, . . . where square pieces of bark for drying their opossum skins on had been cut, often to the height of 30 feet above the ground’’. MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS S35 An examination of the two Murtz sketches (plate 31), shows some of the techniques mentioned by Bunce and Krefft. Ini the background of plate 81 A, some men ave capturing opossums. On the extreme left, one man has lita fire at the base of a holluw tree, while another is waiting at (he top te club the opossnuin as it endeavours to escape from {he sruoke. In the centre vf the illustration another aboriginal is ascending the tree by means of a climbing vine in pursnit of an opossum, whilst his companion, stick in hand, is waiting to kill the creature when it jumps to the ground. In the lelt foreground, a man, returmng to camp, is carrying a uunther of Gpossums, other aborigines are skinning the ereatures, Whose pelts, held on reetangles of thick bark of the gum tree with wooden pegs, are drying around a camp-fire. These rectangles of bark, similar to those previously mentioned by Krefft, have been removed from the tree on the extreme right, On plate 81 B, a Martz sketeh in Ratzel (1896, p. 364), a number af opossum skins, now decorated with simple designs, but still pegged out on the sqnares of bark, are drying beside the fire. Although Bunce states that the skins were decorated with a piece of glass or a sharpened spoon (obviously the effeets of civilization), Smyth (1878, p. 349), states that ‘The mussel shell, v-born, is used by the natives for scraping and preparing the skin for bags, rugs, ete." Howitt (1904, p. 742), who claims that the aborigines did not dress their skins, but merely dried them, states that ‘to make them more pliable, they eut markings in the skin sides with mussel shell (nanduwung).”” Dunbar (1948, p. 142), when deserihing the skin rugs of the Ngemba tribe of the Darling River writes: ‘‘Skin rungs were made of the skin of the doe kangaroo, murraway; this was stretched and dried in the shade, rubbed with ashes, then with emu oil or goanna fat, and pulled backwards and forwards over a stuooth-harked tree to make it pliable. Other than this, no attempt was made at tanning. The skins were ronghly trimmed and sewn together by threads of kangaroo-tail sinews, and, in the cold weather, the cloak was worn with the fur side inwards’’. Dunbar makes no reference to decorations on the inside of the rugs. Worsnop (1897, p. 15), described the manufacture of the skin rugs of the South Australian aborigines thus, ‘‘Their opossum rugs, or clonks of kangaroo skins, after having been stretched and dried before a fire, or in the sun, are roughly trimmed and sewn together by 536 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM kangaroo sinews, the edges of the skin are pierced with a sharp- pointed bone for the sinews to pass through. When a sufficient number of skins are sewn together, the next operation is to ornament the inner, or flesh side of the cloak, which is done by doubling over a part of the skin, a few inches at a time, and scraping the narrow edge with a flint, or the sharp edge of a shell. The design usually partook of a zig-zag, or diamond pattern (see plate 32 B and plate 33 D), according to the taste of the wearer’’?. During the writer’s investigations of the Adnjamatana tribe of the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia, the aborigines showed him how they folded and scored their skins in a similar manner to that described by Worsnop (1897). Plate 33 C also illustrates a northern Flinders aboriginal demonstrating, on a completed rug, the method of using a large stone implement, wtuna, to dress a skin. Fig. 5. Rough sketch of kangaroo-skin cape from Jarramungup, south-western Western Australia. (2) The writer feels sure that Worsnop is wrong in one particular. The skins are decorated before being sewn together. This is evident on an examination of the skin rug from Marion Bay (plate 33 D), the skins from the northern Flinders Ranges (plate 33 B), the Murtz illustration in Ratzel (plate 31 B), and the Condah rug (Mountford, 1960, fig. 1). MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 537 Edwards (1963), has deseribed a large series of kidney-shaped stones, most of them from southern South Australia, whieh the aborigines had used when preparing skins for their rugs. Hammond (1933, p. 30), in deseribing the methods adopted by the aborigines of Western Australia when making their bouka or kangaroo skin capes (fig. 5) wrote: ‘After the kangaroo had been skinned, the skin is pegged out in the usual way and left until half dry. It is then smeared all over with grease. Using a small sharp- edged stone, the natives would then scrape it until it was quite flexible, occasionally working it with grease. When finished, it was as pliable as any tanned skin. In making the bouka, the chosen skins would be laid, side by side, on the ground, and the adjoining edges would be trimmed with a sharp stone so that they met evenly. The trimmed edges were sewn together with kangaroo sinews . . . The sewing would be done by pricking holes in the skin with a wooden needle . . , then pushing the sinews through with the fingers, The stitehes were from a quarter to three-eighths of an inch apart, and looked like a sort of blanket stitch. The children wore one-skin boukas except in hot weather’, Summarizing the available evidence on the manufacture of aboriginal skin rugs, it wonld appear that the animal was skinned, its pelt stretched on a sheet of bark, or on the hard ground, until dry, or partly so. The skin was then dressed and on most, but not on all occasions, decorated before it was trimmed and sewn together in the form of a cape or a rug. METHODS OF WEARING RUGS In general, the aborigines on the mainland of Australia (plate 31 A, B), and in Tasmania (plate 30 A), wore their skin rugs by passing one edge under the right arm and fastening it to the other edge with a bone skewer on the left shoulder. This method of wearing the cloak allowed perfect movement for both arms. D’'Urville’s sketch (plate 30 B), of the aborigines of King Georges Sound, Western Australia shows that skins were worn across the shoulders in the same manner as a cape. (3) The child in the foreground of D’Urville’s illustration (plate 30 B) is Wearing 4 single skin. 538 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Gouger (1838, p. 50), when writing of the Adelaide tribe says, ‘‘The women carry their children behind their backs in the part of the kangaroo rug enveloping them, so tied that the upper part forms a sort of a hood’’. Mountford and Harvey (1941, facing p. 162) illustrated an aboriginal woman from the Adnjamantana tribe of the northern Flinders Ranges, carrying her child in a similar manner. The Tasmanian mother on plate 30 A, with her rug around the shoulders, is holding a child in her arms; others are wearing their rugs across their left shoulders. DECORATIONS AND THEIR MEANINGS There is no evidence that the aborigines of Tasmania or south- western Australia used any designs on the inside of their skin rugs. Those, however, who inhabited the southern districts of South Australia decorated their rugs with diamond-shaped patterns (plates 32 B and 33 D), and in the northern Flinders with square designs (fig. 4, and plate 33 B, C). The few available illustrations, specimens in museum collections and references in literature all show that the aborigines in both Victoria and New South Wales decorated the inner surfaces of their skin rugs with elaborate designs. Dawson (1881, facing page 8); Ratzel (1896, p. 364), (plate 31 B); Murtz (plate 31 A, and Mitchell (1888) (plate 32 A), all illustrated aboriginal men and women wearing these decorated skin rugs. Ratzel (1896, p. 364) figures an unlocalized skin rug; Mountford (1960, fig. 1) a rug from Condah, southern Victoria and in this paper describes and illustrates a skin (plate 33 A), from an unlocalized locality in New South Wales; a rug from Echuca, northern Victoria (fig. 2), and another from the Hunter River, New South Wales (fig. 3). Many writers have made passing references to these decorated rugs. Strutt (1858, p. 62), states, ‘‘The fur rugs were made from opossum skins and decorated with various devices (designs), on the inside in red and black;’’? Parker (1905, p. 121) records that “*. . . Their opossum skin rugs used to have designs scratched on their skin sides and also painted patterns . . .’’; Hull (1858, p. 62) also stated that ‘‘The opossum-skin rug and cloak was much ornamented with rude engravings of rivers, camps, animals, ete., ete., scratched on the skin with a mussel shell’’. MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 539 Smyth (1878, p, 228), when referring to the Victorian rugs, notes that, ‘The inner sides ol! the opossum rugs . . . were usually oTmanented, They (the aborigines) inscribed lines on the skin and darkened them with powdered charcoal, fat and with other colours, he figures were the same as those on their weapons, uamely, the herring-bone, chevron, and saltier, with representations of animals in outline . . . When an animal was figured, it is common, as in the drawings | have given (fig. 48), to fill in the space around it with lines’’, Later Smyth (1878 p. 294), quoting Bulmer said, ‘‘In ornamenting their rugs, they copied from Nature. One man .. . got his ideas from natural objects . . . the markings of a grub, called Krag, and from the snakes and from the markings of lizards he derived new designs. The natives, in adorning their rugs, and weapons . . . inntated the forms of the plants and trees’’, Bunee (1858, p, 103), writes, ‘*After the sking had been sufficiently stretehed and dried, they were curiously marked, the work of the men, animals, kangaroos, emus as well as human figures frequently represented”. There ave many different opinions among the early writers regarding the meanings of the desizns which the aborigines inseribed on their rugs. ‘The following is a selection of the opinions expressed; Parker (1905, p. 21) records ‘*. . . have designs seratched on their skin rugs, alsu painted patterns. Some say tribal marks, others, just to look pretty and to distinguish one rom another’s’’; Frazer (1898, p. 201), when speaking of body searring writes, “I think it is likely .. . that eaeh family had its own mombarai which belonged to each clan of the tribe, for a friend of mine tells me that . . . he had an opossum me made for him by a man of the Kamilaroi tribe, who marked it with his mombara. When the rug was shewn to another black some time later, be at onee exclaimed, ‘I know who made this, here is his mombarai’.’’ Greenway (1910, p. 198), when referring to the burial customs of the same tribe states, ‘‘On the bare part of the tree, certaim marks were cut to correspond with the marks on the dead man’s "possum rug or cloak, for each man’s rug is particularly marked to signify its partienlar ownership’? Howitt (1904, p. 741), says that, ‘The markings are called waribruk and each man had his own. Fig. 50 shows examples of the waribruk known to me’’, This selection of writings from the early observers suggest that some, but not all, of the symbols engraved on the skin rugs of eastern and south-eastern Australia were the personal marks of the owners, There must have been occasions, however, when the artist, to satisfy 540 RECORDS OF ‘THE S.A. MUSEUM his aesthetic sense, would have decorated his rug with designs that had no totemic meaning. ‘The simple designs on the South Australian rugs were, without donbt, used only for decoration and to make the skins more flexible. DESCRIPTION OF RUGS Fig. 2 illustrates an opossum skin rug colleeted at Echuea, on the River Murray in 1853, Approximately 83 inches long and 69 inches wide, it is made up of 76 decorated and seven undecorated skins, laid in 11 rows. The individual skins have been skilfully sewn together with fine sinews and the designs cut into the surface with some sharp tool, possibly, as recorded by Smyth (1878, p. 349), with the sharp edge of a mussel shell, A few of the skins in the lower left-hand corner have been coloured with red oehre. Although this rug, which is in the National Museum of Vietoria, hag been torn almost in halves, it has been possible by means of photography, to obtain an almost complete record of the designs engraved on its inner surface, There is little doubt that some, if not all of the designs were personal symbols or totemie marks of the owner, a number of them being similar to those which Ilowitt (1904, fig. 50), stated belonged to aborigines with whom he was acquainted. Fig, 3, from the Hunter River, eastern New South Wales, collected by Commander Wilkes on the United States exploring expedi- tion of 1838-42, is now housed in the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, D.C, The rug, which is 58$ inches long and fifty inches wide contams 22 reecularly cnt skins of the brush-tailed opossum, ‘'richosurus vulpecula, a smaller piece of the same material and a skin of the ereat grey kangaroo (Macropus cangaru)™?. The skins were laid in two rows of five skins, and two rows of four, the kangaroo skin and the small piece of opossum skin filling in the upper right-hand corner to complete the rectangle. The skins are sewn edge to edge, with very fine stitching of cotton cord. The number of designs on this rug that resemble each other suggest that they too, like those on the Eechnea rug (fig. 2), may have represented the personal marks of the owner’? (4) These skins were identified by Dr, David Johnson, Curator of Mammals, Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington D,C, (5) This rug has been figured by Schuster (1961, essay 27, fig. 7). MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 541 Fig. 4 illustrates a skin rug collected by the writer from the aborigines of the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia, It 18 made up of 41 rabbit skins, laid in six rows and sewn together with sinews, probably thoge from the tail of a kangaroo. Hach skin had been decorated with a varied and interesting series of square designs, The aborigines explained that opossum skins would have made a warmer and much more durable rug, bat, as, in more recent years, these creatures had become scarve, they had been forced to use the skins of rabbits, Plate 33 D, from the collection of the South Australian Museum, is a section of a skin rng made from opossum skins in recent years by an old aboriginal woman of Yorke Peninsula in South Australia, This rug, about four feet square, is decorated with diamond-shaped patterns typical of southern South Australia (see plate 32 B), Plate 33 A, is a single decorated skin from New South Wales. Its specific locality is not recorded in the register of the British Museum, where the specimen is housed. The diamond-shaped patterns on this skin, partly coloured with some pigment, possibly red ochre, are unlike those used in South Australia. Plate 33 B is a single skin, collected in the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia, and now in the collection of the National Museum of Victoria, The designs consist of squares similar to those on the Flinders Range rug (fig. 4), SUMMARY This paper illustrates and describes all the known examples of aboriginal skin rugs and decorated skins in existence, surveys and early literature which describes the types of skin rugs used by the aborigines of Australia, gives the techniques employed in their manu- facture, the methods of wearing, the decorations inscribed on their surfaces, and their possible meanings. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS For assistance in this research IT wish to acknowledge help received from the Board of Governors of the Sonth Australian Museum and for the use of their facilities; to the National Museum of Victoria for permission to photograph and deseribe the aboriginal rugs in their collection; to Mr, A. Massola, the Curator of Anthropology of that Institution for his ever-ready help; tu Mr, IT, Crawford, the Curator of Anthropology of the Western Australian Museum, for his sketch of the Jarramungup rug, and tu Mr. B. Cranstone, Curator of Oceanic Ethnography of the British Museum, for his kindly assistance- i 542 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM BIBLIOGRAPHY Angas, G. F., 1847: South Australia Illustrated. Bates, D., 1938: The Passing of the Aborigines. Bunce, Daniel, 1857: Australasiatic Reminiscences. Calvert, Albert F'., 1881: The Aborigines of Western Australia, Dawson, J., 1881: The Australian Aborigines. Dunbar, G. K., 1943: Notes of the Ngemba Tribe of the Central Darling River. Mankind, 3(5). D’Urville, D., 1833: The Voyage of the Astrolabe. Edwards, R., 1963: Preliminary survey of the aboriginal reniform slate scrapers of South Australia. Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 14(3), pp. 515-524. Frazer, John, 1893: The Aborigines of New South Wales. Journ. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 16. Gouger, Robert, 1838: South Australia in 1837. Greenway, Canon, 1910: The Kamilaroi Tribe. Science of Man, N.S.W., 11(10). Hammond, J. E., 1933: Winjan’s People. Hassell, EH. in Davidson, D. S., 1935: Myths and Folk-lore of the Wheelman Tribe of South-western Western Australia. Folk Lore, 44. Howitt, A. E., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-eastern Australia. Hull, W., 1859: Evidence, Report of Select Committee of the Legisla- tive Council of Victoria on Aborigines. Krefft, G., 1862: Customs of the Aborigines of the Lower Murray. Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 3. Mitchell, T. L., 1838: Three Expeditions into the Interior of Eastern Australia, Mountford, C. P. and Harvey, Alison, 1941: Women of the Adnja- matana Tribe. Oceania, Sydney, 12(2). Mountford, C. P., 1960: Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Ree. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 13(4). Parker, K, L., 1905: The Euahlayi Tribe. Peron, M. F., 1809: A Voyage of Discovery to the Southern Hemisphere. MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 543 Peron, M. F. and Freycinet, L., 1807-16: Voyage de Decouvertes Aux Terres Australes, Atlas No. 1. Ratzel, F., 1896: The History of Mankind. Smyth, R. B., 1878: The Aborigines of Victoria, 2 vol. Strutt, C. E., 1858: Report of the Select Committee of the Legislative Council of Victoria on Aborigines. Schuster, C., 1961: Observations on the Painted Designs of Patagonian skin rugs. Essays in Pre-Columbian Art and Archaeology, 27. Tindale, N. B. and Lindsay, H. A., 1963: Aboriginal Australians, Brisbane. Worsnop, T., 1897: The Prehistoric Arts, Manufactures, Works, Weapons, Etc. of the Aborigines of Australia. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 30-33 PLATE 30 A. Tasmanian aborigines at South-West Cape, Tasmania, wearing skin rugs (Peron & Freyeinet). B. Aborigines of King George Sound, south-west of Western Australia, wearing skin eapes (Dumont D'Urville). PLATE 31 A, Aborigines (probably Victorian), catching opossums and drying skins (Murtz). B. Family group (probably Victorian) in eamp, with decorated opossum skins, on squares of bark, drying beside the camp fire (Murtz, in Ratzel). PLATE 32 A, Aborigines of the Bogan River, New South Wales, wearing skin cloaks (Mitchell). B. Aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe, South Australia, wearing skin rug (Angas). PLATE 33 A. Decorated skin, New South Wales. B. Decorated skin, Northern Flinders Ranges, South Australia. C. Method of fleshing skin with stone implement, northern Flinders Ranges, D. Section of decorated skin rug, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia. Ree. S.A. Museum Von, 14, Puare 30 2abie = cs =a Tasmanians and Western Australians wearing skins, To fae page Bada.) Rec, S.A. Musnuat Vor. 14, Phare 31 Preparation of opossum skins. Ree, SwA. Museum Australians wearing skins. Von. 14, Parr 3s Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Para 33 Divoration of skins in Australia. THREE NEW SPECIES OF THE GEKKONID LIZARD GENUS DIPLODACTYLUS GRAY FROM AUSTRALIA By ARNOLD G. KLUGE”), DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA Summary In preparation for a revision of the large and complex gekkonid lizard genus Diplodactylus Gray a study was made of all the specimens deposited in Australian university and museum collections. During this study a few specimens were discovered which apparently represent three undescribed species. It is not surprising that these populations appear to be restricted to two regions already supporting a large number of plant and animal relicts. Two of the species are known only from the Carnarvon and North-West Natural Regions of Western Australia and the third from central Australia. All the new forms belong to the vittatus species group which at present includes byrnei Lucas and Frost, conspicillatus Lucas and Frost, pulcher (Steindachner), steindachneri Boulenger, tessellatus (Gunther), and vittatus Gray. This species group is characterized by relatively long and slightly expanded digits with moderately large subapical plates, preanal pores either present or absent and a cloacal spur consisting of a cluster of ridged spine-like scales. THREE NEW SPECIES OF THE GEKKONID LIZARD GENUS DIPLODACTYLUS GRAY FROM AUSTRALIA By ARNOLD G, KLUGE, Deparrmant or Biotocy, UNIVERSITY OF Souruern Catrrornia, Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA Plates 34-35 In preparation for a revision of the large and complex gekkonid lizard genus Diplodactylus Gray a study was made of all the specimens deposited in Australian university and museum collections. During this study a few specimens were discovered which apparently represent three undescribed species. It is not surprising that these populations appear to be restricted to two regions already supporting a large number of plant and animal relicts. Two of the species are known only from the Carnarvon and North-West Natural Regions of Western Australia and the third from central Australia. All the new forms belong to the vittatus species group which at present includes byrnei Lucas and Frost, conspicillatus Lucas and Frost, pulcher (Steindachner), steindachneri Boulenger, tessellatus (Gunther), and vittatus Gray. This species group is characterized by relatively long and slightly expanded digits with moderately large subapical plates, preanal pores either present or absent and a cloacal spur consisting of a cluster of ridged spine-like seales. I wish to extend my gratitude to the curators of the following institutions for their assistance during my study tour and for the opportunity fo describe specimens under their care: Harold G, Cogger, Australian Museum (A.M.), F, J. Mitchell, South Australian Museum (S.A.M.) and Glen M, Storr, Western Australian Museum (W.A.M.). I also wish to thank A. R. Main of the Department of Zoology, University of Western Australia (U.W.A.) for reading the manuscript. Diplodactylus galeatus sp. nov. Holotype: S.A.M. R973. Collected in the Stuart Range, South Australia by Henry Greenfield on 15 October, 1920. (1) Postgraduate Fulbright Scholar, during 1961-62, at the University of Western Australia. $46 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM Diagnosis: Diplodactylus galeatus can be distinguished from all ether members of the vittatus species group by the following combina- tion of characters: (a) dosal body scales moderately large and swollen; (b) tail relatively long, round in crogs section, covered dorsally with regular annuli of slightly enlarged tubercles; and (rc) a colour pattern consisting of a continuons post-orbital streak over occipital region and a series of large conspicuous. circular marke on dorsum of body (plate 34, A). Description of holotype: Wead moderately deep; eye large: snout relatively long; rostral rectangular, slightly more than twice as wide as high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent; nostril small, directed posterolaterally, surrounded by rostral, first supralabial (broadly in contact), two supranasals and four postnasals; anterior-most anpra- nasal large, meeting counterpart on midline (internasal absent); scales immediately posterior to supranasals slightly enlarged and swollen; seales of snout moderately large, 9/11 between postnasals and preocular granules (left and right sides respectively); 8/9 supra- labials, slightly decreasing in height posteriorly; 24 seales between centrolateral margins of orbits (excludine those of dorsal eyelids) ; 2/4 extremely small spinose scales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; mental almost qnadrangniar, longer than wide; 10/11 infra- labials; scales bordering mental and infralabials slightly enlarged and flattened, gradually grading into small conical granules of throat region; external ear opening relatively small, almost round, slightly below level of angle of jaw; occipital and ternporal regions of head covered with moderately large conieal scales; dorsal surface of body eovered with large swollen scales separated by minute triangular granules (pl. 84, A); enlarged dorsal body scales rapidly grade into conical granules of sides and venter; granules of venter slightly imbricate, one-half times as large as swollen dorsals; limbs covered with relatively small imbricate conical scales; digits relatively long, narrow and depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with single row of enlarged swollen seales; 7/7 swollen seales covering inferior surface of fonrth finger, 9/8 covering fourth toe; subapical plates large, much wider than more proximal width of digit; nails extremely short, strongly curved, not projecting distally beyond claw sheath; tail moderately long, slightly swollen at base; tail covered above with large spinose tubercles in regular annuli which are in contact or separated by one or two rows of smaller conical scales; subcandals approxi- mately one-half times as large as dorsal tubercles; male; cloacal spur KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS S47 consists of cluster of 8/6 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines; preanal pores absent. Dorsal ground colour uniform yellowish-brown (probably slightly faded due to preservation); dark brown postocular streak continuous behind occipit, encloses uniform yellow region (plate 34, A); small yellow spot on side of neck; four large light diamond-shaped marks on dorsum of body (one pectoral, two midbody and one pelvic) ; dorsal surface of tail with faint indication of four irregular enclosed or open large circular marks; all dorsal body and tail colour patterns bordered by very dark brown; all ventral surfaces immaculate white, chromatophores absent. Snout-vent length 52.7 (all measurements given in millimeters) ; length of tail 27.0; length of head 14,8; length of snont 5.4; diameter of orbit 4.1; distance between eye and ear 4.8; width of head 10.2; distance between axilla and groin 23.4; length of fore limb 20.3; length of fourth finger 3,8; length of hind limb 25,0; length of fourth toe 4.2. Variation: In addition to the holotype, Diplodactylus galeatus is known from the following specimens: (a) S.A.M., 21563, Hermanneburg, Northern Territory and (#) A.M. R11995, 4 miles north of Alice Springs, Northern Territory. These specimens agree with the holotype in all important characters and exhibit the following variation: dorsomedian rostral crease one-fourth total height of rostral; two to five, ave. 3.2, postnasals; eleven to twelve, avg. 11.5, scales between postuasals and preocular granules; nine supralabials; twenty-four to twenty-eight, avg, 26.0, scales between centrolateral margins of orbits; three to four, avg. 3.5, extremely small spinose scales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; mental lanceolate, slightly to much longer than wide; ten to twelve, avg. 11.0, infralabials; scales bordering mental and infralabials small to slightly enlarged; external ear opening very small; dorsal surface of body covered with moderate to very large swollen scales; minute triangular dorsal granules absent or extremely small; sides of body and venter covered with small slightly flattened imbricate scales; seven to eight, avg. 7.8, swollen seales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, eight to eleven, avg. 9.3, covering fourth toe; nails extremely short to long, not or but slightly extending beyond claw sheath; tail relatively short in S.A,M,. R1563 (absent in A.M. R11995); annnli of large spinose tubercles of tail in contact or separated by one to four rows of smaller conical scales; subeaudals slightly smaller than dorsal tubereles of tail; both males; cloacal spur consists of cluster of five to six, avg, 5.3, spines; dorsal ground ecolonr uniform yellow or dark reddish-brown; no 548, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM indication of spot on side of neck; four to five large light almond- shaped or irregular circular marks on dorsum of body (one pectoral, two to three midbody and one pelvic); dorsal surface of tail devoid of colour pattern, Relationships: Within the vittatus species group, galeatus appears to be most closely related to tesseliatus. This relationship is inferred from their similar head and body proportions and the type of midbody and tail scalation. Diplodactylus galeatus can easily be distinguished from tessellatus by its peeuliar colonr pattern (in tessellatus the dorsal surfaces of the head and body are uniform or marbled grayish- brown). Diplodactylus tessellatus is known from the Fiverard Ranges, South Australia and Newcastle Waters, Northern Territory. Htymology: The specific name is derived from the past-participle of the Latin word galeu, meaning covered with a helmet, thus drawing attention to the occipital cap formed by the continuous dark brown postocular streak (plate 84, A). Diplodactylus wmitchelli sp. nov. Holotype: WAM. R14828. Collected at Coolawanyah home- stead, Pilbara Division, Western Australia, by F. J. Mitchell on 17 July, 1958, Diagnosis: Diplodactylus mitchelli can he distinguished from all other members of the wvittatus species gronp by its larger size, relatively large and flattened dorsal body seales and colour pattern (plate 34, B), Description of holotype: Wead slightly depressed; eye large; snout long; rostra) rectangular, almost two and one-half times wider than high; dorsomedian rostral crease slightly more than one-fourth total height of rostral; nostril moderately large, directed dorso- laterally, surrounded by rostral, first supralabial (broadly in contact), two large supranasals and three postnasals; anterior-most supranasal extremely large, broadly in contaet with counterpart on midline (inter- nasal absent); single very large flat scale iromediately posterior to supranasals; scales of snout moderately large and swollen, 10/11 between postnasals and preocular granules (left and right sides respectively); 8/7 large supralabials, of equal height to below pupil; 24 scales between centrolateral margins of orbits (excluding those of dorsal eyelid) ; frontal region strongly concave; 4/3 very small spinose scales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; mental lanceolate, slightly more thau twice as long as wide; 10/10 infralabials, rapidly decreasing KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS 549 in size posteriorly; two rows of large flattened postmentals, rather sharply defined from small conical granules of throat region; external ear opening very small, oval, at level of angle of jaw; occipital and temporal regions of head covered with moderately large oval scales; mid-dorsal surface of body covered with very large slightly imbricate plate-like scales, two to two and one-half times larger than small imbricate cycloid ventrals; enlarged plate-like scales of dorsal body surface vradually grade into smaller and more imbricate scales of sides of body (plate 34, B); limbs covered with moderately large slightly imbricate conical scales; digits very long, narrow and depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with single row of enlarged swollen scales; 8/9 swollen seales covering inferior surface of fourth finwer, 8/0 covering fourth toe; subapical plates very large, much wider than more proximal width of digit; nail very short, strongly eurved, not projecting distally beyond claw sheath; tail regenerated— very short and bulbous, covered with large swollen square scales forming regular annuli (plate 34, B); male; cloacal spur consists of cluster of 7/6 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines; preanal pores absent. Dorsal ground colour reddish-brown; dorsal surface of head uniform light brown; dark brown postocular stripe very conspicnous, ending abruptly above ear opening; vertebral region of body white, projecting laterally in form of serration, bordered by dark brown (pl, 34, B); dorsal surfaces of fore limbs almost uniform light brown, obvious irregular dark brown spots on dorsal surfaces of hind limbs; throat region immaculate white, all other ventral surfaces sparsely eovered with brown chromatophores, most heavily concentrated on palms and soles. Snout-vent. length 60.5 (all measurements given in millimeters) ; length of tail 27.2; length of head 17.1; length of snout 6.2; diameter of orbit 4.4; distance between eye and ear 5.8; width of head 11.3; distance between axilla and groin 27,8; length of fore limb 23.3; length of fourth finger 4,9; length of hind limb 29.4; length of fourth toe 5.3, Variation: In addition to the holotype, Diplodactylus mitchellt is known from the North West and Pilbara Divisions from the following specimens: (a) U.W.A. (uneatalogued), Shothole Canyon, 12 miles north-northwest of Learmonth, North West Cape, (b) 8.A.M. R4280 and W.A.M, R14824, Coolawanyah homestead, and (c) S.A.M. R4281, at waterhole in Tambrey Creek at Tambrey homestead, These specimens $50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM agree with the holotype in all important characters and exhibit the following variation: rostral slightly more than twice to more than two and one-half times wider than high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent to one-fourth total height of rostral; two supranasals and one to four, avg. 2.3, postnasals; scales immediately posterior to supranasals moderately large and flat; ten to thirteen, avg. 11,3, scales between postnasals and preoenlar granules; seven to eight, avg. 7.4, supra- labials, equal or slightly decreasing in height posteriorly; twenty-four to twenty-eight, avg. 25.5, seales between centrolateral margins of orbits; one to four, avg. 2.5, spinose seales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; nine to eleven, avg. 10.4, infralabials; postmentals only slightly enlarged to very large and flat; mid-dorsal surface of body covered with moderately large tu very large, slightly swollen or plate- like scales, one and one-half to three times larger than ventrals; seven to nine, avg. 8.0, swollen seales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, eight to ten, avg. 91, covering fourth toe; tail of specimen from North West Cape unregenerated—relatively short, slightly swollen, dorsal surface covered with large oval slightly imbricate or juxtaposed scales forming regular annuli, subcaudals more flattened and imbricate (tails of all other specimens absent or regenerated and similar to holotype); W.A.M. R14824 juvenile female, remaining epecimens adult males; cloacal spur in males consists of cluster of seven to ten, avg. 8.2 spines} dorsal ground colour yellow to dark reddish-brown; postocular stripe absent; vertebral region of body white with lateral serration or an overall reticulation; dark brown spots either present or absent on dorsal surfaces of fore and hind limbs; ventral surfaces of body and limbs with or without sparse covering of brown chromatophores; tail of North West Cape specimen with light brown reticulation similar to dorsum of body, Relationships; The specific relationship of mitchelli within the vittatus species group is not clear. Superficially, mitchelli appears to be most closely related to wittatus, however, there are obvious similarities to both galeatus and tessellatus. Etymology: This species is named in honour of Mr. F, J, Mitchell, who collected the holotype and who has made many valuable contributions to Australian herpetology. Diplodactylus savagei sp. nov. Holotype: W.A.M. R143269. Collected at Marble Bar, Pilbara Division, Western Australia, by Glen M. Storr on 22 September, 1960. KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS S51 Diagnosis: Diplodaciylus savagei can be distinguished from all other members of the vittatus species group by the following combina- tion of characters: (a) rostral large and hexagonal, (b) rostral crease absent, (c) anterior nasal present (rostral excluded from nostril), (d) only anterior-most supralabial enlarged (not in contact with nostril), all other labials replaced by granules, (¢) dorsal eyelid undifferentiated, (f) spinose scales on posterior border of ocular orbit absent, and (9) colonr pattern of large irregular white spots (plate 35, A). Description of holotype: Head moderately depressed; eye small; snout relatively long; rostral very large, hexagonal, slightly less than twice as wide as high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent; nostril large, direeted dorsally, surrounded by anterior nasal (rostral excluded), single supranasal and four postnasals; anterior nasal very large, borders first supralabial; supranasal large, meets counterpart on midline (internasal absent); seales of snont small and conical, 11/13 between postnasals and preocular granules (left and right sides respectively); anterior-most supralabial large, remaining labials replaced by 19/20 small grannies; 32 scales between centrolateral margins of orbits (ineluding those of dorsal eyelid); dorsal eyelid undifferentiated; spinose scales on posterior border of ocular orbit absent; montal very large, slightly more than twice as wide as long, bordered by seven seales (including first infralabial granule); infra- labials absent, replaced by 26/26 small granules; scales bordering mental moderately large, gradually grading into conical granules of throal, region; external ear opening incoispicuous, represented by small depression slightly below angle of jaw; dorsal and lateral surfaces of head and body covered with small conical granules (plate 35, A), equalling size of moderately imbricate ventrals; limbs covered with small slightly imbricate conical granules; digits moderately short aud broad, very depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with two raws of enlarged swollen seales (plate 35, B); 6/7 transverse series of swollen scales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, 6/6 covering fourth toe; subapical plates large, slightly wider than more proximal width of digit; nail short, strongly curved, not projecting distally beyond claw sheath; tail regenerated; male; cloacal spur consists of cluster of 12/11 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines; preanal pores absent. Dorsal ground colour dark brown; large irregular white spots randomly scattered over dorsal and lateral suriaces of neck and hody 552 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM (plate 35, A); canthus rostralis and supralabial margin white; inter- orbital and occipital regions covered with irregular white marks; some indication of small white spots on dorsal surfaces of limbs; ventral surfaces of head and body immaculate white, devoid of chroma- tophores; ventral surfaces of limbs covered with some chromotophores, becoming heavily concentrated on palms and soles, Snout-vent length 42.7 (all measurements are given in milli- meters); length of head 8.2; length of snout 3.8; diameter of orbit 2.0; ‘listarice between eye and ear 2.4; width of head 6.5; distance between axilla and groin 20,7; length of fore limb 13.8; length of fourth finger 2.6; length of hind limb 14.5; length of fourth toe 3.2, Variation: In addition to the holotype, Dipladactylus savaget is known from the Pilbara Division from the following® specimeris: (a) S.A.M, R3464 (2 specimens) Pilgangoora Well and (b) S.A.M. R4282 Coolawanyah homestead, These specimens agree with the holotype in all important characters and exhibit the following varia- tion; rostral slightly less to more than twice as wide as highs; four to six, avg, 4.5, postnasals; anteriornasal and supranasal separated from counterparts by one to two, avg. 1.3, internasals; fourteen to fifteen, ave. 14.2, scales between postnasals and preocular granules; fifteen to seventeen, avg. 16.2, granules bordering supralabial margin; thirty- one to thirty-six, avg. 33.0, scales hetween centrolateral margins of orbits; mental slightly less than twice as wide as long, bordered by five to six, avg. 5.3 scales; twenty-five to twenty-seven, avg. 26.5, granules bordering infralabial margin; external ear opening very small; scales covering dorsal and lateral surfaces of head and body slightly imbricate; six to seven, avg. 6.7 transverse series of swollen scales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, seven to nine, avg. 7,8, covering fourth toes tails absent; all females; cloacal spur consists of a cluster of five to fourteen, avg, 9.7, slightly enlarged soft scales; moderately large irregular white spots distinct or beginning to become confluent; only faint indication of chromatophores on palms and soles. Relationships: Diplodactylus savagei appears to be closely related to consyrcilatus, This assumption is inferred from their similar rostral shape and absence of a rostral crease, type and arrangement of seales hordering the nostril, absence of enlarged labials, undifferentiated dorsal eyelid, absenve of spinoge seales on posterior border of ocular orbit, and size and shape of mental. Diplodactylus savaget can be distinguished from conspicillatus by the size of its subapical plates and the size and arrangement of its infradigital KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS 553 lamellae (plate 35, B) and its colour and colour pattern (conspicillatus is a marbled brown). In the Pilbara Division conspicillatus has been collected at Yandeyarra and Mundabullangana Stations. Etymology: This species is named in honour of Dr. Jay M. Savage, whose interest in herpetology has stimulated all those students who have come in contact with him. DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES 34-35 PLATE 34 A. A dorsal view of the holotype (S.A.M. R973) of Diplodactylus galeatus. B. A dorsal view of the holotype (W.A.M, R14823) of Diplodactylus mitchelli, PLATE 35 A. A dorsal view of the holotype (W.A.M. R14369) of Diplodactylus sawaget. B. A yentral view of the fourth toe showing the comparative sizes of the subapical plates and subdigital lamellae of Diplodactylus conspicillatus and Diplodactylus sawvaget (right). Rie. SAL Mirseun Vou. 14, PLarr 34 To face pode Soa Vou. 14, Prarr 35 S.A. Museum Rec. — el Mee esa Nea Mes IOS MeNNe maT | A TJURUNGA-LIKE STONE PENDANT FROM NEW SOUTH WALES By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary This paper records a stone tjurunga-like object or pendant with carved designs, from Coolamon in the Albury district, New South Wales. The finding also of portion of a stone tjurunga, without markings, from the Boulia district of Queensland is reported In July 1960 the Rev. H. K. Bartlett drew my attention to the report of the finding of a stone tjurunga-like object, by Mr. William Eisenhauer, while he was slashing burrs on his father’s property at “Bonnie Doon”, three miles west of Coolamon, in the Albury district of New South Wales. A TJURUNGA-LIKE STONE PENDANT FROM NEW SOUTH WALES By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or AnTHROPOLOGY, Sourn AvustraLiAN Museum Fig. 1-4 SUMMARY This paper records a stone ¢jurunga-like object or pendant with carved designs, from Coolamon in the Albury district, New South Wales. The finding also of portion of a stone tjurwnga, without markings, from the Boulia district of Queensland is reported. INTRODUCTION In July 1960 the Rev. H. K. Bartlett drew my attention to the report of the finding of a stone tywrunga-like object, by Mr. William Hisenhauer, while he was slashing burrs on his father’s property at ‘Bonnie Doon’’, three miles west of Coolamon, in the Albury district of New South Wales. A photograph showed the specimen to be of interest and Mr. Bartlett, having corresponded with Mr. Eisenhauer, received it as a gift in January 1961. In July 1962 he presented the specimen to the South Australian Museum, where it is now registered as No, A.54131, The specimen is described herein. Opportunity also is taken to record another stone ftjurwnga-like object from the Boulia district of Queensland (fig. 1-2). DESCRIPTION The Coolamon specimen (fig. 3-4) is fashioned from a natural pebble of indurated gritty mudstone, reddish-brown in colour, both on the weathered surface and below it; broken places show there is little change of colour within the stone. The specimen has been lying in the surface soil of land which has been ploughed periodically for some years and bears score marks either of tines or of plough shares which have passed over it and mutilated parts of the surface, fortunately without seriously interfering with rather deeply incised designs carved on its surfaces. The length of the stone is 17.3 em., its greatest width is 5.0 cm. and its general thickness ranges between 1.9 and 2.2 em. 556 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM a a N.B.T. Fig. 1-4. Stone tjurunga-like objects. 1. Portion of an example from Boulia River, Queensland (specimen in Nielsen Collection). 2, Transverse section through it. 3-4. Two faces of specimen from Coolamon, New South Wales (specimen A.54131 in 8.A. Museum). Seale is to be read in centimeters. TINDALE—ABORIGINAL STONE PENDANT 557 The pebble from which it was fashioned had rounded margins and tapered to one extremity where, in manufacture a hole was drilled by boring cup-shaped depressions from eaeh side until they met in the middle of the substance of the stone, The diameter of this circular hole is 24 mm. In drawing the accompanying illustrations (fig. 3 and 4) the superficial injuries caused by plough marks have been ignored. The effeets were chiefly confined to abrasion and incisions alfecting the continuity of the transverse marks; where the original lines have been obscured or lost the missing portions are indicated by dotted lines. The damage in no way affects the interpretation of the markings. The margin distant from the pierced hole bas reeeived some damage; this probably was done before its defacement by the plough, Designs from the two surfaces ure shown in the illustrations; these are reproduced at about two-thirds natural size; the seale with the drawings should be read as indicating centimetres. The markings on the stone are rather crudely incised, varying in depth of cutting from slight scratches to scovings up to 2 mim. in depth, The deepest cutting is in the cirealar figure with its radiating lines, The lateral margins bear faint well-worn traces of short incisions; these are placed not quite symmetrically in midline, so that viewed from a flat faee they tend to be visible only on one of the two lateral margins. The exception is that at least three of the long transverse lines on the face with the civenlar design continue faintly over the edge to link with those faint margmal notches, which otherwise chiefly are visible from the opposite face and from the side. Recently (September 1962) a visit was made to Lake Menindee with Dr. R. Tedford and Mr, G. Pretty, At Menindee township Mr. J. H. Nielsen showed ime a broken portion of a stone tjurunga in his collection (fig. 1-2), Lt is made from a smooth, fine-grained sandstone of dark colour, is without ornament, but has been pierced with a hole at one extremity, As in the Coolamon eéxample, this hole was bored by drilling in from both surfaces, until the holes met in the middle. The locality given for the specimen was Boulia River, Queensland; it remains in Mr. Nielsen’s possession, The length of the preserved portion of the Boulia specimen is 15.1 em., its greatest diameter being 8.8 cm., and its thickness 0.7 em. When intact the tjurimga may have been about 25 em, in length with a maxinumn width close to 9 em. The general thickness was rather uniform suggesting that the sandstone from which it was made is of a rather regularly fissile nature. 538 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM DISCUSSION The use of the term tjurunga in association with the stone pendant from Coolamon, New South Wales, relates purely to its physical form, It is tjurunga-like but it could conceivably once have been either an ornamental pendant or an object of magical significance. Because of its thickness it does not seem effective as a sound-making bull-roarer and would be clumsy if swung in the fashion of such an instrument. When first mentioned in the press report it was regarded as a form of cylindro-conical stone. It is rather a crudely conceived object made on a natural pebble of rather soft mudstone. It has been drilled for suspension by a cord or string. The designs on it were possibly engraved with a piece of stone, using a sawing action; the euts often suggest multiple tu and fro movements of the tool with occasional change of position or perhaps ulteration to edge of the incising tovul by fracturing, leading to varia- tions in the scratches in the grooves. The parallel series of incised lines cut on it are similar to ones on some ¢ylindro-eonical stones from the Darling River district and also match others found on flat slate pebbles, from the Flinders Ranges, South Australia, such as have been recorded principally by Cooper (1947, 1954). The bird tracks depicted are similar to ones found on wooden weupous, on slate scrapers, as rock carvings in many places, and as tracks painted in rock shelters. Because they depict and symbolize usually specific birds there is not much reason for stylistic departure from actual tracks. No attempt has been made to identify the specific bird registered by the tracks, The circular figure with radiating lines which is a prominent feature of the stone is yery reminiscent of a large carving present on the roof of Devon Downs rock shelter in South Australia, as may be noted by comparing it with the figure published by Hale and Tindale (1930, fig. 246). Descriptively this was called a ‘‘sun’’ design, following the conventions of our own culture, A Maraura tribe aboriginal, in 1938, drew a design reminiscent of it while telling a story about Hayle and the Crow. His version is figured by Tindale (1939, p, 256, fig. 5). It there happened to represent men sleeping around a magic tree, It would appear that the design could have had any one of a number of interpretations; one suggestion from our own culture is that it possibly is intended to depict female genitalia. TINDALE—ABORIGINAL STONE PENDANT $59 The specimen from Boulia River is not critically localized ; it was received by Mr. Nielsen indirectly from a third party. It may suggest an eastward extension of the use of tjurunga-like stone objects and records the employment of a stone type other than the phyllitic material favoured by Aranda, Kukatja and kindred people of the MacDonnell Ranges. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are indebted both to Rev. H. K. Bartlett for his efforts on our behalf and to Mr. Hisenhauer for consenting to have the specimen lodged in the Museum collection. Mr. J. H. Nielsen kindly permitted the examination of his collection and assisted us in other ways. Opportunity is taken to note the several courtesies extended to us by Mr. N. O. Farrar of Bootingee Station, by Mr. R. May and by Mr. G. Packer, on whose land we collected specimens during our visit to Lake Menindee district. Mr. A. L. Blight reported to us several archaeological and palaeontological finds which are now being studied. REFERENCES CITED Cooper, H. M., 1947: Mankind, Sydney 3(10) : 292-298. 1954: Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 11: 97-103. Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1930: Ree. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 4: 145-218. Tindale, N. B., 1939: Rec. 8S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 6: 243-261. YOUNG FEMALE PIGMY SPERM WHALES (KOGIA BREVICEPS) FROM WESTERN AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA By HERBERT M. HALE, HON. ASSOCIATE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary Kogia breviceps is recorded from Western Australia for the first time. Also, a juvenile female from South Australia is described; this has a conspicuous bracket-like marking behind the eye, considered by some to be a characteristic of the genus, and differs considerably in skeletal characters from the western young female. YOUNG FEMALE PIGMY SPERM WHALES (KOGIA BREVICEPS) FROM WESTERN AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA By HERBERT M. HALE, Hon. Associate, Sourn AvusTRALIAN Museum Plates 36-41 and text fig. 1-11] SUMMARY Kogia breviceps is recorded from Western Australia for the first time. Also, a juvenile female from South Australia is described; this has a conspicuous bracket-like marking behind the eye, considered by some to be a characteristic of the genus, and differs considerably in skeletal characters from the western young female. INTRODUCTION T am indebted to my friend Dr. W. D. L. Ride, Director of the Western Australian Museum, for the opportunity of describing a young female Kogia from the south-west coast of Australia and also for the information concerning it recorded below. On the evening of September 18, 1959, two men observed a school of ‘‘porpoise-like animals’’ in the neighbourhood of Leighton Beach, near Fremantle, the port of Perth, in Western Australia. At 10 a.m, on the following day passers by saw a small whale ashore and still alive on the Leighton Beach. Mr. N. Steward reported the occurrence to Dr. Ride who, with some members of his staff, collected the specimen at 4 p.m. on the same day—September 19, 1959. It proved to be a female approximately 220 cm. in length. A fibre-glass cast of the whale and its skeleton are preserved in the Western Australian Museum. In the small hours of the morning of September 12, 1961, a young female Pigmy Sperm Whale, reported by some observers as a ‘“norpoise’’, or the calf of a Humpback seen swimming nearby, was stranded on a soft sandy beach, two miles north of Grange, on the eastern side of St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. This Kogia was photographed by the press on the same morning, and I am indebted to 562 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM The News and The Mail of Adelaide for the photograph reproduced on plate 36, B. Soon afterwards the whale was brought to the Museum by members of the staff. It exhibited no barnacle sears, but numerous recent short cuts were present on the lateral and, particularly, ventral surfaces, possibly caused by the nearby extensive Pinna beds. This example came ashore during calm weather, Its complete skeleton is housed in the South Australian Museum. As with other small whales, kogias are sometimes referred to by casual observers as ‘‘blackfish’’ (for example see Gunther, Hubbs and Beal, 1955, p. 263 and 269; also Hale, 1959, p. 337) or ‘‘porpoises”’ (Manville and Shanahan, 1961, p. 270), one of the reasons why strandings are not always immediately reported and, indeed, probably often disregarded. WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FEMALE, APPROXIMATELY 220 cm. IN BODY LENGTH (W. AUST. MUS. REG. NO. M.4519), External Characters According to measurements kindly supplied by Mrs, Kaye Thies of the Western Australian Museum, and to photographs taken by Dr. Ride of the animal on the beach, the snout was very short, about 2.0 per cent in the body length, while the dorsal fin was situated a little anterior to the middle of the body length, The greatest length of the pectoral limbs was about three times that of the width, The snout was blunt and deep, rounded above and descending steeply and only slightly obliquely, before curving back only a short. distance ahove the most anterior point of the mouth (pl. 36, A and text fig, 1), As already suggested (Hale, 1962, p, 200) a relatively short snout and small skull account for a more forward position of the dorsal fin in relation to the body length, Yamada’s measurements (1954, pp. 41 and 45) of a Japanese female, 2,200 mm. in length, indieate that this had a short snout, the origin of the dorsal fin in advance of the middle of the body, and the skull less than one-eighth of the body length. As shown by Dr. Ride’s photographs the blowhole was semi- circular and obliquely inclined towards the rear, terminating on the right side at a distance from the snout considerably greater than in the case of the left end. HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 563 Fig. 1-4. Young female, near Fremantle, Western Australia; 1, head; 2, mutilated dorsal fin; 3, pectoral limb; 4, caudal fin (not to same stale). According to the photographs the dark dorsal colour extended down to occupy the greater part of the snout and, as seen from the side, merged into the white of the underside not far above the upper jaw. Behind the mouth the dark pigmentation was crossed by an ill- defined white streak, curving upwards to the neighbourhood of the ear; from the dorsal end of this marking an irregular streak ran towards the axilla of the pectoral limb (cf. pl. 36, A herein, and Yamada, 1954, fig. 5, b). The dark colour, as far as can be judged, oceupied the whole of the dorsum and extended far down on the sides, the white of the underside, however, extending upwards to the rear of the insertion of the pectoral limb. Skeleton Skull (pl. 37, A and 38, A). Relatively small, more than eight times in the given body length of the animal. The rostrum, from tip to anterior wall of the left nostril, is much less than half of the total length of the skull and measured to the posterior level of the antorbital notches it is slightly less than half; it is distinctly wider than long, in fact its breadth between the antorbital processes is almost half of the total skull length, 564 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The supraoecipital has a shallow longitudinal median depression in the dorsal half with a short median carina at the apex, Its upper margin is broadly rounded with a tiny median projection bent down between the maxillae (pl. 37, A and 39, A); the bone at its narrowest part, between the posterior borders of the temporal fossae, is less than twice its height. The prominent occipital condyles are widely separated dorsally; ventrally they are separated by a distance equal to about one-fifth of their height. The foramen inagnum is oval in shape, its width equal to three- fourths the height. The lateral surfaces of the maxillae are low and rounded, before descending to form the great fossae; the right (measured from the posterior end of the maxillomalar suture) is 20 mm., and the left 28 mm.,, in depth. Tle malar on both sides is not fused with the frontals or with the maxillae, The maxillo-malar sutures form a V, deeper and more acute on the left side, and barely recurved posteriorly; they do not rise to the level of the dorsum of the antorbital processes. The dorsal crest is only slightly elevated above the level of the supraoccipital, The right premaxilla is considerably expanded behind the nares, where it is two-ninths the length of the bone. The prefrontal forms a high crest between the nares, is elevated above the right premaxilla alongside the right nostril, and has the notch in the margin bordering this nostril V-shaped and well defined, On the palatal surface the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear on both sides for a distance of 21 mm. and, with the vomer, reach slightly beyond the anterior ends of the maxillae. The maxillary alveolar grooves are smooth, well defined, somewhat widened anteriorly, and 58-66 mm. in length. The postorbital processes are tapering and apically subacute while the distance between them slightly exceeds that between the antorbital processes, The full number of teeth presumably is not available, 15 only being sent separately from the mandibles; on the whole these show greater curvature than those of a calf previously figured (Hale, 1947, fig. 10). The largest is 21 mm. in length, and all are anically aente. HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 565 Fig. 5, Ventral (left) and dorsal views of manubrium of sternum of Western Australian young female (4%; nat. size). Sternum. The bony portion of the manubrium is the only com- ponent available. It is unusually narrow anteriorly, where its width is less than the length. Wing-like expansions are poorly developed in the bone but doubtless were present and cartilaginous, as evidenced by the thickness of the antero-lateral margins. No median suture or foramina are present, although indications of the latter appear on the dorsal face; see fig, 5 which shows proportions, anterior notch, ete. Vertebrae. The cervicals (pl. 41, A and B), as is most usual in the genus, form one solid mass, the height of which (89 mm.) is less than that of the greatest width (104 mm.); the spinous process is low and wide as in Yamada’s No. 5 example (Yamada, 1954, fig. 8, upper) but unlike it has no indentations, when viewed from the side, near the obtuse apex. The first of the 13 thoracic vertebrae, like all the others, has the neural arch complete, its neural canal is not much wider than deep and its dorsal spine is apically subacute, inclined forwards, and is two-sevenths the total depth of the vertebra. The second thoracic spine is also slightly forwardly inclined and tapers to a subacute apex, The dorsal process of the last thoracic, measured from the upper limit of the neural canal, is one-fifth longer than the distance 566 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM between the venter of the centrum and the apex of the canal, and more than one-half of the depth of the vertebra (pl. 41, C and D). The apex of the dorsal process is subtruncate and more or less slightly convex in the second to ninth thoracics, subtruneate and slightly concave in the last three. In the anterior five of the nine lumbar vertebrae the dorsal spine is also more than half the total depth of the vertebra; in the sixth and seventh it is subequal, and in the eighth and nine a little shorter. The neural canal from the tenth thoracic, and in all the lumbars, is approximately twice as deep as wide, although a progressive reduction in the size of the canal begins with the first lumbar. The anterior fifteen of the caudal vertebrae are available, the rest being in situ, as the caudal fin as well as other parts, were preserved by Dr, Ride. Metapophyses are paired on the first four, are fused on the fifth and, as an anterior projection, do not entirely disappear until the eleventh caudal, but as usual become successively shorter. The neural canal becomes a wide, open groove on the fourteenth and fifteenth. The epiphyses are completely free on the posterior face of the cervicals and on both faces of the centrum of all the remaining vertebrae available, Only eleven chevrons, all with the members united, accompany the disarticulated skeleton. Ribs, Thirteen pairs, the anterior eight with a double articulation. Length of ribs taken in a straight line from head to free end of bony portions, Rib Right. Left. No. mm, mm, 1 210 212 2 281 285 3 305 315 4 322 322 5 323 325 6 316 316 7 Tip abraded 315 8 280 290 9 263 289 10 Tip abraded 271 ll 253 260 12 232 Tip abraded 13 Dorsal end 192 broken HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 567 SOUTH AUSTRALIAN FEMALE, 192 cm. IN BODY LENGTH (S.A. MUS. REG. NO. M.6310). I am indebted to Miss M. Boyce, of the Museum staff, for the photographs reproduced on plates 37 to 41 and also for the text figures of this specimen. Parasites and Stomach Contents The fore and main stomachs contained an astonishing mass of worms, large and small, and beaks of small examples of the Southern Squid, Sepioteuthis australis (identified by Mr. B. C. Cotton, Curator of Molluses at the South Australian Museum). External Characters In the photograph on pl. 36, B, the apparent depression beneath the snout is an optical illusion. The length of the body was fully four and one-half times its greatest depth. The snout was rounded, with the front curving backwards to the mouth. The crescentie blow- hole was large, 50 mm. in diameter, oblique, and with the left end of J Y \ saree \s8 10 ) Se Fig. 6-10, Young female, St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia; 6, head; 7, blowhole; 8, pectoral limb; 9, dorsal fin; 10, caudal fin (all \ nat. size). 568 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM the opening 205 mm,, from the vertical level of the snout, that of the right 230 mm. (fig. 6-7). The dorsal fin was three times as long as high and situated slightly in advance of the middle of the length (fig. 9). When first stranded the colouration was as follows. Grey on upper part of snout, the dark area extending back to three inches helow the eye, thenee to the axilla of the peetoral fin. The white of the underside extended upwards, however, to form a_bracket-like marking behind the eye (exactly as in the photographs of a Californian adult published by Hubbs, 1951, p, 406, pl. 3) and again beneath the pectoral fin in the form: of an almost cireular patch, which was margined dorsally with grey as dark as that of the back of the animal. The grey otherwise extended from the axilla to beyond the anus, when it curved down, leaving only a small part of the underside of the base of the tail white, The pectoral fins were dark grey externally and on the inner edges. The candal flukes were dark grey above, the underside with the edges margined with similar colour and the remainder white with irregular dark spottings. The bracket-like marking and the patch behind the pectoral fin had become pinkish, but were still discernible, 48 hours after the animal was stranded. Body Measurements, Measurements. mm. percent, Total length to uoteh of tail flukes .. 2. 6. 6. 6. ce ee ee ye 4, 7,920 100 Greatest depth of body .. .. wb se we -. 6480 22.4 Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior corner of rye tf 2 5% a BBG 13.0 Tip of mandible to vertical level of anterior corner of aye ,. .. .. 160 8.3 Tip of snout ta most anterior point of blowhole .. . ~~ 205 10,6 Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior end of base of dorsal fin... 965 50.2 Tip of mandible to axilla of pectoral lim 6... 4. ce ee ee pe ee) 420 21.8 Tip of mandible to anterior point of vulyt . 2 6. ee ee ee a, 1,200 62.5 Tip of mandible to anterior point of anus .. 2. 2. 6. ee ve oe vy 1,250 65.1 Length of gape to ma ate FOV 16) 0s ee, ie ae oye ote ee Tp loa. ha od LEE 5.8 Tength of eye .. .. os wie awe 34 Se OW we cee tee le et 25 1.3 Depih of oye .. wt jee Ot Hel ole ee ak 96 cue eee ou 12 0.6 Greatest width of caudal flukes .. 2. 2... ta 0s ow oe er eo en as 810 26.5 Hoight of dorsal fin .. .. eat De Ge we ey a ok TX Ro do PS 4.9 Length of hase of dorsal Oi, FF geqeoides at Quad ot wi ah oh 18D 16.4 Greatest length of pectoral fin 2... 2. 2. -. 8. ee we ye ge ae) 290 16.1 Greatest width of puetorul fin 2. 2. 6-0 6. ee ee eke ce ge ee ee) 105 5.4 Skeleton Skull (pl. 37, B to 39, B). This is less than one-seventh of the body length. The rostrum, from tip to anterior wall of the left nostril, is less than half the length of the skull but measured to the posterior HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 569 level of the antorbital notches is more than half. The skull is about as wide as long, and its greatest breadth, between the antorbital processes, is distinctly more than half its length. The supraoecipital has a shallow median depression near the vertex only. Its upper margin is produced and broadly triangular medianly, a feature apparent in pl, 38, B, but, because of its forward inclination not evident in pl. 39, B; the width of the bone, at ite narrowest part, between the posterior borders of the temporal fossae, is more than twice its height, The frontal is free for the whole of its visible length, while the shape of the squamosal (as compared to that of the Western Aus- tralian example) is best illustrated by reference to pl. 38, The occipital condyles are elongate, widely separated dorsally, and ventrally by a distanee equal to less than one-seventh of their height. The foramen magnum is as wide as deep, The dorsal edges of the maxillary fossae are sharply defined ridges (pl. 37, B). The lateral surfaces of the maxillae very consider- ably in height, as measured from the posterior end of the maxillo- malar suture, being on the right side 25 mm. and on the left 45 mm, in depth. The malar on both sides shows no indication of fusion with the maxillae or frontals, he maxillo-malar suture forms a shallow U on both sides, reeurved downwards to frontal and anteriorly rising to above the level of the dorsum of the antorbital processes. The dorsal erest is elevated a little above the level of the supra- oecipital. The expanded portion of the right premaxilla, posterior to the nares, is at ils widest part one-fifth of the length of the bone. In the palatal region the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear for a length of 20 mm., and reach slightly beyond the anterior ends of the maxillae, The alveolar grooves, smooth and well defined, are 50 mm. in length on both sides, The subtriangular and apically narrowly rounded postorbital processes are wider than in the Western Australian female (pl. 38); the width between them is distinctly more than the breadth of the skull between the antorbital processes. No upper teeth are present; there are 15 teeth in the left ramus of the lower jaw, 16 in the right; the longest teeth are 16 mm. in length, and all are apically aeute. As in the western specimen the rami are not fused at the symphysis. 570 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Tongue bones (pl. 40, A). The basihyal is roughly hexagonal in shape and wider than long; the anterior margin has a shallow median notch, on both sides of which is a relatively wide articular area, to which is attached a short cartilage, articulated with the cartilaginous ceratohyal; the posterior part has a distinct angular notch on each side, near the concave posterior margin. The bony portions of the stylohyals are considerably longer than the ceratohyals or the thyrohyals. The latter are irregularly oval in shape and surrounded by cartilage, which separates them very markedly from the basihyal. Sternum (pl. 40, B, ventral view). This consists of four segments, the first three of which are entire. The ossified part of the manubrium is not much wider than long, with a narrow and short median notch at the anterior edge; thick oval portions, 18 mm. and 22 mm. in length, are fused antero-laterally with the main body of the manubrium (fig. 11); the ragged suture of the left, and larger, suggests that at least this element was previously separated from the rest of the manubrium (cf. also Hale, 1962, pl. 4, fig. A and B, where these parts are cartilaginous) ; the wing like expansions of the anterior half are well developed and the posterior margin has a shallow median notch, alongside which the articular surfaces slope forwards. The second and shorter segment, as in the posterior half of the manubrium, has markedly concave sides; the third segment, likewise with concave Fig. 11. Ventral view of manubrium of sternum of South Australian young female (5 nat. size). HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 57] sides, is four-fifths the length ol the second and less than half the length of the manubrinm (85:50:40). As in a young male from South Australia there is a fourth small segment, but in this young female only the element of the right side is ossified (ef, Hale, 1962, pl. 4, A and pl, 40, B herein). Vertebrae. Counted in situ, with the animal partly fleshed, these are; cervical, 7; thoracic, 13; lumbar, 9; caudal, 25—a total of 54. The first caudal is regarded as that in which the anterior corners of the first chevrons are attached to the hinder end of the centrum, The last two cavdals are very small. In other young examples from South Australia the vertebrae (counted in like manner) range from 53 to 57 and in adults 52-50. The height of the cervical mass is less than the width (86: 100); the dorsal process is short, arrow in cranial view, and seen from the side is apically rounded and with two shallow notches in the anterior margin (pl. 41, H and F). All the thoracic vertebrae have the neural arch complete; the first has the neural eanal wider than deep (87; 25), and its dorsal process very short, less than one-sixth the depth of the vertebra. The secoud thoracic has a much longer dorsal process but still falling far short of that of the western female. In the sueeeeding thoracies the dorsal process becomes successively longer; the dorsal process of the last (thirteenth), measured from the upper limit of the neural canal is only half the depth of the vertebra, its width is four-sevenths its length, and as with the other thoracics the apical margin is sub- truncate and convex (pl. 41, G@ and H). In the nine lhimbar vertebrae the dorsal process is similar to that of the thoracics in shape; in the first the process is one-half the depth of the vertebra, m the others less than half, the ratio in the ninth being 40: 108. The neural canal becomes progressively smaller from the fifth thoracic vertebra; it is wider than deep in the first four but posterior to the fourth is deeper than wide (21: 18 in the thirteenth; pl, 41, G and H); in the ninth lumbar the depth of the canal in relation to its width iy 14: 8. Tn the 25 caudal vertebrae metapophyses are paired on the first. four, fused on the fifth, and are distinguishable as an anterior pro- jection until the ninth, he neural canal becomes a completely open groove on the thirteenth, The last two caudals are extremely small, being, without the epiphyses, 4 mm, and 2 mm, in length. 572 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM The vertebral epiphyses are quite free on the posterior face of the cervicals and on both posterior and anterior faces of the centrum of all other vertebrae. There are 13 chevrons, all the members united excepting in the last pair. Ribs. Thirteen on both sides, the last pair rudimentary; they were counted before dissection of the animal was completed, the eight anterior pairs have a double articulation. Length of ribs, taken in a straight line from head to free end of bony portions. Rib Zz Cordarone Right. mm. 155 230 265 275 287 287 279 265 249 230 210 182 25 Left. mm. 163 230 264 280 282 283 275 264 253 231 212 186 33 Skull measurements of the two young females. Western Australia Measurements, Total condylobasal length .. .. .. .. Height to vertex .. .. * Width between postorbital processes o. Hinder edge of occipital condyles to posterior wall of left naris Height of supraocccipital from upper margin of foramen magnum .. Width of supraoceipital at narrowest part between posterior moraine of temporal fossae .. .: Length of rostrum from ‘tip, to anterior wall of left naris .. Tip of rostrum to anterior margin of palatines .. Width of rostrum between antorbital processes .. . bo en te Greatest length of pterygoide «atte “ahs Length of left naris . .. Width of left naris .. .. ... Height of foramen magnum ot (M4519). Per cent Per cent length. breadth. 100.0 113.8 63.1 71.8 87.8 100.0 50.9 58.0 36.1 41.1 61.2 69.7 41.4 47.1 35.3 40,3 49.8 56.7 45.6 51.9 12.9 14.7 8.3 9.5 13.6 15.5 South Australia (M,6310), Per cent length. 100.0 62.9 92.6 48.1 31.8 Per cent breadth. 108.0 68.0 100.0 52.0 d4.4 68.5 50.0 38.0 58.0 52.0 15.2 10.8 13.6 HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 573 EMulL measurements of the two young females—continned. Wastern Australia South Australia (M4519). (M6310), Measurements, Per cent Percent Percent Per cent mu, length. breadth, mm, length. breadth. Width of foramen magtiun », 5. 5. 87 1.2 11,6 34 12.6 13.6 Height of occipital condyles . 2... 52 19,7 22.5 60 22.2 24.0 Width of oceipital condyles . .) .. TO 26.6 30,3 70 23,9 28,0 Length of righk ramus of muandibly (condyle to unterisr eu of ym Pliysis) ., se ve ee pe ee ee ee BBA R8Y 101,3 244 90,8 97.6 Depth of right Tamus at coronoid ,. 70 26.6 30.3 68 26.2 27,2 Length of symphysis .. ou. ye oe ee 82 12.1 13,8 45 16.6 18.0 Length of alveolar portion .. .. .. 90 34,2 38.9 97 35,9 38.8 DISCUSSION The above table, with pl. 87 and 38, show that there is quite marked variation between the two skulls. Plate 87 illustrates the considerable difference in the maxillary fossac, In the Western Australian female these are excavate evenly to the vertex, whereas in the South Australian female the surfaces become flattened (indeed on the right slightly convex) towards the vertex, where the fossae are therefore mueh shallower. The premaxilla of the western skull is shorter; the malar is more acute distally and has the anterior third slender and not eurved upwards to above the level of the antorbital processes, as is the case in the South Australian skull. Plate 38 illustrates also the difference in the distinetly separated maxillo-malar sutures. ‘The posterior edge of the frontal is fused with the supra- occipital in the western skull, but is free in the other, In the South Australian example the exposed anterior portions of the palatines are very small, whereas they occupy a very much larger area in the other skull, with which, unlike the former, they are fused. The Western Anstralian female appears to be older than the southern female; this is indicated by the greater body length of the former, the fact that some of the bones of the skull have fused, and the prefrontal is longer, as also are the teeth. As noted above, how- ever, in the former the skull is shorter in relation to the body length. Of the juveniles previously examined by me the skull of the Western Australian example, although 20 mm, longer, in some respects resembles that of a male (S. Aust. Mus., Reg, No. 6186, Hale, 1962, p. 200), 193 em. in length and taken in St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia; as mentioned in the description of this male the skull is relatively short, A comparison of the skeletons of these two specimens again indicates the impossibility of separating K. simus (Owen, 1866) as a distinct species, 4 574 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The main differences between the skull of the abovementioned young male and the Western Australian young female are that in the latter :—a, the supraoccipital, while similar in shape, is narrower in proportion ,cf, Hale, 1962, pl. 2, C and pl. 89, A herein); b, the height to vertex is lower; ¢, its greatest width, between the postorbital processes, is narrower in relation to the condylobasal length; d, the rostrum, measured to level of posterior ends of antorbital notches is longer, 47.5 per cent of length of skull as against 35.3 per cent, and the lower jaw is correspondingly of greater length; e, the maxillo- malar suture is of different shape on the right side—a variable character in any case; f, the expanded part of the right premacxilla, posterior to the nares, is wider; g, the maxillary fossae are shallower. It has been suggested that in K. breviceps the dorsal spine of the cervieal vertebrae is mich longer than in Owen’s simus and that the spinous processes of the other vertebrae may be correspondingly long (Yamada, 1954, pp, 43 and 48, ete.). In both the abovementioned South Australian male and the Western Australian female this process is short and in general the cervical mass is similar, In the two young females herein recorded the western specimen has the dorsal process of the cervicals wider in eranial view than that of the South Australian example and seen from the side it is broadly subtriangular instead of irreenlarly rounded (pl. 41, ef. A and B with FE and F), while in the thoracic and lombar vertebrae the dorsal process is distinctly longer (pl, 41, ef. C and D with G and H), and see also table below), Locality Height of Height Louality Height of Height West. Australia Dorsal of Per Cent South Australia Dorsal of Per Cent Process Vertebra Process Vertebra. Thor, ....,.18 15 139 63-9. Thor. ..... i3 63 128 49 Lumb. ....., 2 80 153 62-3 Limb. —.... 2 62 126 49:2 Height of Greatest, Height of Greatest Locality Dorsal Width of Per Cent Locality Dorsal Width of Per Cent Weet. Australia Process Dorsal South Aiistralia Process Dorsal Prooess Process Thor, - .13 75 29 258-6 Thor. ..,,,18 63 38 165-8 Lumb. ...... 2 80 34 235:3. Lumb, ..,,.2 62 38 163-1 While Yamada’s studies (1954) did not convince him that simus of Owen can be satisfactorily characterized as a second species of Kogia he states (p. 52) ‘‘two rather distinet types apparently do exist,’’ but are not connected continuonsly by all characters. HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES S75 Of the Japanese material available to him, Yamada examined in detail six specimens, of which his numbers 2 and 6 show some features of simus, as outlined by Ogawa in 1936-37 in an attempt. to distinguish simus trom breviceps. The main difference noted by Yamada is that tlie dorsal process of the cervieal vertebrae, as suggested by Ogawa also, is much longer in simus, as also is this process in the thoracies, lumbars and anterior candals (Yamada, 1954, fig. 8-10). As noted above, the dorsal spines of the cervicals do not differ much in height in the two Australian females herein discussed, but there is a marked difference in this process in the thoracies and Jumbars, as well as in the anterior caudals, The differences in the skeletons of the two young females now described lead again to the question as to whether the Pigmy Sperm Whale migrates in small herds, Tt would seem that F. T. Bullen, in the Cruise of the “‘Cachalot”’, was the first to suggest that Kogia is not a solitary whale (see also Palmer, Journ, Mamm., 29, 1948, p. 421). According to information supplied by a whaler, Yamada’s examples 4 and 5 were taken from a different school than his number 6—the last separable from 4 and 5 by some characters (Yamada, 1954, p. 52). During June to September, 1959, schools, or possibly the same school, of small, blunt-nosed whales were seen moving slowly at the surface near the coast of Encounter Bay and in St. Vincent Gulf. In June of this year a female and calf were stranded on the beach at Encounter Bay while in September an adult male came ashore in St. Vineent Gulf, (Hale, 1962, pp. 203-211 and 216.) In these three examples the dorsal process of the thoracic and lumber vertebrae is jugh, ag in the Western Australian young female, and likewise is more than half the total depth in the last thoracic. However, the Glenelg male has a short cervical dorsal spitie (as in both of the females herein recorded) whereas in the Eneounter Bay female and calf this provess is distinctly higher in relation to the depth. Dr. Ride now supplies the information that on the day prior to the stranding of the young Western Australian female a school of porpoise-like animals was observed in the vicinity. What may be further evidence of schooling is provided by a photograph secured from a ‘plane, at 500 feet, close inshore at Burleigh Heads, sonth of Brisbane in southern Queensland, by Mr. Robert Anthony of The Daily News, Murwillumbah, New South Wales. This was in January, 1962, and Mr. Anthony in litt, supplied the 576 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM information that ‘‘the school was moving in a northerly direction in a very lazy fashion’’. An opinion was expressed that the animals were one of the species of Whaler Sharks (Carcharhinus) but my colleague, Mr. T. D. Scott, Curator of Fishes at the South Australian Museum, supplies the following comment: “‘T have examined carefully the photograph and am of the opinion that the animals shown herein are definitely not Whaler Sharks. In the first place, these sharks do not travel in schools as shown in the photograph but are usually of solitary habit except in the mating season, when two or three sharks are seen together. Furthermore, the general proportions of the body, which is much shorter and deeper than the Whaler Shark and the single centrally placed dorsal fin on the back, together with the horizontal tail flukes indicate that these creatures are a species of small whale. In addition, the second dorsal fin, which is rather large in the Whaler Sharks is not obvious in the photograph. I would be quite prepared to state definitely that these animals are not sharks.’’ Mr. Anthony’s description, and the photograph, which he sent to me, possibly constitute a record of a herd of more than a score of Pigmy Sperm Whales, all in parallel formation and moving slowly in the same direction. If Kogia does in fact move from place to place in coherent small groups, the point arises as to whether or not individuals of a herd have in common a combination of some of the obviously variable characters (osteological and/or external), and that these would serve to distinguish them from members of other schools, all having an appreciable different aggregation of the variables. REFERENCES CITED Gunther, G., Hubbs, C. L., and Beal, M. A., 1955: ‘‘Records of K ogia breviceps from Texas, with remarks on movements and distribution,’’ Journ. Mammalogy, 36, pp. 263-270, pl. 1 and 2. Hale, Herbert M., 1947: ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps, Blainville) on South Australian Coasts.’?? Rec. South Aust. Mus., VIII, pp. 531-546, pl. XIV-XVIII and text fig. 1-17. 1959: ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale on South Australian Coasts—continued.’’ Rec. South Aust. Mus., XII, pp. 333-338, pl. 40, and text fig, 1-2. HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 577 1962: ‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps, Blainville) on South Australian Coasts. Part 3.’’ Rec. South Aust. Mus., 14, pp. 197-230, pl. 1-4 and text fig. 1-12. Hubbs, C. L., 1951: ‘‘Eastern Pacific Records and General Distribu- tion of the Pygmy Sperm Whale.’’ Journ. Mammalogy, 32, pp. 403-410, pl. 1-3. Manville, R. H. and Shanahan, R. P., 1961: ‘‘Kogia stranded in Maryland.’? Journ. Mammalogy, 42, pp. 269, 370. Yamada, M., 1954: ‘‘Some Remarks on the Pygmy Sperm Whale, Kogia.’? Sci. Rep. Whales Research Inst., Tokyo, Japan, No. 9, pp. 37-58, fig. 1-13 and plate. EXPLANATION OF PLATES 36-41 Two Young Females of Kogia breviceps PLATE 36 A. Head of female, Western Australia; B, female on beach, South Australia. PLATE 37 Dorsal views of skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females (to same scale). PLATE 38 Skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females, as seen from the side (to same scale). PLATE 39 Rear views of skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females (to same scale), PLATE 40 A. Tongue bones and (B) sternum of South Australian female (not to same scale). PLATE 41 Vertebrac, Western Australian female; A and B, cranial and side views of cervicals; C and D, anterior and side views of last (thirteenth) thoracic. South Australian female; BE and F, cranial and side views of cervicals; G and H, anterior and side views of last (thirteenth) thoracie, (All to same scale.) Reo. SA, Mouser 40 S.A, Musi Vou. 14. Prars 86 Po feew page TS] Rre. S.A. Mi Vou. 14, Poare 37 Ree. S.A. Mesnen Vou. 14, Puatre 3s Rec. S.A. Museuat Vor. 14. Puarre 39 Ree, S.A. Meseua Vou. 14, Puarr 40 a | | | Rec. §..A. Museum Von. 14. Phare 41 THE FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION ON FLEURIEU PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By BRIAN DAILY, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE Summary Adelaide Supergroup and Marino Group are proposed to replace the terms Adelaide System and Marinoan Series. Arising from the discovery of Lower Cambrian fossils in metamorphosed rocks at Delamere a conformable sequence from the Precambrian Tapley Hill Slate to the Cambrian Carrickalinga Head formation has been established for the Delamere region. Comparison of this Precambrian-Cambrian sequence with that found north of Normanville indicates that only minor facies differences exist between the two regions. The Cambrian-Precambrian boundary is placed below the oldest fauna near the top of the Mount Terrible Formation, which is stratigraphically above the Marino Group. THE FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION ON FLEURIEU PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By BRIAN DAILY, Untversrry or ADELAIDE Plate 42 and text fig. 1 SUMMARY Adelaide Supergroup and Marino Group are proposed to replace the terms Adelaide System and Marinoan Series. Arising from the discovery of Lower Cambrian fossils in metamorphosed rocks at Delamere a conformable sequence from the Precambrian Tapley Hill Slate to the Cambrian Carrickalinga Head formation has been established for the Delamere region. Comparison of this Precambrian-Cambrian sequence with that found north of Normanville indicates that only minor facies differences exist between the two regions. The Cambrian-Preeambrian boundary is placed below the oldest fauna near the top of the Mount Terrible Formation, which is stratigraphically above the Marino Group. The marble on Mount Rapid is equated with the Brighton Lime- stone and the Rapid Bay marble is tentatively regarded as being the same formation, INTRODUCTION The stratigraphy, structure and age relationships of the pre- Permian sedimentary sequences developed on Fleurieu Peninsula have given rise to much speculation among geologists. Historically, Fleurieu Peninsula is important in that the discovery by Sir Edgeworth David of a Cambrian fauna in the Normanville district and the extension of this fauna to the Sellick Hill district by Howchin (1897) has provided the only means of dating the folded sediments comprising the Mount Lofty Ranges. Until recently, all subsequent fossil discoveries had been confined to this narrow belt of unmetamorphosed Cambrian rocks outcropping from a point three miles south-west of Willunga to just north of Normanville. 580 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM To the south of Normanville an extensive belt of Permian glacial deposits effectively conceals any southward continuation of the fossiliferous Cambrian and older rocks. Further south in the Rapid Bay-Second Valley area there are marbles which strike across the Bay towards the fossiliferous Cambrian in the north. After mapping the lowgrade metamorphics occurring on the coastline between Sellick Hill and Victor Harbour, Madigan (1925) concluded that the marble occurring on Rapid Head could be correlated with part of the proven Cambrian sequence and that ‘the structure is simple and the field relations are all in favour of the Cambrian age of the Fleurieu Peninsula.’’ Sprigg and Campana (1953) were able to show that the structure is not simple but reported that as anticipated Adelaide System rocks (including Sturt Tillite) formed a closure around the south end of the Yankalilla Archaean inlier and that the Rapid Bay Marble and over- lying calcareous phyllites which they correlated with the Archaeocyatha limestones and overlying phosphatic shales of the Sellick Hill area, “falso nosed irregularly around the structure’’. In addition, they indicated that sediments typical of the Kanimantoo Group succeeded the phyllites and occurred ‘‘on both the east and west limbs of the locally overturned regional fold.’’ A Cambrian to Ordovician age was suggested for the Kanmantoo Group. Later, these observations were supported or reaffirmed by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954a, 1955), Campana (1955), Campana and Wilson (1955). This correla- tion of the Rapid Bay Marble with the Cambrian limestone has been generally accepted by most South Australian geologists. In 1962, at the suggestion of Mr. J. L. Talbot, Geology Depart- ment, University of Adelaide, five post-graduate students within the Geology School were assigned geological mapping projects between the Yankalilla Archaean inlier and the Rapid Bay-Delamere region. A reason for choosing this region was that it appeared to be structurally interesting. When consulted about the possible age relationships of these metamorphosed rocks the author decided to demonstrate the well known Cambrian sections at Sellick Hill and Carrickalinga Head so that the knowledge gained could be applied to the south. Subsequently, a traverse was made along Stockyard Creek, Delamere, the intention being to predict our way through the section. The metamorphosed equivalents of ten Cambrian rock units occurring between Sellick Hill and Carrickalinga Head were all recognized and located in their correct stratigraphic positions thus DATLY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 581 establishing lithological correlation between the two regions. Subse- quently, when demonstrating the same seetion to third year geology students Cambrian fossils were found in two of the three units where fossils might reasonably be expected to occur in these metamorphosed rocks, The fossil discoveries appeared to confirm Madigan’s contention that the Delamere-Rapid Bay marbles were in faet Cambrian in age. They also indicated that the core of the overturned anticline between Startish Hill and Delamere as mapped by Campana and Wilson did inelude rocks of Precambrian age, thus confirming the suggestion made by these workers on their map legend and in the necompanying explanatory notes. However, subsequent investigations carried out by the author have indicated that this anticline, as shown on the Jervis sheet, does not exist and that there is apparently a complete sequence from laminated phyllites, herein equated with the Tapley Hill Slate, up to and ineluding the Kanmantoo Group. In addition, evidence, although inconelusive at present, indicates that the Rapid Bay Marble ilself may not be Cambrian in age but may approxiinate to the Brighton Limestone of the Adelaide region. I. THE CAMBRIAN NORTH OF NORMANVILLE Abele and McGowran (1959) have given an excellent account of the Cambrian geology of the Normanville-Sellick Hill region, They divided the sequence into five formations, four of which they formally named, For mapping purposes, the base of the Cambrian was drawn at the base of the thin Hyolithes sandstone member of the Wangkonda Formation, Horwitz, who mapped the continnation of the Sellick Hill Cambrian to the north-east on the Milang sheet (Tlorwitz and Thomson, 1960), extended the Cambrian boundary down to the base of an arkose more than 200 feet stratigraphically below that determined by Abele and McGowran. Stratigraphy In fig. 1 the stratigraphic columns for the Sellick Hill and Carrickalinga Head areas and the accompanying explanations briefly summarize the author’s present knowledge and opinions of the geology of the region. A terminology somewhat different from that used by Abele and MeGowran has been erected and reasons for this are given in following paragraphs. 582 z H £ £ . 3 “ 3 3 % > Fic. Sellick oo =I RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM STOCKYARD SELLICN HILL. CARRICKALINGA CREEK DELAMERE 24 Heatherdale Hyollthids , Shale — 23 gattropads Hyedithide, if. 22 12 gastropods " 7 2) Archadocyathe Fork Tree pas Limestone [| 1 | Arehaeacyatna Hyolithids and worm castings near base 43 yollthids, 45 Worm castings {beSandstone ag. with hyolithids 38 Sellick Hifl Limestone Hyolithids, Wangkonda worm costings Limestone Mount Terrible “oo ~Sandstone Formation iA ported t Marino a7 Group 1. CORRELATION OF CAMBRIAN SECTIONS, FLEURIEU PENINSULA, Will area, , Olive-coloured siltstones passing to chocolate shales below. . Massive quartzite, flaggy sandstones and siltstones. Thin siltstones interbedded with flaggy quartzite, and thin massive light blue quartzites. . Arkosie sandstones, siltstones. . Dark grey siltstones with increasing carbonate content towards top. . Sandstones, with carbonate rich pods, hyolithids, gastropods, sponges and other organisms. . Flaggy argillaceous limestone. . Massive pale blue grey limestone, massive mottled limestone and thin sandstones. . Mottled and banded argillaceous limestones and cale-shales, coarse sandstone lenses near base. Hyolithids, gastropods, brachiopods and other organisms. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 583 10. Massive non-argillaceous limestones with Archaeoeyatha, brachiopods and abundant phosphatie shelled organisms, 11. Mottled argillaceous limestone with hyolithids, sponges and brachiopods. 12, Flaggy argillaceous limestones and dark coloured cale-shales with carbonate and phosphate nodules. Hyolithids, Heleionella, 13, Black shales with phosphate nodules. Scenella, Carriokalinga Head arca. 20. Sandstones with worm castings and burrows, cale-shales, mottled and banded lime- stones with hyolithids and other organisms. 21, Massive, generally dolomitised, clean limestone with Arehaeocyatha. 22. Massive and mottled argillaceous limestone. 23. Rubbly banded argillaceous limestones with interbedded eale-shales. 24. Cale-shales with carbonate and phosphate nodules. Helcionella, hyolithids, sponges, 25. Thin alternating bands of shale and graywacke. (Lingulella in shale near base.) Stockyard Creck area. 30. Finely laminated black eale-phyllites. 31. Dark blue argilliceous limestones; eream, buff and light blue-grey banded marble. 32. Dark coloured siltstones with quartzites, especially near top. 33. Cross-bedded coarse to pebbly caleareons sandstone, quartzite, marble (‘‘ gritty marble?!) 34. Laminated siltstones, eross-bedded quartzites, siltstones, 35. Massive quartzite, 36. Green to grey siltstones, phyllites with siltstones and graywacke, 37. Thin flaggy and rippled clean quartzites and siltstones with thin bands of massive quartzite. 38. Massive arkose. 39. Grey phyllites with thin cale-sandstones. 40. Cale-sandstoue with hyolithids and gastropods; grits; arkose; unit is very calcareous near fo). 41. Mottled argillaceons limestone. 42. Banded marbles with sandstone (similar to item 40) and conglomeratic sandstone, 43, Mottled und banded argillaceous limestones, marbles, eale-phyllites, Lenses of sand- stone with worn castings aud hyolithids near base. 44. Massive banded marbles. 45. Massive and mottled argillaceous limestone, 46, Dark phyllite with argillaceous limestone nodules, AT, Dark phyllite with phosphate nodules. 4%, Alternating bands of phyllite and graywaeke. Marino Group (Adelaide Supergroup) W. Howchin in many publications prior to 1922 referred to all of the rocks of the Adelaide region above the ‘Archaean’ complex and below the Permian as the Cambrian Series. David (1922) tentatively suggested ‘‘that all the strata from the base of the Archaeocyathinae limestones to the basal conglomerates overlying the Archaean(?) schistose rocks of Aldgate in the Adelaide 584 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM region, be given some local name such as ‘the Adelaide series’, and, for the present I would suggest that they may be classed, provisionally, as Proterozoic(?). It is quite possible that more than one series of rocks are included in the suggested Adelaide series.’’ I believe that David’s intention in using Adelaide Series was to overcome the need to call these beds Cambrian. In this way he discarded the unwanted time sense of Howchin’s terminology and used Adelaide Series in the sense that we would now use Group or Supergroup. Without any accompanying explanation, Howchin (1923) restricted the term Adelaide Series to the Brighton Limestone and underlying strata. In all subsequent publications he used the term in this restricted sense, but his opinions regarding its age varied from Upper Precambrian to Lower Cambrian. David (1927) after review- ing world occurrences of the Archaeocyatha concluded that ‘‘the Lower Cambrian age of the greater part, if not the whole of the Adelaide Series (in David’s original sense; B.D.) is rendered very probable’. However, David (1932) finally accepted Howchin’s subdivisions but regarded the Adelaide Series as Newer Proterozoic. Subsequent to Mawson (1940), the use of the term Adelaide Series has largely depended on the definition of the base of the Cambrian. In the Flinders Range, Mawson broke with the Howchin tradition by including all strata below the Pound Sandstone in the Adelaide Series. Sprigg (1942) working in the type area included the ‘*Pre-Archaeocyathinae Grey Quartzites’? in the Adelaide Series. These he regarded as ‘‘the equivalent of Mawson’s Pound Quartzite’’. Mawson supports the contention that David used the term Adelaide Series in a rock-stratigraphic sense. Mawson (1939) stated, ‘“‘Thus it was then suggested to Howchin by the late Sir Edgeworth David and the writer that a local name should be applied, non-committal as to age, and with the understanding that as knowledge of the forma- tions progressed it should be dropped in favour of divisional names. Thus the term ‘Adelaide Series’ was created as a temporary working tool’’. The term Adelaide System was first used by Clarke (1938) and not by Mawson (1948) as generally believed. System was used to replace Series in Howchin’s restricted sense. His choice of the term System was influenced partly by the subdivision of the Adelaide Series into the Para and Narcoota Series by Hossfeld (1935), and by Mawson’s work in the Wooltana district (Mawson, 1934) which was subsequently modified (Mawson, 1948). Wilson (1952) regarded DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 585 Hossteld’s Para Series as the equivalent of the more recently defined Torrensian Series but the mapping of the Gawler Sheet (Campana, 1953) indicated that the Nareoota Series embraced rocks belonging to the Para Series and ranging as high as the Kanmantoo Group, I is regrettable that Mawson and Sprigg (1950) did not consider Mossfeld's terminology when disenssing the subdivision of their Adelaide System. It is quite clear that the Para Series as defined by Hossfeld (1935, p. 44 and geological map) is not only synonymous with the Torrensian Series but that it also embraces the same type area originally mapped by UWowehin, David (1950), and Jater Mawson and Sprigg (1950) formally defined the term Adelaide System. David, following Tlowehin, restricted the System to the Brighton Limestone and underlying beds, He divided the sequence into Lower and Upper Series, with accompany- ing Stage names, some of which were used by Sprigg (1946). Mawson and Sprigg rejected this subdivision and erected an independent terminology for a System extending from the Aldgate Sandstone to the top of Sprigg’s ‘‘Pre-Archaeocyathinae Grey Quartzites’’, They subdivided the System as found in the Adelaide Region—the type area—into three Series, the Torrensian, Sturtian and Marinoan, This subdivision has been accepted and used extensively by South Australian geologists, Quite erroncously, another and presumed older series, the Willonran Series (type area about 350 miles north of Adelaide), has since heen included im the System, System and Series are time-stratigraphie terms based on a column of rocks to which geological time significance is attached. The System (Series) in its type area is based on a sequence of rocks but recogni- tion of the System (Series) elsewhere must be based on some reliable means of correlation, normally fossils, The general lack of fogsils in Precambrian rocks implies that correlation can be rarely attained for these rocks. The term, Adelaide System (Marinoan Series), in the type area has been aceepted but its application elsewhere immediately implies a correlation which generally cannot be substantiated, Jt is proposed that we abandon the use of the term Adelaide System and the accompanying Series terms and substitute for them the more acceptable rock-stratigraphic terms, Supergroup and Group, These terms then could be legitimately used beyond the type area sinee they do not imply correlation, Such a move would be in keeping with the 586 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM recommendations contained in the American Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature (1961) and in the proposed revision of the Australian Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature.'” Mawson and Sprigg inferred that their Marinoan Series ended at the beginning of the Cambrian. In redefining these rocks as a group it is necessary to define the upper limit. This I have taken as the sequence of thin light colonred massive quartzites interbedded with rippled siltstone and flaggy quartzites that form bold outerops along the front of the Willunga Searp. Lower in the sequence, green to olive coloured siltstones pass gradually into chocolate slates with mud-cracks and ripples. The sequence is interpreted as a shallow- water deposit which, during the time of deposition of the red beds, experienced short periods of emergence, On the Milang sheet, Horwitz (in Horwitz and Thomson, 1960) mapped laminated purple and green shales at the top of the Marino Gronp, but the unit is not present at Sellick Hill, where Thomson and Horwitz (1961) have proposed an unconformity between the Marino Group and an over- lying arkose ‘‘marking the onset of a new sedimentary cycle’. This contact cited as evidence for unconformity is a ent and fill contact with the cut made in unconsolidated sediment. The contact cannot be accepted as evidence of unconformity. Further south, near Carrickalinga Till, in a tectonically complicated area, evidence cited for an unconformity is best interpreted as due to faulting. Mount Terrible Formation This new name is proposed for a sequence of dominantly clastic rocks above the Marino Group and below the Wangkonda Limestone. The name is taken from the rise ealled Mount Terrible, 4 miles south- west of Willunga. Three members can be distinguished and together these constitute an easily recognizable unit. The formation is well exposed on the new Sellick Hill- Myponga road and in the deep creek immediately south of the road. The basal part of the lowest member, about 40 feet thick, is a cross-bedded coarse-grained arkose with thin silty partings. The upper part of the member is quite silty but contains thin beds of coarse sandstone some of which have been leached of their carbonate content. This part of the member is lithologically similar to the uppermost member (Hyolithes sandstone) and weathers (1) During a discussion at a meeting of the Geological Boviety, South Australian Diyision, Dr. A. W. Elecnian independently proposed the use of tle term Group instead of Series, DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 587 giving a characteristic intermittently cavernous appearance parallel to the bedding. The bedding is quite irregular and gives every indica- tion of being reworked by organisms. Worm castings are common on bedding planes but no other fossils have been found in the member. The middle member is a sequence of dark grey siltstones (weathering yellow) about 200 feet thick which towards the top hecome more noticeably cavernous in weathered outcrop. In places, disruption of the bedding by worms leads to a characteristic spotted appearance of the rock. (Kraaksten type bedding of Kuropean authors; Dr, A, A, Opik, personal corumunication.) The upper member, the Hyolithes sandstone of Abele and McGowran (1959) consists of 45 feet of sandstones and coarse silt- stones. The most conspicuous feature of the unit is its strongly cavernous natire (plate 42, C). The cavities are elongated parallel to the bedding and many contain pockets of residual clay, The hyolithids oewuwr in a band of clay in weathered sandstone twenty feet below the top of the member. The fauna is rich and includes sponges, two genera of gastropods and many unidentified organisms, It is the oldest Cambrian fauna located in the region, Intensive re-working of parts of the unit by worms has given rise to a kraaksten rock, The cavernous nature of the weathered outerop of all members has resulted from the leaching of carbonate rich patches and nodules, observed only in fresh outcrops, as in the deep creek below the new Selick Hill-Myponga road. As pointed out by Horwitz (1960) and Thomson and Horwitz (1961) the arkose marks the beginning of a new sedimentary eyele. It separates the essentially non-carbonate red beds of the Marino Group from the dominantly carbonate rich rocks of the Lower Cambrian, Its significance is discussed in later paragraphs, Wangkonda Limestone The Wangkonda Formation was erected by Abele and MeGowran (1959) for the Hyolithes sandstone and the limestones below the flagey Sellick Hill Limestone, In this paper the Wyolithes sandstone is included within the Mount Terrible Formation and the term Wangkonda limestone is applied to the limestone member, The lowest unit is a flaggy and mottled argillaceous limestone which contains an assemblage of fossils similar to that found near the top of 588 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM the underlying formation. The limestones above are massive and generally clean, but mottled argillaceous limestones are also present. A prominent caleareous sandstone with some kraaksten structure is also included. The Archaeocyatha recorded by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1955) have been examined and found to be oolites. Oolitic and fragmental limestones occur commonly within this formation. Sellick Hill Limestone The contact between the Wangkonda Limestone and Sellick Hill Limestone on the new road is a cut and fill contact (plate 42, A). At the contact hyolithids, gastropods and other organic remains are found in the basal coarse sandy facies of the Sellick Hill Limestone. Faunas occur throughout the formation but are sparse in comparison with those found in the lower 30 or 40 feet, where worm castings and burrows are prominent in quartz sandstone. Strong current action is not only indicated by the nature of the contact (which in some ways suggests it has been cut in lithified rock) but also by the current- sorted and serially inserted hyolithids. The sandy facies is a persistent feature over a large area but is not developed in some sections. It is quite an important feature from Myponga Beach to over a mile to the south-west along the coastline where carbonate cemented sandstones are well developed. Although the base of the formation is there below sea level, about 100ft. of coarse angular sandy sediments with hyolithids and abundant worm castings (some over two inches wide) are exposed. Higher in the section are several continuous bands of intra- formational conglomerates, generally less than a foot thick. These conglomerates are composed of the limestone pebbles that remained after the interbedded muds were winnowed out by strong current action. Abundant fossils, also concentrated, sorted and oriented by this current action, are frequently associated with these conglomerates. The lithological variation of the Sellick Hill Limestone has been described by Abele and McGowran (1959). The lower part is essentially a calcareous shale, but above, banded and nodular argillaceous limestones alternating with cale-shales are characteristic, (2) Dr, A, A. Opik (personal communication) has suggested that this contact is due to submarine solutional effects. This idea is supported by the fact that the upper surface of the Wangkonda Limestone is differentially phosphatized (residual phosphate on a corrosion surface). DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 589 making the recognition of these mottled beds comparatively easy. The Sellick Hill Limestone is similar to the Parara Limestone of Yorke Peninsula, but unlike that formation contains no trilobites. Fork Tree Limestone This formation ig divided into two members, the thicker and lower one being a massive partially recrystallized clean limestone containing Archaeoeyatha, phosphatic shelled organisms and sponge remains, The limestone is variously dolomitised. The upper member, 4 massive strikingly mottled limestone, is only sparsely fossiliferous, Heatherdale Shale This formation was divided hy Abele and McGowran into a lower caloareous member and an upper member which is a black shale almost free of carbonate, The boundary between the two members is really a subjective issue. The lower part of the formation is extremely variable lithologieally and the thickness of the carbonate developments vary as do also the type of limestone. In the Sellick Hill region thin weathered shale with phosphate nodules separates flaggy limestones from the underlying mottled member of the Fork Tree Limestone. Above this there is a gradual transition through shales with inter- bedded lentieles and nodules of limestone to essentially non-caleareous phosphate rich shales, At Carriekalinga Head above the Fork Tree Limestone is a thick sequence of rubbly argillaceous lime- stone which gives way to cale-shales containing large carbonate nodules, Phosphate nodules occur in both the rubbly limestone and cale-shales. The upper member, as recognized in the Sellick Hill region, cannot be recognized in this section. Hyolithids, sponges, brachiopods and gastropods, which include Welcionella, ocour sporadically throughout the formation. Carrickalingu Head formation This term is here used informally for a sequence of alternating thin olive-coloured shales and thin graywackes that occur in the Carrickalinga Head region. The base of the formation is marked by the first band of olive-coloured shale that appears above the carbonate rich member of the Heatherdale Shale. Abele and McGowran (1959) have erroneously included this band as the upper member of the Heatherdale Shale. Lingulella is the only fossil found in the forma- tion, within 30 feet of the base, The contact with the underlying "we 590 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Heatherdale Shale is sharp and the formation represents the beginning of a new cycle of deposition. The top of the formation is concealed below the sea. 1. THE CAMBRIAN OF THE RAPID BAY-DELAMERE REGION Geological investigations were concentrated in the strip of country bounded by the Stockyard Creek and the main road linking Delamere and Rapid Bay, The observations were also supplemented by work carried out between this area and Myponga reservoir, Stockyard Creck Section Stratigraphic observations were initiated in Stockyard Creek. Here, Mr. W. ©. Leslie, University of Adelaide, who is currently mapping the area, assured me there were good exposures. As a knowledge of this section is vital for the understanding of the geology of the region a considerable amount of detailed work was carried out along this creek. The results are summarized in fig. 1, Thicknesses given for this column have been computed from the aerial photographs except for those mentioned in the text which have been measured. On the Jervis sheet, along Stockyard Creek, Campana and Wilson have delineated an overturned anticline with Cambrian rocks on both limbs. Examination of this section reveals that the stratigraphy on the two limbs of the alleged anticline ig so vastly different that even neglecting facings (these are not readily available), it is not possible to interpret the sequence as an anticline, The phosphatie phyllites, which Campana and Wilson used to delineate the structure not only for this part of the alleged anticline but also to the north in the Rapid Bay region (see especially Carnpana, 1955, fig. 1) could not be located on the overturned limb. Phyllitie rocks do occur there but they are not phosphatic, Later search revealed that all the heds on the “over- turned’ limb were right way up according to the many facings obtained on cross-hedded rocks, Further, it was found that the phyllites are faulted against south-east dipping arkosic beds mapped as overturned Kanmantoo Group rocks. These also face east and so are not overturned, The stratigraphic position of these *Kanmantoo Group” rocks has not yet been established, The details of this section along Stockyard Creek are shown below. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 591 Sturt Group The oldest rocks found along the line of section are laminated black phyllites with well developed lineations and bondinage structure, These rocks are faulted against south-east facing arkosic rocks which strike into them, The actual contact occupies the bed of the creek and is not observable. These black phyllites can be correlated with the Tapley Hill Slate. Thicker developments of these phyllites occur to the north-east where they are particularly well exposed in No Where Else Creek, The phyllites are ealeareous and pass gradually into a thick flaggy limestone-marble sequence which approximates to the Brighton Limestone of the Adelaide region. The boundary as in the Adelaide region is a gradational one and I lave made no attempt to define a position for i. The limestones vary from dark blue grey argillaceous limestones and cale-shales to very pure banded cream, buff and light blue grey marbles. The upper part contains evidence which indicates that the beds were of shallow water origin, They are rippled and contain mud cracks and mud pellets, The beds are quite lenticular, Marmo Group Difficulty was found in establishing a boundary between the Sturt and Marino Groups and the lowest unit inelnded in the Marino Group might well be included with the Brighton Limestone, This lowest unit is a well laminated dark blue-grey to black calcareous siltstone, It is succeeded by dark-coloured current bedded siltstones and silty quartzites with thin interbeds of cleaner quartzites. Mud eracks were found not only in this but also in a quartzite-siltstone sequenee which lies stratigraphically above. Higher in the section there is a coarse to pebbly caleareons sandstone with clean and sandy marble lenses. This important unit is quite useful for mapping purposes and is hereafter referred to as the “gritty marble’, Above is a thick sequence of laminated siltstone with minor quartzite interbeds. The lower part of the unit is banded in such a way that it recalls the type of banding in the Marino Group siltstones of the wave eut platform north of Black Point, Hallett Cove. About 50 feet of massive dark grey pebbly quartzite underhes about 1,400 feet of soft and poorly outcropping siltstones and phyllites which become coarser in their upper part. Thin greywackes are included in the upper part of this unit, The phyllites are strongly lineated and some are rich in magnetite. The uppermost unit of the Marino Group consists of a sequence of alternating flaggy and ripple marked quartzites, laminated 592 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM siltstones and at least three massive clean quartzite bands which form prominent outcrops throughout the district. This unit is equated with the uppermost anit of the Marino Group found in the Sellick Hill district. Mount Terrible Formation A massive arkose band five feet thick is overlain by a thin sequence (about 60 feet) of light grey phyllites which include at least two thin bands of calcareous sandstone. The beds, particularly the sandstones, weather with a characteristic cavernous appearance identical to that found in the same formation at Sellick Hill, The bedding is quite irregular in the sandstones and worm activity is evident on their bedding planes, The uppermost unit included in the formation is a sandstone, 40 feet thick, which forms a hard band across the hed of the ereek. It varies from a fine to coarse grained sandstone and contains pebble lenses and coarse arkose. The rock is patchily calcareous throughont, the uppermost 6 feet (poorly exposed) being a sandy marble. Twelve feet above the base is a three to four inch cale-sand band containing abundant hyolithids and scanty gastropod remains. Away from the creek the sandstone assumes a strong cavernous character on weathering (plate 42, D). Wangkonda Limestone (Marble Phase) A blue-grey argillaceons limestone outcrops in the bed of Stockyard Creek, It is correlated with the lowest member of the formation at Sellick Hill and is overlain by massive light blue-grey to pink marbles which are split by a band of sandstone, twelve feet thick, similar to that which contains the hyolithids in the Mount Terrible Wormation. The uppermost part of the sandstone is a fine grained conglomerate with well rounded quartz grains. Some fine crystalline dolomite bands occur within the formation. Sellick Hill. Limestone. The boundary between the Wangkonda Limestone and Sellick Hill Limestone is visible in a road entting on the south side of the creek and also in a small quarry 100 yards to the south (plate 42, B), The basal portion of the unit in the quarry consists of a thin white gritty sandstone eight inches thick which lenses out within the length of the quarry. It contains worm castings and numerous serially inserted hyolithids, About five feet of the weathered formation, mainly leached calcareous shale, cale-siltstones and lenticular limestones, are exposed above the marble, One cale-shale band up to three inches thick DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS. CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 593 contains numerous hyolithids. In the road cutting, the Wangkonda Limestone is overlain by leached grey to yellow cale-shales. Thin sandy interbeds contain evidence of worm activity. The weathering pattern is strikingly similar to that seen in the same formation on the old Sellick Hill-Myponga road, Hyolithids occur within three feet of the contact. The remainder of the formation is mainly seen in small quarries and in a large road cutting on the Cape Jervis-Yankalilla road, The lower part is a laminated calcareous shale becoming more calcareous above and developing imto banded and nodular mottled limestone. The only apparent difference between this formation here and the Sellick Hill region is that there is a decided drawing out with consequent flattening of the limestone nodules and bands. This is a tectonie affect. As well some of the purer limestone bands have been altered to marbles, the shales to phyllites. Fork Tree Limestone (Marble Phase) Both members of the formation are located on the east side of the Cape Jervis road. The thiek lower member is represented by very pure, banded and coarse-textured, light-coloured marbles. The upper unit, a dark coloured and mottled argillaceous but massive limestone, is well exposed in a quarry on the north side of the creek. Heatherdale Shale (Phyllite Phase) Above the mottled limestone is a blue-black weathered phyllite containing flattened caleareous nodules which weather ont and cover the ground, This corresponds to the lower member of the formation as recognized in the Sellick Hill region, The upper member is a dark phyllite which contains abundant carbonaceous and phosphatic nodules. The best ontcrops are found high on the slopes above the ereek. Carrickalinga Head formation This formation is easily recognized and consists of alternating thin bands of soft brown phyllite and massive dark graywackes of similar order of thickness to the beds found on Carrickalinga Head. The contact with the underlying Heatherdale Shale was not observed, This formation is accepted in this paper as the lowermost unit, of the Kanmantoo Group. 594 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM III. DISCUSSION Regional metamorphism has affected the rocks, particularly the finest clastics and the purer limestones, but the grade is low and no difficulty is experienced in establishing lithological correlations with the Cambrian-Precambrian sequence to the north of Normanville. Pure limestones were the most noticeably affected, going to banded, generally coarse-textured marbles, the banding being a meta- morphic effect. It parallels the axial plane of the folds which in turn approximates to the true bedding as seen in other rock types. Massive mottled limestones with little original argillaceous components have been recrystallized to produce marbles, with thin schistose bands. Flaggy, mottled and banded argillaceous limestones such as the Sellick Hill Limestone were apparently little affected structurally, but their textures were variously changed, depending on original composition. Calcareous shales have been altered to phyllites, the more argillaceous limestone bands and nodules being flattened and drawn out parallel to the fold axis with little increase in grain size. (Very strong lineations, plunge 30°, direction 140°, remarkably constant, are recorded throughout the Rapid Bay—Delamere area.) The purer limestones have altered to marble. The fossils found near Delamere in the sandstones have not been greatly affected by the regional movements, the most conspicuous effect being flattening with distortion in the axial plane. One of the most obvious things that emerges from the considera- tion of the stratigraphy of the region, for that portion of the geologic column studied, is the remarkable constancy of facies. Certainly, minor facies differences do occur but these do not detract from the overall picture. The only facies changes of any particular note are related to the lower portion of the Heatherdale Shale, where both laterally and vertically there is variation in the shale-carbonate ratio. A practical expression of this variation are the various types of mottled, nodular and flaggy limestones that are encountered in the various sections. There is also some variation in the lower part of the Sellick Hill Limestone where coarse sandy lenses are frequent. In some sections the sands are entirely missing, whereas in others such as in a quarry immediately east of Fork Tree Homestead, the lower part of the formation is a thick sandstone with leached cale-shale interbeds. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 595 A glance at fig. 1 indicates that the Mount Terrible Formation rests on Marino Group quartzites and siltstones in both Stockyard Greek and at Sellick Hill and that this nnit is underlain by siltstones which pass down into thick sequences of finer grained rocks. These two units are equated in both sections.@ Hxamination of the uppermost unit of the Marino Group indicates that the sediments are lenticular and are of shallow water origin; periods of temporary exposure are indicated by mud cracks, A paralie environment is suggested for the deposition of the unit. Rocks similar to those of the Marino Group were deposited during the Lower and Middle Cambrian elsewhere in the State and a comparable environment of deposition for them has been invoked by Daily (1956). Tt is worth noting here that these proven Cambrian rocks are devoid of all animal life except trilobite tracks and bnrrows and therefore represent an environment apparently unsuitable for the preservation of skeletal material, One must keep these facets in mind when final consideration is being given to the determination of the Cambrian-Precambrian boundary. The Mount Terrible Formation introduces a new cyele of deposi- tion dominated by the presence of carbonates, It is interpreted as a transgressive unit deposited under full marine conditions. The trans- gression does not imply unconformity and on the evidence presented it seems unlikely that there is unconformity between tt and the Marino Gronp as proposed by ‘Thomson and Horwitz (1961). The Kanmantoo Group also imitiates a new cycle of deposition and is marine, at least near its base, as indicated by the presence of brachiopods, The interfingering of the greywacke-shale sequence with the underlying Heatherdale Shale, suggested by Abele and McGowran (1959), cannot be supported, the Heatherdale Shiale- Carrickalinga Head formation contact being one of the sharpest within the Cambrian sequence, The initiation of Kanmantoo Group sedi- mentation is interpreted as having commenced simultaneously every- where within the region studied. Whether it is necessary to invoke a time break between the two formations tou explain the absence of the non-calearcons member of the Heatherdale Shale at Carrickalinga (3) A comparison of tha stratigraphic column for the Stockyard Creel Precutnbrian sequence (fig. 1) with that given for the Willinga senyp by Madigan (1927, fig. 4) indicates striking lithological agreemont hetween these live nveas, provided due allowance 1s made for regional metamorphir effeets. CAs there ir ro little Interal lithological variation in the Cambrian-Preeambirija sucecssion on Mleurien Peninsnla there appears to be hore an excellent rescarch project far Nive Metamorphic petrologist mterceted in the progressive metamorphism of a sedimentiry subeession.) 596 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Head, is questionable. Rather, the initiation of its deposition may be related to the uplift (not orogenic) within the ‘‘geosyncline’’ during the Lower Cambrian (Daily, 1956, p. 99, pp. 125-128, p. 139). IV. THE BASE OF THE CAMBRIAN SYSTEM, SOUTH OF ADELAIDE Abele and McGowran (1959) discovered Cambrian fossils a short distance below the position of the Precambrian-Cambrian boundary as defined by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1955). For mapping purposes they placed the boundary at the base of their Hypolithes sandstone and related all beds below this level to the Adelaide System. Daily (1956), after discussing the problem of fixing the base of the Cambrian in South Australia, concluded that comparative faunal studies were necessary to define the base of the Cambrian and that ‘‘perhaps then we shall find that the base of the Archaeocyatha lime- stone will approximate the base of the Cambrian.’’? These faunal studies have not yet been made and we are no further advanced towards solving this problem. Only comparative faunal studies of our oldest faunas with those from other continents, can provide a solution. In any discussion on the boundary problem several factors must be considered before possible finality can be reached. We are not certain how far down in the stratigraphic column we will find Cambrian fossils. Perhaps our searches have in the past been too limited. Another factor already cited above concerns the environment of deposition and available conditions for fossilization. The Marino Group rocks have not been given the study they warrant and we can only guess as to their depositional history. Certainly they are not likely looking rocks in which to search for fossils. Nevertheless, fossils do occur and to these we ascribe a Precambrian age, not because we know they were Precambrian animals, but because the fauna is ‘‘without any known Lower Cambrian elements.”’ (Glaessner, in Glaessner and Daily, 1959, Glaessner, 1960.) Another factor which clouds the issue is the proposed unconformity between the Marino Group and the Mount Terrible Formation on Fleurieu Peninsula. Unconformity or disconformity at the top of the Pound Sandstone in the Flinders Range has also been cited. Added to this the earliest shelly fauna on Fleurieu Peninsula contains such a variety of animals that one might expect to find traces of them lower down in the column. Further they may be older than Lower Cambrian faunas found elsewhere. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION a97 It has been the practice in this State to make time boundaries coincide with mapped rock unit boundaries, This is contrary to established stratigraphic principles and any attempt to define the base of the Cambrian as a rock unit boundary should be resisted. For this paper the Cambrian-Precambrian boundary is placed within the Mount Terrible Formation below the first appearance of the Hyolithes and associated fauna. Future study may decide that this position is incorrect but the boundary proposed is more realistic and com- patible with known fact than one which is forced to fit the lithology. Vv. THE AGE OF THE RAPID BAY MARBLE Previous workers in the Rapid Bay-Delamere region have assumed the presence of only one major marble formation and have correlated this lithologically with the fossiliferous Lower Cambrian limestones found near Normanyille. The present investigations have shown that the seqnenece contain- ing the Delamere marbles can be correlated with the Lower Cambrian succession both on lithological and faunal grounds, In addition, it has been shown that the marble on Stockyard Creek near Starfish Hill is not overturned but faces cast, does not form the west limb of a postulated anticline of which the Delamere marble forms the east limb, nor is it Cambrian in age, It is about 2,500 feet stratigraphically below the Cambrian beds and eqnates with the Brighton Limestone and is therefore Precambrian in age. Conformably below the marble are phyllites whieh can be correlated with the Tapley Hill Slate. These phyllites do not contain phosphatic nodules. The Jervis sheet indicates that these phyllites and marbles oceupy a syneline between Starfish Till and Mount Rapid and an anticline between Mount Rapid and Rapid Head, Continuity of outerop is indicated for both units although in the hinge area of the syncline younger cover thasks the marble. Investigations have suggested that the marble band on Mount Rapid is overturned and faces west whilst stratigraphieally above is the ‘‘gritty marble" (Imit 33 of Stockyard Creek section) and other beds referred to the Marino Gronp, and below, beds lithologically similar to the Tapley Hill Slate, For these reasons the marble is correlated with the Brighton Limestone, If this band is then linked with the Starfish Hill marble as seems the logical thing to do, we would have an anticline with Tapley Hill Slate in the core but with closure to the north-east. This seems improbable as the closure of the regional anticline around 598 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM the Yankalilla Archaean inlier is to the south-west. However, a fault bringing the two marbles close together could be postulated to explain the relationships. The closure of the Mount Rapid marble band with the large mass to the north, the Rapid Bay Marble, cannot be estab- lished, both bands being cut off by a fault west of Mount Rapid (Mr. R. D. Drayton, personal communication). If closure could be effected then we would have a syncline closing to the south-west which again is contrary to the structural interpretation of the region. No satis- factory facings have been found in the sequence below the Rapid Bay marble to assist in the interpretation of the complex structure but a few suggest that it is facing east and hence right way up. Possibly a fault separates the two marble bands"). It is impossible with the present data to establish the true stratigraphic position of the Rapid Bay marble. It still could be Cambrian in age but there are not many points of resemblance between these sequences and the established Cambrian sequence at Delamere. It is tentatively suggested therefore that the Rapid Bay marble is a tectonically thickened phase of the Brighton Limestone. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Portion of expenses in connection with this work were defrayed from the University Research Grant. Most of the observations in the Sellick Hill-Carrickalinga Head region were made whilst at the South Australian Museum. I am indebted to Messrs. R. D. Drayton and W. C. Leslie for helpful discussions. They will contribute a joint paper with accompanying map on the geology of the Rapid Bay- Delamere region; also to other members of the Geology Department, especially Dr, A. W. Kleeman, who have criticized parts of the manu- script. I wish to express my sincere thanks to Mrs. H. Auvaart for typing the manuscript and to Miss A. M. C. Swan for the excellent drafting of fig. 1. (4) The above arguments assume that the closure of the regional anticline to the south-west around the Archaean as mapped by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954, 1954a) is correct, The author believes that the evidence for a south-west closure might be disputed. Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954a, fig. 3) in a block diagram indicate a closure for the basal conglomerates to the south-west around the Archaean, Mr, J. L. Talbot and the author have together examined the section along the Congeratinga River and found that the basal conglomerates occur as fault slices within the Archaean. Facings on all slices of these conglomerates proved that they were not overturned and belonged to the east limb of the fold and not the west limb as indicated. Further, the Sturt Tillite and underlying quartzites are faulted against the Archaean and are overturned (according to B.D.). Practically the whole of the thick pre-tillite sequence found on the east limb is faulted out. If the regional closure for this anticline is to the north-east (a critical reappraisal of the region should indicate this), then many of the existing difficulties such as the faults postulated for the Rapid Bay region would become unnecessary. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 599 REFERENCES American Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1961: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geologists Bull., 45, No. 5, pp. 645-665. Abele, C., and McGowran, B., 1959: ‘‘The Geology of the Cambrian South of Adelaide (Sellick Hill to Yankalilla).’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 82, pp. 301-320. Campana, B., 1953: Geol, Atlas S. Austr., Gawler Sheet; Geol. Survey S. Austr. 1955: ‘‘The Structure of the Eastern Sonth Australian Ranges: The Mt. Lofty-Olary Are.’’ Journ. Geol. Soc. Austr., 2, pp. 47-61. Campana, B., and Wilson, R. B., 1955; ‘‘Tillites and Related Glacial Topography of South Australia.’’ Hcl. Geol. Helv., 48, no. 1, pp. 1-30. Campana, B., Wilson, R. B., and Whittle, A. W. G., 1954: Geol, Atlas S. Austr., Yankalilla Sheet; Geol. Survey S. Austr. 1954a: Geol. Atlas S. Austr., Jervis Sheet; Geol. Survey S. Austr. 1955: ‘‘The Geology of the Jervis and Yankalilla Military Sheets.’’ Rept. Investigations No. 3; Geol. Survey S. Austr. Clarke, E, deC., 1938: ‘‘Middle and West Australia.’’ Regionale Geol. d. Erde, Bd. 1, Abs. VII. Akad. Verl. M.B.H., Leipzig. Daily, B., 1956: ‘‘The Cambrian in South Australia.’?’ XX Congreso Geol. Internacional, Mexico, 1956. El] sistema Cambrico su Paleogeografia y el problema de su base, 2, pp. 91-147. David, T. W. E., 1922: ‘‘Oceurrence of Remains of Small Crustacea in the Proterozoic(?) or Lower Cambrian(?) Rocks of Reynella, Near Adelaide.’’ Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Ad@laide, 46, pp. 6-8. 1927: ‘‘Note on the Geological Horizon of the Archaeo- eyathinae.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 51, pp. 410-413. 1932: ‘‘Explanatory Notes to Accompany a New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia.’’ London, Arnold, 177 pp, 600 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM (ed. Browne, W. R.), 1950: ‘‘The Geology of the Common- wealth of Australia.’? London, Arnold, I, 747 pp. Glaessner, M, F’,, 1960: ‘‘Precambrian fossils from South Australia,” Rept, XXI Int. Geol. Congr., Norway, Pt, 22, pp. 59-64. Glaessner, M. F., and Daily, B., 1959: ‘*The Geology and Late Pre- cambrian Fauna of the Ediacara Fossil Reserve.’’? Ree. S. Austr. Museum, Adelaide, 13, No. 3, pp. 369-401. Horwitz, R, C., 1960: ‘‘Geologie de la region de Mt. Compass (fenille Milang), Australie Meridionale. Kel. Geol, Helv. 53, No. 1, pp. 211-263, Horwitz, R. C. and Thomson, B. P., 1960: Geol. Atlas S. Austr., Milang Sheet; Geol. Survey 8. Austr. Horwitz, R. C., Thomson, B. P. and Webb, B. P., 1959: ‘The Cambrian-Precambrian Boundary in the Eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges Region: South Australia.’”’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Austr., Adelaide, 82, pp. 205-218, Hossfeld, P. 8., 1935; ‘*The Geology of Part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges.’”’ Trans, Roy, Soc. 8. Austr, Adelaide, 59, pp. 16-67. Howchin, W., 1897: ‘On the Occurrence of Lower Cambrian Fossils in the Mount Lofty Ranges.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 21, pp. 74-86. 1923: ‘‘A Geological Sketch—Section of the Sea-Cliffs on the Eastern Side of Gulf St. Vincent, from Brighton to Sellicks Hill, with Deseriptions.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. §, Austr,, Adelaide, 47, pp, 279-315, Madigan, C. T., 1925: ‘*The Geology of the Fleurien Peninsula, Part {: The Coast from Sellick Hill to Vietor Harbonr."’ Trans, Roy Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 49, pp. 198-212. Madigan, C. T., 1927: ‘The Geology of the Willunga Searp,’’? Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 51, pp. 398-409. Mawson, D., 1934; ‘*The Munyallina Beds. A Late Proterozoic Formation.’? Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 58, pp. 187-196, 1939: ‘The First Stage of the Adelaide Series: As Tns- trated at Mount Magnificent.’’ ‘Trans. Roy. Soe, 8. Austr,, Adelaide, 63, (1), pp. 69-78. 1940: ‘The Adelaide Series.’’ Aust. J. Sci., 3, pp. 25-27. DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 601 1948: ‘‘Sturtian Tillite of Mount Jacob and Mount Warren Hastings North Flinders Ranges.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 72, 2, pp. 244-251. Mawson, D., and Sprigg, R. C., 1950: ‘‘Subdivision of the Adelaide System.’’ Aust. J. Sci., Sydney, 13, No. 3, pp. 69-72. Sprigg, R. C., 1942: ‘‘The Geology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 66, (2), pp. 185-214. 1946: ‘*Reconnaissance Geological Survey of Portion of the Western Hsecarpment of the Mount Lofty Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 77, (2), pp, 313-347. Sprigg, R. C. and Campana, B., 1953: ‘*The Age and Facies of the Kanmantoo Group, Eastern Mount Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island, 8.A.’’ Aust. J. Sei, Sydney, 16, No. 1, pp. 12-14. Thomson, B. P. and Horwitz, R. C., 1961: ‘‘Cambrian-Pre-Cambrian Unconformity in Sellick Hill-Normanville Area of South Australia.’’? Aust. J. Sci., Sydney, 24, No. 1, p. 40. Wilson, A. F., 1952: ‘‘The Adelaide System as Developed in the Riverton-Clare Region, North Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia.’”’ Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 75, pp. 131-149. HXPLANATION OF PLATE 42 Fig. A. Cnt and fill contaet (chalked) between massive light-grey limestone of the Wangkonda Limestone (right) and the Sellick Hill Limestone, new Sellick Hill-Myponga road, Wyolithids oeeur abundantly above the contact. in the Sellick Hill Limestone. Fig. B. Contact between the fossiliferous Sclliek Hill Limestone and the underlying massive marble (Wangkonda Limestone) in a small quarry, about 100 yards south of Stockyard Creek, Delamere. Hyolithids oceur in sandstone at the contact indicated by the hammer head, Fig. C. The eavernous weathering typical of the upper calearcous sandstone member of the Mount Terrible Formation, new Sellick Hill-Myponga road. Fig, D. Cavernous weathering in the upper calcareous sandstone member of the Mount Terrible Formation, Stockyard Creek, Delamere. Hyolithids oceur in beds ahout 4 feet above those in the photograph. Photographs taken by Mr, J. L. Talbot, Geology Depurtment, University of Adelaide. Tiec, SoA Mirsieiem Von. 14, Poatr 48 Te fire page B02.) Coron X oa Ng. Age Mau 9&4 4 volume 14. No. 4 1964 RECORDS OF THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Published by the Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide. Registered in Australia for Tronsmission by Post es a Periodical. OBITUARY NOTICE: HERBERT WOMERSLEY, A.L.S. (Honoris causa), F.R.E.S. 10.iv.1889-14.x.1962 (ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, 1933-1954; ACAROLOGIST, 1954-1959; HONORARY ACAROLOGIST, 1959-1962) Summary Herbert Womersley was born on April 10", 1889, at Warrington, Lancashire, England. Warrington was an ancient town, an industrial centre with some 50,000 inhabitants, its most important industries being then the manufacture of iron and iron goods, wire, leather, soap and beer. It derived its importance from being situated on the River Mersey and the Manchester Ship Canal, an artificial watercourse separating Warrington from the county of Cheshire, and allowing large ocean-going vessels to reach the docks in the heart of Manchester. Warrington had a museum (which housed the free library) and a municipal art gallery. The town’s moment of greatness was from 1757-1783, when the famous Dissenting Academy existed there, numbering among its teachers Joseph Priestley (1733-1804), also Aiken, Taylor and Wakefield. Obituary Notice] HERBERT WOMERSLEY, A.L.S. (Honoris causa), F.R.E.S. 10,iv.1889-14.x.1962 (Iinromonoaist, Sourm AusrrauiAN Musaum, 1933-1954; Acaroroarst, 1954-1959; Honorary Acarotoatst, 1959-1962) Herbert Womersley was born on April 10th, 1889, at Warrington, Laneashire, England, Warrington was an ancient town, an industrial centre with some 50,000 inhabitants, its most important industries being then the manufacture of iron and iron goods, wire, leather, soap and beer. It derived its importance from being situated on the River Mersey and the Manchester Ship Canal, an artificial water- vonrse separating Warrington from the county of Cheshire, and allowing large oeean-going vessels to reach the docks in the heart of Manchester. Warrington had a moseum (which housed the free library) and a municipal art-gallery. The town’s moment. of greatness was trom 1757-1783, when the famous Dissenting Acadamy existed there, numbering among its teachers Joseph Priestley (1733-1804), also Aiken, Taylor and Wakefield. Womersley was a true son of Laneashire, and never quite lost all trace of the North Country accent. Apart from a short sojourn in South Wales, his boyhood was spent in Warrington, where he was educated, At an early age he became interested in insects, an interest no doubt fostered by his father, Fred Womersley, an enthusiastic amateur lepidopterist. Young Womersley’s early interests in this group were the Lepidoptera, and later the Diptera. In his early twenties he became interested in microscopy, and had the good fortune to come in contact with Abraham Flatters, a well-known British microscopist, Who was later one of the founders of the firm of Matters and Garnett, makers of entomological requisites. Until the end of his life Womersley remembered F'latters with affection, WUWnder his puidanee, he was able to take a night course at the Manchester School of Technology in the staining, clearing and eutting of botanical sections. Out of this came Womersley’s first scientific publication (1912), on the use of terpineol as a clearing agent, which was published in Flatter’s own journal, The Micrologist, In 1907 Womersley had joined the staff of J. Crosfield and Sons, soap and chemical manufacturers, where he served the equivalent of an apprenticeship, specializing in fuel economy (coal) and water 604 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSBUM softeners. Before the 1914-1918 war he had begun to collect Diptera to some purpose, coming in contact with sueh well-known workers as A. A. Austen and F, W. Edwards. A number of new loeality records were added to the British fauna, and notable among these was the collecting in Britain for the first time of the march-fly Tabanus (Atylotus) plebijus Wallen, 1817 in 1911 at Abbots, Moss, Delamere, Cheshire, Ilis attention beeame at that stage attracted to the primitive insect groups, the Thysanura and more particularly the Collembola, groups in which he was able to make use of his flair for microscopy. He entered into correspondence with a number of other workers, both in England and on the Continent, including the Belgian workers M. Goetghebuer and A. L, Tomnoir, the latter of whom later came to Australia and worked with R. J. Tillyard in Canberra, (The present writer did not manage to find any of this early correspondence of Womersley’s in the mass of material Womersley turned over to him in 1962, when a request was made for access to biographical material; possibly it did not survive World War 1.) With the outbreak of hostilities, Womersley joined the Royal Army Medical Corps in 1914, initially through the St, John’s Ambulance Brizade at Manchester, On account of his training im microscopy he was placed in charge of a laboratory at Fort Chatham, under the control of Charles Singer, later to become famous as & medical historian, Womersley’s duties included routine clinico- pathological tests, including bacteriological, and even extended to routine pharmaceutical dispensing, A man of resource, no doubt be rose to the occasion under these varying demands. For some months Wowersley was in daily contact with Singer, getting to know him and Mrs, Singer well, and on one occasion the trio journeyed to Folkestone together, Their love of natural history was no doubt a bond in common, In 1915 calls were made for persons trained in chemistry to join the Chemical Corps of the Royal Engineers, and. Womersley volun- teered and was transferred to one of the newly formed gas companies, Womersley looked hack in later life samewhat wryly upon this period. No real use was made of his training in chemistry, and the duties allotted to these troops consisted mainly of Ingging heavy eylinders of chlorine, phosgene and other gases into suitable situations in the trenches, and, when the wind was suitable, releasing the gases upon (he enemy, He participated in the first British gas attack upon the Gormans at Loos, snd acain at the Battle for the Hohenzollern Redoubt, and on the Somme, These attacks were relatively ineffective, as the SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H, WOMERSLEY 605 Germans were well ahead in this field and had effective respirators, In addition the meteorological forecasts were unreliable, and the British gas companies sometimes found the gases they had released rolled back upon fliemselves when the wind changed. Womersley himself was affected by gas in this way on several occasions. With the heightening tempo of war many industrial chemists were put into the munitions industry, Womersley being recalled from the trenehes and transferred to explosives manufacture, Formal discharge oceurred in 1917. He served in factories in Chester and Mauchester, and later at Dornoch in Seotland, being concerned with the mannfaeture of 'L.N.T., nitroglycerine, acids, as well as. the recovery Of aleohol and ether vapour in cordite stoves. During this period there was no time for entomology. In 1920 he left, Warrington to take up an appointment as manager, uel and Steamraising Department, in Christopher Thomas Bros., soup tnanufacturers, at Bristol. He was now able to devote his spare time seriously to entomology, and entered into correspondence ayain with other workers. He worked with assidnity, concentrating upon the Apterygota, with a occasional inenrsion towards the Diptera and other groups. In the study of the Apterygota he found evidance in Lubbock’s (1873) monograph on the Collembola in the Ray Society's volomes, and was also able to get lelp from a number ol colleagues both in Ingland and on continental Europe. For some years most help was probably derived from J, M. Brown, F.L.8., F.E.8., who identified Collembola and Thysanura sent to him in Sheffield. Others of his eorrespondents were J. R, Denis, of Dijon, Franee, W. M. Linnanicmi (who later changed hig name to W. M. Axelson) in Seandinavia, Professor F, Silvestri in Italy, J. Stach in Poland, and the eollembologists J. W. Folsom and H, B. Mills in the United States of America. His Knglish colleaynes interested in these insects were J. W, Shoebotham and R, 8. Bagnall. Womersley becaine closely associated with the Bristol Museum, his industry and enthusiasm impressing itself npon the then Direetor, Dr. OU. Bolton. th Bristol also he identified himself with waturalists’ interests. He joined the Bristol Naturalists’ Society, taking a prominent part in its activities, including a term as President. THe wus also one of the promoters of the South-Western Union of Naturalists, and served as Secretary from its inception nntil he left KMingland in 1930, His Presidential address to the Bristol Naturalists’ Society in 1923 intreduced his survey of the Apteryyota of the south- west of England, which appeared in three parts, over 1924-1926. He 606 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM was highly esteemed by his colleagues in Bristol, and on departure was made an Honorary Member of the Naturalists’ Society. Cordial relations were enjoyed with many other naturalists, particularly entomologists, and the correspondence Womersley received from them remains in existence, The co-operation of these workers was both genuine and considerable, and these letters are a pleasure to read over 30 years later on the other side of the world. One finds among it such gems as this from the Rev. A. Thornley, M.A., F.L.8., F.ELS., F.R.Met.Soc., F.R.H.S., written from St. Anael’s, Carbis Bay, Cornwall on 3rd September, 1929: ee . Just at present . . . our little Bay, where I get your nice Petrobius, is almost a solid mass of trippers, and bathing tents right up against the Petrobial Cliffs!!! But as soon as ever they clear off to dulce domuwm my wife and I will make a special expedition and try to send you a tube-full . . .”’ He did this despite his own preoccupation with the Diptera and other groups, his rheumatism and his age. In another letter he mentioned he had been an entomologist for 50 years. Womersley had the capacity for lasting friendship, and another friend of that period who stands out is J. V. Pearman, who later joined the staff of the British Museum, specializing in Psocoptera. In these years he published a number of short papers on the Apterygota, showing an increasing grasp of the group, and among these were sandwiched short notes on Diptera and Dermaptera. In the course of several years he became the British authority on Collembola, and collections were referred to him from South Africa, New Zealand, the New Hebrides and British Guiana for study, the last of these originating in the Oxford University’s expedition there in 1929. His most important publication was a monograph upon the Collembola of Ireland (1930, Op. 34). That work was the result of collecting done in a long week-end in Ireland, which he spent in company with G. W. Stelfox of the Dublin Museum, a friend and admirer of Womersley. The collecting was done mainly in County Wicklow and around Dublin Heads, the trip being supported financially by the Royal Irish Academy, through its Fauna and Flora Committee; the Academy later published the monograph. While still in Bristol Womersley became a Fellow of the Entomological Society of London (later F.R.E.S.), this being in 1926. He attended the meetings in London, going up from Bristol. The two occasions on which he attended a ‘‘Verrall Supper’’—quite a famous SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 607 institution—stood out in his memory in his old age. At these meetings he met sueh well-known entomologists as Karl Jordan and A. D. Imms. In 1929 G, P, Bidder, F.R.S., Zoological Secretary of the Linnean Society of London proposed him as an Associate, Honoris causa, of the Society, and Womersley won the keenly contested election for this honour, which le valued greatly, In 1927 Womersley decided to transfer to entomology in a professional eapacity as soon as opportunity permitted, and hoped to combine this with emigrating with his family to New Zealand, His abilities had by this time come to the notice of R. J. Tillyard, who was later appointed to the position of Chief, Division of Beonomie Entomology, O.S, & I, R. (later C.S.1.R.0.), Commonwealth of Australia. In 1930 Tillyard had Womersley appointed as Entomolo- gist, Seetion of Pasture and Field Pests. At that time two arthropods were causing much damage to Australian pastures, the ‘lucerne flea”’ Snimthurus viridis (Linnaeus) (Collembola) and the Redtegeed Barth Mite, /Talotydeus destructor (Tucker, 1925); the worst infestations were in Western Australia, Owing to Womersley’s lack of formal training in biology, at the university level, it was insisted that he was to spend a period of training in museum work, He was therefore posted to the British Museum from January to May 1930, for the purpose of getting as wide a knowledge as possible of the ‘‘group Acarina of the class Arachnida’? and the ‘‘Order Collembola’’. As time was clearly ltmited, he was instructed to concentrate his attention upon two groups within the stated range, these being ‘‘the family Wupordidae [s.1.] of the Acarina’’ and the ‘‘farnily Sminthuridae"’’ of the Collembola, THis work was defined as being to complete ag far as possible a catalogue of these two families, to study and collect material, both in the field and moseums, making both slide and spirit collections, and mounts of disseeted material. In the Collembola he was to concentrate on ‘the genera of the most economic importance, viz., Sminthurus, Sminthurinus, Bourletiella, and make microscopic moynts of as many species as possible’’. Furthermore, he was to: “Make a special study of the green and yellow species of Sminthurus, with a view to determining as accurately as possible the type characters of 8. viridis L., and also of clearly distinguish- ing from it all the more closely allied species. This study should include the immature stages as lar as possible, also caren measurements of adults of both sexes (S. viridis reaches a large size in Australia) . . .’’. 608 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Finally, under ‘Control measures’, Womersley was instructed by Tillvard to: “Draw up a report to me on the position in England at the present time as regards tlie mechanical, chemical and biological methods of control in use or being studied in connection with any of the above.’’ In a more personal note of the same date (January 3rd, 1930) Tillyard told Womersley that he had written to Dr. Tate Regan, then Director, British Museum (Natural History), asking him to provide every facility for Womersley'’s study in these groups. He asked Womersley to attempt to locate any of Stanley Hirst’s type material in Mngland, Tf he found it necessary he was to remain in England throughout the summer; this was to be decided after consultation with Dr, A. J. Nicholson, Deputy Chief of the Division, who was to visit England in May 19380. A fortnight later illyard forwarded a collection of mites aud Sininthuridae, from Tasmania and other Australian localities, for Womersley’s study, with the proposal that if the material were of sufficient interest the sminthurids were to be written up ‘tin a yery short paper entitled ‘Clover springtails of Tasmania’, with figures carefully drawn to show how the different species can be distinguished’’, All the material had been collected from clover species in the field, In due course Womersley sent back the required paper, lt waa not published however, until 1932 (Op, 47), when the addition of fresh material necessitated some change of title. Womersley was able to list 32 species or subspeeies of Collembola considered economically important in Britain, The same letter (undated, apparently May, 1930) refers also to MaeLagan’s studies on the possible control of Sminthurus viridis at Farnham Royal, as then unpublished (published in 1982, in the Bulletin for Extomolagical Research). Amoug predators obseryed by MacLayan were six species of spiders, five species of beetles, and one hemipteron (Anthocoris sp. )s An additional note of Womersley’s in the same letter to Tillyard is of interest, as heralding his eventual econmmplete preoccupation with acarology: “T have now beeone very interested in the Acarina and am vetting quite familiar with the different genera and more common species. What about the Tetranychidae (Red Spider)? Are these not of importance in Australia as well as the Eupodidae?’’ On 6th March 1920 Tillyard wrote to say that all the formalities had been completed for Womersley’s appointment with C.8. & LR, for a period of three years, It is apparent that even at this early SOUTHCOTT-—-OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 609 stage a considerable bond of mutual esteem and affection had developed between the two men, Tillyard had already commenced to send nnoficial letters to Womersley, explaining the local background to him in a way which could not be dealt with in the more official correspondence. These letters are most revealing of the personalities of the two men, are helpful to the memorialist, and possibly also will be so to future historians. It is fortunate that this correspondence has been preserved, Tillyard wrote privately to Womersley on the Ist April 1930: **T should advise you to bend all your energies while in Kngland to equipping yourself for your major problems, which are pretty tough ones, as you will readily admit, These other things | Devonian Collembola and insect phylogeny], interesting as they tmdoubtedly are, mnust be taken as hors d’oeuvres by those who sit at the Commonwealth’? Banqueting Table! The tighter the finances grow, the londer will come the ery of ‘Results, results, for our money!’ And you know we simply cannot run without this money; so there we are! You will find the economic problems intensely fascinating on their own, The pure science must he developed more at leisure and in spare times,”’ Atter five months spent in training at the British Museum and in gaining familiarity with field control methods (from D, 8. MacLagan, Farnham Royal, and W. M. Davies at Rothamsted), Womersley, with bis family, left for Austraha. As Dr, A. C. D. Rivett of the 0.8. & TR. had proposed, a short period was spent in South Africa en route, to make a study into the distribution and habits of Hualotydeus (**Penthaleus’’), and any other aspects that might be relevant to his duties in Western Australia, This pleasant interlude of seven weeks was greatly enjoyed, and Womersley was able to colleet Collembola in various localities, and out of this was eventually to come his revision of the South African proturan fauna (Op. 45, 1931), the collembolan fanna (Op. 46, 1981; Op. 58, 1934), and also papers on the Thysanura (Op. 51, 1932) and Acarina (Op. 57, 1933; Op, 66, 1935), with the additional material from other collectors. Tt was in South Africa that Womersley was thrown upon his mettle in economic entomology, He told the writer in 1961 that he also regarded this short period as his real introduction to the Acarina, Both in Mnegland and in South Africa his collecting of Acarina was very limited, and much less effective than his approach to the Collembola and the other Apterygota; probably also his interest {) of Australia, for those actuatomod to m wider usnge of this term, 610 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM in their taxonomy was not fully awakened. Thus the South Australian Museum collection of Acarina contains only a few slides of any other than the families Penthaleidae and Bdellidae (plus Cunaxidae) collected before he arrived in Australia. It was in South Africa that Womersley made his initial observations upon the predation of the bdellid mites upon Sminthurus. This the present writer has referred to in more detail in an account of Womersley’s acarological work in ‘*Acarologia’’; it will not be repeated here. The letter to Tillyard, which preserves a record of these early studies on the subject, refers also to many other matters of entomological interest including some which Tillyard had brought up earlier, these being largely related to the distribution of the Protura and Collembola, the collecting of Psocoptera, and more particularly, the phylogeny of the insects, with which Tillyard was then greatly preoccupied. From this letter, as well as later ones, it is obvious that Tillyard was relying heavily upon Womersley for information on the structure and homologies of primitive and fossil insects. Womersley and his family arrived in Perth on September 25, 1930. The hope that both Tillyard and Womersley had entertained of their meeting in Perth at the arrival was not fulfilled, owing to the financial stringency of the period, and the difficulties with which the Division of Economic Entomology, with Tillyard as Chief, had to contend. On arrival, the following letter was waiting from Tillyard, written on 18th September: “Unfortunately Australia’s finances are just now in a parlous condition and are likely to remain so for some time to come. However, I have done my best to see that your work should not be hampered in any way by this circumstance, and a reasonable amount is still retained on the Estimates for your travelling about Western Australia looking at the Red-Legged Earth Mite and Clover Springtail or Lucerne Flea’’. (Tillyard detested the common name ‘‘Lucerne flea’’ for Sminthurus viridis and made strenuous efforts to supplant this with ‘‘Clover Springtail’’). In the same letter Tillyard elaborated: “To come . . . to your . . . research work, I expect you will find it convenient to divide your work on the Mite into sections under some such headings as the following :— (1) Distribution in Western Australia; (2) Control by natural enemies; SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 6hi (3) Control by sprays and dusts; (4) Control by cultural methods, “You will find that Mr, [L. J.] Newman, the State Govern- ment Entomologist, has already done a good deal of work under (3) and (4). We are hopeful that you may have discovered some- thing under (2) in South Africa and that you may also have set. up some kind of eo-ordination with South African authorities which will enable supplies of it to be shipped to you from time to time. If not, then you will have to concentrate on other methods , . , ‘Mor second line researches, which may be undertaken when the main problem is hanging fire for any reason, I want you to look into the Sminthurus problem in Western Australia and also to collect and study Acarines, Collembola and related insects generally, paying special attention . . . to those likely to be of economic importance . . .’’, Initially laboratory accommodation was made available at the Department of Agriculture, Western Australia, and after consultation with the Department Entomologist, L. J. Newman, Womersley was able to write to Tillyard on 80th September : “With regard to the Mite itself, from my talks with Mr. Newman it appears to be a far more serious problem here than in South Africa, I shall be able to say more about this later, It does not, however, appear to have been introduced here much more recently than the Cape Weed itself, which takes back to 1837), the mite not having appeared before 1916. Something like this may be the case in South Africa. Thus its association with Cryptostemma can only be secondary. Its possible mode of introduction, therefore, is still uncertain . . .’’. In a more personal letter of the same date, Womersley (who had adopted this custom of Tillyard’s), commented: ‘We are intensely taken with the fauna and flora here, and as we are on the edge of King’s Park, 1 have a happy hunting ground at the very door’’ (2) J, M. Blaek, in the ‘‘Flora of South Australia’! (1929, 1957) records that Cryptostemma calendula (Ly 1758) Druce, 1914 = C. calendulaceum, (1a. 1768) RK. Br. 1818 originated in South Afries and was first volleeted in Austrdlia at King George's Sound, Western Australia, in 1833. (The wame of this species is now Aretotheca calendula (L, 1753) Levyna, 1942,) 612 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM and continued that it was proposed to use the Department of Agricul- ture laboratory as a town office, while accepting the offer of Dr. (1. KE. Nicholls of the facilities of his Department at the University of Western Australia for research, and possibly using Beverley, which he had not yet seen, as a field station. “Tf ] work at the University and live near [as he was hoping} I shall be able to work out all my South African Apterygota there in the evenings . . . I found Protura in Capetown the weekend before we left’’. The remainder of the letter discusses the phylogenetic relations of the insects with which Tillyard continued to be preoeenpied, with the Devonian Rhyniella, the Protura, the Collembola and the Machilidae taking prominence. By October Womersley had visited the Denmark, Guildford, Beverley and Bunbury districts, and was able to write a preliminary report on the presence ol I7alotydeus destructor and Penthaleus bicolor (Froggatt, 1921) (= Penthaleus major (Dugés 1834) (teste Womersley 1935d (Op, 67) p. 163) as being present everywhere in the State. By now he was living at Claremont, fairly close to the University, and was hoping soon to be able to devote some of his evenings to working there. Perth was to be the centre of his activities. Further Tasmanian Collembola were forwarded by Tonnoir, and Womersley set about getting all his Tasmanian material together for a paper to go in the Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania. Tillyard, who was a tmernber, had offered to eommunicate the paper for him. By 3rd November 1930 Womersley was able to report that he had completed the study of the Tasmanian globular springtails. The same letter contained: ‘“‘Now for some news! Protura have been discovered in W.A. Mr. Dnnean Swan of the University has found them in humus in the University grounds, We has handed his mounts over to me for determination and verification, As he found them entirely by himself and only came to me for confirmation he is to be congratulated, They are a species of Acerentulus as are those that I was able to collect in 8. Africa’’, and continued that he had also reeeived Neelus (= Megalothorax) from D, GC, Swan in Western Australia, and had also a good many sminthurids from Western Australia, which he considered were mostly SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 613 new. He commented on being unable to find the predators he had noted in South Africa: ‘The species of Bdellid and Trombid™ which conditions in 8. Africa suggested might be controlling predators, so far as present observations go, do not appear to occur here.’ Tillyard (letter to Womersley, 15th November, 1930), in referring to the last sentence commented: “Tt is very important that you should let me know, as soon as possible, whether, after a more extensive survey of W.A., you are still of that opinion,”’ He further suggested that it might be desirable for these species of mites ty be considered for introduction into Australia for study, in quarantine. Another locality visited by Womersley was Bridgetown, where he spent Ist-4th December, 1930, and some collecting resulted. On 12th January 1931 Tillyard wrote to Womersley stressing the importance of his finding out as much as possible about the eggs of both economic pests (the springtail and the mite) during the summer. He requested that Womersley should attempt to duplicate the findings of F, G. Holdaway, under varying climatic conditions, that in normal oviposition in Sminthurus viridis the animal defaecated over the newly laid eye with moist soil previously eaten, but to be on the alert for abnormal methods of oviposition: “*T think that you ought at some stage duplicate this work under varying climatic conditions, so as to make quite sure that this habit is fixed in Western Australia, as well as in South Australia [where J. Davidson Was studying the problem]. The climatic conditions are not altogether parallel, as you know”’. Womersley replied to the effect that he hoped to do this. At the time he was working with great industry, In addition to his formal duties, he had nnder control a vast taxonomic programme for the Apterygota, and papers on these were in preparation or going through the press, dealing with members of this group from England, South Africa, Krakatau, Japan and Australia, and not long before he had () At that stage Womersley used this term very loosely, eg., to cover the whole of the Trombilioiden snd the Erylthraeoiden. The mite ecopeernel was probably a species of Anystia (Anystoidua: Anystidue) with whose identification he was not at that stage famliar, Soo the comments by Womersley (19380, p. 111; Op. 57), under Anystis baccarum (Th). 614 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM published his accounts of the apterygote faunas of Ireland and New Zealand, and had dealt with various collections from Britain and elsewhere. At this stage his enthusiasm for the Apterygota was quite unbounded. In his letter to Tillyard of 15th February 1931 he wrote: ‘“‘T am exceedingly interested to hear of the species of Collembola from Mt. St. Bernard [Victoria]. Fancy asking me if I would like to see it! . . . I am only too keen on seeing Springtails from anywhere on this earth or the next if they exist there’’. The voluminous correspondence between Womersley and Tillyard continued for several years, and provides many an illuminating commentary on the time and on their colleagues, as well as upon their own attitudes and working methods. The mutual esteem and affection were quite genuine, and due to a natural affinity of character. The bond was cemented further when Tillyard was able to visit Womersley in Western Australia. The love of both men for their subject shines through this correspondence. Tillyard, through his access to the higher circles of government, writes more revealingly. He was clearly quite perceptive, and a good judge of character. We find this comment in a letter to Womersley, written on 15th October 1931: ‘“‘The other day we had an interesting visit from the M.P. for Fremantle, Mr. J. Curtin. I found him an exceedingly well informed and interesting man, and ventured to mention you to him, whereupon he said that he was shortly returning home to do some work in his electorate, which is by no means a safe one for him, and that he would look you up! So do not be surprised if he calls round at Marita Road [Claremont], as you are actually in his electorate. He is a very brilliant debater and a most interesting personality; quite good enough to be in the Ministry, I think. I hope you will do your best to interest him in your particular problems if he comes along.’’ Being in high position in Canberra, Tillyard realized the importance of the political aspects of economic entomology far more than Womersley could in Western Australia. The politician John Curtin became Prime Minister in 1941. Womersley continued his work for nearly three years with the Division of Economic Entomology, when his appointment was drawing towards completion, Unfortunately, the period of financial stringency which Australia had been undergoing had not abated, and although SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H,. WOMERSLEY G15 the work was considered promising, all appointments were being terminated ag soon as coutracts were completed. Although Womersley had hoped to continue his work under Tillyard, such was not possible, and he applied for the position of Entomologist, South Anstralian Museum, which had become vacant with the death of Arthur M. Lea. With Tillyard as his champion, Wowersley had no diffenlty in getting this appointment. Although he had not given np hope of working under Tillyard again (with the added attraction that the CLS, & LR, salaries were well above those offered in Sonth Anstralia), it was in this position that his major contribution to scienee lay, and he stayed there until his retirement, and subsequently. Nevertheless, it was considered that the work on the predator control of Sminthurus wirulis was most promising, and Tillyard subsequently set G, A, Currie to continue in the field which Womersley had pioneered, and after Currie had lett this work, another officer, K. R. Norris, was also given this field of study, and other studies have continued subsequently, What had Womersley yetually achieved in hia work for the CS. & LR. in Western Australia? As 'Tillyard's early correspondence indicated, the study of the possible chemieal and cultural methods of control of Sminthurws and IHalotydeus had been pursued previously, notably by L, J. Newman, ‘The study of the actual life history of Sminthurus was under study by J. Davidson in the Waite Institute in Adelaide, with effective and extensive equipment, also technical and other assistance, Davidson was not in the position ol being under pressure to solve a major task affeeting an area as large as Korope. In collaboration with the Western Australian Department of Agri- culture, though with limited finanees, more precision was given to the knowledge of the chemical attack upon the pests, The new aspect was the study of predator coutrol of one of these pests, Sminthurus. These results were summarized in two papers (Op, 50, 1932; Op. 58, 1933), in which guarded claims were made. Methods of transporting the predator mites were studied, and attempts to establish them in various pastures were made, which were considered suecessful, allhough criticism is possible of the methods adopted, there being no experimental design that would provide sufficient evidence for firm conclusions to be drawn. In fairness, however, it should be realized that a technical service for this was not really available, nor were its potentialities capable of being applied under the circumstances as they were then, It is donbtful if the taxonomy of the Australian Bdelloidea was at a stage advanced enough to be an instrument of precision. From a long range viewpomt, among the more important 616 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM results of the work were the numerous taxonomic papers Womersley produced on the Collembola. Among these was his Opus 52 (1932), a preliminary account of the Australian Collembola, published as a pamphlet by the C.S. & LR. It is notable in another regard, in being the first taxonomic paper ever published at the expense of the C.S. & LR., through the Division of Entomology. In subsequent years large batches of the predatory bdellid mite, Biscirus lapidarius, were sent to localities in other Australian States, where there was a heavy infestation with Sminthurus. In the absence of sufficient finances to do fully controlled experimental trials, it was considered that this was the most effective means of testing out the effect of this predation. Initially hundreds, and later, thousands of mites were sent, and were placed at Riverton, Murray Bridge, Glen Osmond, and Woodside in South Australia, as well as in Victoria and Tasmania; also earlier in Western Australia (see Op. 53). In this work Womersley acted in a consultative capacity on the taxonomy of the Collembola and of the mites. These activities by the C.S. & LR. continued for some years. Over 1934-1936 increasing claims were made for the effectiveness of this method. By 1937 newspapers were carrying headlines, claiming that the bdellid mites had controlled the ‘‘Incerne flea’’, written in a florid journalistic style. In fairness to Womersley it should be pointed out that he was in no way responsible for these widely publicized and perhaps exaggerated claims, and this blaze of publicity was not of his designing. Although gratified that his work should be considered a success, he remained unmoved by it, at least outwardly, and continued his taxonomic work without interruption. His friend and colleague, D. C. Swan, wrote in 1940 (J. Agric. S. Austr. 43: 466) that the results of predator control of Sminthurus were not striking, possibly with the newspaper treatment of the subject in 1937 in mind. K. R. Norris, who had taken up the subject for C.S. & IR. in Western Australia, studied the subject for several years, and concluded (1938, C.S. & LR., Pamphlet 84): “The population graphs for Smynthurus™ viridis may differ widely for different situations and also for the same situation in successive years. The numbers of Biscirus lapidarius are shown to have a probable relation to those of Smynthurus, accounting at least in part, for a rapid decline in the number of springtails at the end of the season.’’ (4) The name Sminthurus has now been placed on the Official List of Generic Names in Zoology (1954), and Smynthwrus is invalid and rejected (1958). SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 617 A further appraisal of this subject will be found in Wallace, M. M. H., Austr. J. Agric. Res.: 1954, 5 (1): 148-155, and 1959, 10 (2); 160-170, These papers will give further references for those interested in this subject. Womersley took up his duties at the South Australian Museum on January Ist, 1933. He worked there until the end of his life, although af times he considered the possibility of moving to London, or clsewhere in Australia, It is fortunate for the taxonomy of the Australian Apterygota and Acarina that he did not do so, as it is umikely he would then have been able to devote himself so whole- heartedly to these tasks. Initially he concentrated on the taxonomy of the Apterygola, producing a large uamber of short papers, and in 1939 published “The Primitive Insects of South Australia’? in the British Science Guild Handbooks series, where, in actual fact, the whole of the Australian Apterygota, as then known, were monographed, In 1932 he published a short note with L, J, Newman (Op. 50) in which he made his first reference to the Acarina in print, and in 1933 published three papers (Opp. 58, 56, 57) in which Aecarina were considered, Rapidly, more extensive inroads into the taxonomy of the Agarina were made, The story of Womersley’s aearological studies has been told in Acurologia (5 (3): 328-3384) of July 1968, and there- fore will not be elaborated here, It may be said however, that the collection of Acarina at the South Australian Museum is one of the great collections of the world, and his series of papers on the taxonomy of the Aearina have seldom been equalled. His magnum opus, over his whole field of work, was undoubtedly his monograph of the Trombiculidae of the Oriental and Australasian regions, published in the Records of the South Australian Museum in 1952 (Opp. 188, 139). It ran to 673 pages. Gradnally, as the immense collections of these Aearina, the veetors of serub typhus, and related forms kept being referred to him, all groups other than mites were dropped from his studies, Onee that major work was completed he was free to produce a long series ol shorter papers. Ie retired in 1954 as Entomologist, but was immediately appointed as Acarologist, a position that had been created specially for him. At thie age of 70 years, in 1949, he retired again, but beeame Honorary Acarologist, and worked on as before, By now he was dogged by inereasing Hl-health, aud could not work such long hours. He continned the study of his beloved Acarina until a fortnight before his death. In the Apterygota, and more particularly the Acarina, his industry and 618 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM regular habits enabled him to produce an immense amount of work, and he did a great deal for descriptive taxonomy, where his services will be greatly missed. He was also active in scientific affairs in England and Australia, particularly on the organizational side and in the field of wild-life conservation. This is referred to in more detail elsewhere (Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 87: 249-252 (1963)). He was the Verco Medallist of the Royal Society of South Australia in 1943, served as President in 1943-1944, and was gratified by the Society’s electing him to Honorary Fellowship in 1962. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The writer wishes to acknowledge Womersley’s own help in providing biographical details when requested in 1961 and 1962, and in providing information and correspondence, particularly of the period before 1933. In addition the letter files of the South Australian Museum have been consulted in particular points. The correspondence of 1923-1932, and also some of subsequent years, which Womersley entrusted to the writer, will be deposited later in the South Australian Archives. SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 619 Bibliography of Herbert Womersley (1) 1912 Terpineol, a new clearing agent. The Micrologist 1(8) : 115-116, (2) 1922 Diptera from the Bristol district. HKnt. Mon. Mag. 58: 234. (3) 19242 The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part I] (pp. 28-37) wm Presidential Address, 1923, ‘‘The Modern Study of Entomology’’ (p. 28). Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soe.: (4) 6: 28-37. (4) 1924b The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part IT]. Ann, Rept. Proe. Bristol Nat. Soc, (4) 6 (2): 166-172. (5) ix 1924e Anisolabis annulipes and Prolabia arachidis [Derm- aptera] at Bristol. Ent. Mon. Mag. 60; 213. (6) xi 1925 (With R.S. Bagnall). Two new British Collembola. Hint. Mon. Mag. 61: 250-252, (7) 1926a The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part II]. Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soe. (4) 6 (3): 217-221. (8) 1926b The Apterygota of Somerset. Proce. Somerset Archaeol. Nat. Hist. Soc., Taunton 71: lix-lxiii, (9) 1926c¢ Insect pests and their biological control. Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat, Soc, (4) 6 (4); 297-302, (10) 1 1926d Protanurophorus pearmani Womersley: additional note. Ent. Mon, Mag. 62: 23. (11) iv 1926e Protanurophorus pearmani Womersley—new locality. Ent, Mon. Mag. 62: 99. (12) vi 1926f British species of Protura—a request. Ent. Mon. Mag. 62; 141, (13) 1927a The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part IV]. Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc. (4) 6 (5): 372-379, (14) vi-vii 1927b Notes on the British species of Protura with descriptions of new genera and species. Ent, Mon. Mag. 63: 140-148 (pp. 140-144, June; pp. 145-148, July), (15) vii 1927¢ A study of the larval forms of certain species of Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63: 149-153. (6) Thore is some difficulty in establishing the order and date of publication with some papers. The estimates given are the best after considering all the evidence available to me. Month of publication is estimated similarly, where available, (8) See text of that article, and comment in Womersley (1926d). B 620 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM (16) vii 1927d Notes on the mounting of Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63: 153-154, (17) x 1927e A new British species of Petrobius (Leach) Carpenter. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63; 231-233. (18) x 1927f On the habitat of the early stages of some Tipuloidaea [sic]. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63: 235. (19) x 1927¢ = 30 ft. ridge 47 ur wes SINS eae eos a7 Sle le eee eee - = Oe tS a\e ~ 7S Fig. 1. Ground plan of Site I at Moonee Beach, New South Wales. approximately 100 yards long and 50 yards wide. High fixed dunes border its landward side. The implements lie on the basic ironstone ridges of the peninsula and on sand remaining in the central parts. Water has washed some towards the beach, otherwise again no implements occur lower than the 10 foot level. They are the same in type and relative numbers as those of Site I, and are classified together. Most ready access to this site is by walking along the beach from Site I. NORTH—MOONEE BEACH ABORIGINAL SITES 635 E 40 ft. dune Ww BSNS ete VAS Midden Layer Fig. 2, Elevation (not to seale) of Site I. (Heavy line indicates implement horizon; heavy dots sand cover; circles indicate old fixed dune). Head-land sven 15 ft. —_ ee =e ee a ee ee ee a iL — =— me eS — r *% = FIRE ~HEARTHS ROCK ENGRAVINGS © Fig.1. PITCAIRN STATION SS ELEVATED AREAS Big. 1. Map of Piteuirn stition indicating the relative positions of rock angravings aud camp-2) les, WATER SUPPLIES A permanent ronning spring in the bed of the Manunda Creek (map, fig. 1) provides a good supply of fresh water, Smaller semi- permanent eprings in the steep ¢orges of Porcupine Range (plate 43, fig, C) and roeckholes, some capable of holding many gallons of water, oceur on the stony bills of both Pitcairn and adjoining Hill Grange station, The openings of some of these rockholes have been eovered with flat slabs of stone, probably by the aboriginals, to prevent animals drinking the water, and to reduce contamination and evaporation. EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 645 FLORA AND FAUNA The flora of the area, characteristic of the dry parts of South Anstralia, appears to be a northerly extension of the Murray belt of serubland, The evealypts are, for the most part, the dwarf varieties venerally classified under the name ‘‘Mallee’’, Serub Sheoak, Casuarina distyla; Sandal-wood, Santalum laneceolatum, and mulga, Acacia aneura, grow on the open flats, and the native pine, Callitris glauca, on the ranges. Native peach trees (quandong), Santalum acuminatum, whose fruit was much favoured by the aboriginals, are occasionally seen on both the plains and the sides of the stony hills. Salt-bush, Atriplex vesicarium, and blue-bush, Kochia sedifolia, cover the undulating countryside, and tussocks of T'riodia the higher hills and ranges, In the early days of white settlement this grass was known as ‘porcupine’? because of its needle-like spines—hence the nume, Porenpine Range. Spear-, and other native grasses fourish on the open flat country after the errati¢ rains. Kangaroo, euros, emus, echidnas, lizards, snakes, goannas and many sorts of birds frequent Piteairn station, but wombats, wallabies and dingoes, once present in considerable numbers, have become almost extinct since the Sawers family aequired the sheep station in 1895, It will be seen from this that there would have been an adequate supply of food to sapport an aboriginal population in recent and probably also in prehistoric times, ROCK ENGRAVING SITES The rock engravings on Pitcairn and Hill Grange stations have been divided into five groups, i.¢., Twelve Mile; Porcupine Range; Mafeking Mills; Manunda Springs and Hill Grange station (map, fi. 1). The first three of these groups are somewhat isolated from the others, while the latter two are sitnated on the continuous line of hills extending from Manunda Springs, across Hill Grange station, into the adjoining property. The present survey has been confined to Piteairn and Hill Grange station; the engravings at other sites located in this north-eastern area are at present being Investigated. Twenive Mrue This site, a rocky outcrop near an ont-station, is about twelve miles south-east of Pitcairn station homestead. At the present time the only indication of a water supply is a few minor rockholes near the engravings and possible soaks in the bed of a watercourse some distance away. 646 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Fig. 2. Rock engraving designs from the Twelve Mile site, Pitcairn station. The engravings are confined to the smooth surfaces of an uneven outcrop situated at the eastern end of the low line of hills rising out of the broad plain to the west of Levi Range (map, fig. 1). Although EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 647 the number of engravings is not large, the proportion of apparently unfinished designs is greater than those found among the other groups examined, Many of these engravings at the Twelve Mile are well preserved (plate 44), while others have been almost entirely worn away by erosive action of water and wind-blown sand. There are few unusual designs at this site. Most depict animal tracks (fig. 2D, E, N, Q. X) and cireles (fig. 2B, C, HB, I, H, I, L, M, P,Q, T, U, V and X), all of them characteristic of South Australian rock engravings, The tracks include those of an adult emu with chicks (fig. 24). There are a number of human foot and handprints with peenliar outlines (fig. 2M, R, 8, U,), the feet having four, five or six toes, and the hands four to six fingers. Porcupmne Ranauk A semi-permanent spring is located in a secluded, steep-sided gully on the northern slopes of Waite Hill (map, fig. 1). As it flows towards the open plain the water from this spring fills many rockholes (plate 43, fig. C). Hvidence of aboriginal visits to this isolated valley ts indicated by the designs engraved on rock surfaces adjacent to the water supplies, The most unusual and extensive group is an intricate collection af eireles and tracks on one large pavement near a creek (fig. 6), Other designs (many badly weathered), include crescents (fig. 41, F, K, L, R), a number of small engraved disc-like designs (fig. 4P), emu tracks (fig, 4H, J, M, 8S) and some human footprints (fig. 4G, O, Q). Several of the engravings of emn tracks (fig. 4J, 8) may have been intentionally distorted. Mountford (personal communication) states that the aboriginals of the Wailbri tribe of Central Australia, depict the tracks of a mythical lame emu, kalaia, in a similar manner. Marexine Hiis Near some small rockholes among these hills, a few portions of engraved circles and tracks were found. here may have been other engravings at this site at some time, but the surface of the rocks has been broken into so many fragments that any other designs would have been obliterated. Manunpa Sprtnos anp Hitz, Grance Station The aboriginals engraved many designs on the outcropping roeks in the line of hills (plate 45, fig. A) which extends in a general north- easterly direction from Manunda Springs across Pitcairn to the Hill Grange station (map, fig, 1). EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 649 _ Although there are a number of simple engravings at the Manunda Springs (fig. 4A, B, C, D), the designs are more numerous and complex near the Hill Grange boundary (plate 45, fig. B). Here are many circular designs (fig. 3A, B, C, D, E, F, J, L, P, T, W, AA, BB) and several examples of the barred circle (fig. 3H, AA), Fully intag- liated lizard designs (fig. 30, V), common in the Panarammitee area (Mountford and Edwards, 1963), are rare at this locality. As at the Twelve Mile site, animal tracks form a large proportion of the engravings. There are poorly executed human footprints (fg. 31, M, «), R, BB, CC), several small marsupial tracks with large crescents (fig. 300) and a few dise-like designs (fig. 3N, BB). Fig. 4. Hock engraving designs from Manunda Springs and Porcupine Range. During the examination of some rock engravings on the slopes of a hillside on Hill Grange station, a group of partly covered circles was noticed in the bed of a shallow gutter. The removal of soil and rubble to a depth from six to twelve inches revealed more engravings (fig, 5, plate 43, fig. B). Other buried rock faces probably exist, but as the deposition of the debris took place at irregular intervals of time, auch detrital cover is not likely to supply evidence of age, but serve merely to protect the engravings from weathering and erosion, Similar oceurrences of buried engravings have been recorded from sites in the Northern Flinders Ranges by Hale and Tindale (1925), in Deep Creek, 650 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM near Burra, by Campbell (1925) and Biddle (1925), and from Panaramitee North, by Mountford and Edwards (1963), and stated as being adjacent to, or in, creek beds, partly covered by a layer of soil. TECHNIQUES There is no published record of any white person having witnessed an aboriginal making an actual rock engraving in South Australia, and the tools are unknown. Basedow (1914, 1925), Hosking (1926), Mountford (1935) and Mountford and Edwards (1963) have suggested that rock engravings were produced with a sharp-pointed piece of hard stone, either hand-held or used as a chisel-like instrument, Experiments on typical rock face material have shown it is possible to produce suitable pits by both methods. The use of a hammer-stone and chisel however enables a more controlled application of the force to the rock surface; as many of the designs were engraved with fine detail and accurately and sharply portrayed, some carefully directed use of the tools employed would have been necessary. The measure of exactness and regularity seen in many of the engravings (plate 44, fig. C) would have been difficult to achieve with a single hand- held implement. A search in the vicinity of rock engravings for specialized tools has been undertaken without success by a number of investigators, Basedow (1914, 1925); Stapleton (1931) and Mountford and Edwards (1963). As quartzite and the milky variety of quartz are the hardest materials available and occur in abundance near all the rock engravings, some fragments of these may have been used in one of the methods adopted. If struck with the correct amount of force and at a suitable angle, selected pieces of these materials have sufficient hardness and toughness to penetrate the softer rock surface a number of times without damaging the point. There are instances where variations in the size and shape of the individual punch marks can be seen, suggesting a difference in tool point and in the action of striking the rock surface to produce an engraving. Several of these variations are seen in plate 44, fig. C, D. Heavy blows from an implement of some weight would have been required to make the large circular pits which comprise the design on plate 44, fig. A. The detailed study being undertaken of the various kinds of depressions forming the designs of the engravings may help to provide evidence of the techniques employed. Only a few examples of straight line markings (plate 44, fig. B) were found similar to those recorded from other sites by Basedow (1914); Tindale and Mountford (1926); and Mountford (1929). 651 EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION {A J © ga WCA Sa a - f ‘a a 3 z a“ - =“ - “ 7 —~ AREA EXCAVATED ~ \ . \ \ N 'Cx\ \ N Rock engravings revealed by excavation on Hill Grange station. Fig. 6. Extensively engraved rock pavement in the Porcupine Range, Pitcairn station Fig. 5. D 652 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM WEATHERING Most of the sites so far examined have presented instances of engraved surfaces in an advanced state of deterioration due to the effects of long weathering. As there is insufficient evidence to determine the rates of this weathering process if cannot be used as a reliable basis for estimating age. The engravings on outcropping rock surfaces situated on Hill Grange station provide striking evidence of the effects of weathering and disintegration. Chemical and mechanical weathering, aided by erosion by water and wind, appear to be the principal factors causing fragmentation of the rocks in this region, In some places only small portions of the designs remain While there are instanees where prac- tically the whole surface has been broken into fragments and many of them washed down the hillside. Por example, a large group of circles (fig. 37, T; plate 45, fig, B) has been so affected that some of them have obviously disappeared and nearby slabs of the engraved, outer layer of the rock have become detached and rest loosely on the underlying mass. ANTIQUITY Many of the authors who have recorded rock engravings in South Australia have speculated on their age (Basedow, 1914, 1925; Campbell, 1925; Biddle, 1925; Hale and Tindale, 1925, 1929; Hale, 1926; Tindale and Mountford, 1926; Mountford, 1929, 1935, 1960; Stapleton, 1931; Tindale, 1935; Cooper, 1941; Mountford and Edwards, 1962, 1963). The general opinion is that they are of some antiquity. This suggestion is based on the weathered eondition of the rock surfaces, evidence of minor earth movements, patination, the presence of engravings of hoth extinet creatures and thei tracks, and the faet that living aboriginals of the Flinders Ranges and other areas where such engravings exist have asserted that they are not the work of their people, bat. of mythical ancestors who lived during ereation times. The engravings have been cut into the hardened and heavily patinated surface layers of the loeal rock masses, Such rock altera- tions probably involve a long period of time. It is therefore important to determine, if possible, to what extent patination of the rock snrface has oceurred subsequent to the engraving of the designs. The strongest evidence of age must rest upon the extent of deterioration of engraved markings or their patination, While some have the appearance of marked ‘fageing’’, others present a sharpness in the eut margin suggesting a later origin, EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 653 Mountford and Edwards (1962) recorded their observation of the apparent absence of dingo tracks among the large number of engraved animal and bird tracks recorded in the north-east of South Australia. This may imply that some of these engravings predate the arrival of the native dog on this continent. No representations of dingo tracks were found among the engravings examined in the Pitcairn area. It is of interest that dingo bones were recovered in a recent archaeological excavation at Fromm Landing, South Australia, by Mulvaney, Lawton and Twidale (1964), Carbon 14 tests have dated the levels of these remains at between 1000 + 91 B.C. and 1220 + 94 B.C. and to be the oldest dated dingo remains recorded for Australia. The engravings examined during this survey are comparable with olhers so far recorded from adjacent regions. There is a resemblance in the detail of the designs; weathering has advanced to a like degree and the same techniques appear to have been employed, Tt is there- fore reasonable to suggest that the whole series (map, fig. 9) are the work of related groups of aboriginals, and may be comtemporary. While searching for rock engravings in the Pitcairn area, many rounded piles of fire-bnnit stones (plate 43, fig, D) were observed along the Manunda and other watercourses (map, fig. 1), Gray (1930) at Orroroo aud Meyer (1846) at Encounter Bay note the use of heated stones for cooking by the aboriginals, and it is likely that the blackened stones located indicate fireplaces. During the survey of Panaramitee station in 1961 (Mountford and Edwards, 1963) similar hearths were noticed along the Yunta and Winnininnie Creeks and their tributaries. Such watereourses, snpplemented by associated permanent springs, would have been sufficient to support hoth the people who made the neighbouring rock engravings and the game which would have provided them with a food supply, Consequently it appears that the water- courses of this region and the nearby exposed rock surfaces, were the main factors determining the situation of these rock engravings. The map (fig. 9) shows such a distribution in and around the Manunda- Yonta Creek drainage area, The possibility that the Manunda Creek and its tributaries were once semi-permanent watercourses, flowing towards the Murray as part of the north-eastern drainage system, cannot be discounted if the present aridity of the climate of northern South Australia is of comparatively recent origin, as has sometimes heen suggested (Howehin, 1914), 654 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM IN. Cc 0 cM 5 Brenoa K. Hussar Fig. 7. Large stone implements from the Manunda Creek, camp-site A, Piteairn station. A, Large, trimmed flake implement, arapia in form, with a flat base and characteristic working platform, Specimen Reg. No, A54666 in South Australian Museum. B. Trimmed core implement with a slightly convex or keeled base and secondary trimming around the periphery. .A54667. C. Horsehoof-shaped core implement with two working edges, A54668, EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION G35 OCCUPATION SITES In many instances where hearths were observed, the banks of the watercourses are almost devoid of vegetation, apart from occasional clumps of salt-bush and blue-bush, Some of these areas have been undergoing continuous surface erosion by wind and water, leaving a mass Of stones strewn about on the bared areas of red clay, In some places, much of the land surface is disintegrating and being carried away in newly forming erosion gutters, Low rainfall and the effects of pastoral activities currently inhibits the growth of a cover of veectation. Frosion has not only been responsible for exposing hearths and implements—some can be seen embedded in the banks of the watercourses—hut it is likely that it has also caused some to have been washed away into the creeks. he search for stone implements in these areas produced discarded flakes and implements of varying sizes. At three particular localities (map, fig. 1 A-B; C and D) the number of implements collected was sufticient to indieate More than a casual stopping place. Manunpa Creek (Site A) This camp-site is located on a well-drained position on the high western bank of the Manunda Creek (map, fig. 1A). The now temporary spring at the base of some slate outcrops in the ereek bed may account for the presence of the nearby camp-site, Here erosion has removed the more friable surface soil leaving an assemblage of stones, including many implements, discarded flakes and fire-hearths. The collection of artifacts made from this site consists of 231 large implements, mainly trimmed cores (e.g., fig. 7) made from coarse grained quartzite readily available in the bed of the Manunda Creek; 90 smaller flakes of irregular shape with varying amounts of trimming; 18 worked cores; two geometric microliths; two microlithie end scrapers made from australites; 114 discarded quartzite flakes and 63 seraps of milky qnartz and chaleedonic material. Manunpa Creek (Site B) Some eroded clay flats, a little to the north, form an extension of the main Manunda site (map, fig. 1B), Here fireplaces were located and a few large implements and uwntrimmed stone flakes collected. Manunpa Creek (Site C) This eamp-site is on the banks of the Manunda Creek about a mile up-stream from the main site (Site A). Only a small number of 656 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM implements were found, but an interesting feature was some well- defined areas strewn with great quantities of milky quartz fragments, apparently broken up during the manufacture of implements from this material. D2 Boanoa K. Hunsane Fig. 8. Large trimmed core implements from Albert Hill, camp site D, Pitcairn station. D. Core chopping implement showing the functional edge sharp and intact. A54669. KE, Core chopping implement with functional edge re-worked or sharpened as a result of continued use. A54670. F. Core chopping implement re-worked to such an extent that the implement is almost worn out and of little further use. A54671. EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 657 Twenty-eight artifacts were recovered, including 14 semi-discoidal adze-stones of milky quartz; 24 indefinitely shaped flakes of the same miaterial (all bearing evidence of secondary trimming), three geometrie and one semi-discoidal microliths, Auspert Hin (Site D) This rather isolated camping ground, covering some 50 acres of the banks and adjoining flats of a Manunda Creck tributary, is midway between the Piteairn homestead and the Twelve Mile rock engravings (map, fig, 1D), The variety in the implement types collected differ from those of the main Mannunda Creek e¢amp-site (Site A). Thirty-eight large core implements were reeovered; microliths comprised 15 geometries, one diseoid and three semi-discoids, one nosed scraper, seven end-scrapers and some small worked cores. There were approximately 800 scrap flukes; six of these show trimming. Some of the large implements are good examples of their respective types, three in particular (fig. 8) clearly exhibit the stages of modification of the shape of a core implement when it was continuously re-sharpened, DISCUSSION There is no conclusive evidence to indicate the density or permanence of the prehistorie population of the Piteairn region, The number of artifacts found is small when compared with the quantity recovered from other parts of northern South Australia (Mitchell, 1949; Cooper, 1954). This suggests that this particular area was not permanently oceupied by a large community at any period. The predominance of large implements among the material collected on the Manunda Oreck indicates a similarity to the Kartan camp-sites recorded at Flallett Cove (Cooper, 1959), near the River Wakefield (Cooper, 1961), and to a limited extent on Kangaroo Island (Tindale and Maegraith, 1931; Cooper, 1960) where the proportion of such implements was also high in comparison with smaller types. Other massive implements were retrieved by Cooper (1943) from eamp- sites near the rock engravings at Mount Chambers Creek, Oratunga and on Boorloo Creek near Marree (Cooper 1941), Most of the implements from all these sites are similar in size, form, material and technique of manufacture, Assuming these are Kartan implements and are ancient, as has been suggested, they may belong to the same period as the rock engravings. If so they provide further indications of the possible antiquity of the engravings, 658 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Many of the trimmed core implements recovered from the Pitcairn area bear evidence of constant use, some having been sharpened a number of times by trimming the functional margin with blows by a hammer-stone (figs. 7 and 8). The edges of some tools have been re-worked in this manner so often, that further sharpening would have been impossible and they were obviously discarded. Cooper (1961) states that the high proportion of core chopping implements found along the banks of the River Wakefield—also worn to the limits of their usefulness—may represent an accumulation of tools discarded over an extended period by a relatively small population. This may also be the explanation for the findings of the Pitcairn area. FLORINA @ e @ MANNAHILL WABRICOOLA WINNININNIE SNAKY HILLS @ WINNININNIE @ SPRINGS OULNINA YUNTA @ e SERneS PANARAMITEE CHARITY NORTH Wwe @ ~.\ge® OLD NETLEY @ Wet STATION a ROCK @® r) “¢ WHYDOWN @ HOLES A PARATOO CREEK NACKARA e TIVERTON 6 SPRINGS v ae Men? HILL GRANGE MANUNDA @ SPRINGS @ 0 MILES PORCUPINE @ RANGE bain MILE SCALE Fig. 9. Map showing the general distribution of known rock engraving sites in or near the Manunda-Yunta Creek drainage area. Certain rock painting sites in Central Australia are situated well away from regular camping places and forbidden to all but the fully initiated. In contrast to this, the groups of rock engravings in the north-east of South Australia occur in places where good water and food supplies were available and therefore may have been near regular, general occupation sites. If so, the engravings may not have had any particular restricted sacred or ceremonial significance but rather EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 659 represent the efforts of the aboriginal inhabitants of the long past, reminding themselves of their mythical and legendary staries in both naturalistic aud abstract styles, Interpretation of such a vast array of stylized figures is not an easy matter. Certain of these, such as simple or concentric vireles, wavy lines and crescents, are not uncommon among designs exeented by living aborigines and may thus he decipherable. But in addition there are many other designs and patterns which could probably be designated as expressions of abstract. aboriginal art, Further disenssion of this aspect is beyond the scope of the present paper, the purpose of which is to record the available information about the rock engravings and stone artifacts of the Pitcairn and Hill Grange stations. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author acknowledges the interest and enthusiasm of Mr. Brian K. Sawers and his family who provided accommodation, supplied transport for field work and generally assisted in the collection of implements and tracing of engravings. Without thei generous help it would have been impossible to carry out the survey. Mr. 8, R. C. Lang of Hill Geange station kindly gave permission to continue the survey on his property, The encouragement and advice of Mr, C, P. Mountford, Professor G, H. Lawton and Drs. TT’. D. Campbell and P. 8. Hossteld daring the preparation of this paper is appreciated, Mr, H. M, Cooper gave assistance in comparing the various implements from Piteairn with those he has collected, and his advice was invaluable in other ways. The Board for Anthropological Research of the University of Adelaide granted funds towards the expenses of field work of this research, Mr. M. R. Marchant, of the South Australian Lands Department, provided details needed for the preparation of maps. The plates, figures and maps have been prepared by the author, and the outlines of implements drawn by Miss Brenda Hubbard, Acknowledgment is also made to the Board of the South Australian Museum for publication of this paper and to Mr, Norman B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology, for his consideration and advice. The figured specimens have been placed in the South Australian Museum collection, REFERENCES CITED Basedow, H,, 1914: Aboriginal rock carvings of great antiquity in South Australia, J.R. Anthrop. Inst., London 44. ————. 1925: The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide. 660 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Biddle, J. P. E., 1925; Aboriginal markings on rocks near Burra (Kooringa)), Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 49. Campbell, T. D., 1925: Detailed notes on the aboriginal intaglios near Burra, Trans, Roy Soe. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 49. Qooper, H, M., 1941: Rock carvings and other aboriginal relies from near Marree. S. Austr, Nat., Adelaide, 21, 1943: Large stone implements from South Australia, Ree, S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 7(4). 1954: Material culture of Australian aboriginals. Ree. 8. Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 11(2). 1959: Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett Cove, South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soe. 8S, Austr., Adelaide, 82. 1960; The archaeology of Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Ree, 8, Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 13(4). 1961: Archaeological stone implements along the Lower River Wakefield, South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 84. Gray, J., 1930: Notes on native tribe formerly resident at Orroroo, South Australia. S. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 12(1). Hale, H. M., 1926: Aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia. 8. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 8(1). Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1925: Observations on aborigines of the Flinders Ranges, and records of rock earvings and paintings. Ree. 8. Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 3(1). 1929; Further notes on aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia, S. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 10(2). Hall, F. J., MeGowan, R. G, and Guleksen, G. F., 1951: Aboriginal rock carvings: a locality near Pimba, South Australia. Ree. 5. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 9. Hosking, J. W., 1926: Native rock carvings at Pekina Creek, Orroroo, South Australian, S, Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 8(1). Howchin, W., 1914: The evolution of the physiographical features of South Australia. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 14. Meyer, H. BK. A., 1846: Manners and customs of the aborigines of the Encounter Bay Tribe, South Australia. Adelaide. Mitchell, 8S. R., 1949: Stone-age craftsmen, Melbourne. Mountford, ©. P., 1929: Aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia. Aust. Assoe. Adv, Sci,, Hobart, 19. EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 661 1929: A unique example of aboriginal rock carving at Panaramitee North. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 53. 1935: A survey of the petroglyphs of South Australia. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 22. 1960: Simple rock engravings in Central Australia. Man, London, 60. Mountford, C. P. and Edwards, R., 1962: Aboriginal rock engravings of extinct creatures in South Australia. Man, London, 62. 1963: Rock engravings of Panaramitee station, north-eastern South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 86. Mulvaney, D. J., Lawton, G. H. and Twidale, C. R., 1964: Archaclogi- cal excavation of rockshelter no. 6, Fromm Landing, South Australia. Proce. Roy. Soe. Vic., Melbourne, 77. Stapleton, P., 1931: Aboriginal relies in the Blinman District. S. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 12(2). Tindale, N. B., 1935; Rock-markings in South Australia. Antiquity, London, 9. 1951; Comments on supposed representations of giant bird tracks at Pimba. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 9. Tindale, N. B. and Mountford, C. P., 1926: Native markings on rocks at Morowie, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Austr., Adelaide, 50. Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: Traces of an extinct aboriginal population on Kangaroo Island. Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 4(3). 662 Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. powP SayPp DP RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 43 Hill Grange station looking south with the Poreupine Range in the background. Rock engravings revealed by excavation on Hill Grange station. Semi-permanent spring situated in the Poreupine Range, Pitcairn station. Fire blackened pile of stones on the Manunda Creek camp-site, Pitcairn station. PLATE 44 EXAMPLES OF Rock ENGRAVINGS, TWELVE MILE SITE, PITCAIRN STATION A cireular design composed of rounded pits. Straight line markings. An unfinished emu track with variations in size of the peck marks. Typical South Australian rock engravings, PLATE 45 Hill Grange station, looking north. A weathering, engraved rock surface, Hill Grange station. Rec. SAL Musi Vor J4, Phare 48 Vu fave vane Wind Rec. S.A. Meseum Vou. J4 Prharke 44 Rie, SwAL Messen Vou. 14 Phare 49 REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS (LEPIDOPTERA HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)” PART VIII By NORMAN B. TINDALE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary Two new species of Oxycanus are described, O. buluwandji Tindale from Lake Barrine, Queensland and O. hildae Tindale from the Victorian Alps. The hitherto unknown female of Trictena argyrosticha Turner is reported from Stanthorpe, Queensland, and some observations are given on other species of Oxycanus. REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS (LEPIDOPTERA HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)‘’? PART VIII By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Sours Avustratian Museum Plates 46-47 SUMMARY Two new species of Oxycanus are described, O, buluwandji Tindale from Lake Barrine, Queensland and O. hildae Tindale from the Victorian Alps. The hitherto unknown female of Trictena argyrosticha Turner is reported from Stanthorpe, Queensland, and some observations are given on other species of Oxycanus. INTRODUCTION The present paper describes several new or noteworthy Australian species belonging to two genera, Oxycanus and Trictena which have been dealt with in earlier pages of this Revision. I am indebted again to Mr. C. G. L. Gooding for opportunities to see some material discussed herein; he has again been good enough to deposit types in the South Australian Museum collection. Oxycanus buluwandji sp. nov. Plate 46, fig. 1 Male. Antennae brown, pectinations rather long, slender, 2, tapering rather suddenly to tip, each pectination with an apical tuft of ejliae; head and thorax ochreous with a greyish-green tinge, abdomen at base brightly ochreous, becoming duller and greenish-tinged towards apex. Forewings warm brown with bright ochreous patches which tend to be concentrated in a zig-zag from the termen near forewing tip to inner margin at one-half, then extending towards base; a series of small, paired golden yellow spots each ringed with brown tending to run in lines across the wing, generally parallel to termen, with a rather greater number concentrated in a subterminal area where the linear arrangement is rather disturbed; there is also a subterminal series of semi-Iunate brown spots between each of the veins from the apex to (1) Part VII of this series was published in these Records, Vol. XIII, pp. 157-197. 664 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM the inner margin. Hindwings ochreous at base, dark brown on distal half; in life the base of the wings may have had a fugitive pink tinge. Wings beneath ochreous with (he outer margins darker, Forewing length 54 mm., expanse 121 mm. Loe, Queensland: Lake Barrine, 1928, K. J. D. (type, a male, unique, 1.19112 in S.A. Museum), This is a large and outstanding member of that group of Australian species within the genus Oxycanus which centre around O. beltistus, In these the male genitalia, when obliquely viewed, are seen to possess a series of spines of equal length along the latus of the teguinen. This is the seventh species which falls into the group. In general appearance it is closest to QO. beltistus Turner particularly in the rather broadly pointed forewings, showing a suggestion of subfaleation; in markings it seems to be most like O, natas Tindale, but that species has well rounded fore wing tips. Except for the rather aberrant O, aedesimus (Turner) from the Kungella Plateau, Queensland, this is the first species of the genus to be taken at a point intermediate between the mountains of New Guinea and the Brisbane district of Queensland. In life it must he a very striking insect. When compared with New Guinea species O. buluwandji probably falls nearest to O. lamsi Tindale, from Mount Goliath, in the form of the genitalia and in the suggestion of subfaleation of the forewings, but the peculiar shape of the hindwings of O, tamsi, the different, shorter antennae, and the distinctive markings set the two apart; O. tamsi is much the smaller of the two species. The name chosen is based on the tribal name of the negrito people who claim Lake Barrine as their territory. Mr. C. G. L. Gooding, in whose collection T noticed the specimen, has kindly passed the type to me for preservation in the South Australian Museum colleetion, Oxycanus rosaceus Tindale Oxycanus rosaceus Tindale, 1935, Ree, S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 5: 306, fig. 33, 82-83. The only known Victorian specimens of this interesting species were those taken in various years by Mr. ©. G. LL. Gooding near Moe, Victoria, the last, oecasion being on 24 April 1944. The restricted area where they oceurred was cleared of vegetation and ploughed up TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 665 immediately after the 1944 emergences and no further specimens have been noted in the district. In Mr. Gooding’s opinion the larvae are external root feeders on a species of Hucalyptus. Oxycanus diremptus (Walker) Plate 47, fig. 1 Porina dirempta Walker 1865, List. Lep. Ins. Brit. Mus., 82: 597, Oxycanus diremptus Tindale 1935, Rec, 8, Austr, Mus,, Adelaide, 5: 289. Most of the species of the genus Oxycanus tend to be variable in Wing markings, with a wide range from melanie forms through well- marked, often silvery-spotted and banded forms to rather highly decorative paler forms in which fiashes of ochreous and white are present, O, diremplus is 10 exception in being variable as to markings, although forms possessing an abundance of silvery while are unusual. The striking example figured (plate 47, fig. 1) was taken by Mrs. Margaret Coulson at Moe, Victoria, on 21 April 1951, and is in the collection of Mr. C. G. L. Gooding. The specimen has a forewing length of 58 mm. and expanse of 84 mm., being a rather large male specimen but falling within the normal limits of variation in size, of the species, The forewing has the costa narrowly chocolate-brown and the terminal area is a somewhat lighter shade of the same colour. ‘The discoidal markings are ochreous, narrowly margined with brown, as are also the more obscure markings between the greatly expanded area of silvery-white which oceupies the greater part of the forewing; the anal area is mottled with fine gray scales and hairs. The hindwings and the underside of wings are as in more normal specimens of the species, The genitalia in no way differ from the more normal members of the species. The character of the latus of tegumen clearly indicates its specifie identity with O. diremptus, In wing pattern it probably is the extreme development of that form of the species which has been named QO. diremptus form kershawi (Lucas). Tn a former paper in these Reeords (11, 1955, pl. 82 f, 8) I depicted one ol three specimens ol a similar silvery extreme form of the species Oxycanus sordidus (Ilerrich-Schaeffer) taken at Red Hill, Victoria. Oxyeanus hildae sp, nov. Plate 46, fig. 2-3 Male, Antemae yellowish-ochreous, slender, pectinations 2. Head and thorax pale brown, abdomen pale ochreous fawn, a. little 666, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM darker towards apex. Forewings subhyaline, pale brown with rather obscure markings in pale fawn, indistinctly margined with brown; veins and margins of wings appear darker and contrast with the yellowish-ochreous of ciliae; base of wings posteriorly clothed in ochreous yellow hairs, Hindwings subhyaline, pale brown with the veins margined with pale ochreous yellow, ciliae also ochreous yellow; base of wings clothed in ochreous yellow hairs, Wings beneath dusky brown, darker along the veins with termen and portions of veins of hindwings tinged ochreous. Forewing length 29 mm., expanse 63 mm, Female. Antennae yellowish-ochreous, slender, scarcely pectinate. Head and thorax pale brown, abdomen pale ochreous fawn, Forewings subhyaline, pale ochreous fawn with brown markings, some of which show vague traces of a paler centre, veins emphasized by yellow scales, sometimes bearing patches of darker scales, ciliae ochreous. Hind- wings subhyaline with traces of same markings as in forewing, veins strongly margined in yellow, margins and ciliae brightly ochreous; base of wings with ochreous yellow hairs. Wings beneath dusky brown, veins emphasized with ochreous towards termen and margins and ciliae brightly ochreous yellow. Forewing length 38 mm,, expanse 84 mm. Loe. Victoria: Jacob Creek (holotype male and allotype female 25 April 1946, collected by C. G. L. Gooding) 1.19113 in 8.A, Museum; also one specimen from New South Wales: Cathcart (paratype, 1.19114, male, 11 March 1958, collected by N. B. Tindale). Tt is with pleasure that this species is named as O. hildae after Mrs. C. G. lL. Gooding who shares with Mr. Gooding such enthusiasm for the discovery of new and interesting Lepidoptera, This species, by reason of the possession of a simple arenate latus of the tegumen, keys to the vicinity of O. perditus Tindale found in Western Australia. The wing markings of the male are somewhat similar to those of O. perditus but the species differs in being smaller, less opaquely clothed in scales and in having the evanescently pink hairs (which fade in preserved specimens to an ochreous yellow) confined to the bases of the wings, The paratype male is slightly smaller (expanse 60 mm.) and the markings tend to be somewhat more obscure but it is evidently the same species. The last named example was taken in a mercury vapour lamp light trap on a night when the 11 p.m, temperature was 53°F. TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 667 Trictena argyrosticha Turner Plate 47, fig. 2 The female of 7. argyrosticha has not previously been described or figured. I am indebted to Mr. C. G. L. Gooding for an opportunity to record a very fine example taken by Miss Jean Harslett in April 1949 at Stanthorpe, Queensland. Female. Antennae ochreous, slender and incipiently tripectinate. Head, thorax, abdomen and legs pale brown. Forewings brown, costa ochreous-tinged towards apex, wing covered with scroll-like markings; a well defined oblique white fascia from apex to My at 2ths, bordered with dark brown; traces of a discoidal fascia reduced to a single patch of white scales, a dark brown blotch and some ochreous-tinged scroll- like lines in the position of the silvery-white fascia of males. Hind- wings pale brown with the costa narrowly ochreous-tinged. Forewing length 75 mm., expanse 160 mm. Loc. Stanthorpe, Queensland (allotype female 1.19115 in South Australian Museum). Like the male, the female of this species differs in well marked fashion from females of the only other known species of the genus, Trictena argentata (Herrich-Schaeffer). The key based on male specimens given in a former description (Tindale, Rec. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 4: 1932, 500) will serve, save that the sub-terminal white band, although it tends to be continuous, as in the male, is rather wider than the key indicates as usual in the male. 668 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 46 Fig. 1 Above. Oxycanus bulwwandji Tindale. Holotype male, Lake Barrine, Queensland. Fig. 2-3 Below. Oxycanus hildae Tindale. Holotype male and allotype female, Jacob Creek, Victoria. PLATE 47 Fig. 1 Above. Oxycanus diremptus (Walker). Unusually marked example, Moe, Victoria, 21st April, 1951. Fig. 2 Below. Trictena argyrosticha Turner. Allotype female, Stanthorpe, Queensland, April, 1949. Reo. S.A. Museo Von. 14, Puare 46 To feces qatue BOS | Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Pharr — ~ Fl med se sae — son A _ - nth ae aa i ee 1 bites NOTE ON FLINT IMPLEMENTS FOUND NEAR NIPA, CENTRAL PAPUAN HIGHLANDS By H. K. BARTLETT Summary In September 1960 I paid a short visit to Nipa on the Nenbi River in the Central Papuan Highlands. (This river is called the Nemb or Nembi by the local people.) The area was described briefly by the late F. E. Williams in the Annual Report of the Territory of Papua for 1938-39. Williams wrote about the Wela valley and its inhabitants as “the grasslanders”. A small landing strip, suitable only for tiny Cessna aircraft, had been cleared in the dense wild sugar cane (pit pit) covered valley. Ninety points of rain in 48 hours were sufficient to close the airstrip. NOTE ON FLINT IMPLEMENTS FOUND NEAR NIPA, CENTRAL PAPUAN HIGHLANDS By H. kK. BARTLETT Fig. 1-3 In September 1960 I paid a short visit to Nipa on the Nenbi River in the Central Papuan Highlands. (This river is called the Nemh or Nembi by the local people.) The area was deseribed briefly by the late F. EH. Williams in the Annual Report of the Territory of Papua for 1938-39, Williams wrote abort the Wela valley and its inhabitants as ‘‘the gragslanders’’. A small lauding strip, suitable only for tiny Cessna aircratt, had been cleared in the dense wild sugar cane (pit pit) eovered valley. Ninety points o! rain in 48 hours were sufficient to close the airstrip. A Government outpost liad been established a few months before my arrival and a Methodist missionary and his family were living in a temporary house near the strip. The area largely was ‘‘uncontrolled’’, and travel was not permitted for more than a mile and a quarter beyond the Government station, Flint flakes exposed ou the strip attracted my attention. Deep drains had been dug on both sides of the airstrip, and numerous flakes could be seen protruding from the walls of the drains at a depth of three feet. Few of the flints showed signs of secondary chipping. The primary flakes were sharp enough for general use. When I had gathered a few flakes, small boys were eager to hunt for more. Natives informed me that this flint was known as are (or arer—see I", EH. Williams’ Vocabulary of the Augu language). Taking a sharp flake I pretended to cut my arm. An old man nodded vigorously and pointed to his right hip which was coated generously with pig’s fat and dirt. Taking the stance of a bowman he shot two imaginary arrows and indicated that he once had two such arrows in his hip. A small boy spat on his hand and rubbed the spot, removing the dirt, and revealing two scars. The old man then took two flint pebbles, and using one as a hammer, struck off a sharp flake with which he demonstrated how he had removed the arrow from his flesh. 670 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM The Gold lip pearl shell (Pinctada maxima) is the greatest treasure of the people. I saw a man engaged delicately in cutting a breast ornament from a large shell. He used a primary flake of are to deepen the groove made by long hours of cutting, After three days there was little appreciable difference in the depth of the groove. Women and girls displayed rows of cireular keloids between the breasts, on artis from the shoulders almost to the elbows, on the thighs, and on the calves of their legs, A piece of skin about the size of a sixpence, had heen raised to form the keloid. A number of girls came for treatment for infected euts on the leg. Tt appeared that this was the last part of their body to be decorated with keloids. A Mendij boy, who aeted as interpreter, explained that, before the white men came, women raised keloids by cutting the skin with are, Now they use razor blades! Are appeared to be the material in general use where cutting edves were required, Evidence of its nse was seen in some elaborately carved arrows, which, | was told, were shot only at ‘special men’’. Several ‘‘eores’’, similar in shape to the ‘‘horsehoof’’ used by the Australian aborigines, were found at Puril, an old fighting ground ahout one and a quarter oiiles from Nipa, and a fine example of a chopper formed hy extensive secondary flaking was found at the same site, Flint pebbles are found in abundance in ereeks and ave plentifully distributed in the soil, Comments (by Norman B, Tindale) The Rev. H. K. Bartlett is an experienced collector of aboriginal implements and has presented to the South Australian Museum material from many surface archaeological sites in Australia, His eyes did not fail him on a brief visit to New Guinea, The Nipa record adds one to the relatively few reported sites Tor archaeological implements on the island of New Guinea. It is one of the first mining places for flaked implements to be recorded and is of particular interest because the use of primary flakes seems to have persisted up to the present time. The three types present among the five significantly reworked flake implements found by Mr, Bartlett have been figured. The largest specimen (fig. 1), from Puril, is a uniface cleaver- like implement worked on a large flake, The secondary working is concentrated at one end; the original material remains on the upper BARTLETI—PAPUAN FLINT INSTRUMENTS 671 half of the worked face. Study of the cutting edge shows that at the angle at which an adzing cut would be effective but at no other, the stone would have presented an almost flat and level cutting edge against the wood or other substance being eut. Therefore, reasonably, it is suspected to have been an adze. Coneentration of the flake sears = a =~ Pig. 1-3. Implements from Nenbi River, Papuan Highlands 1, Cleaver-like implement from Puril. 2, Disevidal high-backed implement from Nipa. 3, Long-bladed adze or chisel from Nipa. implies hafting and if techniques similar to those of Australian aborigines can be inferred to have been applied the implement had been re-edged by further flaking while in the haft. The material of this implement, as of all the implements and flakes from this site, is a fine-grained gray chert, which may have been deposited from a 672 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM voleanie sonree, since the cortex present on part of this specimen appears like a voleanic grit. The very acute cutting edge (50° angle) may suggest that the implement was. used to cut some relatively soft substance. Both faces of the eutting edge show much silica-polish as if they had been chopped into a pithy substance such as sago containing hard fibres, or into stems such as those of sugar cane. ‘Iwo small flake sears at the eutting edge are injuries sustained after the implement had been in use for some time and their surfaces lack the high degree of polish present on the rest of the edge. The second specimen (fig. 2) is a diseoidal high backed implement made on a block, The effectively trimmed part of the margin is confined to less than one-half of the periphery. The original block had two flakes easually removed fvom the upper surface and there are traces of a few scars at the opposite end of this surface which probably were made when the block was broken out; these seem a little more weathered than the rest of the work suggesting that the block may have been lying about for some time before being fashioned into its present form, The second of the three views of this implement shows the most highly trimmed edge and it is evident that the rather obtuse eutting margin (of approximately 75° angle) met the work with a straight edge, I have elsewhere suggested that in Australia imple- ments like this probably were hafted in the manner of the kod) (kod ja) axe of the present-day aborigines of South Western Australia, Objections have been made to this suggestion by those who have not had opportunities of studying the majority of the snrviving hafted specimens of kody axes. There is a second specimen very similar to this high backed implement in the series from Nipa. The third specimen (fig. 3) has heen fashioned on a flake strnek from a prepared platiorm to form a parallel-sided long blade, There ig an angle of 114° between this platform and the upper or flake surface of the implement. This has been developed at the end opposite the striking platform to form a long-bladed adze or chisel, At the angle of use, if it were hafted as a chisel in the Australian manner, it would have presented an even and very slightly convex entting edge to the work, A second example of a small long-bladed chisel or adze is not quite so parallel-sided but probably was made and used in the same way as the figured one. Its surface is polished, partly from use and possibly partly also from rolling in water after being discarded. BARTLETT—PAPUAN FLINT INSTRUMENTS 673 The collection contains ten other flakes, all without more than casual secondary trimming. Four of the flakes are semi-discoidal and thin, three others are stouter, and the rest are nondescript blades; they range up to 5 cm. in length. The material from this Nenbi River site has been presented to the South Australian Museum and is registered under the number A.54132. SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GUINEA FROG HYLELLA WOLTERSTORFFI WERNER By MICHAEL J. TYLER Summary Examination of the holotype of Hylella wolterstorffi Werner has revealed firmisternal characteristics. The species is therefore transferred from the arciferal Hylidae to the Microhylid genus Oreophryne. The holotype is redescribed and figured, and its relationships to other species discussed. Hylella wolterstorffi Werner (1901) is based on a single specimen collected in New Guinea by Tappeubeck. The exact type locality is unknown, for the data labels accompanying the collection in which the specimen was included were either detached or illegible (Werner, 1901, p. 602). SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GUINEA FROG HYLELLA WOLTERSTORFFL WERNER By MICHAEL J. TYLER Fig. 1 SUMMARY Examination of the holotype of Hylella wolterstorfi Werner has revealed firmisternal characteristics. The species is therefore trans- ferred lrom the arciferal Hylidae to the Mierohylid genus Oreophryne. The holotype is redeseribed and figured, and its relationships to other species discussed. INTRODUCTION Tylella wolterstorfi Werner (1901) is based on a single specimen collected in New Guinea by Tappeubeck. The exact type locality is unknown, for the data labels accompanying the collection in which the specimen was included were either detached or illegible (Werner, 1901, p. 602), After several authors had expressed the opinion that Hylella Reinhardt and Lutken was a polyphyletic assemblage, wolterstorfi and the other New Guinea members of the genus were referred to Hyla by Barbour (1912). Van Kampen (1919) suggested that wolterstorffi might be based on a juvenile Tyla arfakiana Peters and Doria, but when revising the Indo-Australian members of the genus (1923) continued to regard the former a valid species. Through the kindness of Dr. Gunther Peters of the Institut fiir Spezielle Zoologie und Zoologisches Museum, Berlin, the author had the opportunity of examining the holotype. As the shoulder girdle was found to be firmisternal, the presence of wolterstorfi in a Hylid genus cannot be maintained. The species has therefore been redeseribed and figured, and its systematic position revised. DESCRIPTION OF THE HOLOTYPE The presence of a firmisternal girdle with reduced development of the clavicles, the absence of vomerine teeth and maxillary teeth, and the presence of T-shaped terminal phalanges indicate that wolterstorffi is very closely allied to the Microhylid species Oreophryne (Hylella) brachypus (Werner), and should also be referred to Oreophryne. 676 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Oreophryne wolterstorffi (Werner) Holotype: Z.M. 16853. One adult specimen collected in New Guinea by Tappeubeck. There are neither maxillary nor vomerine teeth. The tongue is oval, entire and half free behind, and there is a single, denticulate pre-pharyngeal ridge. The eye is prominent, its diameter greater than the distance separating it from the naris; the snout is truncate. The tympanum is indistinct, with a horizontal diameter which is slightly more than one-third of the eye diameter. Fig. 1. Lower surface of hand and foot of Oreophryne wolterstorff. The shoulder girdle was found to be partially dissected, and only those portions of the procoracoids separating the eclavicles from the eoracoids are now present. The clavicles are in such close proximity to the coracoids that it is considered unlikely that the procoracoids could have extended as far as the secapulae, The posterior margin of each clavicle is obtusely angled, and the anterior margin evenly rounded, The clavicle may also be divided into two portions; the proximal portion subtends to the coracoid at an angle of approximately 40°, and the distal half lies parallel to the coracoid. TYLER—NEW GUINEA FROG 677 The hand is unwebbed, and the fingers bear large, truncated discs (lig. 1). There is a short basal web on the foot, and very narrow fringes to the toes. The toe dises are very much smaller than the finger dises (fig. 1), The terminal phalanges are T-shaped. Werner described the colouration of the specimen as follows: “Whitish brown aboye, with grey blotches. A dark brown stripe stretches from the posterior edge of the eye above the tympanum towards the back; this stripe does not extend over the head, Anterior part of head to middle of eyes light-coloured, posterior part of head dark brown (both of these colours being distinet and clearly divided), Limbs indistinetly flecked with brown, Belly and thighs marbled with white and light brown.”’ The holotype is now a very pale brown, and few of the markings reported by Werner can be distinguished. Dimensions: Snout to vent length 22.5 mm.; tibia length 9.7 mm. ; head breadth 7.4 mm.; head length 7.1 mm.; eye diameter 3.1 nm.,; éye to nuris distance 1.8 mm.; internarial span 1.6 mm.; tympanum diameter 0.8 mm. RELATIONSHIPS It is possible to divide Oreophryne into two groups according to the extent of the development of the procoracoids (Parker, 1934), In one group the procoracoids extend to the seapulae, and in the other the distal half or one-third is replaced by a slender ligament. In view of the large number of species currently comprising the genus, this separation is a convenient taxonomic characteristic, It is therefore extremely unfortunate to find that the procoracoids of wolterstorffi have been destroyed. The presence of webbing between the toes is shared by relatively few species. Oreaophryne kampeni Parker has one-third webbed toes, but differs from wolterstorfi in having the third toe shorter than the fifth. Oreophryne erncifera (Yan Kampen) and O, albopunctata (Yan Kampen) have similar webbing, but the third and fifth toes are of equal length, The tympamm of O. anthonyi (Boulenger) is half the diameter of the eye (approximately one-quarter in wolterstorfi), whilst O, biroi (Méhely) has very much larger finger dises, Oreophryne brevicrus Zweifel may be distinguished from wolterstorffi by smaller finger discs and a slightly protruding snont. Oreophryne idenburgensis Zweifel has a much larger tympanum but 678 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM exhibits many characteristics common to wolterstorffi, as does O. brachypus (Werner) which is distinguished by more extensive toe webbing. DISCUSSION The evidence supporting the recognition of many Oreophryne species frequently consists of differences in the diameter of finger and toe dises, and similar minor features. Although it is sometimes possible to demonstrate the statistical significances of such differences in freshly preserved material, it is extremely difficult to make accurate comparisons when the specimens are old and dehydrated. Although a revision of the genus may reveal that wolterstorfi is synonymous with one of the many species currently recognized, it is clearly distinct from those which take priority by date of publication, and should therefore remain a valid name. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I wish to acknowledge my gratitude to Dr. Gunther Peters who made it possible for me to examine the holotype, and to Professor R. F. Whelan of the University of Adelaide for helpful suggestions during the preparation of the manuscript. REFERENCES Barbour, T., 1912: A contribution to the zoogeography of the East Indian Islands. Mem. Mus. comp. Zool., Harvard 44(1): 1-203. Parker, H. W., 1934: A monograph of the frogs of the family Micro- hylidae. London. viii + 208 pp. Van Kampen, P. N., 1919: Die amphibienfauna von Neu-Guinea. Bijdr. Dierck., Amsterdam 21(1): 51-56. 1923: Amphibians of the Indo-Australian Archipelago. EK. J. Brill Ltd., Leiden, 304 pp. Werner, F., 1901: Ueber reptilien und batrachier aus Ecuador und Neu-Guinea. II Reptilien und Batrachier aus Deutseh- Neu-Guinea. Verhandl. Zool. bot. Gesell. Wien, 51: 602-614, PIGMY RIGHT WHALE (CAPEREA MARGINATA) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS, PART 2 By THE LATE HERBERT M. HALE, HONORARY ASSOCIATE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary Skeletal parts of four of seven Pigmy Right Whales stranded on South Australian coasts are discussed in some detail; three are of juveniles, one of an old adult. Body measurements of one young male are given. The skull of an old example, compared to that of juveniles about nine feet in length, exhibits considerable growth changes. In all material in hand the length of the skull is approximately one-fourth of the length, or estimated length, of the entire skeleton. PIGMY RIGHT WHALE (CAPEREA MARGINATA) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS, PART 2‘ By tHe Large HERBERT M. HALE, Honorary Assocratn, Sourn Austrauian Museum Plate 48 and text fig. 1-4 SUMMARY Skeletal parts of four of seven Pigmy Right Whales stranded on South Australian coasts are diseussed in some detail; three are of juveniles, one of an old adult. Body measurements of one young male are given. The skull of an old example, compared to that of juveniles about nine feet in length, exhibits considerable growth changes. In all material in hand the length of the skull is approximately one-fourth of the length, or estimated length, of the entire skeleton. INTRODUCTION The known strandings of Caperea on South Australian coasts occurred in a restricted area bounded by the north coast of Kangaroo {sland and the southern part of Eyre Peninsula. Also, at Victor Harbour, near the western end of Encounter Bay, and not far from Kangaroo Island, one juvenile became fouled in a fishing net in shallow inshore water. The localities are adjacent to, or at, the entrances to Spencer Gulf and Gulf St. Vincent. Although a good number of whales of other species have been seen in these gulls, or have come ashore, there is to date no record of the Pigmy Right Whale travelling north into them, or coming to grief in the shoals there as have many other whales. Seven definite records of Caperea in South Australia are now available; two are from the north coast of Kangaroo Island, the one accidentally netted at Vietor Harbour, three from Port Lincoln Bay, on the western side of the wide entrance to Spencer Gulf (south- eastern coast of Kyre Peninsula) and one from Coffin Bay on the west coast of the Peninsula, opposite to, and only 30 miles from, Port Lincoln, which is one of South Anstralia’s foremost fishing ports, situated on Boston Bay, immediately north of Port Lincoln Bay. (1) Part 1, see Records South Aust. Mus., iv, 1931, pp. 314-319, fig. 4. 680 RECORDS OF THE $.A, MUSEUM ‘he last example to be observed was an adult female which eame ashore on August 16, 1960, on mud flats near ‘*Tulka’’ (referred to below) in Port Lincoln Bay, in an advanced stage of decomposition, Unfortunately, because of urgent commitments, this specimen could not be secured at the time, and subsequently if disappeared. On July 7, 1960, a Caperea accompanied by its calf was seen in Port Lincoln Bay and it seems probable that the female was the one stranded five weeks later. Cuiler (1961, p, 297) records a preguant lemale stranded on a Tasmanian const towards the end of June, 1961. Some vears azo the writer prepared a popular article, published in country newspapers, detailing the characters by which whales, particularly small and insufficiently known species, tay be recognized. Following this, and the 1960 stranding, officers of the Fisheries and Game Department at Port Lincoln stated that it is not uncommon for Pigmy Right Whales to appear in ‘‘Proper Bay’’ (the local name for Port Linco Bay) during the winter and that from time to time several had been stranded near **Tulka’? but had not been reported. Port Lincoln Bay shoals towards its western end, where extensive mud flats ure exposed at low tide. Whales occasionally come ashore on these flats, particularly in the vieinity of ‘Tulka’’, a homestead at the south-western part of the Bay and eight miles from Port Lincoln town. ‘he same thing occurs in Coffin Bay, J. H, Tlamilton (1952, p, 2) suggests that Byron Sound in the West Falkland Island may act as a ‘‘sort of trap’’ and ‘‘that panic at finding themselves in narrow and shoaling waters may have resulted in the stranding of these whales’’, viz, Globicephala, Physeter, Orcinus, Balaenoplera and the Pigmy Right Whale, This pertinent suggestion might well apply to the bays of southern Eyre Peninsula, while the Kangaroo Island strandings of Caperea occurred in shoal waters partly enclosed by a long sand bank loeally known as “The Spit’’. An eighth record is afforded by a tympanie bone recorded by Zeitz (1890, p. 8) who stated, after recording the occurrence ol the juvenile from Victor Harbour ‘‘besides whieh there is an ear bone from the former locality’. This bone has not yet been located in the Museum collections, but the identification is assumed to be correct as Zeitz had the advantage of direct comparison with the tympanics of three other skulls, HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 631 MATERIAL IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM The specimens housed in the Museum, dealt with herein and in Hale, 1931, are as follows: M.1593. Sex unknown, Mounted skeleton with some bones missing. Brownlow, north-east coast of Kangaroo Island. Stranded October 21, 1884. M.2966. Young male. Disarticulated skeleton and _ baleen. Victor Harbour. Entangled in fisherman’s net. September 13, 1887. M.2967, Young male. Plaster east of head. Point Marsden, north-eastern coast of Kangaroo Island. Stranded October 21, 1889. M.5743. Juvenile, sex unknown, Skull and part skeleton. South- western end of Port Lincoln Bay. Stranded prior to 1948, M.6110. Young male. Disarticulated skeleton. South-western end end of Port Lincoln Bay. Stranded December 26, 1955, M.G111. Adult, sex unknown, Coffin Bay. Stranded about 1950. M.1593. Brownlow, Kangaroo Island Neobalaena margmata Hale, 1931, p. 314. The artieulated skeleton previously briefly described by me is that of one of **three individuals in the flesh . . . recetyved at the Museum’’ (Zeitz, 1890, p. 8). The skeleton now hangs in a position where it is more easily accessible than before. In 1931 the vertebral counts was given as cervical, 7; thoracic, 17; lumbar, 3; caudal, 14. In view of the faet that the sternum, first chevron and bones of the left limb are missing, it is probable that a seventeenth short and slender pair of. ribs were also lost through careless maceration, Im such ease the thoracics number 18 and the lumbars 2, an attachment for the first and missing chevron being present posteriorly on the centrum of the second lumbar, This Kangaroo Island example was about 16 feet in length. The skull of this example is in general as shown in Beddard’s firures (1908, pl. VII-TX), with the vertex not much posterior to the nasal bones. M.2966. Victor Harbour, young male Neobalaena marginata Hale, 1931, p. 315, fig. 1. Skull 70 cm. in length (see table 1). A specimen nine feet in body length. 682 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Shull. Viewed from the side the supraoccipital rises in the posterior half to form a rounded elevation, so that the vertex of the skull is well behind the middle of the length of the supraoeetpital, In {ront of the tumidity the contour is concave, with a median longitudinal ridge extending from the anterior end of the supraoecipital to the vertex, About 2 om. anterior to cach oceipital condyle there is a well marked low elevation, 3-4 em, in diameter, The nasals, where exposed, are symmetrical, the inner faces fused ventrally but separated above by a deep groove for the whole length of the bones, including the anterior ends. Vertebrae. in my first record of this example [ stated that the epiphyses are “not, or not completely, anchylosed’’, In fact, as far as can be made out, the epiphyses are all free but several show traces af a composition which had been used to fasten them to the centra, The cervicals are fused but are not thoroughly coalesced. The posterolateral portions of (he neural arches of the last two are incompletely anchylosed while between the centra of five to six there is on the left side a slit through which may he seen the edges of the remnants of the epiphyses. Again, the centra of the sixth and seventh are completely fused only in the ventro-lateral parts of the lett side, while fusion has begun on the right side in the same position; other- wise the centra are narrowly separated and between them can be seen the remains of the two epiphyses; the upper portions of these last, comprising the dursal halves of the epiphyses, are fused ventrally, while below the visible lateral edves of the lower parts of the epiphyses are anchylosed, The cervical mass is wider than high (165: 130) ; (he combined dorsal processes are equal in depth to the neural canal, with the contour of the upper edge convex. The first thoracic, as in the other thoracies, has the neural arch complete and has a short dorsal process, rounded apically and sub- triangular when viewed from the side; the neural canal is very slightly deeper than wide, its depth less than one-third the total height of the vertebra (of, M.5793, ete.). In the second to sixth thoracies the neural canal is deeper than wide (ef. M.5753); the dorsal process of the third is wide, little more than one-third of the total depth of the vertebra, with subparallel sides, and the height less than one and one-third times the greatest width (48:38), The fourth to fifteenth thoracies haye the dorsal process longer and wider, dilated towards the distal end which is subtruncate; the HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 683 tenth has a dorsal process which is one-half the total height of the vertebra, and with its greatest width much less than half its height (54: 80). The neural canal becomes an open groove on the seventh caudal. Ribs. See table 2. Sternum. See fig. 1. Remarks. It will be noted in table 1 that there is less difference between the overall and condylobasal lengths of the skull of the Victor Harbour male than that of other skulls described herein; this is due to the lesser backward prolongation of the exoccipitals, ete. Fig. 1-2. Ventral side of sterna of Caperea, from specimens nine and ten feet in body Jength (x 56). M.2967. Point Marsden, Kangaroo Island. Neobalaena marginata Beddard, 1903, p. 107; Hale, 1931, p. 316, fig. 2 and 3. First five cervicals completely fused; neural arches and centra of sixth and seventh partly free. Ipiphyses of vertebrae not fused with centra, Seventeen pairs of ribs (vide Beddard). Young male, almost 11 feet in length (vide Hale following Stirling’s unpublished notes). Skeleton in Cambridge University Museum. Plaster cast of head in South Australian Museum. ¥ 684 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM M.5753. Port Lincoln Bay. Sex unknown. Skull 67 em. in length (see table 1). A young example stranded prior to 1948; judging by the length of the skull the total body length would have been no greater than that of the Victor Harbour young male (M,2966 herein) previously recorded (Hale, 1931, pp. 315-316, fig. 1, and Davies and Guiler, 1957, pp. 58-582.) The following bones of specimen M.5753 were subsequently brought to the Museum by Mr. G. Cramer. Vertax Vertax Fig. 3-4, Skulls of Caperea; 3, 670 mm., and 4, 1,575 mm,, in overall length (scales very disproportionate). Material. Skull, with squamosal and exoccipital of one side missing; rami of lower jaw with distal portions missing. There were seventeen pairs of ribs but in the first, sixth to eighth and fourteenth only one of the pair was recovered. Cervical vertebra; eleven thoracies, only one to four in sequence; six of the caudals, the first five in sequence; a few chevrons. Skull. Fig. 3. As in the Victor Harbour young male (M.2966), the greatest height occurs in the posterior half of the supraoccipital, where there is a similar marked rounded hump at the level of the HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 685 postero-lateral angles of the frontal; anterior to this the supra- occipital is shallowly concave, with the median longitudinal ridge short and becoming obsoleseent well in front of the abovementioned tumidity. This supraoccipital hump rises above the dorso-lateral edges of the supraoecipital when the skull is viewed from the side. There is also a small and low dorsal tumidity in front of, and about 2 em. from, each vecipital condyle. Nasiils, where exposed, symmetrical, completely fused. the junetion represented by a shallow {rroove which does not reach the anterior ends. Vertebrac. EXpiphyses are completely free on the posterior face of the centrum of the last cervical and on both anterior and posterior laees of all other vertebrae available, All cervicala are fused into a solid mass excepting that anehylosis is asyminetrically not fully complete in the lateral parts of the posterior neural arches, The mass is nearly ball as wide again as deep (195:135) and the combine! dorsal processes are low, subequal in depth to the neural canal, and in profile gently convex, highest at anterior third of length. The first thoracic has the neural arch complete, with a short rounded dorsal process; the depth of the subtriangular canal is equal to one-third of the greatest height of the vertebra and is distinetly wider than deep. In the second thoracie the neural arches are separated dorsally (3 to 4 mm,), The third and fourth have the neural canal a little wider than deep; the dorsal process of the third is narrow and tapering to the apex; it is approximately one-third the depth of the vertebra and is about twice as high as its greatest width; that of the fourth is longer and wider, rounded on upper edge, The thoracic presnmed to be the tenth has the dorsal spine with upper inirgin semicireular, the sides subparallel, and with greatest width less than half its height (45:83); as with the other available thoracics this process is not at all constrieted in the proximal half, and is equal to about one-half the total depth of the vertebra; the neural canal has become smaller than in the preceding vertebrae and is as wide as deep. Ribs. See table 2, The first is less dilated at the distal end than in older examples and also in one of the first pair in M2966, This may be dne to erosion during maceration, or, possibly, the first ribs in the young are not. necessarily symmetrical, Scapulae. Deeper than in M.2966 and with acromion wider and coracoid about twice as long. 686 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Remarks. Apart from the scapulae the most apparent differences from the skeleton of the Victor Harbour young male, M.2966, which is of comparable size, are the shorter anterior dorsal carina on the supraoccipital, the completely fused nasal bones, and the larger vertebrae in relation to the skull length, with the dorsal processes of the thoracics dissimilar in shape; there is also some variation in the ribs (see table 2). M.6110. Port Lincoln Bay. Young male. Skull 84 em. in total length (see table 1). A juvenile 10 feet in body length, collected by members of the Museum staff. This example was noticed swimming sluggishly on or about December 25, 1955; it was stranded on December 26 near ‘“Tulka’’, 8 miles south of Port Lincoln, and was then photographed by Mr. Howard W. Dorward and Mr. ©. L. Gill (see plate 48); these, as in the other photographs published by me in 1931, show the white band along the upper jaw and above the baleen, referred to by Davies and Guiler (1957, p. 581). A fisheries inspector, Mr. D. E. Barnes, informed us of the stranding and the specimen was ‘‘fleshed’’ on the spot by two members of the Museum staff on January 6, 1956. It was then noted that the unfortunate creature had been peppered with bullets from a small calibre rifle; the specimen by this time was considerably decomposed, so no colour notes were possible. Material. Complete skeleton, but with dorsal processes of six thoracics damaged. Measurements in the flesh. Total length, in a straight line, to middle of tail flukes .. .. 38,050 Tip of snout to eye .. 6. se ee ee ee we te te ee ee te te ee 685 Tip of snout to genital slit .- +. 61 ee ee ee te te te es ee 2,140 Tip of snout to origin of dorsal fin... -. ee se se ee nese 2,230 Tip of snout to axilla .. ee ee ee ee ee ee ee re ee te ee ee 1,070 Length of eye 1. 66 ce we oe ee be be be ee ee te ee re ee 40 Length of gape .. 2. ee ee re ee ee te ee te te te te tee 610 Length of dorsal fin (approximately) .. -- ++ e+ s+ se tess 155 Height of dorsal fin .. 6. ee ee ee ee be te re te ne eens 155 Greatest length of pectoral limb .. «+ ++ ee ee ee te te sete 305 Width of caudal fin .. .. - The above measurements were secured by the collectors, Messrs. G. F. Gross and A. Rau. It was noted that the caudal fin had a central notch. Skull (see table 1). The supraoccipital is elevated in the posterior half but distinctly less so than in the two smaller examples (M.2966 and 5753). Also, the median dorsal ridge is conspicuous, almost HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 687 continuous, fading out about three inches before the anterior end of the bone and not quite reaching the foramen magnum. The anterior part of the supraoccipital, in front of the low dorsal hump, is more elevated than in that of the skulls of the two young about nine feet in length. The dorso-lateral occipital edges are strongly produced, not evenly curved as in the smaller skulls, but sinnous and slightly upturned at about the middle of their length. The low dorsal tumidities in front of the condyles are still apparent. The exposed parts of the nasals are fused but the dorsal groove is rather wide and deep, No suture is apparent between the fused basihyal and thryohyals, Veriebrae, Cervical, 7; thoracie, 18; lumbar, 2; caudal, 15; ehevrons, 4, The cervicals are fused together but net completely so; the lateral processes of the last five are partly free on both sides while the eentra of the sixth and seventh are defined by a pair of very short lateral slits, inside which may be seen, in each, remnants of the two epiphyses ; ventrally there is a short space between the sixth and seventh, again with the fused remains of a pair of epiphyses. The greatest width, across the lateral processes of the first cervieal, is much greater than the height (202: 142) and the combined dorsal processes, which slope forwards, are subequal to the depth of the distinctly wider than deep neural canal. Kpiphyses are completely free on the last cervical (posterior) and all other vertebrae, both fore and aft. The first thoracic has the neural arch complete, the distally rounded dorsal process one-filth the total height of the vertebra and the neural canal wider than high, In the second the width of the canal is subequal to the height, iu the remaining thoracics it is higher than wide. The dorsal process of the third to eleventh thoracies are broad, slightly dilated and rounded at distal ends, In the eaudals the neural canal becomes a short open groove on the eighth, Ribs (see table 2). The first rib, relatively, is more expanded than in other young examples examined, inclnding that of the mounted specitmen M.1593, and also in this rib as illustrated by Beddard (1903, pl. IX, fig. 6). Its length is less than two and one-half times the distal width, and its breadth distally exceeds the greatest width of any of the other ribs. 688 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Sternum. Fig. 2. Irregularly subcordate, longer than wide, coneave above for anterior three-fourths of length and with well developed, elongate and asymmetrical articular facets for attachment of first ribs. Scapulae, As shown by Beddard (1903, plate VT) but with upper edges not af all sinuons, but evenly curved, Remarks. The photographs reproduced on pl. 48 herein show the ‘*bowhead’’ character referred to by Davies and Guiler (1957, p. 580, fig. 1). M.6111. Coffin Bay, Eyre Peninsula, Sex unknown Skull, 157.5 em. in total length (see table 1). Part skeleton of a fully adult example collected by members of the Museum Staff. Material, Skull and mandibles. Vertebrae: cervical, 7 and 30 other vertebrae. In the ubsence of a complete suite of ribs it is assumed that 18 are thoracic, 2 lumbar, and caudal 10 plus ? Scapulae are available but the sternum, pelvie bones and chevrons are missing. he bones noted above, before recovery for the Museum, were atanding under a tree on the property of the late Mr, J. Mortlock, A fisherman who knew of the stranding of this large example stated that it came ashore about 1950. Mr. J. G@. Haggarty, then caretaker of the Mortlock station, later supplied a photograph of the animal secured soon after it was stranded and this shows the ‘*bowhead’’ as illustrated by Davies and Quiler (1957, fig, 1). In the paper of the last named authors the locality, us supplied by me, is given as Port Lincoln, but subsequent enquiry revealed that the animal was stranded on a beach at the entrance of Coffin Bay, in the south-western coast of Myre Peninsula and opposite to Port Tineoln on the south-eastern coast. A Sperm Whale, 42 feet in length came ashore here in late May, 1956, and from reports of a late officer of the Fisheries and Game Depart- ment, then stationed at Port Lincoln, Coffin Bay also is a ‘‘trap” for whales. he length of the skull, as supplied to me (4 feet, 74 inches) and sent, to Dr, Guiler, is obviously the length from the anterior margin of the foramen magnum to the tip of the rostrum whereas the overall length is 1,575 mm. Thus it is apparently the largest skull known to date and it would seem that the body length of the animal may have been somewhat in excess of 21 feet. The vertebrae indicate that it was an old individual. HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 689 Tt is possible that there are other discrepancies in the lengths of skulls given by Davies and Guiler, as for example in the Kawau Island skull, in which the skull length was taken from ‘snout to occipital foramen”’, Skull (see table 1). There is a marked difference in the dorsal profile with that of examples with skull 67 em. to 70 em, in total length. The dorsal ridge is strongly elevated for almost the anterior two-thirds of the supraoccipital and the vertex occurs immediately behind the nasals. The sharp-edged occipital expansions are much more prominent than in smaller skulls, and for the posterior two-thirds of their length are inclined upwards instead of slightly downwards, so that, viewed from the side, the posterior part of the profile of the supraoeeipital is nit visible, as if is in the small skulls. Mor about one-third of the length of the supraoecipital the dorsum is flattened and the pair of bosses immediately above the condyles are obsolescent. Vertebrae, The epiphyses are thoroughly fused, and incorporated with, the centra of all vertebrae available. The cervicals are fused into a solid mass excepting for the usual elongate foramina between the lateral processes. There are traces of the fusion of the dorsal processes in the last three, most distinct in the sixth-seventh, The combined dorsal processes are more elevated than in the young and the mass is relatively wider (420; 270); the width in relation to the height remains approximately the same, however, the greater elevation of the dorsal processes having been accompanied by a proportional widening of the lateral processes af the mass. There is a prominent facet on each side of the dorsal processes of the first and second vertebrae, oval in shape, and 30 to 40 mm, in depth, The first thoracic, as in the other dorsal vertebrae, has the neural arch complete; the neural canal is deeper than wide. The canal is markedly deeper than wide in the second, and is deeper than wide in all of the other thoracies. The dorsal processes, apart from that of the cervieals, are much as figured by Beddard but from the eighth backwards the apex is rounded, allowing for the fact that the seventh is broken; in any case, this is a variable feature, The lateral processes are relatively wider than in younger examples, particularly noticeable from the tenth backwards. 690 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM In the eighth caudal the neural canal becomes a very short open groove. Ribs (see table 2). Only eight pairs, third to eighth, eleventh and fourteenth, are amongst the total of twenty-two individual ribs in hand; none is available posterior to the fourteenth. The eleventh to fourteenth are damaged proximally and distally so that their lengths given in the table must be taken as approximate. There is a marked thickening of all ribs, particularly apparent in the posterior ones as compared to the condition of the very young in which the dilation is almost wafer-like as the hinder edge is approached. Scapulae. Much as figured by Beddard (1903, pl. VII). The dimensions are: width 53 em.; depth 30 em. SKULLS Taste 1. Turere Juventces, 9 FEET TO 10 Freer in Lenatu, AND ONE ADULT, Cc, 21 Freer Registration Number... . M.2966 M.5753 M.6110 M.6111 Measurements mm. |PerCent}mm. |PerCent|mm. |PerCent|mm. /Per Cent fstnaeetoals es ARSEined Rae Overall length .........2--.04 700 | 100-07 | 670 | 104-68 | 840 | 103-70 | 1,575 | 105-70 Condylobasal length ........-. 695 | 100-0 640 | 100-0 810 | 100-0 | 1,490} 100-0 Length from anterior margin of foramen magnum to end of TOStHrUM ...0eee cece cece eens 655 94-2 565 | 88-2 760 | 93-8 |1,420) 95:3 Length of supraoccipital from anterior margin of foramen MAGNUM cere eee eseveee 265 38-1 290 | 45-3 315 38-8 570 | 38-2 Anterior end of supraoccipital to tip of rostrum ...........005 390 | 656-4 275 | 42-9 445 54-9 850 | 57-0 Postero-lateral processes of maxillae to end of rostrum... | 475 | 68-2 430 | 67-1 570 70:3 |1,105 | 741 Postero-lateral processes of maxillae to level of posterior of exoccipitals .............46- 225 32:3 240 37-5 270 33-3 470 31-6 Depth of maxilla at level of anterior margin of supra- occipital ... 0.6... cece ee eee 98 14-1 100 15-6 98 12-1 195 13-0 Greatest height of skull ....... 205 29-5 205 32-0 210 25-9 470 31-5 Width between squamosals .... 370 53-5 -— — 410 50-6 770 51-6 Width between postero-lateral processes of frontals ........ 330 47-4 365 57-0 380 46-9 750 50-3 Width of frontal at concave outer MATPIN 2... eee eee eee eee 95 13-6 103 16-0 115 14-2 180 12-0 Width across occipital condyles. 115 16-5 125 17-9 120 14-8 205 13-7 Length of mandible .......... 550 79-1 — _— 680 83-9 | 1,280 85-9 Depth of mandible at coronoid. . 75 10-7 15 11-7 85 10-4 185 12-4 Depth of mandible at middle of length 1... .ccee cece erences 60 8-6 80 12-5 80 9-8 225 15-1 M.2966 and M.6110 are young males ; the sex of the other two is unknown. HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 691 M2966 and M.6110 are young males; the sex of the other two is unknown, In these young males, where the length of the animal is known (nine and ten feet) the skull is less than four fimes in the total length of the skeleton, while in a Kangaroo Island speciinen about 16 feet in length (M,1593 herein), it is only slightly more than four times in the length. Iv Beddard’s figure of a skeleton a little more than 13 feet in length, the proportions are shown as four and one-half times in the total length, although this author states ‘‘The proportions of the length of the skull to that of the entire skeleton including the skull are as 1:5%"’ (Beddard, 1903, p. 101, and pl. VIT). All length measurements, and the heights of the skulls, in table 1 are parallel to, and at right angles to, a median base-lme, taken from tlie level of the ventral angles of the squamosals to the anterior ends of the premaxillae. The length along the curve of the arched profile, obviously, ig In excess ol that of the base-line, but not to the extent one would expect from the appearance of the skulls oriented as noted above, There ig some variation in the degree of arching. The percentage of the base-line distance from the foramen magnum to the end of the rostrum, as against measurements from the same points along the curve of the dorswm is 105 (M,2966), 114 (M.5753), 108 (M.6110) and 110 (M.6111), In the young male ten feet in length (M.6110) the skull is more depressed than in the others and has the supraoceipital considerably longer in proportion to the condylobasal length, although less convex dorsally. The median length of the dorsal eurve of the two smallest skulls is affected by the prominent posterior supraoccipital hump, which ig much lower in M,6110 and absent in the adult, Tn the skull of M.2966 the distance between the occipital condyles and the posterior level of the exoecipitals is very short, only one-sixth of that im the other two small skulls, The relative depth of the maxillae, measured from the point where they reach the premaxillae at the anterior end of the supraoceipital, is variable, and may differ in the right and left bones, in which ease the zreater depth is cited in the table, Measurements alone do not demonstrate adequately the differences between the largest skull and that of juveniles, A review of the limited number of South Anstralian skulls available shows that the posterior supraoceipital hump, the rounded summit of which 1s the vertex, is a character of the very young. This tumidity becomes Ag2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM far less prominent after a body length of ten feet is attaimed (Beddard’s 1903 figures show little indication of it beyond a slight elevation of the median dorsal ridge anterior to the ‘‘O'’ on his fig. 1 on pl. LX). In the larger of the Kangaroo Island specimens, with the skeleton almost 16 feet in length, the vertex is not far back from the unterior end of the supraoceipital and the carina behind this is continuous, slightly convave and rising very little at the site of the juvenile rounded hump, In the skull, over 157 em. in length, of the old adult the posterior part of the otherwise strong median dorsal ridge is flattened, with no indication of an elevation—in faet the carina begins to curve upwards at a point about one-third of its length from the foramen magnum; thenee it is but little curved in profile and is slightly concave not far posterior to the short gentle convexity before the anterior end of the supravecipital, The sharp-edged lateral occipital ridges also alter with growth. The skulls 67 em, and 70 em, in overall length have their margins evenly curved and very slightly bent down excepting near the anterior ends. In the male ten feet in length, with 84 em. skull, the lateral ridges shaw indications of uptnrning at about the middle of their length, The 123 em. skall of the Kangaroo Island specimen exhibits a more apparent wpturn of the ridges, particularly in the exoecipital- aquamosal part, so that in sideview the median dorsal carina is hidden at the extreme posterior end (see also Oliver, 1922, pl. 1), In the Old adult, with skull 157.5 em. in length, the uprising of this lateral ridge hides the posterior half of the supraoeceipital when the skull is viewed from the side (ef, fig, 3 and 4 herein), Tt must be noted that the last-named drawings are from photographs taken to show the dorsal contour of the skull: therefore there is some distortion of the lateral parts, particularly apparent in the frontal and squamosal. The mid-length depth of the mandibles increases, relatively, with age, but on the other hand the bulla of the ear bones of the young is not only smoother, but proportionately strikingly larger, than in the adult or even in an example 16 feet, in length. In the last pair of ribs the width-length is taken from the longer uf the pair, The ribs of the young male M.6110 were tagged in sequence as they were removed from the carcass. Beginning with the eighth pair the widening of the posterior riba, so marked in all but the last, becomes apparent; the length of the ribs in table 2 is taken in a straight line from head to distal end, 693 HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE ms a — | OL 09% 61 | 68 08% o% ax = a os — | OI Ore ce | G8r 0ze Ob | SL G0% oF = — | O81 olt oo | Lt Oth 09 | 6-01 raK4 9-81 OL OF | L-€T OF | 29 | TSI OSt cg | LTT ore LSI 008 ost | T-eI C6h gg | SOL | Gh | 89 | OST ale LFI 0g8 OZ1 | OBI 008 09 | BPI Ott | 09 | L3r OIF 16 006 og | nit | ots 09 | S€I coro | 9-01 Bot — | = — | Ter OF 09 | 6€T C68 ce | GTI 91h = = — | 36 CSF cp | BI GRe ce | 0-01 Ott 6-9 018 eo | bb OSF ce | OOT O88 ge | LS 868 | quay tag | wauey | PLL queg rag | WIFuErT | WBPLA | IE Teg | WAU] | WIPIAA | 34e9 Jeg | WAFUET I119'W O119' WH ecLcW 9962 qn ‘ON "893 IINGY ANQ GNV SATINGANL AAA, dO SHIY WOIUaLSOg 40 HLONG'T OL AGVIG dO HLGIM ISHLVAUL) “% WIAVY, said ANOD 694 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM With the material in hand the data are too meagre to allow any very definite conclusions, particularly as so many of the posterior ribs of the adult are missing and those available are more or less damaged. However, in the four examples the thirteenth rib is widest in relation to the length while in general the eighth to eleventh tend to become longer in proportion to the width. REFERENCES CITED Beddard, Frank E., 1903: ‘Contribution towards a knowledge of the osteology of the Pigmy Whale (Neobalaena marginata).”’ Trans. Zool. Soc., London, XVI, 1903, pp. 87-110, pl. VIIT-IX. Davies, J. L. and Guiler, E. R., 1957: ‘‘A note on the Pygmy Right Whale, Caperea marginata Gray.’’ Proc. Zool. Soe., London, 129, pp. 579-590, pl. 1-2. Guiler, E. R., 1961: ‘‘A pregnant female Pygmy Right Whale.” Austr. Journ. Sci., 24, pp. 297-298. Hale, Herbert M., 1931: ‘‘The Pigmy Right Whale (Neobalaena marginata) in South Australian waters.’’ Ree. S. Austr. Mus., IV, pp. 314-319, fig. 1-4 (refs.). Hamilton, J. H., 1952: ‘‘Cetacea of the Falkland Islands.’? Commun. Zool. del Mus. de Hist. Nat. de Montevideo, IV (num. 66), pp. 1-6. Oliver, W. R. B., 1922: ‘‘A Review of the Cetacea of the New Zealand Seas -1.’’ Proc. Zool. Soc., London, pp. 559-561, pl. 1 (refs.). Zietz, A. 1890: ‘‘A list of the whales and Dolphins of the South Australian coast in the Public Museum, Adelaide.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., XIII, pp. 8-9. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 48 A young male Caperea marginata, ten feet in body length, stranded on flat at Port Lincoln Bay (upper photograph by courtesy Mr. If. W. Dorward, lower by Mr. GC. L. Gill). Ree. S.A. Musktum Ta face jaye “—* ood | Teta # papi £ a ane, ae c _ ee ws ee iad i> Vor 14, Puare 48 aa al ~ A NEW METEORITE FIND FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, CURATOR OF FOSSILS AND MINERALS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Summary The external features, mineralogy, and structure of a new aerolite from the Millicent area of South Australia are described. Four stones, found within an area of a half-mile radius, are evidently individuals of a meteorite shower. A fifth stone, discovered forty-two miles to the north, shows certain external and textural differences from the remainder of the group, but is believed to be a part of the same fall, which is here named the Lake Bonney Meteorite. A NEW METEORITE FIND FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, Curator or Fossms anp MINeErRAts, Souta Austrrauian Museum Plates 49-51 and text fig. 1 SUMMARY The external features, mineralogy, and structure of a new aerolite from the Millicent area of South Australia are described. Four stones, found within an area of a half-mile radius, are evidently individuals of a meteorite shower. A fifth stone, discovered forty-two miles to the north, shows certain external and textural differences from the temainder of the group, but is believed to be a part of the same fall, which is here named the Lake Bonney Meteorite. INTRODUCTION A stony meteorite weighing 1.9 kg. was discovered by Mrs. B. G. McDonald of Millicent on October 21, 1961, in sand dune country between Lake Bonney and the sea, thirteed miler S.S.W, of Millicent township in the South-Hast of South Australia. Three further stones were discovered on subsequent visits to the area. The four stony meteorites have a complete fusion erust and are not the broken fragments of one large mass. One of the stones was found shattered into several pieces and scattered over a distance of five square feet. The pieces are easily put together, and the shattering is believed to be of recent date. Weights of the four finds are given below, and their locations shown on the locality map. The numbers refer to specimens registered in the Mineral Collection of the South Australian Museum, G.7345 .. .. 1.96 kg. G.7346... .. 538.64 grams—(total weight of fragments) G.7347 .. .. 56.70 grams — .. .. 205.55 grams The four stones were all found within an area of a half mile radius, close to the small peninsula known as Jacky Point, which projects pected ds into Lake Bonney. The co-ordinates of Jacky Point are 37° 45 §., 140° 18’ E. In addition, a further stone of 283.5 grams (G.7579) was found, also by Mrs. McDonald, at Nora Creina Bay, forty-two miles along the coast to the north-west. 696 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM S&S) MILLICENT AREA fi. LAKE GEORGE VN SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA Y With inset map showing location of Lake Bonney meteorite find. MILLICENT © SOUTHERN OCEAN @ METEORITE FIND v2 Mie } Scale in miies. | 5 Serena —— ease ——— teem — teomerat———— emt 3 Ls Hig. 1. Map of Millicent area, South-East of South Australia, with inset map showing location of Lake Bonney meteorite find. CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 697 LOCATION OF FINDS The strip of dune country between Lake Bonney and the sea averages one mile in width. The more stable dunes carry a serub vegetation, but most of the area is subject to drift. After leaving the the road !rom Millicent, access at the northern end of the lake is restricted to four- wheel drive vehicles, and the region is largely unfrequented, Beeause of the highly unstable environment in which the finds have been made, stones lying on the surface can be uncovered and covered again very quickly by drifting sand. It is highly probable therelore, that other stones remain to be found in the area. The Nora Creina find was loeated in a similay dune sand environment within a half mile of the sea, NATURE OF FALL The eoneentration of four of the five finds in the Jacky Point dren suggests that he original fall oceurred in this vicinity, and that if was in the fort: of a shower of stowy meteorites. No evidence is available for the direction of the fall, but it is probable that part of the shower fell into the sea and part into the lake. Tf the Nora Crema stone was found iz situ, and is also a part of the Lake Bonney fall, the area of the strewn field was considerable, the long axis of the distribution ellipse being over forty miles long. Alternatively, as the general drift along the coast is to the north, it is conceivable that the Nora Creina stone could have been transported northwards and finally washed ashore. If this possibility is acknowledged, then further stones could be found anywhere along the coastal strip north from Lake Bonney, A further possibility, considered to he the most likely, is that the stones have been transported by aborigines at some time in the past. Snpport for this view is given by the numerous native camp- sites in the area, and the fact that one of the stones was found in close proximity to one of these sites, From the available evidence it is concluded that the Nora Creina stone, althongh showing some differences from the Lake Bonney group, is part of the same fall. Tt will therefore be included as an individual stone of the group, which is here named the Lake Bonney Meteorite and is described below. 698 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM DESCRIPTION OF THE LAKE BONNEY METEORITE Fixrernat Features The largest stone (G.7345, plate 49, A) is a roughly equi-dimensional block, very tough and compact and brownish-black in colour, The flat surface shown at the base of the photograph is believed to he a fracture surface. The stone is completely covered by a fusion crust with an average thickness of 0.5 mm. The orientation of the meteorite during flight can be determined, and frontal, lateral and rear surfaces identified. The flat fracture surface presumably developed late in fight, modifying the original shape and giving the stone its block-like form. No well-marked apex is developed on the frontal surface, which is smooth and close-textured, with a few nodular projections of fused nickel-iron, There are a few fine ridges of fused material distributed at random. Faint flow-lines ean be seen passing from the frontal to the lateral surfaces. The lateral surfaces show regmaglypts with no marked linear trend. The rear surface shows shallow regmaglypts, and the generally smooth surface possesses areas pitted with small circular depressions, These are well seen under low power microscopic examination (x30). They occtir in isolated patches, and with one exception (on a lateral face) are confined to the rear surface, Certain portions of the rear surface show the development of a network of fine cracks, These are well shown on plate 49, A. G.7346 and G.7347 both show a fusion erust similar to G.7345. Nodules of fused nickel-iron are more common, some of which are broken and appear like burst bubbles. The Nora Creina stone (G.7579) has a highly scoriaceous crust, the nodular surface being greatly accentuated and producing a stone of markedly different appearance from the remainder of the Lake Bonney group. MinenavoaicaL Composrrion Thin sections cut from four of the five stones have been examined, and the following minerals identified ;— Opaque Minerals: Nickel-iron; Nickel-iron occurs as irregular branching masses, as grains, and as rims around the chondri. Troilite; Troilite is present in amoeboid masses and as small grains in all the thin sections studied. The largest mass observed CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 699 measured 2x 1mm, It also oceurs in association with chondri as a rim, or partially and sometimes completely enclosed within chondri. Composite grains of troilite and nickel-iron are common. The opaque minerals constitute approximately 15% of the stones, Troilite is in excess of nickel-iron in the Lake Bonney group, and equal in proportion with nickel-iron in the Nora Creina stone, The smallest stone (G.7347) has very little nickel-iron. Silicate Minerals: The silicate minerals, olivine and orthopyroxene, constitute approximately 75%-80% of the stones. Olivine is in excess of orthopyroxene. They occur in both echondri and groundmass. Olivine: The olivine, which shows little alteration, has a eomposi- tion of 25 mole per cent FeaSi Os (determination by Dr. B. H. Mason, American Museum of Natural History). It is predominant in the Nora Creina stone. Orthopyroxene: The orthopyroxene is non-pleochroic aud has low birefringence. The fibrous structure is well shown in the chondri, and in some individual crystals in composite olivine-orthopyroxene ehondri. Plagioclase feldspar: Single erystals of plagioclase were noted in the stones G.7346, G.7347 and the Nora Creina stone. Glass: The laths of olivine in the barred olivine chondri are separated by glassy material, Some glass also oceurs in veins, Tron Oxides: Limonite is present in all the stones, as an oxidation produet of nickel-iron, and it occurs in and adjacent to veins. It is most common in the two smaller stones, where it colours much of the thin section. Opaqne material, black under oblique reflected light, is found in veins together with limonite, and also associated with the nickel-iron and troilite. Occasionally it oceurs as isolated grains. It is believed to be magnetite. Battey (1962) reports magnetite from the Wairarapa Valley meteorite (New Zealand) and it has been reported from a number of other chondrites, Chloride; Lawrencite: (ferrous chloride) was observed as a green exuda- tion on the freshly cut surface of two of the stones. 700 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM Srructure The Nora Creina stone differs from the others of the group in showing well-developed chondri. They are of the followmg types :»— i, Eecentrie radiating chondri of fibrous orthopyroxene. ii. Granular olivine chondri, iii. Barred olivine chondri, iv. Composite olivine-orthopyroxene chondri. The chondri of the first type are frequently almost spherical in form with clearly defined margins separating them from the matrix. They generally show ‘‘brush"’ or undulose extinction, The granular olivine chondri are less well differentiated from the matrix, and do not usually show the same spherical outline. The individual olivine grains in the coarser chondri often show subhedral form, and small irregular olivine grains oecur commonly between larger grains in the chondrule. In one ease two granular olivine chondri are merged together to form a double chondrule shaped like a figure-of-eight. Barred olivine chondri are infrequent, Interstitial material in these forms appears to be glass. The composite olivine-orthopyroxene chondri comprise alternating prismatic layers of the two minerals, or the chondrule consists of a central section of fibrous orthopyroxene with marginal areas of barred olivine. Nickel-iron is found incorporated in some of the chondri. Many are partially or completely surrounded by a rim of nickel-iron and troilite. The average diameter of the ehondri is 1 mm.,, the largest heing 3 mm. The matrix consists of an aggregate of granular orthopyroxene and olivine with interstitial areas of nickel-iron and troilite. The Nora Creina stone does not show the brecciation common in many chondrites. Veins are common, frequently showing an anastomosing pattern. They eut both the matrix and the chondri and are filled with iron oxides and glassy material. The largest stone (G.7345) shows the chondrule types of the Nora Creina stone (with the exception of the barred olivine chondri). However the chondri are less well differentiated from the ground mass into which they tend to merge. One distinctive chondrule consists of a cross-hatched serics of ortho-pyroxene laths. This type of micro- structure has been referred to by Krinov (1960) as a complex-grated chondrule. CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 701 Ohondritic structure is also poorly developed in the other stones of the Lake Bonney group. CLASSIFICATION Determination of the olivine composition of the Lake Bonney and Nora Creina stones places them in the group of olivine- hypersthene chondrites (Mason, 1962). The fact that the olivine composition of the Nora Creina stone is the same as that of the Lake Bonney group supports the view put forward in this paper that all the stones form part of the same fall. CONCLUSIONS From the available evidence it is concluded that the five stones constitute a fall of stony meteorites in the vicinity of Jacky Point, Lake Bonney. The Nora Creina stone is not believed to have been found im situ, and its separation from the remainder of the group by a distance of over 40 miles is thought to be due to removal after fall by natural, or more probably, human agencies. The differences in structure and external features observed between the Nora Creina stone and the rest of the group are interpreted as resulting from variation in the original meteorite mass before disruption in the atmosphere, and to differences in their terrestrial history. Development of iron oxides is variable within the stones. ‘Two of them, however, show considerable oxidation, which suggests that the fall is not a recent one. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author extends his grateful thanks to Mrs. B. G. McDonald of Millicent, the discoverer, and to Mr. MeDonald, for making the meteorite available for study, and for their hospitality and help in the search for further finds; also to Mr. Dave Schultz of Rendelsham for providing transport and leading a search party into the Lake Bonney area. Dr. Brian Mason of the American Museum of Natural History kindly made available determinations of the olivine composition incorporated in this paper. “tt 702 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM REFERENCES Battey, M. H., 1962: ‘‘The Wairarapa Valley, New Zealand, Chon- drite.’’ Miner. Mag. 33 (257), p. 73. Krinov, EH. L., 1960: ‘‘Principles of Meteoritics,’’ Pergamon Press. Mason, B., 1962: ‘‘The Classification of Chondritie Meteorites.’’ Amer. Mus. Novit. No. 2085. EXPLANATION OF PLATES 49-51 PLATE 49 A. The largest stone of the Lake Bonney Meteorite group (G@.7345). View showing rear surface with shallow regmaglypts, pitting and development of fine cracks. Plat fracture surface shown at base of photograph, B. Photomicrograph of G.7345 showing orthopyroxene chondrule (diameter 1.5 mm.) in ground mass of nickel-iron and troilite (black), olivine and orthopyroxene. The large white area is a hole in the thin section. PLATE 50 A. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) showing on the left a granular olivine chondrule with rim of nickel-iron, and a barred olivine chondrule on the right. The latter (long axis 1.5 mm.) is traversed by a vein filled with iron oxides. B. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) (x 40 approx.). A spherical ortho- pyroxene chondrule, finely fibrous, with small embayments filled with nickel-iron, appears on the left of the photograph; and an eccentrically radial fibrous orthopyroxene tchondrule is seen on the right. PLATE 51 A. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) showing granular olivine chondrule in the centre (long diameter 1.6 mm.). A composite chondrule (olivine and ortho- pyroxene) with nickel-iron rim appears at the top right of the photograph. B. Photomicrograph of G.7347 (x 40 approx.). Chondritic structure is poorly developed. Two chondri of orthopyroxene in the ceutre of the photograph merge into the ground mass. The black areas are nickel-iron and troilite. at. 14, Poarn 49 Vv UM Mus A Ss nyrt me, Ri To fdew pate FOR) Ree. S.A. Musecm Von. 14, Phare 50 Rue. SAL Mosreew Vou. 14, Piarne ot 704 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM Pace Pact Cassin .. -- othe ot we serve OP desertor, Gyomys ., -- coe on TTR castaneothorax, ‘Cinclogoma .. 344, n47, 348, 349, 350, 363, 365, 466 eastanotuin, Cinclosoma , » "34, "346, 347, 348, 349, 853, 358, 360 castanotum, Cinclosoma castanotum 354, ae Casuarina .. ee ee ee ee ee es oe 286, 287 enurinns, Eptesious pumilug .. .. .. 180 centralis, Smitthopsis erassicaudata 155, 156 cephalotes, Veturiug .. .. .. 489, 490, 493 corvinuc, Notomys «+ ve» 176, 177, a 191 Ghara ics cy dy Sy ed ale ee be oe BE, 68 Chlamydera os 6 cu be ve ee vt as sal Chlenias +. 4+ 4. +. +» 182, 185, 188, 139 chrysogaster, Hydromys .. .. 178, 189, 191 cicero, Kuanider es ce ce ee ae ee BTA, BBS ciliata, Limnimetrn io. vee. ee ee ee) 471 Cinclosoma ,, 337, 339, 340, ‘B41, 442, 348 einnamomeum, Cineloanma -. d42, B43, 344, B46, 348, 349, 360, 368. 366 cinpa momen, Cinelosoma ‘etnnanno: TACUM wey a ee os oe ae ee os BGO elarum, Cinclosoma castanotum .. 343, B44, od6, 337, pee 8 356, 357, 358 Clausadinyehus ,. ,. ey ve we ye ey) 118 clovedonense, Patarntomon ,. .. 44, 75, 76, 78, 79 elypeomarginatus, Passalus ., » ~, "490 Onemodus ¢. ee ee ae > oe ev O70 enleopteraldes, ** ‘Lamprodema'' o- or BIB collaris, Fontejus .. a... as 875, 378, 379 colonicus, Chaerephon plicatus .. ., 181 comminrcitlis, Saxostrea .. .. .. -, 6414 eonditor, Leporillus .. 4. .. 175, 190, 191 confinis, Acerentulus .. 6... -+ ae ee © 90 consanguineus, Dieuches .. .. 431, 454, 465 consucidlis, Elasmolomus -. -. -. -. 459 conspicillatus, Diplodactylus . 545, 552, 553 eonspiciatus, Lagorthestus .. 44, 166, 188, 189, 190, 191 constricta, Sminthopsis murina .. .. 106 corbienlaris, Corbidinyebus 2. +. 107, 108 Corbidinyehus rege ce En og oh feet LO cordata, Alloeador .. see 250 crassicauduta, Sminthopsis . 4 “458, 188, 191 cristicauda, Dasyeereus .. .. 1d, 137, 188, 189, 191 erucifera, Oreophryne .. 4. 9... 2. 677 Cryplocoris 2 4. .. 2. e. ATR, B74, B82 Cryptostemma = Arctatheca) vy oae GIL evyiicnlus, Orvetolagus ., ,, .. 2. 183, 191 evelosticha, Chlenins .. .. .. 185, 196, 138 Cyfenus os be bl be cole: eof makes 48 eylindricus, Polyaspinus .. .. 115, 116 danitus, Acerentulus 2 .. 2. -. .. 76, 7 darlingtonil, Hvla ,- .- -, ,. os ye 858 BashegecOs +5 wr few es on ps oh us” ohOD Daasyurops: yo oy. oe nsven oe as ew 4, 44 Dasyurus oa os sales ee ew ve Da 187, ‘190 deltoides, Plebidomax .. .. -. .- -.| 841 destructar, Walotydeus .. .. 2. .. 607, 612 Diarthrophallus .. 1 ee ve ee ee ve 488 diemenianus, Dromiccius .- .. .. 414, 416 Diouches .. .. 873, 427, 488, 430, 431, 487 dingo, Canis familiaris . 178, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191 Diplodactylugs .. .- wi pe ye wory G45 Diprotodon .. .. .. 2, 2 22, “41, 42, 46, 50 dirempus, Oxyeanng . .. 2. ac es ae BOB distans, Centrotrombidium ,. .. .. -- 483 distanti, Dieuches ,, .. 443, 449, 444, 465 distyla, Casuarina... .. 2. -. -- 2. 645 doderoi, Acorentomon .. .. «. 63, 79, 81 domesticus, Melis cattns ,. .. 184, 188, 191 dovei, Cinclosoma punctatum .. .. 351, #52 drake, Tiagis wa es le wh vw ve ve BOO Dromieeius ». .. .. +. to ce oy Yd, 418 Dromornis si: 1. 1. ve (es we ae ae 418 Drvimoag oe pe pe ee ee ee ee oBdA, BAT dugesii, Trichobius .. 2. 2. 24 «. 477, 478 fundasi, Cinclosoma castonotum ., 354, 856 duodecimpilosa, Diarthrophallus .. 487, 489, 493, 495, 496 ecaudatus, Clhoeropus .. —- ., 160, 188, 191 obeainna, PYTASOR- ae avr et pe ey we G4 Elawmplomus o. 1. ay 2+ ee 487, 428, 452 clophantoyus, Pachyornis rk at oy A418 enigmations, Dieughes .. . 42, 440 Eosentomon .. we we we we ey “65, 69, 74 Epiceratodus .. 6. . Sa veers oP epipbenus, Brachytremella .. 487, 488, 493 evemiann, Perameles 151, 159, 160, 188, 9 Brldeda oy ve on os ae ve ov oe O72, 873 errana, Johnatoniana .., vs y- va ne "483 ‘‘erythrothorax?? apis sae eas- tancothorax) . fey ge ae 2005 Buander «4 373, 374, $81, 383, 388, 390 Buculyptug ., .. .. +. S87, 280, 293, 858 Eucoametias see ee ae ea ce 2a 872, B77 Buowenia .. .. ss .. -. -- -. 89, 46, 50 Bupetes a. ve $o 38 42 92 Bal cuphnes, Tiypsipyrgias .. ee se gs ce 5e BOL everardensis, Notomys aleXis ., -. +. 177 eyroins, Notoniys fuseus ., +. 176, 177, 190 eyrensis, Epiceratodus ., ,. 2... a. aT fallax, HyIa vs se ne wt ee ee ee te 856 fasciata, Cryptovoris . .. .. 875, 380, 382 fnsciatus, Myrmecobius . 157, 189, 190, 191 fasciatus, Povameler .. , -. -. oy 4. DAN ferragua, Macropus . y. se we ue ee 50 fieldi, Peeudomys .. .. +. ++ «+ 172, 191 finitimus, Dienehes .. .« ‘432, 4387, 439, oe Havipes, Platilen .. .. 2. 2) 2. ee flaviventris, Taphozous .... -. ,- 181, 191 Fontejanus Sy Seto tre ew 351 FOnNt@jU8 +5 os es we oe 04 Olay ‘B74, 376 Forresti, Psoudomys . .. .: za ae 198 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 705 Page frenatns, peer se ee aed 224. Bd fulvolavatus, Flyé romys vhryaogagler . 178 fuseus, Notomys .s ou. ce ee ue ae DTZ, 191 . 545, 546, 547, 548, 550 Genyornis sss, se ve ay 48, 48, 413, 418 geoffroyi, Dasyurua .. 152, 153, 187, 188, 189, 191), 191 geoffroyi, Nyetophilus .- ++ +5 ys 180, 191 Reorginne, Acwein .. 4. see oe 861 gigas, Macroderma ss «+ 150, 180, + 187, 191 @lauca, Qullitris .. 2. 2. 2... .. G45 Globicephala Sue's gees eo te er we | 880 goldei, Cinglosoma ajux .. 2. 2. 6. BAT goliath, Procoptodon ,. .. 1. . as 50 gouldi, Chalinolobus .. -. ., -. -. 180, 191 gracilare, Neotrombidium .. .. .. 4. 475 gtucilipes, Dromieeiug .. .. 4. -y +e 417 gracilipes, Neo{rombidium . .. ., .. 472 grandicus, Diouthes .. -. -. .. .. 481, 433 galeatua, Diplodactylus . gregoryi, Fipieeratodus 2... 6. 4) ae AT greyi, Bcoteinns .. 6. .) 6. +. .- 181, 191 halluentus, Dasyurus .. -. .- 158, 188, 190 Halotydeus +) ce ve ey ve ay oe GOD, G15 Helvionella .. .+ 2. te ev +e 383, 589 hemileucurua, Conilurus 4.4... 174 hermannsburgonsis, Pseudomys ., 173, 174, 182, 188 higginsi, Polyaspinus ., .. ae eee ts hile 1G, Oxye: WUNUS ve et weet "862, 65, 666 hilliert, Dasyoe reus eristicauda -. 164 hirsutus, Tatieleas ss ey ee ae oe 431, 439 hirsutus, Lngorchestes .. ,. 151, 167, 187, 188, 191 hirtipes, Sminthopsis -. -. .. .. 155, 191 Be a 2 eye Lp ay 3 hse ». 858 Thylela io. 6. oe ee vere G75 Hyolithes s,s. + 2. vs B81, 586-7, 596-7 Hypsiprymnodon .. .. O68 idenburgenals, ccaphry ye ct owscnn OTT Tmporata 2. 6. aa ee ee we we e. 286, 287 ingrami, Phase oale o% .. 54, 191 inkatu, Chleniax .. 131, 133, 135, 136, 137, 138, 189 inornuta, Petrogale ,, .. a 4a 165 insularis (== Elasmolomus v- -albun } +» 457, 458, 465 Tonesenelhime oy. 2. 46 oe th we aa 678 iowaense, Proturentomon we ce ae a. Gd, 78 lridomyrmex 2... 22 ee pe ne SBI lig, HVA ee sys uae 1. a. 253, 26 Ts0odon ss ca ve ye we “187, 188, 159, 190 Jolnstoniana ., .. 2+ +. +. 477, 481, 483 kampeni, Oreophryne .. .- 5, -, -. 677 kershawl, Oxyeanis .. .0 +. ey. ce ey) 665 koebeli, Eritingis .. .. ., -, -, -, 260 Paar Kogia ,, 197, 198, 202, 204, 215, 216, 217, 991, 299, 293, 227, 561, 576 lacertosus, Euander - 373, 374, 383, 385, 386 Lagorelestes ., ses. a ce ee ey ee) Hh lagotis, Thalacomys .. 167, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191 “Qamprodema’’ 2. -, .. +e a: ve 373 lanceolatum, Santalum .. .. -. ey 4. 6645 lapidarius, Biseirus cove se ew ee we G16 larapinta, Sminthopsis .. .. 156, 188, 191 148 lasiandra, Melaleuca .. os seve luteralis, Petrogale .. 164, 187, 18, 189, 191 latifrong, Lusiorhinus .. .. 2. -. .. 168 latisecuta, Johnstoniana .. .. .. .. 483 latus, Boshbequius .. 4. 4+ ve ve +s 429 Laxamana (—=Narbo) .. .. -. .- .. 463 leni, Allocader .. -. 4. ve ee ee ys 250 lefroyi, Compseuta ., .. 6. cee oe Leggadino ., .. .. «. “179, 187, 189, 190 leiehardti, Lagorehestes conspicillatus 167, 168 lesneuri, Bettongia .. 49, 151, 169, 183, 187, 188) 189, 191 Jeucoceras, Diewehes - .2 6. 2. 2... 481 leueura, Thalaeomys 5. se ee ee ey ae 158 liueatus, Poeantius .. .. .. +. .. $62, 463 lineosus, Elasmolomus ., .. 2: 2 ae 459 Lingulella .. 4. -. -. -- 583 littoralis (—Plasmolomus ordidus) » Jae, 465 longienudatus, Notomys .- .. +» 12 191 longicollis, Dieuches ,. .. .. 431, 450, 465 longipes, Narbo .. ., ev pean 463 lunata, Onychogale .. .. 166, 189, 190, 191 lysiphloia, Acacia -. 6. es ve ve oe) 148 macdonnellensis, Phageogala .. ,, 158, 191 Nacroura, Bminthopsis .. .. -. -. «) 155 Macrovamia .. .,) ee ve oe - ++ 286 macnlicollis, Diewehes .. .. 433, 445, 465 maculosa, Nethersia .. -. .. .- 4, 850 maidlyi, Hydrometra ve ve ve ee oe 472 major, Penthaleus .. .. 1. 4. ey oe) 612 marginata, Neobalaena ., .. .. .. 681-694 marginatum, Cinelosoma .. .. 344, 347, 348, 349, 358, 362, 363, 366 marginatum, Cinclosoma’ marginatum . 364 Mastaromys .. .. 2-2 .- ee ee ee ee 172 maura, Lamprodema .. .. ., ., .. B78 maiwaoni, Meniscolophus .. ss ee es 89 Muxaphunus (== Dieuches) ., .. .. 480 maxima, Pinetada 2. e+ ve ev ee ae 870 muyri, Cinclosoma castanotum .. 354, 355 Mogalothorax (—Neelus) .- -. 613 Melaleuca ,, - 282, 283, 285, 287, 293 melanotragus, Melanerita .» .. 4. 6. G41 Meniseolophus .. .. .. «2 se -- ss 89 Mesoplodon .. 4. +4 e+ ++ ae te oe 204 metarhinus, Acerentomon , .. .. «+ 64, 87 706 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM Pade metochoides (—Narbo biplagiatus) 464, = Micronect& 11 ++ ee ve ee ee ne oe millsi, Eosentomon .. os es ve es 63, ne 12 mimulus, Phaseogalo ., «+ ++ 154 minimum, Proturentomon .. 75, 76, 78, H minimus, Averentulua .. -. - minnie, Pseudomys .. .. «. 171, 139, int minor, Dromiteiug +. ++ ee ve oe 41d, 416 minor, “¢Sthenurus’? coe wr ve ee oe minor, Thalacomys .. .. .. 158, 190, 191 miselius, Thulaconiys minor ., », +, 158 mitehelli, Diplodactylus ., .. 548, 549, 550 mitehelli, Notomys .. .. 4. 177, 178, 191 MONNOETING, Diplothrombriam dap ae, We. 483 monunguis ,, 477, 478, 481, 482, 483, 484 morgani, Cinelosomn eastanatum . a47, 54, 856 morio, Chilinvlobus .. . - 181, 191 multicoloratus, Fontejus "375, "377, ores 880 murina, Sminthopsis nove fe ey 191 imiscatis, Cinelosoma ajax .. 1. 2. a, B67 musculus, Mus vs ey y+ +, 182, 189, 191 Myodoeha era ab iee ee we fee “TE nanus, Pseudomys .. .. .. 172, 187, 191 Warbo os we ve ve ve on $27, 428) 463 nasuta, AnNISOPH 6. ve ve ue te ew gy ATT Nundarensia (== Poeantius) .. .. .. 461 nos, Cinclosoma marginatum ,. .. 368, Bhd Nuelaw vo er pees 20 ws sad STB nogleetum (= Cinclasoma piincta tam) 340, 351 nomorale, Acerentomon .. .. +. fit, 82, 84 Nentrombidium ,, 473, 475, 477, 478, 481, 482, 483, 484 nereix4, Elasmolomus ., «. ++ 458, 460, 465 bealitbes, Alloecader 2... 44 , 249 newloni, Genyornis .. .. . £3, 412, 418 nigrn, Oncophysa yesioulata .- 250 nigroaenuus, Udeoeoris .. .- a76, 390, 397 nigropietus, Poeantius y+ +s rs vy =s 461 norvegiens, Rattus .. .. -. .. .. 188, 191 notntus, Dieushes ., .. 483, 447, 449, 465 Notomys .. .. .. 49, 175, 17, 187, 188 Nototherium .. .- .- -- 39, 50 novae-hollandine, Dromiceius » 414, 416, 417 novaehollandiac, Lobibyx ,. 4, +9 - 139 nudus, Dieuches ». 2. «1 se se ae 433, 449 Aullarborensis (—=Cinelosoma alisteri) 359 Nymphaea oe ne ee ck ka we oe oe 287 obesulus, Tsopdon .. +e ve - -- =- 159 obliqua, Eucalyptus ,. 6. <1.) . + 388, 389 oblongum, Acerentomon .. .. .. +. G4, 85 obacuripes, Dieuches .. 432, “44, 436, 437, 440, 442, 465 ocelidentulis, Aearantulds .. 6. wa ae 64 occidentalis, Sthenurus . .- 50 ocennicus, Dieuches . 432, 485, | 487, 445, 465 aeypus, Dromi¢aius ., » 413, x OE 416, 417 og, Protennodon .. .. .- ~» 50 PAGE orbita, Dieathais ., .. <1 «. ++ ++ G4l Orcinus .. <<. ee ee te oe te we oe (880 Oreophryn® 66 ce ci we wt ia 677, 678 oVum, Alnpliperas . -. .. .. ee Oxyeamus 2. a. ce ve ee ey pe ve F3, BGS Pachyhrachins .. 2. 2) se se 4+ 378, B77 Pachymeros -- .- -. 2, «= -+ e+ e+ 487 Pachvornis a Pesce skiers seine. SIF palankarinalea, Porikonla so. es oe 20, 36 palankarinnieus, Prionofemnus ,, ». 39, 45 pullidior, Dasyuroides Byrnei .. .. -. 155 Palorehozstes .. 2. ae 4 . 37, 45 Pandanus ..oce ve ne 281, 286, 597, 293 papuanus, Klasmolomus .. .. 453, 459, 465 Purnentomou .s oes ye ee er ee ee) 8 Paromis is os os pene ee op re Bie Passalud 11 ++ ne 0p ce pe ar oe oe 489 patricius, Dromiceings 2. 1. 2. ae ee 417 peduneulatus, Laomys .-.. -. .. 174, 191 penicillata, Bettongia .. 150, 168, 187, 188, 190, 194 peniciiata, Phaseognle .. .. 140, 153, 191 ‘*Ponthaluus’? yn yes -. ee G09 Peramelea «6 4. ee ee 187, "188, 139, 190 porditus, Oxyeantta sc ee ae ee ee ee 666 Yorikoala 6. 6. we ve ee ae ee BO, 82, 34 pevoni, Patellanaxy ., .. .. .. -. -. G41 etrejus (= Pussalus) ,- +. +. =) 489 Prtrobius «car ee oe oe ee oe oe 608 Potrogale 2. 4. 62 ee ck te ae ew 1 Phalavrocorax .. .. .. -- -- «+ -- 4, 48 Phaseolonus .. 2. 55 ee ye ty pe 44, a9 Phoenicopteras .. 6. ee se ee ee ee OOD Physeter 2... ete ew FRO pietipennis (= Buander. lacertosus) . 384 pinus, Acerentomon «ey. en ee se 64, 91 pirate, Phascogale penicillnta . 2. +) 153 planifrons, Iyperoudon .. «. .- y+ Sal Platalea .. . bene 48 plebijus, Tubanus “CAtylotin) | -- a BME plicatus, Chacrephay .. tape ee ey DBT, 191 Poeantins «5 ++ 2. +. ++ +. $27, 428, 461 Polyaspinus «2.6 2. ec ye ee ee LOS, 116 Polyaspis ev cs ve os ooo 125 Porandor 1. +e vy ae 373, “ard, 387, 388 Prionoteminus 2.06. Ge nt ee we ae 39, 45 prisena, Varanus . .. 1 cs ve ae ve AF Procoptodon «. sss. -- -- -- -+ SO, 648 Propleopus «. 66 ve ee ee re 44 Protemnodon .. .. +. +6 Tone ag, 45, 50 78 Proturentomon ++ oss 4+ ee ne ee oe Prytanes .. ut tb ot ee, OO psammophila, Sminthopsis -. ae ys 156, 191 Psendomys os vs se we =e ee =e ee 198 Ptochlomera 6... 2. 6s ey) ee e+ 372, 373 puleher, Diplodactylus o 40 08 ce ey G45 pumilus, Eptesiews .. +... +. +. 180, 197 punetatum, Cinclosoma » .. 343, 344, 348, 349, 350, 366 punctatum, Cinclosoma punctatum -- 350 INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 707 Paor pygmaca, Hylan .. .. .. .. ,, 253, 256, 257 pyrioldes, Stuphunitis .. 4... .. .. 250 queenslandiac, Dromiceius », .4 4) 2. 4lT quercinum, Acerentomon -. 2... 2.) SL quereus Diarthrophallus . ,. 438, 489, a“ quoll, Dagyurus 1. ue es ee ey we oe rufacll (= Euander lavertosus) .. 373, ae Fabia 8 4. cela ' oe 2, detew at rattus, Rathug i.e. ce ee ae oe 182, 101 regia, Platulea .. 4. 4) ce ae pe ee 48 Rhyniella apse” om. oiy ear bitsy oe 459 simus, Kogla .. .. ,. 221, 573, 574, 575 BiwAMMOR so ve ee ce ee . 373 Sminthopsis .. 156, 157, 187, 188, 189, 190 Sminthurinug .. 4. ve se ae -. .. 807 Sminthurus .. .. 607, 610, 611, 615, 616 Smynthurus (= Sminthurus) re eee OLE socium, Gonyuentrum .. ys se ae 248 sordidus, Hlasmolomus , . 453, 454, 457, 459, 460, 465 sordidus, Oxyeanus .. - 2.2. 65 4. 665 spenceri, Antechinomys 157, 187, 189, 191 apongleri, Cymatilesta wn) ga te oc toy HEL spinosa, Brachytremetla ve ele) oe ee) | SOB steindachneri, Diplodaetylua .) .+ 5 545 Sthomurus 6... ae ve ve ee oe as 45, 50 stoliezkae, Epiphenus .. .. .. -. -. 493 PAE streblida, Monitnguis .. 475, 477, 478, 479, 481, 489, 483 superetliaris, Drymodes .. .. 2, 341, 342 swaui, Wogentomon .. ,, .. «. 83, 69, 74 syriacus, Dieuchegs .. .. .. 2. .- "431 tacniophora, Parada .. .. .. 2. 2. 2350 tainsi, Oxyeanus .- 2. 4s ve ae e. § 6664 tusmaniae, Euaulana .. .. 2. 2. .. 250 telumonides, Hypsipyrgias . .. ,, 250, 252 Telocoria ., ., s+ ae es 378, 390, 398 fenuipes, Nevotrombidiun or aw ea oe 495 terminalls (= Narbo biplagiutus) .. 464 tessellatue, Diplodavtylus .. 6545, 548, 550 Themeda 2, 2. 4. ye ee ue 280) 286, 287 WHOCUUFS ay ou ina te atelier tie oe 1FZ Thryptomeue 2...) ye ck ua ee ue BGS Thylacings .. 2. 41 2. 2. ws 2 U5, 43, 44 'Thylacoleo oh Yo ow ce Ye sean dd tillyardi, Averentulus eS of Nee : 64, 99, 100 timorensis, Anisops . ,, .. ss us .. 471 tlidaloi, Gonyeentrum yore a 249 tindalei, Zygovoris .- 5. ., 375, 380, 381 todmordeni (= Cinelosoma v. cinna- TAOIST) fs) coset cre an re Go WHET torpidus, Dieuches .. .. .- 2... 498, 441 torquata, Ninvlla .. -. -. 4. es vs 641 torquatus, Buander . se ee ee 4. 874, B86 Traehytes .. ou. tp tye or (115 tramoseviva, Callana s,s, ce ce ce 641 transversus, Elasmolomus .. -. .. .. 459 Trichosurus .. .. 2, se sean ee ca OD Trietona .. a. fee 663 lricuspiduin, Neotrombidium ' 478, 478, 482 trilobata, Diplouysta .. 250 Triodia .. 2. 5 Se 146, "83, 505, 645 trivirgata, Eritingis chive as euratce Sl tubarculatus, Polyaspinus .. .., .. 115, 116 tunneyi, Rattus...) vs as 4... 17], 191 Turds yo .. - + rete S49 typhlops, Notoryetes re ” 161, 187, 188, 191 Udeoworis 6 .. -- 4738, 389, 390, 461 uivhancol, Phatnoma .. .. 2... 249 unappendiculatus, Casuaring », ., ., 414 unguifera, Onye uogate we 166, 189, 191 Uroaétus oy. . = ay ot emg, 1d veulbul, Blasmulomus .. ., 453, 457, 459, 460, 405 varicgatus, Poeuntius ,. .- -- =. 462 yenatoris, Chitlinolobus gouldi ie vy. 280 vermiforme, Bosentomon ., .... .. 69 vesicurium, Atriplex .. 2. 4) 4, a) O45 yillosissimus, Rattus ., ., 170, 187, 188, 190, 191 vinceus, ‘*Halmaturus't ., ,. 44 viridis, Sminthurus .. ., 607, 608, 610, 613 vittata, Telovoris .. 6. 6k ee ke 370, B04 vittatus, Diplodactylus .. .. 545, 546, 584, 550, 551 708 Page vulpecula, Trichosurus .. 150, 162, 187, 188, vulpes, Vulpes . waitei, Pseudomys ... .. .. Wallabia .. .. . westraliensis, Acerentulus . westraliense, Eosentomon . .. .. westraliensis, Fontejus 189, 190, 191 .. 184, 189, 191 173, 187, 191 . .. 45, 50 7.64, 95, 97, 99, 100 63, 64, 69 .. 375, 379 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM wheeleri, Eosentomon .. wolterstorffi, Hyla .. .. .. wolterstorfi, Oreophryne .. womersleyi, Eosentomon . woodwardi, Laomys .. xanthopus, Petrogale .. Xerotes .. ona Zygocoris .. .. -- .. 65, 72, 74 PAGE 255 675-678 mn ee CONTE 174 165 282 373, 374, 380, 381, 382